Cheap  Book  Store, 

OF  THE 
UNxVERSnT 

^;^/:lIFO: 

JIDOCATIOH  XXM;        / ' ^^ 


GBl' 


/0>/-' 


J 


i4^. 


■^L^. 


.... 


m. 


^ 


.^*%  ^^*  ^  / 


^ 


-ii 


^^ 


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Archive 

in  2008  witii  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http:'//www.arGliivfe.org/(jetails/englislisyntitholOOenglrich 


ii^Vf     "-""rfE 


AN 

ENGLISH    SYNTITHOLOGY, 

IN  THREE  BOOKS, 

DEVELOPIIfO 

THE  CONSTRUCTIVE  PRINCIPLES 

OF 

THE  ENGLISH  LANGUAGE, 

BY 

APPROPRIATE    POLYMORPH  TERMS,   USED  IN    THIS 

SCIENCE   ONLY;    EACH  FORM    OF   THE   SAME 

WORD  HAVING    BUT    ONE    MEANING. 

BY   JAMES    BROWN. 


Is  it  more  difficult  to  teach  truth  tlxan  error  "i  and  is  it  more  useful  to  learn  error 
than  truth  I 


In  Grammar,  aa  well  as  in  other  sciences,  technical  terms  appropriate  in  them- 
selves, having  but  one  specific  meaning,  and  that  accurately  defined,  are  much  more 
convenient  and  useful  than  any  other  terms  can  be. — Rev.  P.  Bullions,  D.  D.,  Pro- 
fessor of  Languages  in  the  Albany  Academy  ;  .Author  of  Principles  of  English  Qram- 
mar  ;  Principles  of  Latin  Orammar ;  and  Principles  of  Chreek  Grammar. 


BOOK  III. 

Second    Edition  . 

PHILADELPHIA  : 

PUBLISHED  BY  HENRY  GRUBB, 

AND  SOLD    BY   W.   A.   LEARY,    No.   158  N.   SECOND  ST. 

1847. 


srocATioi  Msa; 


BOTH   SYSTEMS   ILLUSTRATED. 

I.  The  technical  terms  of  the  Old  Theory,  as  is  demonstrated  in 
the  Appeal. 


II.  The  principles  of  the  Old  Theory,  as  is  demonstrated  iii 
the  Appeal. 


I.  The  technical  terms  of  the  New  System,  as  is  demonstrated  m 
the  Appeal. 


II.  The  principles  of  the  New  System,  as  is  demonstrated  in 
the  Appeal. 


n 


[Entehed  according  to  act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1847,  by  JAMES  BROWN, 
In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  district  Court,  of  the  Eastern  District  of  Pennsylvania.] 


From  the  Camden  DemdiiM.     '      ^ 

«AN  ENGLISH  SYNTITHOLOGY  IN  THREE  BOOKS  Bif  ^' 
JAMES  BROWN,  PUBLISHED  BY  H.  GRUBB,  AND  SOLI 
BY  W.  A.  LEARY.  No  158,  N.  Second  Street. 


This  work,  as  the  title  page  indicates,  is  a  complete  "  develop- 
ment of  the  constructive  principles  of  the  English  Language,"  and 
taken  in  connection  with  the  author's  "  Appeal  from  the  old  British 
theory  of  English  Grammar,"  will  be  esteemed  by  every  intelligent, 
and  disinterested  teacher,  as  the  most  luminous,  and  intelligible  view 
^,  which  has  ever  been  presented  of  this  important  subject  All  the 
"'  absurdities  of  the  Murray  theory  as  amended,  and  patched  by  Kirk- 
ham,  Greenleaf,  Goold  Brown,  John  Frost,  B.  Frazee,  John  S.  Hart, 
&c.,  &c.,  are  fully  exposed — the  metajAysical  nonsense  in  which 
these  compilers  have  enveloped  the  subject  of  English  Grammar,  is 
entirely  exploded,  and  that  which,  by  their  clumsy  manipulations,  is 
rendered  a  mass  of  confusion,  and  unintelligible  jargon,  odious  and 
even  frightful  to  the  pupil,  and  vexatious  to  the  conscientious 
teacher,  has  been,  under  the  plastic  operations  of  a  comprehensive 
mmd,  presented  in  these  books,  in  a  new,  beautiful,  and  perfect  form, 
well  worthy  of  the  name  of  System. 

To  this  new  production  Mr.  Brown  has  given  the  appropriate,  and 
significant  title  of  "Polymorph  System,"  to  distinguish  it  from 
,.the  old  English  Grammar  which  he  denominates  the  "  Monomorph 
Theory."  This  distinction  will  strike  those  who  examine  it,  as 
^judicious,  and  convenient.  And  the  entire  change  in  the  nomencla- 
ture will  appear  but  a  natural  result  of  Brown's  perfect  develop- 
ment of  the  constructive  principles  of  the  English  Language,  which 
are  not  reached  by  the  old  technicals.  The  arrangement  of  these 
principles  into  a  beautiful,  and  harmonious  system,  renders  the  new 
nomenclature  not  only  expedient,  but  essential.  And,  as  Mr.  Brown 
has  made  it "  appropriate,  brief,  and  easy,"  there  can  be  no  just  ground 
for  its  rejection. 

To  obviate  any  objection  that  may  arise  in  the  mind  of  one  attach- 
ed to  the  old  absurd  terms,  the  author  has  given  the  definitions 
of  the  Murray  "Parts  of  Speech,"  and  a  "  Technical  Concordance," 
in  which  the  old,  and  the  new  nomenclature,  are  placed  in  juxta  posi- 
tion ;  so  that  it  seems  impossible  for  a  pupil  to  become  acquainted  with 
Mr.  Brown's  system,  and  remain  ignorant  of  that  which  it  should  by 
all  means  supersede. 

We  commend  this  work  to  the  early,  and  diligent  attention  of 
teachers,  and  School  directors  in  New  Jersey.  W.  A.  Learv  adver- 
tises to  fiimish  any  teacher  who  wishes  to  examine  it,  with  ^ipy  of 
the  "Abridgement  of  Books  I.  and  II,  together  with  a  she'et^ con- 
cisely, and  clearly  illustrating  the  first  principles  of  the  work,  and 
the  method  of  prosecuting  the  study. 
L  February  24th.  1847. 


BROWFS  ENGLISH  SYNTITHOLOGY, 

IN  THREE   BOOKS.— BOOKS  I,  AND   II  ABRIDGED. 

CHAMBER  OF  THE   CONTROLLERS   OF  PUBLIC  SCHOOLS,   FIRST 
SCHOOL  DISTRICT  OF  PENNSYLVANIA 

Philadelphia,  September  15th,  1842. 
At  a  meeting  of  the  Controllers  of  Public  Schools,  First  School 
District  of  Pennsylvania,  held  at  the  Controllers'  Chamber,  on  Tues- 
day, September  13th,  1842,  the  following  resolution  was  adopted  ; 

Resolved,  That  permission  be  given  to  such  of  the  Teachers  of  the 
Public  Schools  as  desire  it,  to  form  classes  for  the  purpose  of  instruc- 
tion in  Brown's  System  of  English  Grammar,  as  an  experimental 
trial;  the  books  to  be  supplied  at  the  cost  of  the  pupils  of  said 
classes.f 

Certified  from  the  Minutes, 

THOMAS  B.  FLORENCE,  Secretary. 
To  James  BRowifr,  Esq. 

«  Philadelphia,  January,  1835. 
«  Bitter  complaints  are  made  by  critics  and  philosophers,  in  Great 
Britain,  of  the  insufficiency  of  their  English  Grammars.  '  They  are 
compilations,'  says  the  Edinburgh  Review,  *  silly  rules,  crowding  the 
memory,  and  debasing  the  understanding  of  the  pupil — a  jargon  of 
nickname  definitions,  the  learning  of  which  is  a  mere  ad  captandum 
ceremony,  making  a  parrot  of  the  pupil  to  delight  his  grandmother, 
and  to  give  notoriety  to  his  schoolmaster  and  academy.'  *  *  *  * 
«  Brown  is,  emphatically,  a  grammarian.  He  has  invaded  this  pro- 
vince of  philosophy,  and  made  it  his  own  by  conquest. 

"JOHN  SANDERSON," 
Late  Professor  of  Languages  in  the  Philadelphia  Central  High  School. 

Extract  from  the  Franklin  School  Committee. 

BosToir,  February  1st,  1842. 
"  The  quarterly  examination  of  the  Franklin  School  was  made  by 
all  the  members  of  the  Sub-Committee,  on  the  27th  of  January. 

«  The  condition  of  the  school  is  highly  satisfactory.  Both  depart- 
ments are  under  excellent  discipline,  and  a  great  degree  of  interest 
is  manifest  by  all  the  scholars,  particularly  by  those  of  the  higher 
classes. 

t-  "The  introduction  of  Brown's  First  Book  of  his  System  of  Eng- 
lish Syntithology,  it  is  thought  by  the  grammar  master,  has  been 
attended  with  very  beneficial  results,  and  so  far  as  your  Committee 
can  judge  from  a  brief  examination,  they  fully  concur  with  the  mas- 
ter, ^le  scholars  verily  believe  that  it  has  made  grammar  as  inter- 
esting^ any  other  study  of  the  school. 
«  All  of  which  is  respectfully  submitted. 

OTIS  A.  SKINNER,  Chairman. 
Read  and  accepted. — A  true  copy. 

Attest— S.  F.  M'CLEARY,  Secretary:' 

t  This  Resolution  is  0till  in  force. 
Stereotyped  by  R.  P.  Jdoffridge,  Philad'a.']  [J.  Van  Court,  Printer^ 


m 

introduction  I         - 
Introduction  II. 
Introduction  III.      -    ■* 
Syntithology 
Parts  iir  Book  I.      -    - 
Parts  in  Book  II.    " 
Parts  in  Book  III. 
Syn-di-col-o-gy 
Limitation  of  monos   ^ 
Induology  of  Monos 
Antilogue  Indutory 
Ap-o-logue  Indutory 
Grad-u-logue  Indutory 
Ca-this-e-logue  Indutory 
Op-to-logue  Indutory 
Hy-per-logue  Indutory 
Ec-pho-ne-logue  Indutory 
€rno-me'logue  Indutory 
An-a-logue  Indutory 
Am-il'logue  Indutory 
Gno-mo-logue  Indutory 
Pan-te-logue  Indutory 
Me-ro-logue  Indutory 
I-ron-i-logue  Indutory 
Sy-an-a-logue  Indutory 
Ne-them-e-logue  Indutory 
Specimen  of  analysis 


CONTENTS. 


Page. 
3 

9 

18 

.  47 
48 
49 
50 
52 
52 
57 
62 
63 
64 
65 
65 
66 
66 
67 
67 
G8 
69 
70 
71 
W  72 
^72 
72 
74 


CHAPTER  III. 

CONDICTION  -  -  - 

Division  of  cordiction        -            - 
Rudiction^  E-diction,  Ex-e-diction 
Specimen  in  the  appropriation  of  monos 
Nepoeclad  condiction                -            - 
About  -      -            -            - 
Above                 .            -            _            . 
After 


78 
84 
84 
87 
88 
88 


(1) 


11  CONTENTS. 

Across        -           -           -           ^           -           -           -  90 

Amidf  amidst    ------  90 

Amongf  amongst    -^            -            -            -            -            -  91 

Aroundf  round  -            -  .        -   ,        -            -            -  91 

At                           ------  91 

Athwart             ------  93 

behind        -            -            -            -            -            -            -  94 

Below                -           -.'--            -            -  96 

Beneath      -  -  --  -  -  -96 

Beside,  besides               -            -            -            -            -  96 

Beyond       -------98 

By                     -            -            -            -            -            -  99 

Down         -            -           -           -           -           -           -  105 

From     -            -            -----            -            -  105 

In                -            -            -            -            -            -            -  106 

Into       '            -            -            -            -            -            -  110 

Of 1-112 

On         -           -            -            -            -            -            -  112 

Over           -           -           -         .  -           -           -           -  112 

Past      -            -            .            -    ,        -            -            -  122 

Through     -------  123 

Throughout      -            -            -    .        -            -            -  126 

To,  unto     -            -            -     .       -            -            -            -  126 

Toward,  towards           -            -    „        -            -            -  133 

Under         -            -            -            -            -            -            -  134 

Underneath       -            -    .        -     .       -            -            -  141 

Up              -            -        i  -            -            -            -            -  141 

Upon,  on           -            -            -    .       -            -            -  142 

Within       -------  151 

Atween,  atwixt              -----  153 

Between,  betwixt    ------  154 

Against             -            -..-.--            -  154 

For             -------  156 

Of         -            -            -            -            -            -            -  166 

With 194 

Without            -            -    .        -            .            -            .  212 
Exercises  in  the  condictions  of  monos     -            -           -     .  215 


'^ 


INTRODUCTION  I 


The  study  of  Syndicology  is  an  excellant  discipline  for  the  mind  : 
the  student  is  here  constantly  comparing,  contrasting,  reasoning,  and 
judging.  In  these  exercises,  he  is  unremittingly  examining  the  retor- 
tion of  ideas.  And,  as  this  relation  is  the  true  basis  of  all  just  con- 
clusions, whatever  tends  to^  the  attention  upon  it,  must  hold  a  high 
rank  as  a  means  of  maturing  the  mind. 

To  one  who  desires  to  become  thoroughly  acquainted  with  the  true 
relation  of  ideas,  the  study  of  Syndicotogy  is  interesting,  and  invalua- 
ble. But,  to  him  who  has  no  wish  to  become  deeply  skilled  in  this 
relation,  the  beauties  of  Syndicology  are  mere  colors  to  the  blind  man. 

In  the  study  of  Syndicology,  the  attention  of  the  pupil  is  given,  not 
so  much  to  the  mere  framework  relation  of  word  with  word,  and  mono 
with  mono,  as  to  the  rtietorical,  and  logical  connection  of  idea  with  idea. 
Hence  Syndicology  not  only  begets  a  taste  for  the  study  of  Language, 
but  it  gives  a  capacity  to  understand,  and  use  it :  it  employs  all  the 
faculties  of  the  mind  to  their  full  extent.  And,  while  it  may  be  clearly 
comprehended  even  by  children,  it  is  not  unworthy  of  the  close  atten- 
tion of  men,  of  scholars,  of  philosophers.  But  the  study  of  Syndi- 
cology is  not  the  work  of  a  day.  To  become  familiar  with  this  branch 
of  Syntithology,  demands  a  practice  induced  by  a  philological  affec- 
tion  which  nothing  but  Syndicology  itself  can  beget,  nourish,  and 
mature. 

A  capacity  to  distinguish  the  different  parts  of  speech  in  English, 
the  different  cases,  and  genders  of  nouns,  and  the  different  modes,  and 
tenses  of  verbs,  never  has  enabled  a  man  to  use  the  English  Language 
with  propriety.  The  tenability  of  this  position  may  be  placed  beyond 
all  doubt  by  the  many  gross  errors  which  all  the  old-school  gram- 
marians commit  even  in  their  studied  productions.  No  man  can  use 
this  Language  aright,  without  a  critical  knowledge  of  the  exact  rela- 
tion of  ideas.  And,  as  Syndicology  is  the  only  medium  through 
which  a  critical  knowledge  of  this  relation  can  be  acquired,  the  study 
of  this  part  of  English  Syntithology,  becomes  important  to  all. 

I  have  long  been  satisfied  that  the  old  Murray  theory  of  English 
grammar,  renders  little,  or  no  aid  in  the  use  of  any  Language.  To 
prove  this,  I  deem  it  my  duty  to  embrace  every  opportunity  to  make 
exposures  of  the  numerous  solecisms  which  mar  the  writings  of  the 
most  distinguished  old-school  grammarians  of  this,  and  other  coun- 
tries. Under  this  impression,  I  embrace  the  opportunity  afforded  by 
the  publication  of  this  book,  to  make  a  few  reflections  upon  some 
of  the  many  errors  which  pervade  the  writings  of  Joseph  R.  Chawu- 
lER,  Editor  of  the  U.  S.  Gazette.    This  gentleman  is  distinguished 


4  INTRODrCTlON. 

in  Philadelphia  for  his  knowledge  of  English  Grammars.  And,  if  I 
am  not  under  a  wrong  impression,  there  are  individuals  among  us, 
who  verily  believe  that  he  is  deeply  skilled  in  English  grammar  itself. 
But  while  I  freely  admit  that  he  is  familiarly  acquainted  with  many 
Grammar  books,  I  feel  constrained  to  deny  that  he  has  much  know- 
ledge of  grammar  itself.  And  to  sustain  this  position,  I  have  here 
exposed  a  few  of  the  many  errors  which  deform  his  writings. 
Mr.  Chandler  is  the  author  of  the  following  notice  : 
"New  Books. — Mr.  Leary,  southwest  corner  of  Se- 
cond and  New  street,  has  recently  published  an  edition 
of  Mr.  James  Brown's  English  Grammar,  a  work  that 
bears  testimony  to  its  author's  deep  and  successful  re- 
search, and  to  his  ability  as  a  grammarian.  We  have 
used  more  than  one  occasion  to  speak  of  Mr.  Brown's 
philological  attainments ;  and  though  we  cannot  agree 
with  him  in  his  nomenclature,  we  do  justice  to  his  abili- 
ties and  to  the  results  at  which  he  arrives." — United 
States  Gazette,  1847. 

After  a  critical  analysis  of  this  notice,  I  have  come  to  the  con- 
clusion that  it  exhibits  much  evidence  of  a  want  of  capacity  in  Mr. 
Chandler  to  write  with  grammatical  precision. 

As  Mr.  Leary  is  not  a  wetu  book  why  should  he  be  treated  of  imme- 
diately after  the  head,  "New  Books  1"  As  Mr.  Chandler  does  not 
intend  to  give  a  notice  of  Mr.  Leart/,  but  of  a  book  published  by  him, 
why  should  he  be  made  the  first,  and  central  object  of  attention?  It 
does  not  seem  to  me  that  this  arrangement  is  either  grammatical,  or 
logical.     The  following  is  something  better  : 

New  Books. — James  Brown's  English  Grammar  has 
recently  been  published  by  Mr,  Leary,  Southwest  corner 
of  Second  and  JVew  street. 

Under  this  arrangement,  the  Grammar  has  its  proper  place,  and 
legitimate  rank.  ^ 

"a  work  that  bears  testimony  to  its  author's  deep  and 
successful  research,  and  to  his  ability  as  a  grammarian." 

"  bears  testimony  to  its  author's  deep  and  successful 
research,  and  to  his  ability  as  a  grammarian." 

«'  Testimony'^  is  here  improperly  used  for  evidence.  This  is  ren- 
dered quite  obvious  from  the  consideration  that  ''testimony"  is  from 
the  Latin,  testis,  a  witness. 

Where  the  subject  is  moral  or  intellectual,  evidence,  not  testimony, 
should  be  used ;  as,  "  Of  Swift's  general  habits  of  thinking,  if  his 
letters  can  be  supposed  to  afford  any  evidence,  he  was  not  a  man  to  be 


INTRODUCTION.  5 

either  loved  or  envied." — JoHsrsoif.  "All  that  our  Saviour  did  and 
said  were  evidences  of  his  Divine  character." — Crabb. 

The  substitution  of  testimcni/  for  evidence  would  be  an  obvious  sole- 
cism : 

All  that  our  Saviour  did  and  said  were  testimonies  of  his  Divine 
character. 

"  bears  testimony  to  its  author's  deep  and  successful 
research." 

As  there  is  nothing  in  bear,  which  demands  to,  this  particle  should 
give  place  to  of.  To  bear  testimony  is  to  show,  exhibit,  or  utter  testi- 
mony.    Hence  the  idea  expressed  by  Mr.  Chandler  is  this  : 

a  work  that  shows,  exhibits,  or  utters  testimony  to  the  author's 
research  ! ! !  The  substitution  of  of  for  to  will  show  that  Mr.  Chan- 
dler has  worn  the  regal  tonsure  somewhat  unworthily : 

"a  work  which  bears  testimony  of  its  author's  deep 
research." 

That  is,  which  bears  testimony  in  favour  of  its  author's  deep 
research. 

"  Hence  a  person  makes  another  a  present,  or  performs 
any  other  act  of  kindness  as  a  testimony  of  (not  te)  his 
regard." — CrAbb. 

Persons,  or  things  personified,  bear  testimony  in  favor  of  persons. 
— Cbabb.  V 

"  The  same  came  for  a  witness  to  bear  witness  of  the 
light."  (not  to.) 

"He  was  not  that  Light, but  was  sent  to  bear  witness  o/that  Light." 
(not  to.) 

But  Mr.  Chandler  may  attempt  to  justify  this  use  of  to  by  showing 
that  other  writers  have  committed  the  same  error  !  I  presume  that 
the  authority  of  Dryden  himself  may  be  found  on  the  side  of  this 
solecism.  But  the  sins  of  Dryden  will  never  sanctify  the  eniquities 
of  Mr.  Chandler!  If  Mr.  Chandler  can  show  that  to  utter  testimony 
to  a  person,  is  synonymous  with,  to  utter  it  of  a  person,  he  can  justify 
the  use  of  to,  without  the  blunders  of  others. 

**a  work  that  bears  testimony  to  its  author's  deep  and 
successful  research,  and  to  his  ability  as  a  grammarian." 

The  use  of  to  before  his,  is  a  repetition  of  the  error  which  makes 
Mr.  Chandler  say  that  the  testimony  in  favor  of  the  research  was 
addressed  to  the  research ! 

The  word  "ability''  is  improperly  used  for  capacity.  Capacity,  says 
Crabb,  is  a  mental  endowment,  and  always  supposes  something  ready 
to  receive  or  hold: 

1* 


6  INTRODUCTION. 

The  object  is  too  big  for  our  capacity  when  we  would  comprehend 
the  circumference  of  a  world. — Addisox. 

We  say  an  able  commander — but  a  capacious  mind. 

A  ^vedii  capacity  of  thought. — Crabb. 

Sir  Francis  Bacon's  capacity  (not  ability)  seemed  to  have  grasped 
all  that  was  in  books  before. — Hughes. 

That  '^ability"  may  be  applied  to  the  mind  in  the  sense  of  capacity^ 
is  not  denied.  But  when  it  is  so  applied,  it  should  generally  be 
plural : 

"As  for  me,  my  abilities,  if  ever  I  had  any,  are  not 
what  they  were." — Atterbury. 

But  I  consider  the  clause,  **and  to  his  ability  as  a  grammarian,"  a 
pleonasm. 

"a  work  that  bears  testimony  to  its  author's  deep  and 
successful  research,  and  to  his  ability  as  a  grammarian." 
(Nineteen  words.) 

Corrected,  a  work  which  awards  evidence  of  deep  grammatical 
research.     (Ten  words — nine  redundant  words.) 

The  next,  which  is  the  concluding  part  of  this  notice  of  my  book, 
reads  as  follows : 

"We  have  used  more  than  one  occasion  to  speak  of 
Mr.  Brown's  philological  attainments;  and 'though  we 
cannot  agree  with  him  in  his  nomenclature,  we  do  justice 
to  his  abilities,  and  to  the  results  at  which  he  arrives." 

A  want  of  space  prevents  me  from  making  many  comments.  I 
shall  confine  my  attention,  therefore,  to  the  mere  correction  of  the 
several  errors  which  render  this  sentence  strikingly  analogous  to  its 
predecessor. 

"  We  have  used  more  than  one  occasion.''^ 

Was  the  occasion  used  by  these  gentlemen  1  Who  used  the  occa- 
sion 1  We  use  pens,  dishes,  money,  &c.  But  we  speak  on  occasions. 
The  word,  occasion,  however,  is  improperly  used  for  opportunity. 

What  Mr.  Chandler  intends  to  say,  is. 

We  have  embraced  more  than  one  opportunity  to  speak  of  Mr. 
Brown's  philological  attainments.  But  if  Mr,  Chandler  is  unwilling 
to  exchange  occasion  for  opportunity,  the  sentence  may  read  as 
follows : 

We  have  spoken  of  Mr.  Brown's  philological  attainments  on  more 
than  one  occasion.  Or,  We  have  spoken,  on  more  than  one  occasion, 
of  Mr.  Brown's  philological  attainments.  It  is  a  fact,  then,  that  Mr. 
Chandler  who  has  for  years  worn  the  Royal  robes  in  the  kingdom  of 
grammar,  employs  "used"  for  on  ///  But  the  use  of  occasion  is  bom- 
bastic, and  redundant.  The  sentence,  therefore,  may  be  improved  by 
the  omission  of  on  and  occasion  : 


INTRODUCTION.  ^  7 

We  have  spoken  more  than  once  of  Mr.  Brown's  philological 
attainments. 

and  though  we  cannot  agree  with  hirn  in  his  nomenclature,  we  do 
justice  to  his  abilities,  and  to  the  results  at  which  he  arrives. 

We  have  used  more  than  one  occasion  to  speak"  of  Mr.  Brown's 
philological  attainments ;  and  we  do  justice  to  his  abilities,  and  to  the 
results  at  which  he  arrives!! 

I  am  under  the  impression  that  all  who  wish  to  comprehend  the 
connection  between  these  two  members  of  this  sentence,  will  be  com- 
pelled to  seek  the  gratification  of  their  desires  through  Mr.  C.'s  late 
Grammar ! ! !  Is  it  possible  that  Mr.  Chandler  has  undertaken  to 
express  in  the  preceding  sentence,  what  is  conveyed  in  the  following: 

We  have  used  more  than  one  occasion  to  speak  of  Mr.  Brown's 
philological  attainments,  and  on  each,we  /tauc endeavored  to  do  justice 
to  his  abilites,  and  to  the  results  at  which  he  arrives. 

Mr.  Chandler  speaks  of  results  as  objects  which  can  be  approached 
like  trees,  houses,  rocks,  ships,  4-c.  From  his  manner  of  speaking,  no 
one  who  is  ignorant  of  the  nature  of  a  result,  would  infer  that  a  result 
is  that  which  is  produced  by  the  exertions  of  him  who,  according  to 
Mr.  C.  arrives  atiil  From  this  part  of  the  sentence  the  reader  must 
infer  that  the  result  is  a  thing  which  may  be  far  ahead  of  him  who 
produces  it  !  Besides,  the  word,  result,  conveys  the  idea  oi  aiermina- 
lion,  2.  final  stop — but  arrives  at  imports  a  mere  temporary  pause  ! !  By 
the  use  of  "arrives  at"  in  the  following  expression,  the  speaker  indi- 
cates that  his  journey  does  not  terminate  at  Philapelphia,  and  that  he 
expects  to  continue  it  from  this  city : 

"  I  arrived  at  Philadelphia  last  evening." 

Now,  if  the  word,  Philadelphia,  implied  the  termination  of  the 
speaker's  journey,  with  what  propriety  could  "arrived  af^  be  used  with 
this  proper  name  1 

**and  we  do  justice  to  his  abilities,  and  to  the  results 
at  which  he  arrives.''^ 

Corrected:  and  we  do  justice  to  his  abilities,  and  to  the  results  of 
his  labor. 

"  though  we  cannot  agree  with  him  in  his  nomencla- 
ture." 

Is  not  the  nomenclature  one  of  the  results  1  Certainly.  And  Mr. 
Chandler  does  justice  to  this  result  by  pronuncing  against  it,  without 
conveying  the  slightest  allusion  to  any  defectiveness  in  iti ! 

"we  cannot  agree  with  him  in  his  nomenclature." 

This  condemnation  which  is  rendered  absolute  from  its  source,  bears 
a  striking  analogy  in  its  grammatical  character,  to  the  other  parts  of 
this  notice.  In  it,  the  writer  says  that  he  cannot  agree  in  nomencla' 
ture  !  Although  this  notice  by  Mr.  Chandler,  abounds  with  mistakes, 
the  most  striking  one  is  found  in  the  fact  that  the  author  of  it  should 


8  INTRODUCTION. 

set  himself  up  as  a.  Judge  of  nomenclatures.  Even  the  very  sentence 
in  which  he  gives  judgment  against  the  technical  terms  of  my  system, 
demonstrates  that  he  is  totally  incompetent  to  form  a  just  opinion  of 
any  part  of  grammar.  He  says  that  he  cannot  agree  in  nomenclatvre 
with  me.    A  common  man  would  say, 

We  cannot  agree  with  himrespecting  tea.  But  the  Bashaw  himself 
says, 

We  cannot  agree  with  him  i7i  tea . . 

We  cannot  agree  with  him  in  his  nomenclature. 

Corrected.     We  cannot  agree  with  him  respecting  his  nomenclature. 

I.  The  notice  in  its  original  form. 
"  New  Books. — Mr.  Leary,  Southwest  corner  of  Se- 
cond and  New  street,  has  recently  published  an  edition 
of  Mr.  James  Brown's  English  Grammar,  a  work  that 
bears  testimony  to  its  author's  deep  and  successful 
research,  and  to  his  ability  as  a  grammarian.  We  have 
used  more  than  one  ofccasion  to  speak  of  Mr.  Brown's 
philological  attainments  ;  and  though  we  cannot  agree 
with  him  in  his  nomenclature,  we  do  justice  to  his  abili- 
ties, and  to  the  results  at  which  he  arrives."  [Seventy- 
nine  words.] 

II.  In  its  revised  form. 

New  Books. — Mr.  James  Brown's  English  Grammar.  (Leary, 
Southwest  corner  of  Second  and  New  street.) 

We  think  well  of  the  philological  attainments  of  Mr.  Brown,  and 
verily  believe  that  his  works  afford  evidence  of  deep  research;  but 
we  do  not  like  his  nomenclature.     [Forty-three  words.] 

As  the  difference  between  seventy-nine,  and  forty-three,  is  thirty-six, 
and,  as  the  notice  in  both  forms  is  the  same  in  substance,  Mr. 
Chandler  has  employed  thirty-six  redundant  words  ?  What  would  Mr. 
C.  think  of  a  tailor,  who,  in  making  him  a  coat,  should  use  double  the 
quantity  of  cloth  which  his  size  requires?  And  what  would  Mr.  C 
do  with  this  coat,  if,  while  some  of  its  parts  should  be  made  of 
improper  materials,  others  should  be  placed  in  improper  positions!? 
Would  he  refuse  to  accept  of  the  garment,  or  would  he  receive  it !  1 
and,  if  he  should  take  it,  would  he  keep  it  as  a  curiosity,  or  would  he 
wear  it  as  an  ornament .'  ?  Was  such  an  article  to  fall  into  my  hands, 
I  readily  admit  that  I  should  esteem  it  highly — I  should  wish  to 
keep  it  for  the  accuracy  with  which  it  would  portray  the  construction 
of  hundreds  of  Mr.  C.'s  other  paragraphs.  But  I  should  feel  a  greater 
interest  in  the  tailor  himself— I  should  endeavor  to  couple  i\ns  prince 
of  the  shears  with  the  king  of  grammar,  and  exhibit  the  two  as  a 
brace  of  phenomena  in  the  climax  of  curiosities  ! 


INTRODUCTIONII. 


Within  a  few  weeks,  several  new  works  on  the  art  of  Eng- 
lish grammar  have  been  published  in  this  city.  It  has  fallen  to 
my  lot  to  examine  them  all,  and  from  the  impression  which 
they  have  left  on  my  mind,  I  feel  somewhat  prepared  to  appre- 
ciate the  paragraph  which  the  editors  of  the  Ledger  apply  to 
the  numerous  compilers  of  English  grammars. 

"  The  grammarians  of  our  language,  some  of  whom  know 
little,  and  others  nothing  of  the  philosophy  of  any  language, 
divide  but  into  two  parts  of  speech,  a  preposition  and  a  conjunc- 
tion. They  then  define  a  preposition  to  be  a  word,  without 
independent  signification,  placed  before  another  word,  showing 
some  connection  between  it  and  some  other  word  in  the  same 
sentence  ;  and  they  define  a  conjunction  to  be  a  word  without 
independent  signification,  used  to  denote  some  relation  between 
two  other  words  or  members  of  a  sentence.  With  these  lights 
they  leave  their  pupils  to  find  their  way ;  and  considering  the 
brightness  of  the  lights,  we  need  not  wonder  at  the  mistakes 
of  the  poor  pupils." — Ledger. 

Within  a  few  hours  a  book  has  been  placed  in  my  hands,  of 
which  the  following  is  the  title  page  : 

"  English  Grammar :  or  an  exposition  of  the  principles 
and  usages  of  the  English  language.  By  John  S.  Hart,  A. 
M.,  Principal  of  the  Philadelphia  High  School,  and  member  of 
the  American  Philosophical  Society.  Philadelphia,  published 
by  E.  H.  Butler  &  Co.,  1845." 

That  the  Principal  of  the  Philadelphia  High  School  is  em- 
barrassed by  the  darkness  v/hich  the  Ledger  ironically  calls  lights 
is  obvious  from  the  numerous  errors  which  mar  this  title  page. 

As  the  phrase  "  English  Grammar'^  is  the  name  of  the 
science  itself,  it  should  not  be  applied  to  the  book  which  treats 
of  this  science.  An  English  Grammar  means  a  book ;  but 
"  English  Grammar^^  signifies,  not  the  book,  but  the  science 
on  which  the  book  treats. 

3 


4  INTRODUCTION. 

"The  principles  and  usages  of  the  English  language." 

Are  not  the  usages  of  the  English  language  its  principles  ? 
"In  language,  usage  is  the  foundation  of  all  rules,'''' — Webster, 

Does  not  the  word  'principles^  then,  embrace  as  much  as 
principles,  and  usages  ?  Has  Mr.  Hart  even  attempted  to  show 
the  difference  between  the  principles  and  the  usages  of  the 
English  language  ?  Perhaps  by  "  usages"  he  intends  to  dis- 
tinguish between  the  true  principles  of  the  English  language 
and  the  manner  in  which  he  uses  it !  If  so,  the  difference 
between  principles  and  usages  is  strikingly  illustrated  through 
his  whole  book, 

"  An  exposition  of  the  principles  and  usages  of  the  English 
language." 

Can  the  word  usage,  be  applied  to  the  thing  used  ?  Does 
the  usage  pertain  to  the  instrument  used,  or  to  the  agent  that 
uses  it  ?     Can  we  speak  of  the  usages  of  knives,  and  forks  ? 

Mr.  Webster  defines  usage  as  follows : 

"Usage,  treatment,  use,  or  long  continued  use;  custom 
practice.'* 

The  substitution  of  the  word  practice,  for  usages,  will  clearly 
show  that  Mr.  Hart's  use  of  usages  is  very  ill  usage  ! 

"Principal  of  the  Philadelphia  High  School,  and  member  of 
the  American  Philosophical  Society." 

By  the  omission  of  a  before  member,  Mr.  Hart  indicates  that 
the  relation  which  he  bears  to  the  American  Philosophical 
Society  is  similar  to  that  which  he  bears  to  the  Philadelphia 
High  School. 

"  Principal  of  the  Philadelphia  High  School,  and  member  of 
the  American  Philosophical  Society." 

As  principal  is  without  a,  and  imports  an  official  relation, 
so  member,  when  used  without  this  particle,  and  in  connection 
with  principal,  must  express  the  same  species  of  relation  ! 

Principal  of  the  High  School,  and  President  of  the  Philoso- 
phical Society. 

Henry  Clay  was  then  Secretary  of  State,  not  a  Secretary. 

Principal  of  the  High  School,  and  teacher  of  the  Model 
Grammar  School. 

Does  not  the  omission  of  a  before  teacher  clearly  indicate 


T-  INTRODUCTION.  5 

hat  the  Principal  of  the  High  School  is  the  only  teacher  of  the 
Model  Grammar  School  ?  By  the  omission  of  a,  then,  before 
member,  Mr.  Hart  has  not  only  represented  himself  as  an 
officer  of  the  American  Philosophical  Society,  but  he  has  repre- 
sented himself  as  the  only  member  of  the  Society ! ! 

^^  English  Grammar,  by  John  S.  Hart- — Principal  of  the 
Philadelphia  High  School,  and  member  of  the  American  Philoso- 
phical Society." 

By  the  omission  of  an  before  English,  Mr.  Hart  uninten- 
tionally makes  himself  the  author  of  the  very  science  of  Eng- 
lish Grammar — and  by  the  omission  of  a  before  member,  he 
makes  the  American  Philosophical  Society  to  consist  solely  of 
himself!!  That  these  philological  displays  are  not  the  true 
principles,  but  the  mere  usages,  of  the  Enghsh  language,  cannot 
be  doubted  by  any  enlightened  member  of  this  community. 

The  following  substitute  is  constructed  according  to  the  'prin- 
ciples, not  the  usages,  of  the  English  language  : 

An  Enghsh  Grammar — By  John  S.  Hart,  A.  M.,  Principal 
of  the  Philadelphia  High  School,  and  a  member  of  the  American 
Philosophical  Society. 

Are  the  numerous  solecisms  which  pervade  the  periods  of 
those  who  use  the  English  language,  ascribable  to  an  ignorance 
of  the  old  theory  of  English  Grammar,  or  are  they  attributable 
to  the  unsoundness  of  the  theory  itself? 

In  Mr.  Hart's  ^'Exposition  of  the  principles  and  usages 
of  the  English  language,"  I  find  the  following  definition  of 
Grammar : — 

"  Grammar  is  the  science  of  language^ 

Now,  if  the  old  theory  of  English  Grammar  is  a  full  devel- 
opment of  the  science  of  the  English  language,  why  do  they 
who  adopt  this  theory  entirely  disregard  the  true  genius  of  the 
English  language  in  their  writings  ?  The  following  is  the  first 
sentence  of  the  preface  of  Mr.  Hart's  English  Grammar : — 

"  Four  kinds  of  type  are  used  in  the  following  pages  to  indi- 
cate the  portions  that  are  considered  more  or  less  elementary." 

The  ill  arrangement  of  the  several  parts  of  this  sentence, 
renders  it  clumsy.     The  following  is  something  better : — 

To  indicate  the  portions  that  are  considered  more,  or  less 
elementary,  four  kinds  of  type  are  used. 


0  INTRODUCTION. 

"  Four  kinds  of  type  are  used  in  the  following  pages  to  indi 
cate  the  portions  that  are  considered  more  or  less  elementary. 

The  use  of  indicate  indicates  that  Mr.  Hart  does  not  know 
the  difference  between  the  words  indicate^  and  distinguish. 

"To  indicate  is  to  point  out,  to  show.  Thus,  fermentation 
indicates  a  certain  degree  of  heat  in  a  liquor.  A  heavy  swell 
of  the  sea  in  calm  weather,  often  indicates  a  storm  at  a  dis- 
tance."— Webster. 

But  to  distinguish  is  to  separate  one  from  another,  or  §ome 
from  others  :  The  farmer  distinguishes  his  sheep  by  marking 
their  ears. — Webster. 

But  does  the  farmer  indicate  his  sheep  by  marking  their  ears  ? 

"  Four  kinds  of  type  are  used  in  the  following  pages,  to  indi- 
cate the  portions  that  are  considered  more  or  less  elementary." 

The  use  of  portions  indicates  that  Mr.  Hart  does  not  distin- 
guish between  a  portion,  and  a  part. 

"  A  page,  a  line,  or  a  word,  is  a  part  of  any  book.  Portion, 
and  share  are  particular  species  of  divisions,  which  are  said  of 
such  matters  as  are  assignable  to  individuals." — Crabb. 

That  portion  is  not  synonymous  with  part,  may  be  seen  by 
a  substitution  oi  portion  for  part  in  the  following  instances : 

1.  The  apple  was  divided  into  two  parts.  '  •  - 

2.  The  apple  was  divided  into  two  portions  / 

1.  "  All  the  parts  were  formed  in  his  mind  into  one  harmoni- 
ous body." — Locke. 

2.  All  the  portions  were  formed  in  his  mind  into  one  har- 
monious body ! 

1.  "  The  component  parts  of  a  fossil." 

2.  The  component  portions  of  a  fossil ! 

1.  The  people  stood  at  the  nether  part  of  the  mount. — Ex. 
XIX. 

2.  The  people  stood  at  the  nether  portion  of  the  mount  .^^ 

1.  He  visited  various  parts  of  America. 

2.  He  visited  various  portions  of  America. 

"  Four  kinds  of  type  are  used  in  the  following  pages  to  indi- 
cate the  portions  that  are  considered  more  or  less  elementary." 


INTRODUCTION.  7 

.r  Four  kinds  of  type  are  used  to  distinguish  the  yarts  which 

are  considered  more  or  less  elementary. 

[In,  the,  follovnng,  pages — indicate,  portions.) 

A  substitute. — The  parts  which  are  considered  more,  or  less 

elementary,  are  distinguished  by  different  kinds  of  type. 

The  following  is  the  second  sentence  of  the  same  preface : 
"  The  most  important  rules  and  definitions  are  printed  in 
large  type,  italicized." 

Do  we  print  in,  or  on  type  ?     Do  we  italicize  type  ! 
The  omission  of  ^^ printed^''  would  improve  the  sentence: 
"  The  most  important  rules  and  definitions  are  in  large  type, 
italicised." 

Italicise,  to  distinguish  a  word  by  printing  it  in  Italic  charac- 
ters.— Dr.  Parr. — Todd's  Johnson. 

The  substitution  of  characters  for  type,  will  not  only  correct 
this  gross  error,  but  will  demonstrate  that  Mr.  Hart  does  not 
understand  that  science  which  he  defines  to  be  the  science  of 
language : 

The  most  important  rules,  and  definitions  are  printed  in  large 
characters,  italicised. 

A  substitute. — The  most  important  rules  and  definitions  are 
in  large  italic  characters,  (pririted,  type,  italicised,) 

From  the  same  preface. 

"  By  this  arrangement  the  author  has  been  enabled  to  enter 
more  at  length  than  is  usually  done,  upon  difliicult  and  important 
points."  Who  is  the  author  ?  John  S.  Hart,  A.  M.  And 
who  is  John  S.  Hart,  A.  M.  ?  He  is  the  author  of  English 
Grammar,  Principal  of  the  Pliiladelphia  High  School,  and 
Member  of  the  American  Philosophical  Society  ! 

As  Mr.  Hart  is  all  this — and,  as  he  understands  not  only  the 
principles  but  the  usages  of  the  English  language,  I  presume 
that  he  may  be  asked  to  parse  the  word  "is,"  which  follows 
"i/mn/" 

"  By  this  arrangement  the  author  has  been  enabled  to  enter 
more  at  length  than  is  usually  done,  upon  diflicuh  and  import- 
ant points."  The  nominative  to  "u'"  can  be  found  neither  in 
nor  out  of  this  sentence!  The  nominative  case  to  "is,"  is 
not — it  does  not  exist!     This  use  of  "is"  is  one  of  the  usages 


8  INTRODUCTION. 

of  the  English  language  ! !  If  the  old  theory  of  English  gram- 
mar is  good  for  any  thing,  why  does  not  its  worth  appear  in  the 
writings  of  those  who  understand  it  ?  That  Mr.  Hart  under- 
stands this  old  theory  cannot  be  doubted  for  a  moment.  What! 
the  author  of  a  science  not  understand  it  ?  It  cannot  be.  A 
sculptor  in  Lisbon  was  visited  in  his  dying  moments  by  a  monk, 
to  confess  him.  As  the  monk  held  the  crucifix  before  the 
dying  sculptor's  eyes,  he  exclaimed,  "  See,  here  is  God,  whom 
you  have  so  often  offended — do  you  Itnow  him?^^  "  O,  yes," 
replied  the  sculptor,  "for  I  made  him  myself/" 

Had  I  the  strength  of  him  who  bore  away  the  gates  of  Gaza, 
I  would  exert  it,  not  to  harm  Mr.  Hart,  but  to  benefit  my  fellow 
men.  I  am  satisfied  that  the  old  theory  of  English  grammar  is 
a  preventive  against  the  acquisition  of  the  true  constructive 
principles  of  the  English  language.  To  sustain  this  position  1 
have  undertaken  to  demonstrate  that  they  who  understand  this 
theory  hesf ■,wnie  the  worst,  A  man  writes  well  in  proportion 
to  the  degree  of  attention  which  he  has  given  to  the  true  struc- 
ture of  the  language  in  which  he  writes.  That  Mr.  Hart  has 
given  much  more  attention  to  the  old  theory  of  English  grammar 
than  to  the  true  structure  of  the  English  language  is  obvious 
from  his  incapacity  to  use  this  language  with  grammatical  pro- 
priety. In  the  following  sentence  there  are  several  errors 
which  no  one  who  understands  the  true  constructive  genius  of 
our  language  would  be  liable  to  commit,  and  which  no  one  who 
understands  the  old  theory  of  English  grammar  only,  is  able  to 
correct :— • 

"  The  distinction  here  insisted  on  is  as  old  as  Aristotle,  and 
should  not  be  lost  sight  of." 

To  rid  this  sentence  of  its  unnecessary  prolixity,  this  should 
be  substituted  for  "  the  ;" 

This  distinction  is  as  old  as  Aristotle,  and  should  not  be  lost 
sight  of. 

(Redundant  words — here,  insisted,  and  on.) 

The  next  solecism  which  I  shall  notice,  lies  in  connecting 
should  with  is: 

"  The  distinction  here  Insisted  on  is  as  old  as  Aristotle,  and 
s/iow/t?  not  be  lost  sight  of." 

To  repair  this  infraction  nothing  is  necessary  but  to  give  the 
sentence  a  natural  construction  : 


INTRODUCTION.  «&--.  9 

This  distinction,  which  is  as  old  as  Aristotle,  should  not  be 
lost  sight  of. 

"  The  distinction  here  insisted  on,  is  as  old  as  Aristotle,  and 
should  not  be  lost  sight  of." 

The  main  proposition  is,  the  distinction  should  not  be  lost 
sight  of.  But  Mr.  Hart,  although  "  member  of  the  American 
Philosophical  Society,"  so  constructs  the  sentence  that  the 
main  proposition  is  degraded  to  a  mere  minor,  and  a  mere  minor 
is  promoted  to  the  major  ! ! 

The  distinction  here  insisted  on,  is  as  old  as  Aristotle,  and 
should  not  be  lost  sight  ofJ*^ 

The  phrases,  "  here  insisted  on,^"*  and  "  lost  sight  of,^^  are 
prominent  blemishes.  That  is  bombast;  this  is  contortion. 
Perhaps  the  following  sentence,  although  not  a  paragon  of 
excellence,  is  quite  as  good  as  that  under  consideration  : — 

Of  this  distinction,  which  is  as  old  as  Aristotle,  the  gram- 
marian should  never  lose  sight. 

Or, 

The  grammarian  should  never  lose  sight  of  this  distinction, 
which  is  as  old  as  Aristotle  himself. 

"  The  distinction  here  insisted  on,  is  as  old  as  Aristotle,  and 
should  not  be  lost  sight  ofJ'^ 

"  The  distinction  is  as  old  as  Aristotle." 

The  expression  of  was  after  "  Aristotle,"  must  somewhat 
diminish  the  pleasure  which  the  advocates  of  Hart's  Grammar 
feel  in  recommending  this  work  to  popular  favor : 

The  distinction  here  insisted  on,  is  as  old  as  Aristotle  was!  ! 

I  presume  that  the  Aristotle  of  whom  mention  is  here  made, 
must  be  he  who  was  a  disciple  of  Plato,  and  who  founded  the 
sect  of  Peripatetics.  This  distinguished  philosopher  was  born 
384  years  before  Christ.  He  died  at  the  age  of  63.  This 
distinction,  therefore,  which  Mr.  Hart  thinks  he  has  represented 
to  be  as  ancient  as  the  days  of  Aristotle,  turns  out,  by  the  use 
of  old  for  ancient,  to  be  but  63  years  of  age !  !  The  distinction, 
then,  was  first  made  in  1782  !  This  important  "distinction," 
consequently,  is  not  quite  so  hoary  as  the  author  of  English 
gram.mar  has  attempted  to  make  it! 

"  The  distinction  here  insisted  on,  is  as  old  as  Aristotle  {was,) 
and  should  not  be  lost  sight  of." 

2 


10  INTRODUCTION. 

A  Substitute. — Of  this  distinction,  which  is  as  ancient  as 
Aristotle,  the  grammarian  should  never  lose  sight. 

This  sentence,  which  is  a  ray  of  light  from  the  very  top  of 
the  High  School,  is  sufficient  to  show  every  man  his  duty. 
Words  are  artful  things— to  prevent  them  from  playing  off  their 
tricks  upon  him  who  uses  them,  they  must  be  watched  with 
great  care  and  skill.  They  have  hoaxed  even  the  Principal  of 
ihe  High  School  in  his  very  title  page — they  have  deceived 
him  in  every  sentence  of  his  Preface — and  even  in  the  very 
paragraph  before  me,  these  hypocrites,  if  I  may  so  call  them, 
have,  by  concealing  their  real  characters,  trifled  with  his  learn- 
ing, his  philosophy,  and  even  his  station,  with  the  utmost  im- 
punity. I  apprehend  that  the  words  in  the  English  language 
will  continue  to  be  edge  tools  in  the  hands  of  children,  till  some 
one  who  is  thoroughly  acquainted  with  the  ^^  usages^ ^  of  them 
shall  have  invented  what,  for  the  want  of  a  name,  I  must  call  a 
Logrometerj  by  which  their  real  characters  can  be  measured 
with  exactness. 

It  has  long  been  a  contested  point  whether  language  is  a 
human  production,  or  a  Divine  revelation.  And,  although  I  do 
not  pretend  to  know  which  side  has  the  preponderance,  either 
of  numbers,  or  logic,  yet  I  prefer  to  range  myself  with  the  advo- 
cates of  the  doctrine,  that  language  is  an  emanation  from  men. 
Was  language  an  emanation  from  God,  nothing  but  an  ignorance 
of  this  fact,  could  expiate  the  crime  of  sacrilege,  which  Mr.  Hart 
would  commit  in  the  following  sentence  : 

"  What  is  the  difference  of  meaning  between  the  short  and 
long  forms  of  this  word  ?" 

The  following  construction  will  show  that  "  of"  before 
*'  meaning,''^  is  improperly  used : 

What  is  the  difference  between  the  short  and  long  forms  of 
this  w^ord,  of  meaning  ?!  I 

The  use  of  in  for  of  would  expurgate  this  noxious  part  of 
the  sentence : 

What  is  the  difference  in  meaning  between  the  short  and  long 
forms  of  this  word  ? 

That  in  is  the  proper  word  for  this  place,  is  rendered  clear 
by  the  construction  which  proves  that  of  is  an  improper  one : 

What  is  the  difference  between  the  short  and  long  forms  of 
tliis  word,  in  meaning  ? 


*.  ?; 


INTRODUCTION.  1 1 

Now,  if  language  is  a  direct  emanation  from  the  Divine  Being, 
what  a  gross  infraction  is  this  philological  blemish  ?  But  lan- 
guage has  little  of  the  sacredness  which  it  would  have,  was  it  a 
direct  gift  from  God  to  man.  Language  may  be  abused — and 
Mr.  Hart,  although  the  author  of"  English  Grammar ,''''  seems* 
made  to  abuse  it ! 

"  What  is  tlie  difference  of  meaning  between  the  short  and 
long  forms  of  this  word  ?" 

"  The  short  and  long  forms." 

By  the  omission  of  the  before  long,  Mr.  Hart  has  made  each 
form  both  short,  and  long  !  ! 

This  may  be  illustrated  so  clearly  that  even  Mr.  Hart  liin)- 
self  can  comprehend  it : 

1 .  The  hlack  and  white  ox. 
Here  there  is  but  one  ox. 

2.  The  black,  and  the  white  ox. 

Here  there  are  two — one  is  black— the  other  white. 
The  seven  black,  and  white  oxen. 
^   Here  each  ox  is  partially  black,  and  partially  white. 
Mfi        But,  if  we  say — The  seven  black,  and  the  white  oxen,  -we 
have  seven  which  are  entirely  black,  and  two,  or  more  which 
are  entirely  white. 

1.  The  seven  black,  and  white  oxen. 

3.  The  seven  black,  and  the  white  oxen  are  sold. 
The  old  and  new  testament. 

That  is,  the  testament  which  is  both,  old  and  new. 

He  has  read  the  old,  and  the  new  testament. 

Here  there  are  two  testaments — one  is  old — the  other,  new. 

"  What  is  the  diff'erence  of  meaning  between  tlie  short  and 
long  forms  of  this  word  ?'* 

i.  "  The  «^or<  and  Zon^  forms." 

2.  The  hlaclc  and  white  oxen. 

1.  The  hlack  and  white  ox. 

2.  The  short  and  long  form  ! ! 

That  an  ox  can  be  hlack  and  whiter  is  quite  generally 
admitted — but  that  the  same  form  can  be  both  short  and  long^  is 
not  so  generally  conceded ! !     To  one  who  is  not  member  of  a 


12  INTRODUCTION^. 

Philosophical  society,  the  rationale  of  this  phenomenon,  is  not 
so  obvious. 

"  What  is  the  difference  of  meaning  between  the  short  and 
long  forms  of  this  word  ?" 

A  Substitute, 

What  is  the  difference  in  meaning  between  the  short,  and  the 
long  form  of  this  word. 

Under  the  same  page  I  find  the  following ; 

"  In  course  of  time  it  became  abreviated  into  its  present  form." 

"  In  course  of  time  it,"  &c. 

Is  this  English  ?     If  so,  the  following  is  English  : 

In  course  of  a  year,  he  became  ill ! 

I  do  not  think  that  the  use  of  the  before  course,  would  be 
contrary  to  any  of  the  ^jrinciples  of  the  English  Language — 
but  I  am  somewhat  apprehensive  that  it  might  contravene  some 
of  the  usages  of  it ! 

In  the  course  of  time,  it  became  abreviated  into  its  present 
form. 

"  It  became  abreviated  into  its  present  form." 

To  speak  of  abreviating  a  thing  into  form,  is  to  employ  lan- 
guage in  a  very  singular  form  ! 

Would  it  not  be  somewhat  better  to  say — In  the  course  of 
time  one  became  a. 

Or, 

In  the  course  of  time,  it  assumed  its  present  form. 

Under  the  same  page  I  find  the  following : 

"  One  expresses  the  idea  of  unity  with  emphasis."  **  A  ex- 
presses the  same  idea,  only  without  emphasis." 

I  should  be  much  pleased  to  see  a  technical  disposition  of  the 
word,  onhj  !  What  can  this  word  be  called  ?  It  is  not  an  ad- 
verb. Under  page  90,  Mr.  Hart  gives  the  following  definition 
of  an  adverb : 

"  An  adverb  is  a  word  used  to  qualify  a  verb,  adjective  or 
adverb." 

But  does  only  qualify  a  verb,  an  adjective,  or  an  adverb  !  t 
He  that  can  parse  the  word,  only,  as  here  used,  deserves  a 
medal  for  his  meed ! 


INTRODUCTION.  13 

"  One  expresses  the  idea  of  unity  with  emphasis."  "  A  ex- 
presses the  same  idea,  onli/  without  emphasis  !" 

The  following  is  something  better : 

One  expresses  unity  with  emphasis  ;  but  a  expresses  it 
without  emphasis. 

Let  me  now  say  a  word,  or  two  upon  the  doctrine  of  these 
periods. 

"  One  expresses  the  idea  of  unity  with  emphasis."  "  A  ex- 
presses the  same  idea,  only  without  emphasis." 

1.  "  One  man  followed  me  several  miles." 

2.  "  A  man  followed  me  several  miles." 

In  the  first,  the  idea  is  that  one  man  only,  followed  me.  In 
the  second,  the  idea  is  that  a  maUf  not  a  dog,  not  a  lionj  not  a 
beary  followed  me. 

In  the  first,  the  leading  idea  is  the  number  of  animals  that 
followed — in  the  second,  the  leading  idea  is  the  kind  of  animal 
that  followed. 

That  a  has  no  reference  to  unity,  is  obvious  from  the  answer 
to  the  following  question  : 

How  many  hats  have  you,  John  ? 

I  have  a  hat ! ! 

When  the  idea  in  the  question  turns  upon  the  number^  one 
must  be  used  in  the  answer. 

How  many  hats  have  you  ? 

I  have  one  hat. 

But  where  the  idea  in  the  question,  turns  upon  the  kind  of 
thing,  a  must  be  used  in  the  answer ;  as.  What  have  you  in 
this  case  ?     I  have  a  hat. 

"  The  diflTerence  (between  one  and  a)  is  this."  "  One  ex- 
presses the  idea  of  unity  with  emphasis.  A  expresses  it,  only 
without  emphasis ! !" 

"  Could  one  man  carry  this  weight  ?  No — but  a  man  could 
carry  it !" 

In  the  first,  says  Mr.  Hart,  there  \a  unity  with  emphasis.— - 
In  the  second,  there  is  unity  without  emphasis  ! !  This,  says 
he,  is  the  difference  between  a  and  one  !  !  ! 

Could  one  man  carry  this  weight  ?  No^ — but  a  horse  could. 
2* 


14  INTRODUCTION. 

A  is  so  entirely  destitute  of  number,  that  where  unity  is  found 
in  the  major  part  of  the  sentence,  a  can  not  be  used  in  the  minor. 

This  is  obvious  from  tlie  incongruity  that  is  produced  by 
the  use  of  one,  and  a  in  the  above  sentence  which  should  be  as 
follows : 

Can  one  man  carry  this  weight  ?     No — but  two  can. 

Or, 
Can  a  man  carry  this  weight?     No — but  a  horse  can. 

I  have  already  attempted  to  make  a  partial  exposition  of  the 
several  errors  which  have  found  their  way  into  the  following 
sentence : 

"  What  is  the  difference  of  meaning  between  the  short  and 
long  forms  of  this  word?" 

I  shall  now  undertake  to  expose  the  few  solecisms  that  appear 
more  occult  than  they  of  which  I  have  already  relieved  this 
sentence. 

"  What  is  the  difference  of  meaning  between  the  short,  and 
the  long  form,  of  this  word?" 

"  The  short  and  long  forms." 

The  word,  ybrm,  as  here  used,  means  shape.  Hence  a  sub- 
stitution of  shape  for  form,  will  have  a  tendency  to  show  the 
eccentricity  of  the  idea  which  Mr.  Hart  here  expresses ; 

The  short  and  long  shapes! 

The  notion  of  a  short  shape,  is  certainly  sui  generis  !  Nor 
do  I  know  to  what  species,  or  genius,  that  of  a  long  shape, 
belongs !  Had  Mr.  Hart  employed  primitive,  and  derivative, 
instead  of  short  ■a.ndi  long,  he  would  have  used  words  which  have 
some  relation  to  forms : 

What  is  the  difference  of  meaning  between  the  primitive,  and 
derivative  forms  of  this  word  ? 

That  a  short  shape  is  a  singular  one,  must  be  obvious  to  all. 
But  whether  men,  in  general,  can  so  readily  see  that  "  owe"  is 
2.  form  of  a,  is  not  so  clear !     On  page  32,  Mr.  Hart  says, 

"  ^  or  an  was  originally  ae,  ane  or  one.  These  words  ae, 
ane  and  one  are  the  long  form  of  a.  And  a  is  the  short  form 
of  ae,  ane  and  one  ! 

Mr.  Hart  wishes  to  express  the  parent  relation  which  ae, 
ane  and  one  bear  to  a.     But  can  this  relation  be  expressed  by 


INTRODUCTION.  1 5 

the  word,  '•^form  I  ?"  Does  the  word, /orm,  convey  any  allusion 
to  the  relation  which  a  mother,  as  such,  bears  to  her  offspring  !  ? 
Mr.  Hart  is  not  speaking  of  ihe  forms,  but  of  the  etymology, 
of  a.     The  word,  a,  has  two  forms — One  is  a  ;  the  other  is  an. 

Can  we  speak  of  the  Latin,  verbum,  as  a  form  of  the  English 
word,  ve7'b  ?  Can  it  be  said  that  "  verbum^^  is  the  long  form 
of  "  »er6" — and  that  "  verb"  is  the  short  form  of  verbum  !  ?  A 
scholar  would  say  that  "  verbum'^  is  the  etymon  of  "  verb."  But 
would  a  scholar  say  that  one  is  the  long  form  ofa/f  ?  As  well 
may  it  be  said  that  an  ox  is  the  large  form  of  a  calf — and  that 
^  calf  is  the  small  form  of  an  ox ! ! 

"  What  is  the  difference  of  meaning  between  the  short  and 
long  forms  of  this  word  ?" 

A  substitute. 

What  is  the  difference  in  meaning  between  the  etymon  of  a, 
and  a  itself?  Or — wherein  does  the  meaning  of  a  differ  from 
that  of  its  etymon  ? 

The  following  is  the  title  page  of  another  work  by  Mr.  Hart. 

"  Class  Book  of  Poetry,  consisting  of  selections  from  dis- 
tinguished English  and  American  Poets  from  Chaucer  to  the 
present  Day.  By  John  S,  Hart,  A.  M.,  Principal  of  the 
Philadelphia  High  School,  and  member  of  the  American 
Philosophical  Society."     (1845,) 

"  From  Chaucer  to  the  present  Day.^^ 

I  have  read  of  Chaucer  ;  and  I  have  some  knowledge  of  his 
works — but  of  Mr.  Day  I  am  totally  ignorant ! 

That  he,  and  his  works  exist  somewhere  is  obvious  from  the 
fact  that  Mr.  Hart  mentions  him  in  connection  with  Chaucer 
himself !  Still,  in  Mr.  Hart's  whole  Book,  I  have  not  been 
able  to  find  a  line  in  prose,  or  verse,  written  by  this  honored 
individual ! ! 

"  From  Chaucer  to  the  present  Day." 

It  may  be  that  the  Mr.  Day  whom  Mr.  Hart  has  here  placed 
by  the  side  of  Chaucer,  is  he  who  generally  passes  by  the  title 
of  Monday,  Wednesday^  Age,  Century,  <Sfc. 

If  so,  Mr.  Hart  is  a  Grammarian  indeed ! 

Upon  the  possibility  that  this  is  what  the  author  wished  to 
say,  I  offer  the  following  Emendation: 


16  INTRODUCTION. 

From  the  time  of  Chaucer  to  the  present. 

"  Principal  of  the  Philadelphia  High  School,  and  member 
of  the  American  Philosophical  Society." 

As  Mr.  Hart  is  the  whole  of  this  society,  the  reader  can  judge 
from  the  following  sentence,  how  much  philosophy  belongs  to 
this  Institution. 

Preface.     (First  sentence.) 

The  literature  of  a  nation  cannot  fail  to  contain  within  itself 
that  which  has  made  the  nation  what  it  is.  **  Class  Book  of 
Poetry,  by  John  S.  Hart,  Principal  of  the  Philadelphia 
High  School,  and  member  of  the  American  Philosophical 
Society."  ■ 

Well,  what  is  it  which  makes  a  nation  what  it  is  ?  Why,  it 
is  its  literature.  Hence  the  reader,  although  not  member  of 
the  American  Philosophical  Society,  must  be  philosopher 
enough  to  see  that  the  following  is  the  only  meaning  which  the 
sentence  conveys : 

The  literature  of  a  nation  must  contain  itself  within  itself! ! 
That  is,  the  value  of  a  dollar  must  contain  itself  within  itself ! 
Mr.  Hart  says  that  he  is  member  of  the  American  Philosophical 
Society — and  icho  can  doubt  it !  !  ? 

As  it  is  not  in  my  power  to  understand  what  Mr.  Hart 
wished  to  express,  I  shall  not  attempt  to  say  what  change  should 
be  made  in  his  period  to  enable  the  reader  to  comprehend  its 
true  meaning.  But,  as  I  am  fully  satisfied  that  the  sentence, 
like  some  societies,  is  encumbered  with  redundant  members,  I 
should  feel  justified  in  serving  a  Writ  of  Quo  Warranto  upon 
its  learned  author  requiring  him  to  show  by  what  authority  he 
uses  certain  words  in  it. 

The  literature  of  a  nation  must  contain  that  which  has  made 
it  what  it  is.  (Redundant  words,  not,  fail,  to,  within,  itself,  the.) 

That  "  the  nation"  should  give  place  to  "  it,"  is  obvious  from 
the  use  of  him  for  a  man,  in  the  following : 

The  learning  of  a  man  must  contain  that  which  has  made 
him  (not,  the  man,)  what  he  is. 

2.  Those  great  ideas,  which  in  the  course  of  centuries,  have 
been  gradually  developed  by  its  master  minds,  are  the  moving 
springs,  which  have  set  the  nation  onward  in  the  career  of  civil- 
ization.    (^Second  sentence,  same  preface,^ 


INTRODUCTION.  17 

It  is  not  easy  to  see  whether  Mr.  Hart  means  that  the  moving 
springs  are  made  of  ideas  which  are  in  the  process  of  develop- 
ment lor  centuries,  or  of  those  which  are  developed  at  different 
limes  for  centuries. 
'    If  he  means  the  former,  the  language  should  be  as  follows— 

The  great  ideas  which  it  required  centuries  to  develope. 

If  he  intends  the  latter,  the  first  part  of  the  sentence  might  be 
as  follaws  : 

The  great  ideas  developed  for  centuries. 

1.  The  great  ideas  which  it  has  required  centuries  to 
develope,  are  the  moving  springs  of  a  nation  in  its  career  of 
civilization. 

(Redundant  words — which,  course,  in,  the,  of,  gradually, 
have,  set,  that,  onward,  by,  its,  master,  minds.     14.) 

2.  The  great  ideas  developed  for  centuries  are  the  moving 
springs  of  a  nation  in  its  career  of  civilization. 

(Redundant  words — which,  course,  in,  the,  of,  gradually, 
have,  set,  that,  onward,  by,  its,  master,  mind.     14.) 

In  the  Anglo-Saxon  race,  from  the  days  of  Alfred  until  now, 
men  of  superior  genius,  the  original  thinkers  in  each  successive 
generation,  have  given  birth  to  ennobling  thoughts,  which  con- 
tinue to  endure,  and  are  perpetuated  not  only  in  the  language, 
but  in  the  race  itself.  (45  words.)  John  S.  HarVs  Class 
Book  of  Poetry. 

A  Substitute. 

From  the  time  of  Alfred,  the  original  thinkers  of  Anglo-Saxon 
blood  have  given  birth  to  many  ennobling  thoughts  which  will 
never  cease  to  enrich  the  language,  and  benefit  the  race.  (30 
words.)     (15  Redundant  words.) 

Or, 

From  the  time  of  Alfred,  the  thoughts  of  many  of  Anglo-Saxon 
blood,  have  enriched,  and  ennobled  the  race.  (18  words.)  (27 
Redundant  words.) 

Englishmen,  and  Americans  of  the  present  day  are  living 
exponents  of  the  thoughts,  and  tmths  of  the  illustrious  dead. 
HarVs  Class  Book  of  Poetry. 

Do  the  dead  think  ? 


.18  INTRODUCTION. 

How  then  can  they  have  thovghts  ? 

If  the  dead  have  no  thoughts,  how  can  either  Enghshmen,  or 
Americans  be  living  exponents  of  them  !  ?  I  can  easily  under- 
stand in  what  way  the  hving  may  be  exponents,  indexes, 
pointers,  to  the  dead.  But  I  cannot  conceive  how  any  thing 
can  be  an  index  to  the  thoughts  of  what  does  not  think  /  Of 
imports  springing  from.     Do  thoughts  spring  from  the  dead  ? 

The  use  of  exponent,  and  elaborated,  gives  the  sentence  a 
puffy,  a  tumid,  cast.  One  is  very  learned — the  other  is  almost 
exclusively  technical. 

A  distinguished  writer  upon  English  philology  says — "  Avoid 
the  use  of  technical  terms,  except  where  they  are  necessary  in 
treating  of  a  particular  art,  or  science." 

Another  still  more  distinguished,  says,  Avoid  the  injudicious 
use  of  technicals.  "  Foreign,  and  learned  words,  unless  where 
necessity  requires  them,  should  never  be  admitted  into  our 
composition." 

It  may  be  well  to  give  the  reader  the  sentence  which  precedes 
the  one  under  consideration. 

"  We  are  what  preceding  generations  have  made  us."  "  Eing- 
lishmen,  and  Americans  of  the  present  day  are  hving  exponents 
of  the  thoughts,  and  truths  elaborated  by  the  illustrious  dead." 
(31  words.) 

Why  this  change  from  we  to  Englishmen,  and  Americans  !  1 

Is  it  to  embellish  the  sentence  with  the  error  of  going  from 
person  to  person  ?  from  the  first  to  the  third — from  the  theamatic 
to  the  theatronic  ? 

A  Substitute. 

We  are  what  preceding  generations  have  made  us,— lively, 
bold,  impressions  of  the  thoughts,  originated,  and  matured  by 
our  illustrious  ancestors.     (21  words.) 


INTRODUCTION  III. 


Ix  1845,  a  writer  over  the  signiture  of  X,  furnished  the  Public 
Ledger  with  a  series  of  critical  reflections  upon  the  new  system  of  Eng- 
lish Syntithology.  To  these  articles  which  are  unfavorable  to  the 
new  theory,  I  thought  it  my  duty  to  reply  in  the  language  of  this 
Inthoductiojt.  I  have  not  here  given  the  articles  of  X.  entire; but  I 
have  quoted  all  the  parts  on  which  I  have  made  any  comments.  To 
what  extent  X.  has  been  gratified  in  his  course  oi  fault-finding,  I  am 
not  able  to  say ;  nor  am  I  able  to  decide  whether  the  pleasure  which 
he  derived  from  the  attack  was  greater  than  the  pain  which  he  re- 
ceived from  his  defeat  This  fact,  together  with  the  identity  of  X.,  will 
very  likely  remain  a  secret  till  the  public  eye  shall  have  got  a  glance 
at  the  Records  of  the  Philadelphia  High  School/ 

FOR  THE  PUBLIC   LEDGER. 

3Iessrs.  Editors:  The  production  of  X.  which  apppeared  in  the 
Ledger  of  August  8th,  has  probably  reminded  the  public  of  the  old 
sign,  "  The  Exhibition  is  now  Open"  which,  some  years  ago,  was  pe- 
riodically placed  at  the  feet  of  the  antique  marble  figure  that  stood  in 
front  of  the  Academy  of  Fine  Arts.  Whether  the  various  curiosities 
in  this  grammatical  iheatrum  are  as  happily  arranged  as  were  those 
in  the  Academy  of  the  Fine  Arts,  is  a  point  of  which  there  may  be 
different  opinions ;  but  all  who  have  examined  both  must  admit,  that 
in  number  and  variety,  at  least,  the  collection  of  X.  has  never  been 
equalled  by  any  similar  assemblage.  I  shall  not  attempt  a  full  dis- 
play of  these  rare  things,  nor  shall  I  undertake  a  climax  in  the  pre- 
sentation of  the  few  which  I  shall  attempt  to  exhibit.  Indeed,  there  is 
no  need  of  this,  for  The  Exhibition  is  now  Open,  and  the  lovers  of  the 
curious  and  marvellous  may  gratify  themselves  in  any  way,  and  to 
any  extent,  which  their  time  and  inclination  will  allow. 

I  hope  that  X.  will  repose  full  confidence  in  me  as  par achist.  I  shall 
try  to  do  him  ample  justice.  I  shall  not  only  not  subtract  from  his 
collection,  bui  I  shall  endeavor  to  add  himself  to  it.  Yes,  he,  like  the 
antique  statue  which  sustained  the  old  sign,  will  be  exhibited  headless, 
as  a  specimen  instance  of  the  fate  of  him  who  attempts  to  sustain  the 
old  grammar  against  the  new. 


IV  INTRODUCTION. 

The  first  curiosity  which  must  attract  the  attention  of  many,  is  the 
singular  fact  that  a  man  who  constructs  sentences  so  ungrammati- 
colli/  that  the  words  of  his  periods  cannot  be  parsed,  should  attempt 
to  figure  in  the  public  papers,  as  a  critic  in  English  philology !  That 
this  is  the  case  with  X.,  is  obvious  from  the  inability  of  every  gram- 
marian to  parse  the  words,  sharpness,  success,  and  confidence,  in  ihe 
following  sentence : 

"But  before  I  proceed  to  establish  what  I  have  assumed,  it  seems 
to  me  proper  to  show  that  notwithstanding  the  sharpness  of  his  criti- 
cism, the  success  of  his  attack  upon  Murray,  and  his  followers,  and 
his  unlimited  confidence  in  his  own  system,  Mr.  B.  himself  is  not 
infallible." 

Are  the  words,  sharpness,  success,  and  co?ifidence  in  the  nominative, 
the  possessive,  or  the  objective  easel  If  in  the  nominative,  where 
are  the  verbs  which  agree  with  them  1  If  in  the  objective,  where  are 
the  words  which  govern  them  ?  ! ! 

"But  before  I  proceed  to  establish  what  I  have  assumed." 

Every  logician  will  be  deeply  interested  in  this  proposition.  It  is 
rare  that  we  find  a  critic  attempting  to  prove  what  he  assumes.  As  to 
assume  is  to  take  for  granted,  or  without  proof,  X.  reminds  one  of  the 
Dutch  boy  who  replied  to  his  father  in  English,  that  he  would  come 
to  him  as  soon  as  he  had  catched  the  fish  which  was  already  in  his 
hands  ! 

When  I  shall  have  repeated  the  sentence  of  X.,  I  will  attempt  to 
rid  it  of  the  gross  errors  which,  like  the  poisoned  arrows  of  Satyr's 
quiver,  can  never  be  extracted  from  X.  himself ! 

'•'But  before  I  proceed  to  establish  what  I  have  assumed,  it  seems  to 
me  proper  to  show  that  notwithstanding  the  sharpness  of  his  critscism, 
the  success  of  his  attack  upon  Murray  and  others,  and  his  unlimited 
confidence  in  his  own  system,  Mr.  B.  himself  is  not  infallible." 

Amended — "  But,  before  I  say  any  thing  upon  this  point,  it  may  be 
proper  to  show  that,  notwithstanding  Mr.  Brown's  criticism  is  sharp, 
his  attack  upon  Murray  and  others  successful,  and  his  confidence  in 
his  own  theory  unlimited,  he  himself  is  not  infallible. 

He  that  understands  English  must  see  that  the  substitute  is  as 
much  superior  in  structure  to  the  original,  as  is  a  regularly  built 
vessel  to  the  first  raft,  or  canoe  to  which  mere  necessity  gave  rise. 

If  X.  has  undertaken  to  overthrow  Brown's  system  of  English  Syn- 
tithology,  he  will  soon  be  convinced  that  he  is  engaged  in  a  hopeless 
labor.  Before  he  takes  another  step  in  this  difficult  work,  I  would  re- 
commend him  to  try  his  powers  in  an  attempt  to  pluck  that  bow  from 
the  firmament  which  is  pencilled  upon  the  fluid  canvass  of  the  sky. 

The  following  is  the  first,  though  not  the  greatest  show,  in  this  rare 
collection : 

"It  is  highly  important  that  we  should  fully  understand  the  princi- 
ples on  which  the  English  language  is  constructed.  He  who  sheds 
light  upon  them,  or  contributes  to  c/ear  them  from. the  obscurity  in 
which  pedantry  and  presumption  have  involved  them,  merits  our  en- 
couragement and  applause." 


^'  INTRODirCnON.  V 

The  paragraph,  which  X,  has  unnaturally  divided  into  two  senten- 
ces, reminds  one  of  the  poor  divided  dog  out  of  which  the  boy  attempted 
to  mak€  two !  That  X.  has  farced  the  two  parts  of  this  paragraph 
asunder,  is  rendered  obvious  from  the  following: 

It  is  highly  important  to  this  poor  boy  that  he  should  be  well  edu- 
cated. They  who  give  him  a  thorough  education  merit  his  hearty 
thanks. 

That  these  two  parts  naturally  belong  to  the  same  sentence,  may  be 
seen  by  all  who  understand  the  relation  of  cause  and  effect,  of  premise 
and  conclusion. 

As  it  is  highly  important  to  this  poor  boy  that  he  should  be  well 
edilcated,  they  who  give  him  a  thorough  education,  merit  his  hearty 
thanks. 

As  it  is  highly  important  that  we  should  fully  understand  the  prin- 
ciples on  which  the  English  language  is  constructed,  he  who  sheds 
light  upon  them,  or  contributes  to  clear  them  from  the  obscurity  in 
which  pedantry  and  presumption  have  involved  them,  merits  our 
encouragement  and  applause. 

«  To  clear  them  from  the  obscurity." 

If  a  grammarian  can  get  rid  of  obscurity  by  carrying  his  principles 
away  from  it,  why  cannot  a  physician  cure  his  patient  by  carrying 
him  away  from  his  disease. 

If  X.  does  not  wish  to  suggest  that  dark  rooms  may  be  made  light 
by  carrying  them  away  from  the  darkness,  he  should  have  used  o/in 
the  place  of  from.  The  true  idea  may  be  illustrated  in  the  following 
improprieties : 

Clear  me  from  these  men,means  to  carry  me  away  from  them.  But 
clear  me  0/ these  men,  means  to  carry  them  away  from  tne. 

The  following,  which  is  proposed  as  a  substitute,  is  something  better ; 

Who  sheds  light  upon  them,  or  rids  them  of  the  obscurity  in  which 
edantry  and  presumption  have  involved  them. 

But  of  what  service  is  the  clause, "  or  contributes  to  clear  them  from 
the  obscurity  ?" 

Is  not  this  clause  synonymous  with  "who  sheds  light  upon  them  V 
This  clause,  then,  which  is  grossly  incorrect  in  its  own  structure, 
mars  the  period  with  perfect  tautology.  Nor  is  this  all — for,  as  the 
word  clear  means  to  free  from  obscurity,  perplexity  or  doubt,  X.  expres- 
ses the  whole  idea  in  the  words  "  clear  them."  Hence  the  words  '■from 
the  obscurity  "  are  a  pleonasm  of  a  pleonasm  ! 

But  X.  may  reply  that  as  it  is  necessary  to  particularise  the  obscur- 
ity, it  must  be  mentioned.  True;  but  must  the  verb  which  contains 
the  import  of  the  noun  be  used  where  it  is  necessary  to  employ  the 
noun  ]  Surely  not.  Hence  X.  should  have  used  rid  in  the  place  of 
clear. 

Who  sheds  light  upon  them,  or  contributes  to  rid  them  0/ the  ob- 
scurity in  which  pedantry  and  presumption  have  involved  them, 

3 


VI  INTRODUCTION. 

I  will  close  my  reflections  upon  this  sentence  with  this  remark 
which  is  certainly  due  to  X.  There  are  few  men  whose  sentences  in 
general  can  not  be  parsed,  who  can  "  turn  out "  a  better  period. 

Would  you  allow  me  space,  and  was  it  necessary,  I  might  extend 
my  reflections  to  the  other  periods  of  X.  But,  as  I  have  shown  the 
inability  of  this  critic  to  construct  sentences,  I  will  now  attempt  to 
demonstrate  his  want  of  power  to  understand  them. 

The  author  of  the  new  system  may  not  have  constructed  all  of  his 
numerous  sentences  v/ith  perfect  propriety  in  every  respect.  But  that 
the  periods  which  X.  has  pronounced  bad,  are  not  marred  by  the  sole- 
cisms which  X.  ascribes  to  them,  must  be  obvious  to  all  grammarians 
who  read  his  reflections.  The  following  is  the  first  which  he  pro- 
nounces bad : 

"  But,  although  these  gentlemen  speak  in  an  unusual  strain  of  pane- 
gyrick,  yet  their  own  periods  are  so  often,  and  badly  marred,  by  gross 
solecisms,  that  their  opinions  will  not  only  not  induce  the  people  to 
ihink  highly  of  the  Doctor  and  his  book,  but  will  compel  them  to  think 
less  highly  of  his  friends." 

Upon  this  poetroneX. makes  the  following  reflections: 

This  sentence,  says  X.,  is  liable  to  several  exceptions.  I  shall  ad- 
vert to  two  of  them.  The  clause,  so  often  and  badly  marred,  should  be 
so  often  and  no  badly  marred. 

Their  own  periods  are  badly  marred  by  gross  solecisms,  that  their 
opinions,  &c. ;  this  is  bad  grammar.  « Insert  so  before  badlyt  and  the 
fault  will  be  cured." 

Is  not  so  placed  before  badly  by  means  of  that  figure  which  is  called 
an  ellipsis  ?  There  are  two  modes  in  which  words  are  put  into  some 
sentences.  One  is  by  direct  expression — the  other  by  implication ; 
ellipsis. 

For  instance,  so  is  twice  used  in  the  following  sentence : 

"  He  had  grown  so  tall  and  slender,  that  even  his  own  parents  did 
not  recognize  him." 

-So  is  put  before  tall  by  expression,  and  before  slender  by  implication. 

"  So  often  and  badly  marred." 

That  is,  so  often,  and  so  badly  marred. 

"Their  opinions  will  not  only  not  induce  the  people  to  think  highly 
of  the  doctor,  and  his  book,  but  will  compel  them  to  think  less  highly 
of  his  friends." 

Less  highly  than  what?  inquires  X.  This,  however,  is  not  the  in- 
quiry which  the  nature  of  the  proposition  suggests.  The  natural 
inquiry  is  less  highly  than  when?  Answer — Less  highly  than  they 
nad  formerly  done. 

"I  am  inclined  to  think  that  the  Doctor's  has  been  derived  from 
Goold  Brown,  in  some  way  or  other." 

"  The  words  *  or  other''  says  X.  are  not  only  useless,  but  they  make 
nonsense." 


INTRODUCTION.  Vll 

That  is,  they  are  useless,  and  nonsensicai,  to  a  reader  who  does  not 
know  the  import  of  words. 

1st.  Some  man  has  written  a  criticism  over  the  letter  X.,  which 
cannot  be  parsed ! 

2nd.  Some  man  or  other  has  written  a  criticism  over  the  letter  X., 
which  cannot  be  parsed  I 

In  the  first,  I  do  not  say  whetherl  know  who  has  written  this  curious 
criticism. 

In  the  second,  however,  I  disavow  all  knowledge  of  his  identity. 
The  words,  or  other,  upon  which  X.  is  perched,  when  he  is  emboldened 
to  cry  tiseless  and  nonsense,  have  an  obvious  value  in  the  sentence,  in 
which  they  are  condemned  by  this  Stentor  in  grammar. 

The  import  of  "  or  other,^^  is  1  know  not  who,  1  know  not  where,  I 
know  not  whom. 

Some  person, i  know  not  who,ga.ve  me  the  information. — Wkbsteh. 

But  perhaps  X.  will  say  that  the  clause  "  /  know  not  who,  which  is 
synonymous  with  the  words,  or  other,  is  nonsense. 

Some  person  or  other  gave  me  the  information. 

Some  theoretical  writers  allege  that  there  was  a  lime  when  there 
was  no  such  thing  as  society. — Bacox. 

Here  Bacon  does  not  say  whether  he  knew  who  these  writers  were. 

By  the  following,  however,  he  would  disavow  all  knowledge  of  the 
writer's  identity. 

Some  writer  or  other  affirms  that  there  has  been  a  time  when  there 
was  no  human  society. 

Dryden,  some  where  or  other  says,  «  peace  to  the  dead." — Webster. 

By  the  words,  or  other,  Webster  indicates  that  he  does  not  know 
where  Dryden  makes  this  remark. 

In  defining  the  word  somewhere,  Webster  says — "In  some  place 
unknown,  or  not  specified,  in  one  place  or  another." 

Here  we  find  Webster  using  the  words,  in  one  place  or  another,  sy- 
nonymously, with  the  words  unknown,  or  not  specified. 

Somehow.  One  way  or  another.  In  some  way  not  yet  known.  The 
thing  must  have  happened  somehow  or  other. — Webster. 

Most  gentlemen  of  property,  at  some  period  or  other  of  their  lives, 
are  ambitious  of  representing  their  country  in  parliament. — Black- 
stone. 

I  am  inclined  to  think  that  the  Doctor's  has  been  derived  from 
Goold  Brown,  in  some  way  or  other. 

Should  X.  write  again,  I  trust  that  he  will  give  the  public  a  logical 
definition  of  nonsense. 

I  feel  curious  to  know  whether  what  he  has  written  on  the  words, 
"  or  other, '^  does  not  legitimately  fall  under  such  a  definition. 

I  hope  X.  will  ''proceed  to  establish  what  he  has  assumed.''^  respect- 
ing the  nomenclature,  and  principles  of  the  New  System. 


Tiii  ixTiiODucTioir. 


Foil   THE   PUBLIC   LEDGER. 

Messrs.  Editors.-  If  the  first  article  of  X.  may  be  considered  a  speci- 
men number,  he  is  likely  to  excel  in  interest,  every  other  critic  of  ihe 
age.  True,  he  does  not  seem  to  give  a  superior  brightness  to  the  critic's 
blaze:  but  his  own  errors  are  so  frequent,  and  so  entirely  sui  generis, 
that  almost  every  thing  he  says,  is  endued  with  the  charm  of  novelty. 
His  second,  fully  sustains  the  high  expectations  which  were  raised  by 
his  first.  What  his  third  will  be,  I  am  unable  to  predict.  It  is  to  be 
hoped  that  he  had  written  it  before  he  was  smitten  with  the  judgment 
of  my  first  response:  the  public  mind  has  been  most  suddenly  raised 
to  a  high  pitch  of  expectation, — and  I  should  regret  that  any  agency 
of  mine  should  contribute  to  its  disappointment.  But  the  public  may 
be  assured  that  however  severely  X.  may  feel  this  calamity,  and  how- 
ever much  ii  may  cripple  his  faculties  for  the  present,  he  will  neither 
tremble  long, nor  submit  at  last.  He  may  remain  a  grammatical  invalid 
from  the  stroke  which  he  well  knows  he  has  brought  upon  himself, 
till  the  shame  of  his  defeat,  and  exposure  is  somewhat  diminished, 
by  time.  But  when  the  actual  suffering  is  over,  he,  like  other  sinners, 
will  return  to  his  habits  of  error. 

On  this  occasion  I  will  endeavor  to  invigorate  his  relaxed  muscles 
by  gentle  rubbing,  and  « to  clear  "  his  mind  '■^from "  the  tenebrosity 
in  which  his  late  affliction  has  involved  it,  by  diverting  his  attention 
from  himself  to  another  part  of  his  ^rs/-&orn  .• 

We  are  indebted  to  Murray  and  others  for  what  they  have  done 
towards  reducing  disorder  to  system,  notwithstanding  their  numerous 
mistakes. 

I  notice  this  sentence  because  all  of  its  words,  except  ^^  notwithstarid- 
ing.  and  mistaJces  "  can  be  parsed  ! ! !  And  even  these  might  be  parsed, 
had  X.  constructed  the  sentence  in  the  following  way : 

«  Notwithstanding  the  mistakes  of  Murray  and  other  grammarians, 
are  numerous,  we  are  indebted  to  them  for  what  they  have  done  tow- 
ards reducing  disorder  to  system." 

«  We  are  indebted  to  Murray  and  others  for  what  they  have  done 
towards  reducing  disorder  to  system,  and  we  are  more  indebted  to 
James  Brown  for  his  deeper  exploration  of  the  subject,  and  for  exposing 
the  fundamental  errors  of  Murray^s  system:'* 

That  is,  John  has  rode  a  horse,  and  Stephen  has  rode  one  faster !  ! 
We  are  indebted  to  Murray,  and  we  are  indebted  to  James  Brown 
more  !  / 

As  the  word,  foM,  or  its  equivalent,  should  stand  before  rode,  so 
much,  or  its  equivalent,  should  precede  indebted: 

We  are  much  indebted  to  Murray  and  others,  &c.,  hut  we  are  more 
indebted  to  James  Brown,  &c. 

As  X.  has  omitted  much,  his  sentence  should  read  as  follows : 
Wc  are  indebted  to  Murray  and  others  for  what  they  have  done 
towards  reducing  disorder  to  system, — but  we  ought  to  feel  more  than 
indebted  to  James  Brown,  &c.        .  :■     ,  .  :  - 


INTRODUCTION.  IX 

The  words,  ought,  to,  and  feel  are  impreperly  used.  Were  these 
words  in  the  first  part  of  the  period,  they  would  be  properly  used  in 
the  second  by  ellipsis. 

We  ought  to  feel  indebted  to  Murray,  and  others  for  what  they  have 
done  towards  reducing  disorder  to  system,  and  more  to  James  Brown 
for  his  deeper  exploration,  &c.  and  for  exposing  the  fundamental 
errors  of  Murray's  system. 

Exploration  requires  that  exposing^  should  be  exposition. 
I  will  now  place  the  sentence  in  its  corrected  state  in  juxtaposition 
with  it,  in  its  original  form. 

1.  «'  We  are  indebted  to  Murray,  and  others  for  what  they  have  done 
towards  reducing  disorder  to  system,  and  we  ought  to  feel  more  in- 
debted to  James  Brown  for  his  deeper  exploration  of  the  subject,  and 
for  exposing  the  fundamental  errors  of  Murray's  System." 

2.  "  We  are  much  indebted  to  Murray  and  others  for  what  they  have 
done  to  reduce  disorder  to  system, — but,  much  more,  to  James  Brown 
for  his  deep  exploration  of  the  subject, — and  his  full  exposition  of  the 
fundamental  errors  of  Murray's  system." 

The  next  sentence  of  X.  is  something  better,  though  much  too  faulty 
for  a  critic : 

"  But,  although  I  am  disposed  to  give  Mr.  Brown  what  is  due  to  Aim, 
very  high  praise,  I  cannot  approve  of  all  he  has  done." 

The  following  is  something  better : 

Although  I  am  disposed  to  give  Mr.  Brown  the  very  high  praise  which 
is  due  him,  I  cannot  approve  of  all  he  has  done. 

The  next  sentence  of  X.  may  be  considered  singularly  good  for  a 
critic  whose  periods,  in  general,  can  not  be  parsed ! 

« In  constructing  a  system  of  his  own,  he  seems  to  me  to  have  fallen 
into  errors  similar  to  those  he  has  condemned." 

By  the  use  of  his  own,  X.  conveys  the  idea  that  James  Brown  con- 
structed Murray's  system ! 

In  attending  to  his  own  business,  he  is  found  thorough. 

Does  not  this  imply  that  he  attends  to  another  person's  business. 

The  following  is  something  better  : 

It  seems  to  me  that  the  system  by  Mr.  Brown,  is  marred  by  errors 
similar  to  those  which  he  condemns  in  others. 

But  this  is  not  a  substantive  sentence — it  is  naturally  dependent 
upon  its  predecessor,  with  which  I  will  here  incorporate  it. 

"  But,  although  I  am  disposed  to  give  to  Mr.  Brown  what  is  due  him, 
very  high  praise,  I  cannot  approve  of  all  he  has  done :  the  errors 
which  he  condemns  in  others,  seem  to  me  to  mar  his  own  system." 

In  the  following  sentence,  it  is  said,  that  Brown  compares  the 
structure  of  a  language  to  the  trunk  and  branches  of  a  tree : 

«  This  comparison  of  the  structure  of  a  language  to  the  trunk  of  a 


X  INTRODUCTION. 

tree  and  its  branches,  is  an  indulgence  of  fancy,  and  not  an  exertion 
of  reason." 

If  X.  or  any  other  man,  can  show  any  such  comparison  in  the 
works  of  James  Brown  on  English  Syntithology,  I  will  surrender  the 
field, — I  will  return  my  sword  into  its  scabbard.  That  X.  is  excusable 
for  his  numerous  infractions  of  the  laws  of  grammar,  I  will  admit — 
"  ignorance  covers  a  multitude  of  faults."  But  that  he  is  excusable 
for  a  perversion  of  the  truth,  I  must  deny.  James  Brown  compare  the 
structure  of  a  language  to  the  trunk  of  a  tree  I  Noi^sEjrsE.  Much 
sooner  would  1  compare  the  greenness  of  X.  to  that  of  sapling.  And 
that  I  may  not  be  charged  in  this  comparison,  as  is  Brown  in  the 
other,  with  the  high  handed  offence  of  an  indulgence  of  fancy,  I  shall 
proceed  to  sustain  the  position : 

"  His  comparison  of  the  structure  of  a  language  to  the  trunk  of  a 
tree,  and  its  branches,  is  an  indulgence  of  fancy,  and  not  an  exertion 
of  reason." 

This  is  the  first  intimation  that  I  have  ever  seen  that  a  comparison 
is  either  an  indulgence  or  an  exertion  /  / 

The  clause,  "  is  an  indulgence  of  fancy,  and  not  an  exertion  of  reason," 
reminds  me  of  the  boy's  answer  to  the  gentleman  who  asked  him  for 
his  name : 

"  My  name  is  Job  Hand, — not  Sarah  Treman,  nor  Jane  Nathans  !" 

But  I  presume  that  X.  concluded  that  as  all  branches  of  business 
are  now  pretty  dull,  the  readers  of  the  Ledger  would  have  ample  time 
to  attend  to  the  negative  part  of  his  proposition. — Hence  after  saying 
that  this  particular  comparison  in  an  indulgence  of  fancy,  he  adds,  "and 
not  an  exertion  of  reason." 

The  only  apology  which  I  can  find  for  this  pleonasm  is  that  people 
at  this  time  have  leisure  to  examine  abstruse  points  with  great  care  !- 

But  why  it  may  be  inquired  was  not  the  negative  part  of  this  pro- 
position expressed  by  placing  mere  before  fancy  ?  « is  an  indulgence 
of  mere  fancy." 

I  cannot  answer  this  question  with  certainty— I  presume  that  X. 
was  apprehensive  that  this  manner  of  expressing  the  idea  would  in- 
terdict the  possibility  oi parsing  all  the  words  in  the  sentence  ! 

Some  how  or  other,  the  following  sentence  has  given  X.  great 
offence. 

"  I  am  inclined  to  think  that  the  doctor's  has  been  derived  from  Mr. 
Goold  Brown's  in  some  way  or  other." 

Upon  this  period  X.  remarks : 

« In  some  way  or  other  !  In  whatever  way  it  may  be  derived,  that 
way  must  be  some  way,  and  there  can  be  no  other  way  than  some  way. 
The  words  or  other,  are  not  only  useless,  but  they  make  nonsense^ 

I  shall  attempt  no  comment  upon  the  numerous  grammatical  im- 
proprieties which  deform  this  fine  specimen  of  paralogy.  But  I  wish 
to  be  allowed  to  say  that,  "  are  not  oiily  useless,  but  they  make  nonsense, 


INTRODUCTIOW.  Xi 

might  be  exchanged  for  the  following  without  serious  injury  :  "  Are 
not  only  useless,  but  nonsemdcal." 

"  In  whatever  way  it  may  be  derived,  that  way  must  be  some  way, 
and  there  can  be  no  other  way  than  some  way." 

As  the  word,  some,  means  indefinitey  not  hiowriy  not  specified,  the  po- 
sition of  X.  is  that  every  way  is  an  indejinite  way  ! !  "  There  can  be 
no  other  way  than  some  way"  That  is,  there  can  be  no  way  but  an 
indefinite  way !  The  vulgar  notion  that  some  is  synonymous  with  a, 
has  led  X.  into  absolute  error.  It  is  true  that  there  can  be  no  way 
which  is  not  a  way — but  it  is  not  true  that  there  can  be  no  way  which 
is  not  some  way.  X.  says  that  there  can  be  no  book  which  is  not  some 
book.  Is  the  bible  some  book  1  No.  The  bible  is  a  well  known,  a 
well  defined,  book.  But  the  bible  is  a  book.  Webster,  and  others 
define  some  as  follows : 

Some.  Noting  a  person  or  thing  as  not  known,  not  specified,  not 
definite. 

No  way,  therefore,  which  is  defined,  which  is  made  definite,  can  be 
some  way.    Hence  there  can  be  a  way  which  is  not  some  way ! 

I  am  inclined  to  think  that  the  Doctor's  has  been  derived  from  Mr. 
Goold  Brown's  in  some  way  or  other. 

X.  would  reject  the  words,  or  other,  because  they  are  useless.  He 
would  leave  the  sentence  as  follows : 

I  am  inclined  to  think  that  the  Doctor's  has  been  derived  from  Mr. 
GooJd  Brown's  in  som£  way  / 

Now,  if  every  wa^y  is  som£  way,  of  what  service  are  the  words,  some 
way?  If  every  way  is  some  way,  does  it  not  follow  that  if  the  deriva- 
tion takes  place  at  all,  it  must  take  place  in  some  way !  ?  Hence, 
according  to  the  doctrine  advanced  by  X.  the  sentence  should  be  con- 
tracted to, — 

« I  am  inclined  to  think  that  the  Doctor's  has  been  derived  from  Mr. 
Goold  Brown's !" 

If  every  way  is  some -way ,  every  letter  is  some  letter.  But  X  is  not 
some  letter;  for  it  is  a  well  known,  a  well  defined,  letter.  Notwith- 
standing X  is  not  some  letter,  (that  is  not  an  indefinite  letter,)  X.  him- 
self is  surely  some  person.  But  had  X.  the  courage  to  make  himself 
known,  he  would  cease  to  be  some  person  ! 

I  will  conclude  this  article  by  calling  the  attention  of  the  public  to 
the  very  honest,  and  logical  way  in  which  X.  attempts  to  demonstrate 
that  Brown's  sentence  is  nonsense. 

Brown^s  sentence .-  1  am  inclined  to  think  that  the  Doctor's  has  been 
derived  from  Mr.  Goold  Brown's  in  some  way  or  other. 

X's  sentence  employed  to  illustrate  the  nonsense  of  Brown's .-  «  Some 
one  of  these  three  persons  committed  the  crime,  or  if  some  one  of  them 
did  noty  a.n-other  of  them  did !" 

Incredible  as  it  may  appear  X.  introduces  this  trick  with  the  follow- 
ing words ; 


Xll  INTRODUCTION. 

"Take  for  illustration,  the  following:" 

«  Some  one  of  these  three  persons  committed  the  crime,  or  if  somf. 
one  of  them  did  not,  sm-other  of  them  did !" 

But  what  does  the  sentence  illustrate?  It  illustrates,  not  that 
Brown's  sentence  is  nonsense,  but  that  X.  has  put  too  low  an  estimate 
upon  the  intelligence  of  this  community. 

The  men,  women,  and  children  of  Philadelphia  see,  and  condemn 
this  sentence  as  clumsy  legerdemain. 

The  following  is  a  parallel  instance : 

I  think  that  some  one  or  other  will  be  sent  for  the  papers. 

I  am  inclined  to  think  that  the  Doctor's  has  been  derived  from  Mr. 
Goold  Brown's  in  some  way  or  other. 

Some  how  or  other  X.  has  become  impressed  with  the  idea  that  the 
PhiUidelphians  are  incapable  of  distinguishing  between  a  fair,  and  an 
unfair,  discussion.  That  all  the  Philadelphians  are  profound  philo- 
logists, I  will  not  attempt  to  say.  But  that,  in  general,  they  are 
abundantly  competent  to  distinguish  between  a  happy,  and  an  unhappy 
disposition  of  the  parts  of  a  sentence;  between  a  judicious,  and  an 
injudicious  insertion  of  incidents;  betweendecoration,  and  deformity ; 
between  sentences  that  can,  and  those  that  cannot  be  parsed,  and 
between /a^e, and  true,  reasoning,  is  a  fact  which  X.  will  soon  learn 
with  deep  regret. 

FOR   THE   PUBLIC   LEDGER. 

Messrs.  Editors:  As  the  writer  who  has  recently  rendered  himself 
some  man,  by  assuming  the  letter,  X.  as  a  cognomen,  has  been  heard 
to  screech,  he  may  yet  exchange  the  character  of  some  man  for  that 
of  a  well  known  one.  For,  although  the  screen  behind  which  he  is 
ensconced,  may  protect  Aim  from  the  public  gaze,  it  can  not  imprison  , 
the  shrieks  which  express  his  pain.  Besides,  curiosity,  the  most  vi-  : 
gilant  officer  that  has  ever  pursued  a  violator  of  any  law,  is  now  on 
tip-toe :  every  viva  voce  exertion  to  establish  the  correctness  of  the 
positions  of  X.  will  be  referred  to  some  motive, — any  unusual  degree 
of  familiarity  with  the  articles  of  X.  will  excite  an  interest  as  an  in- 
dex to  his  identity.  In  this  way  curiosity  will  give  birth  to  Suspicion — 
the  daughter  will  join  the  mother,  and  X.  will  lose  the  some  character 
which  now  protects  him. 

But  however  difficult  of  solution  the  problem  of  his  identity  may  be, 
that  of  his  motives  is  most  clearly  revealed  by  the  course  which  he 
has  taken: 

At  the  head  of  his  communications,  he  places  the  title  of  James 
Brown's  books  on  the  constructive  genius  of  the  English  Language. 

"  AN  ENGLISH  SYNTITHOLOGY," 
By  Jah.es  Bnowsr. 

After  citing  this  title  with  an  obvious  intention  to  make  a  false  im- 
pression upon  the  public  mind,  he  most  sagaciously  proceeds  to  make 
a  revelation  of  the  most  important  secret,  that  "  It  is  highly  important 


INTRODUCTION.  XIU 

thai  we  should  fully  understand  the  principles  on  which  the  English  Lan- 
guage is  constructed.^^ 

Having  imparted  this  informatioo,  aad  having  convinced  the  com- 
munity by  the  use  o{  constructed  for  fm-med,  that  it  is  highly  important 
for  him  to  pay  more  attention  to  the  exact  import  of  words,  he  pro- 
ceeds to  say  that  "  he,  who  contributes  to  clear  them  from  (that  is  to 
carry  them  away  from)  the  obscurity  in  which  pedantry  and  presump' 
tiun  have  involved  them,  merits  our  encouragement  and  applause  1" 

The  next  step  in  this  soft-soap  process,  commences  with  a  daub  of 
eulogy  upon  Murray  and  others  for  what  they  have  done  towards  car- 
ri/ing  the  principles  of  the  English  Language  away  from  the  obscurity 
in  which  pedantry  amd  presumption  have  involved  them!  Having 
finished  with  Murray  and  his  admirers,  he  replenishes  his  brush,  and 
takes  James  Brown  in  hand,  with  whom  he  terminates  this  prefatory 
process.     Below  may  be  seen  brush,  soap,  and  all : 

"  We  are  indebted  to  Murray  and  others  for  what  they  have  done 
towards  reducing  disorder  to  system,  and  we  ought  to  feel  more  in- 
debted to  James  Brown  for  his  deeper  exploration  of  the  subject,  and 
for  exposing  the  fundamental  errors  in  Murray's  system  !" 

This  fulsome  paragraph,  X.  joreswwec?  would  satisfy  Brown's  friends, 
that  he  intends  to  review  the  new  system  with  the  utmost  impartiality. 
Feeling  entrenched  in  the  good  graces  of  the  friends  of  the  new  system 
whose  title  he  places  at  the  head  of  his  essays,  he  undertakes  to  fore- 
stall public  opinion  by  imputing  errors  to  the  work,  which  he  has  not 
yet  attempted  to  show ! 

"  In  constructing  a  system  of  his  own  he  seems  to  me  to  have  fallen 
into  errors  similar  to  those  he  has  condemned." 

But  does  X.  proceed  to  point  out  these  errors  ]  O,  yes.  By  what 
means  1     By  the  following  sentence : 

"  His  nomenclature  is,  in  my  opinion,  entirely  indefensible  ! !  I" 

And  by  what  means,  pray,  does  X.  show  that  the  nomenclature  is 
indefensible  !  1     By  the  marvellous  logic  of  the  following  statement : 

"  His  comparison  of  the  structure  of  a  language  to  the  trunk  of  a 
tree,  and  its  branches,  is  an  indulgence  of  fancy,  and  not  an  exertion 
of  reason  !  ! !" 

These  charges  are  preferred  against  the  new  system  in  the  first  part 
of  his  preliminary  article.  How  does  X.  appropriate  the  second  part 
of  his  first  emanation  1  In  the  second,  he  makes  a  most  unfortunate 
attempt  to  show  that  there  are  even  three  grammatical  errors  in  the 
book  which  comprises  n early  ^ue  hundred  pages  ! ! 

To  what  does  he  devote  his  second  article  1 

To  the  same  purpose,  viz. — to  the  perverting  of  the  truth,  and  the 
murdering  of  the  King's  English. 

Although  his  second,  like  his  first, — is  headed;  ''An  English  Synti- 
thology  by  James  Brown,'''  he  abandons  the  book  which  bears  this  title, 
for  a  work  entitled,  "  An  Exegesis  of  English  Syntax !" 

Hear,  hear, — "  Mr.  Brown,  irk  his  JElxegesis  of  English  Syntax,  pub- 


XIV  INTRODUCTION. 

Hshed  in  1840,  page  26,  says,  The  Dictionary  import,  the  general  sig- 
nification of  a  word,  is  not  the  true  basis  of  its  syntax  classification." 

But  why  did  X.  seek  this  sentiment  in  a  book  which  was  not  under 
consideration  1  Had  he  been  reviewing  the  Exegesis,  he  might  make 
any  proper  reflections  upon  it  with  perfect  impunity.  Why  did  not 
X.  take  this  sentiment  from  the  St/ntithology  l  Let  me  answer  the 
question.  X.  found  this  sentiment  in  both  the  Exegesis,  and  St/7i- 
tithology.  In  the  Exegesis,  he  found  it  expressed  in  one  short  period 
which  he  thought,  he  could  mould  to  his  own  purpose.  In  the  Syn- 
tithology,  he  found  it  expressed  more  at  length,  and  illustrated  by  sub- 
junctive matter  which  he  could  not  omit  in  the  quotation. 

In  the  Syntithology  this  sentiment  is  presented  in  the  following  way  ; 
"Motives  Call" 

"  Teacher.  Can  you  give  the  Conjective  Reading  oi call? 

Pupil.  Motives  call. 

Teacher.  By  what  means  do  you  ascertain  the  true  Conjective  Read- 
ing of  a  word? 

Pupil.  By  the  sense. 

Teacher.  Is  not  the  sense,  then,  the  syntax,  the  grammar? 

Pupil.  O,  no !  the  sense  is  the  means  by  which  I  ascertain  the  syntax, 
the  connection.  The  glass  through  which  I  see  an  object,  is  not  the 
object  itself.  The  connection  is  one  thing;  the  muse  of  the  connection 
is  another  thing ;  and  the  means  by  which  the  connection  is  ascer- 
tained is  still  another!     (Book  1.  page  47.) 

Now,  X.  saw  that  he  could  not  in  any  way  place  the  distorting  sen- 
tence after  this  language,  which  he  has  put  immediately  after  the  sen- 
tence that  he  has  taken  from  the  Exegesis  : 

«  He  seems  to  exclude  the  meaning  of  words  from  any  share  in  de- 
termining the  manner  of  their  use  ! ! " 

This  is  inserted  by  X.  as  a  deduction  from  the  sentence  which  he 
extracts  from  the  Exegesis  !  But  does  the  period  quoted  from  the  Ex- 
egesis employ  the  word,  u^e?  No,  verily — ^X.  has  managed  to  substi- 
tute the  word,  use,  for  the  word,  "  classijication  !  !  "     Hear,  hear. — 

"  The  dictionary  import,  the  general  signification  of  a  word,  is  not 
the  true  basis  of  its  syntBiX  classijfication."     (Exegesis.) 

Mark  the  manner  in  which  this  oily  X.  slips  in  the  term  use  in  his 
most  illegitimate  deduction  from  this  period: 

"  He  seems  to  exclude  the  meaning  of  words  from  any  share  in  de- 
termining the  manner  of  their  use  /  /  " 

How  does  this  comport  with  the  following  which  I  find  on  the  four 
hundred,  and  tenth  page  of  the  Syntithology : 

«  To  the  learner." 

1.  "To  form  proper  sentences,  you  must  ascertain  the  precise  char- 
acter of  the  ideas  which  you  wish  to  express. 

2.  Select  the  words  which  will  express  these  ideas  clearly,  and 


INTRODUCTION.  XV 

completely,  without  the  expression  of  any  thing  more,  or  any  thing 
less." 

"  He  seems  to  exclude  the  meaning  of  words  from  any  share  in 
determining  the  manner  of  their  use  !  !  " 

How  does  this  comport  with  the  following,  which  I  have  taken  from 
Brown's  Appeal  in  which  he  makes  a  full  development  of  the  prin- 
ciples of  his  theory: 

"  The  learner  u  concerned  with  the  meaning  of  words :  it  is  by  the 
meaning  of  words  that  he  is  enabled  to  go  through  with  the  various 
exercises  in  the  science ;  the  import  of  words  is  the  instrument  used 
by  the  learner  in  the  process  of  parsing." 

"  He  seems  to  exclude  the  meaning  of  words  from  any  share  in  de- 
termining the  manner  of  their  use  !  J  !  " 

Hear,  hear. — An  example  of  this  exclusion  is  to  be  found  in  that 
part  of  the  introduction  to  « An  English  Syntithology  "  which  treats 
of  the  form  of  expression  in  this  sentence ;  I  and  ke  are.^* 

X.  says  that  Brown  admits  that  this  form  of  expression  has  the 
sanction  of  usage.  That  Brown  admits  this,  I  am  willing  to  allow. 
1  presume  that  Brown  would  admit  that  sin  has  the  sanction  oi  usage. 
But  would  X.  argue  from  this  admission,  that  sin  is  right  ? 

What !  is  a  mode  of  dress  which  is  destructive  to  health,  right  be- 
cause it  has  the  sanction  of  usage  ?  ! 

"  There  is  nothing  but  usage  which  makes  it  proper  to  say  in  Eng- 
lish, 1  love  them,  and  in  French,  1  them  love." 

We  are  informed  by  the  highest  authority,  that  Adam  gave  names 
to  the  objects  with  which  he  found  himself  surrounded.  But  will  X. 
pretend  that  the  form  of  speech  which  Adam  used,  was  that  of  usage  ? 
Who  had  used  this  language  before  Adam  1 !  What,  then,  becomes 
of  the  following  position  taken  by  X.  ] 

"  There  is  nothing  but  usage  which  makes  it  proper  to  say  in  Eng- 
lish, I  love  them,  and  in  French,  I  them  love." 

I  presume,  then,  that  nothing  but  usage,  made  the  language  which 
the  Supreme  Being  addressed  to  Adam,  grammatical  ! 
«<  Adam,  where  art  thou  ?" 

Some  writers  allege  that  there  has  been  a  time  when  there  was  no 
human  society.  If  these  writers  are  correct,  there  has  been  a  time 
when  there  was  neither  usage,  nor  language  !  If  there  has  been  such 
a  time,  language  must  have  had  an  inceptive  stage.  Let  us  suppose, 
then,  that  the  Romans  were  the  first  human  beings  that  have  been 
blessed  with  the  advantages  of  the  institution  of  human  society.  Let 
us  add  to  this  that  the  first  language  originated  with  these  people ; 
and  that  the  first  form  of  speech  was  the  following : 
"  Fructum  mi  hi."    ♦'  Fruit  give  me." 

Now,  if  this  particular  form  of  speech,  is  the  first  offspring  of  the 
philological  legislation  of  the  Romans,  what  influence  did  usage 
exert  over  it?  !  Here,  then,  is  a  fixed  form  of  speech  without  the  aid 
of  usage,  long  continued  use.    But  it  may  be  asked  whether  this  form 


XVI  INTRODUCTION. 

of  speech  was  right  at  the  time  of  its  formation.  It  was  right  because 
there  was  no  law,  no  rule,  against  it. 

The  Romans  adopt  this  form  of  expression.  That  is,  they  adopt  the 
principles  on  which  this  sentence  is  constructed.  In  what  way,  it 
may  be  asked,  do  they  adopt  these  principles.  By  expressing  all  sim- 
ilar ideas  in  the  same /orm.  Well,  says  X.  this  is  usage.  Granted: 
the  principles  of  this  expression  now  have  the  sanction  of  usage.  And 
a  conformity  to  usage  requires  that  all  similar  ideas  should  be  ex- 
pressed in  this  particular />rm.  Now,  let  it  be  supposed  that  in  pro- 
cess of  time  the  Romans  met  with  instances  in  which  the  ideas  to  be 
expressed,  are,  in  fact,  similar  to  those  of  the  sentence,  «  Fructum  mi 
hi,"  but  that  from  a  want  of  proper  attention,  they  do  not  discover 
the  similarity,  2lX{A  consequently,  employ  a  different /brm  of  speech  for 
the  expression  of  these  similar  ideas.  Would  this  obliquity  be  usage,— ^ 
or  a  departure  from  usage  ?  In  other  words,  would  not  this  new  form 
of  expression,  arising  from  an  ignorance  of  the  true  character  of  the 
ideas,  be  a  violation  of  the  principles  on  which  the  sentence,  "  Fructum 
mi  /«,  is  constructed  1 

«  Fructum  mi  hi."  That  is,  give  me  fruit. 

Let  it  be  supposed  that  one  Roman  desired  to  say  to  another,  give 
thou  to  me  apen.  But  from  an  ignorance  of  the  analogy  between  these 
ideas,  and  those  which  are  expressed  in  "  Fructum  mi  hi,"  he  used, 
not  pennam  mi  hi,  but,  mi  hi  pennam  ,-  and  that  mi  hi  pennam  became 
a  common  form  of  speech  within  the  Roman  dominions.  Must  not 
mi  hi  pennam  be  the  offspring  of  ignorance,  and  a  departure  from  the 
principles  which  enlightened  usage  had  already  sanctioned  1 

Again.  Let  it  be  supposed  that  in  1840,  the  Supreme  court  of  Penn- 
sylvania from  a  partial  ignorance  of  the  exact  legal  character  of  a 
particular  case,  departed  from  their  numerous,  and  just  decisions  in 
all  similar  cases.  Would  this  unsound  decision  become  the  law  of 
the  land  1  Would  a  Philadelphia  lawyer  urge  this  decision  before  a 
lower  court,  as  the  law  of  Pennsylvania  1  He  might,  but  he  would  do 
it  with  a  very  ill  grace,  and  to  very  little  purpose.  He  would  be  met 
by  his  opponent  brother  at  the  bar  with  the  paramount  argument  that 
this  particular  decision,  is  a  departure  from  the  great  principles  of 
law  on  which  all  similar  cases  had  been  decided  prior  to  1840,  by  the 
same  tribunal.  The  Judge  in  his  charge  to  the  jury,  would  sustain 
the  rejoinder,  and  here  would  be  an  end  of  the  question.  Let  me  now 
make  an  application  of  this  principle  to  the  case  of  X.  Brown  says 
that,  "  / and  he  are"  is  not  in  accordance  with  the  principles  which 
usage  has  established ;  but  an  obvious  departure  from  them.  What 
are  the  principles  which  usage  has  established  in  regard  to  the  form 
of  the  verb  ?  They  are  expressed  in  the  following  Rule. 

"  The  verb  must  agree  with  its  nominative  case  in  number  and  per- 
son" as,  I  am  thou  art,  he  is,  they  are. 

"I  and  he  are." 
He  is  here  placed  in  the  nominative  case  to  are.  But  as  are  isplural, 
it  does  not  agree  with  he  which  is  singular.    We  ure,  you  are,  and 


INTRODUCTION.  XVH 

they  are,  is  English.  But  neither  I  are,  nor  he  are,  is  English.  It  is 
a  gross  obliquity  from  English.  This  departure  from  the  true  genius 
of  the  language,  has  arisen  from  the  presumption  that  two  singular 
nouns,  or  pronouns,  between  which  and  is  placed,  are  equal  to  one 
plural  noun,  or  pronoun.  Under  this  false  notion  of  the  subject,  gram- 
marians use  the  plural  verb  with  two  singular  nominatives,  which 
have  and  between  them ;  as,  "  /,  and  he  are.'* 

The  ground  taken  by  the  old  school  grammarians,  is  that  I,  and  he 
are  connected  by  and — hence  they  are  taken  together — and,  as  they 
are  taken  together,  they  constitute  3l  plural  nominative. 

X.  is  plain  upon  this  point. — He  says  that  «  His  (Brown's)  error 
arises  from  a  disregard  of  the  mental  operation  of  grouping  objects. 
When  it  is  said  that — this  chair,  and  that  chair,  are  good  chairs,  the 
mind,  before  it  has  employed  words  to  express  the  thought,  has  con- 
sidered them  together,  and  has  regarded  them  as  two  chairs."  (X.) 

I  hope  the  readers  of  the  Ledger,  will  do  X.  the  justice  to  under- 
stand, fully,  this  reasoning.  There  is  certainly  a  high  degree  of  inge- 
nuity in  the  argument.  What!  is  it  necessary  for  the  mind  to  bring 
two  chairs  together,  to  make  them  two  chairs  ? !  Hear,  hear — "  The 
mind,  before  it  has  employed  words  to  express  the  thought,  has  con- 
sidered them  together,  and  has  regarded  them  as  two  chairs  !  !  "  Were 
there  not  two  chairs  before  this  very  logical  process !  1  Did  the 
bringing  of  the  chairs  together  multiply  them  from  unity  \o  plurality  ? 
But  why  does  X.  resort  to  philosophy  to  sustain  this  form  of  expres- 
sion ■?  Does  he  not  expressly  declare  that  there  is  nothing  but  usage 
which  can  make  one  form  right,  and  another  one  wrong !  ]  Hear, 
hear. — "  I  have  always  thought  that  there  was  no  appeal  from  the  set- 
tled usages  of  a  language  !"  "  There  is  nothing  bat  usage  which  makes 
it  proper  to  say  in  English,  1  love  them,  and  in  French,  I  them  love!  /" 
(WhatFrtjncA.///) 

But  how  does  this  doctrine  of  usage  comport  with  ihe  view  which 
he  expresses  in  the  very  first  sentence  of  his  first  article  ] 

« It  is  highly  important  that  we  should  fully  understand  the  princi- 
ples on  which  the  English  Language  is  constructed !  !" 

Language,  then,  is  formed  upon  principles.  Let  us  read  X.  with  a 
substitution  of  usage  ior  principles : 

It  is  highly  important  that  we  should  fully  understand  the  usage  on 
which  the  English  Language  is  constructed!  !  "We  are  indebted  to 
Murray  and  others  for  what  they  have  done  towards  reducing  the  dis- 
order oil  usage  to  system,  but  we  ought  to  feel  more  indebted  to  James 
Brown  for  his  deeper  exploration  of  this  subject." 

What  subject  1  Why,  the  disorder  of  usage  !.'  !  Language  has 
principles — and  usage  should  conform  to  them;  but  it  never  has 
taken,  nor  do  I  believe  it  ever  will  take,  the  77/ace  of  them. 

Upon  what  does  X.  attempt  to  sustain  the  use  of  are  after  he  in  the 
period — ^I,  and  he  are?    It  is  the  curious  doctrine  that  two  chairs,  or 
other  objects,  are  made  two  by  taking  them  together.    In  other  words, 
4 


XVlll  INTRODUCTION. 

that  plurality  becomes  plurality,  because  the  mind  groups  the  objects  t 
But  that  the  position,  that,  where  two  single  objects  are  taken  together, 
the  verb  should  be  plural,  can.  not  be  sustained,  is  obvious  from  the 
consideration  that  where  with  occurs  the  verb  is  singular. 

1.  John  with  his  brother  is  coming,  (not  are.)  Does  not  with  indi- 
cate that  John  is  taken  with  his  brother]  Are  not  the  two,  then,  taken 
together  !  ? 

2.  A  watch  with  its  chain  haji  been  lost,  (not  have.) 

But  does  not  the  mind  take  the  watch,  and  the  chain  together  !  ?  Is 
it  in  the  power  of  X.  to  tell  why  this  verb  should  not  be  plural  1  He 
says  that  are  should  be  used  because  the  mind  considers  I  and  he  toge- 
ther !  Can  he  show  that  the  mind  does  not  take  the  watch  and  its 
chain  together  !  ? 

I  deny  the  doctrine  that  and  indicates  that  the  objects  are  taken 
together.     For  instance : 

He  purchased  salt,  and  meai. 

Is  there  any  thing  here  which  indicates  that  he  purchased  the  salt 
with  the  meati  Nothing.  He  might  have  purchased  the  salt  in  1812, 
and  the  meat  in  1844 ! 

.  But  where  with  is  employed,  we  are  compelled  to  take  the  articles 
together. 

He  purchased  salt  with  meat. 

It  seems,  then,  that  where  we  are  compelled,  from  the  nature  of  the 
expression,  to  take  the  single  things  together,  the  verb  is  singular ! 

As  the  character  of  the  word,  awrf,  has  an  olavious  bearing  upon  this 
question,  it  may  be  well  to  undertake  a  particular  development  of  it 
in  this  place.  Grammarians  denominate  and  a  conjunction.  But  as 
the  letter  X.  conceals  the  identity  of  my  opponent,  so  does  the  word, 
conjunction^  conceal  the  true  character  of  and. 

^'^And"  says  Webster,  "is  a  conjunction  connective,  or  conjoining 
word."  That  the  conjunctive  character  of  and,  may  be  well  under- 
stood, he  gives  the  following  illustration: 

«  John,  and  Peter,  and  James  rode  to  New  York. — that  is,  John  rode 
to  New  York  ;  add  or  further,  Peter  rode  to  New  York ;  add  James 
rode  to  New  York."  According  to  this  illustration,  and  means  more, 
further,  addition.  How,  then,  can  it  be  a  con/omzw^  word  ?  Was  aW 
a  conjunction  in  character,  it  would  exert  as  much  influence  over  the 
preceding  member  of  the  sentence,  as  it  does  over  the  succeeding  one. 
But  Mr.  Webster's  explanation  makes  and  exert  all  its  influence  over 
the  member  of  the  sentence,  which  follows  and: 

"John,  and  Peter,  and  James  rode  to  New  York:"  That  is,  says 
Mr.  Webster,  John  rode  to  New  York;  add  or  further,  Peter  rode  to 
New  York ;  add  James  rode  to  New  York."  The  word,  and,  has 
nothing  to  do  with  the  first  member  of  the  paragraph, — ^'John  rode  to 
JSew  York."  The  first  and  is  employed  to  subjoin,  to  add,  to  aflix,  the 
second  member  to  the  first — and  "  Peter  rode  to  New  York." 

The  second  and  is  used,  not  to  conjoin  the  second  and  the  third 
member  of  the  sentence,  but  to  aflix,  subjoin,  add  the  third  to  the 


INTRODUCTION.         ^  XIX 

second.  Andy  ihe^^is  b.  subjoining  wox^. — not  2l conjoining  one.  What! 
is  the  chain  which  drags  a  log  to  a  standing  tree,  a  conjunction  P  To 
be  a  conjoining  chain,  it  must  drag  the  firmly  fixed  tree  as  well  as  the 
log,  till  it  brings  them  together.  The  first  proposition  is  always  fixed 
— it  cannot  be  moved  by  and;  as,  "  John  rode  to  New  York" 

A  second  proposition  may  be  dragged  to  the  first  by  and;  as  "John 
rode  to  New  York;  and  Peter  rode  to  New  York." 

Fancy  that  the  Bible  is  before  you.  Does  the  hand  which  moves 
Trego's  Geography  of  Pennsylvania  up  to  this  Bible,  exert  any  influ- 
ence over  the  Bible  1  Mr.  Webster  has  well  illustrated  one  trait  in 
the  character  of  and;  but  he  has  not  illustrated  any  part  of  the  char- 
acter of  a  conjoining  word !  The  main  trait  in  the  character  of  and, 
which  Mr.  Webster,  in  common  with  other  old  school  grammarians, 
has  not  attempted  to  give,  is  the  expression  of  harmony  in  character, 
with  the  preceding  matter.  For  instance — "  John,  and  Peter,  and  James 
rode  to  New  York."  Here  John,  Peter,  and  James  ride  to  the  same 
place — in  this  they  harmonize,  agree — in  this  they  are  homogeneous. 

John  rode;  but  Peter  walked  to  New  Nork. 

The  ^.gent  character  of  Peter  does  not  harmonize  with  that  of  John, 
hence  and  cannot  be  used  before  Peter. 

John  rode  to  New  York ;  but  Peter  rode  to  Boston. 

The  character  which  Boston  gives  Peter  does  not  accord  with  that 
which  New  York  gives  John — hence  and  can  not  be  used. 

«  And  "  signifies  harmony  in  character. 

"  A  certain  man  planted  a  vineyard,  and  set  a  hedge  about  it,  and 
digged  a  place  for  the  wine-vat,  and  built  a  tower,  and  let  it  out  to 
husbandmen,  and  went  into  a  far  country," 

These  five  acts  have  the  same  agent — in  this  they  harmonize — 
hence  and  is  properly  used  before  the  words,  sety  digged,  built,  let,  and 
went. 

In  the  following  and  is  properly  used : 

A  certain  man  planted  a  vineyard ;  and  his  brother  set  a  hedge 
about  it. 

The  setting  of  the  hedge  is  in  harmony  with  the  planting  of  the 
vineyard :  the  setting  results  naturally  enough  from  the  planting. 

In  the  following  and  can  not  be  used.  John  built  a  house;  but  it 
did  not  stand  long. 

There  is  no  harmony  between  the  implied  intention  of  the  builder, 
and  the  ruin  of  the  house ;  it  was  built,  not  for  destruction,  but  for 
duration. 

In  the  following,  and  should  be  used:  John  makes  money  and  he 
keeps  it. 

The  keeping  of  the  money  is  in  harmony  with  the  implied  purpose 
for  which  John  makes  it. 

In  the  following,  and  cannot  be  used  with  any  propriety.  John 
makes  money ;  but  he  wastes  it. 


XX  INTRODUCTION. 

The  wasting  of  the  money  is  not  in  harmony  with  the  implied  pur- 
pose for  which  it  is  made. 

In  the  following  and  should  be  used : 

"  Henry  has  purchased  a  horse,  and  John  has  sold  an  ox  to-day." 
As  these  two  acts  are  business  transactions,  they  are  in  harmony  one 
with  the  other. 

In  the  following  and  can  not  be  used : 

The  Alderman  heard  the  witness;  hut  he  had  not  sworn  him. 

The  not  swearing  of  the  witness  is  so  much  out  of  harmony  with 
the  hearing  of  his  statement,  that  the  use  of  and  would  be  as  great  a 
mockery  in  grammar,  as  such  a  proceeding  would  be  in  the  adminis- 
tration of  justice. 

The  following  is  good  in  grammar,  as  well  as  in  law. 
The  Alderman  swore  the  witness,  and,  then,  heard  his  statement. 

And  signifies  that  the  character  of  the  matter  which  follows  it,  is  in 
harmony  with  that  of  the  matter  which  precedes  it.  The  word  but, 
and  several  other  nepoeclids  (conjunctions)  signify  the  reverse. 

Why,  then,  is  and  used  in  the  following] 

"  John,  and  Thomas  are  honest  men." 

X.  says  that  and  is  employed  because  these  two  persons  are  taken 
together.  But  Brown  says  that  and  is  used  because  the  character  of 
Thomas  is  in  harmony  with  that  of  John. 

If  and  is  used  because  these  two  persons  are  taken  together,  the 
following  is  bad  English  : 

John  as  well  as  Thomas  is  an  honest  man.  Are  they  not  here  taken 
together  ? 

As  well  as,  and  and,  are  the  same  in  character,  which  may  be 
seen  from  the  following : 

Henry  is  healthy  as  well  as  strong. 
Henry  is  healthy  and  strong. 

Let  me  now  ask  why  must  are  be  used  when  and  occurs  1 
«  John  and  Thomas  are  honest  men." 

X.  says  are  must  be  used  because  the  mind  takes  John  and  Thomas 
together !  But  does  not  the  mind  take  Thomas  with  John  in  the  fol- 
lowing 1     John  as  well  as  Thomas  is  honest ! 

^hy  do  we  not  say, — John  as  well  as  Thomas  are  honest ! !  To 
answer  this  question  X.  must  show  that  the  writer  does  not  intend  to 
affirm  the  same  thing  of  Thomas  which  he  affirms  of  John  !  The 
doctrine  of  X.  is  that  wherever  the  same  predicate  is  ascribed  to  two 
singular  subjects,  the  subjects  must  be  taken  together !  He  further 
teaches  that  as  they  are  taken  together,  are  must  be  used  instead  of 
is  !  But  here  are  two  singular  subjects  which  the  mind  takes  together, 
and  to  which  the  same  predicate  is  ascribed — yet  is,  is  employed  in- 
stead of  are  !    John  as  well  as  Thomas  is  honest ! ! 

Here  is  the  altar — X.  is  the  victim  which  must  be  sacrificed  upon  it. 


:  "  ■■■  -  .^ 

INTRODUCTION.         ^^  XXI 

But  what  has  thrown  X.  upon  this  burning  pile  of  words?  His 
"  disregard  of"  the  fact  that  two  singular  nouns  can  not  make  a.plural 
one.  Book  may  be  repeated  a  thousand  times, — yet  each  repetition  de- 
notes a  single  book — Book,  book,  book,  is  not  plural.  Books  is  the 
plural  of  fiooA/  The  j9/wra/ number  is  the  direct  expression  of  more 
than  one  thing,  in  the  same  word ;  as  man,  men. 

I  hope  the  readers  of  the  Ledger  will  fully  understand  me  here. 
Mr.  Webster  says — "  Plural,  containing  more  than  one,  designating 
two  or  more  ;  as,  a.  plural  word." 

«7,  and  he  are."  (X.) 

Is  J  a  plural  word  ?    Is  he  a  plural  word  ? 

Why  then  is  are  used  with  he  ?  X.  says  that  "are "  is  used  because 
the  plural  number  is  found  in  the  nominative.  How,  pray,  is  the  plu- 
ral number  made  out  1  Why,  by  taking  the  person  denoted  by  he, 
with  him  who  is  expressed  by  //  /  Ah !  and  does  the  taking  of  the 
real  persons  denoted  by  the  words  J,  and  he,  infuse  the  plural  number 
into  the  word  /,  and  into  the  word,  he !  1  This  is  surely  a  curious 
way  of  rendering  a  word  plural ! 

I  have  always  understood  that  we  is  the  plural  of  /,  and  they,  of  he. 
But  X.  says  the  plural  of  the  words  I,  and  he,  is  the  taking  of  the  per- 
son whom  he  denotes,  with  the  one  whom  1  denotes  !  !  ! 

Mr.  Webster  says, — "  In  grammar,  the  plural  number  is  that  which 
designates  more  than  one."  Mark — it  is  the  plural  number  of  the  word 
itself,  which  expresses  the  plurality  of  objects ;  as,  books,  we,  they.  In 
what  way  does  X.  get  a  plurality  of  objects  1  By  taking  the  real 
person  denoted  by  he,  with  the  real  person  denoted  by  1/  / 

ButMr.  Webster  says  that  in  grammar,  the  plurality  of  objects  must 
be  got  by  means  of  the  plural  number  of  the  word;  as,  We.  They. 

«I  and  he  are." 

That  here  are  two  persons  is  not  denied.  Nor  can  it  be  denied  that 
there  are  two  persons  in  the  following :     "  /,  as  well  as  he  is  !" 

X.  derives  the  plurality  from  the  expression  of  two  distinct  single 
things  by  means  of  two  distinct  pronouns  of  the  singular  number ! 
But  in  grammar  the  dominant  principle  is  that  the  plurality  must  be 
expressed,  not  by  the  singular  number  of  two  distinct  nouns,  but  by 
the  plural  number  of  the  same  noun  !  What !  can  it  be  said  that  the 
singular  number  of  a  noun,  which  is  the  same  thing  wherever  found, 
is  really  the  j^/wra/ number  because  it  is  found  in  1,  and  he  /  P  As 
well  may  it  be  said  that  one  drop  of  water  is  two  drops  because  it  is 
found  at  one  time  in  the  tributary  stream,  and  at  another  in  the 
mighty  ocean  !  The  same  singular  number  which  is  found  in  /,  is 
found  in  he.  There  is  but  one  singular  number :  The  singular  num- 
ber of  I  is  the  capacity  of  this  pronoun  to  denote  but  one  person. 
This  same  numeral  capacity  is  the  singular  number  of  he. 

There  is  but  one  plural  number — the  plural  number  is  the  capacity 
.of  the  word  to  express  more  than  one  thing;  as,  we.  they. 

This  same  numeral  capacity  which  is  in  we,  is  in  they. 
4* 


XXU  INTRODUCTION. 

"  There  can  be  no  doubt,"  says  X.  "  that  it  is  proper  to  say,  four 
and  one  are  five.  In  accordance  with  our  author's  theory,  we  should 
say,  four  and  one  is  five,  and  by  applying  his  test  we  should  find  that 
we  would  say,  four  is  five,  and  one  is  five." 

1.  «  Four,  and  one  are  five." 

2.  «•  Four  is  five,  and  one  is  five." 

The  predicate  is  that  which  is  said  of  the  subject.  Here  are  two 
subjects — viz. /our  and  one.  What  is  the  predicate  1  The  predicate 
in  both  periods,  is  Jive. 

What  is  the  predicate  in  the  following  1 

John,  and  his  brother  are  sick  : 

That  is,  what  is  said  of  John,  and  his  brother?  It  is  said  of  them 
that  they  are  Sick. 

Sick,  then,  is  the  predicate  of  both.  In  other  words,  it  is  predicated 
of  John,  and  his  brother,  that  they  are  sick. 

"Four,  and  one  are  five." 

Here  five  is  the  predicate.  But  of  what  is  Jive  the  predicate  ?  Five 
IS  the  predicate  o^four  ! 

Now  X.,  is  any  thing  predicated  oifour?  O,  yes.  What  is  it  which  is 
predicated  of  four?  If  any  thing  is  predicated  of  four,  it  must  he  Jive  ; 
for  five  is  the  only  predicate  in  the  proposition.  It  is  here  said,  then, 
that /our  is  Jive  I  /  /  But  X.  says  that  it  is  correct  to  say,  '^four  and 
one  zxejivey — ^but  incorrect  to  say,  four  is  five,  and  one  is  Jive. 

If,  however,  X.  is  at  all  expert  in  the  process  of  simple  reasoning, 
he  will  see  with  perfect  clearness,  that  his  form  of  expression  is  liable 
to  the  same  objection  which  he  makes  to  Brown's.  * 

<«  Four,  and  one  are  Jive." 

Is  any  thing  here  affirmed  1     Yes. — What  is  it  ? 

It  is  here  affirmed  thsit  four  are  Jive  !  Is  any  thing  predicated  of  oric? 
Surely.  What  is  the  predicate  of  one?  It  is  Jive  J  Five  is  the  only 
predicate  in  the  sentence — hence,  if  any  thing  is  predicated  of  oncy  it 
must  he  Jive  /  What  advantage,  then,  has  the  form  of  X.  over  that 
of  Brown  1     None  at  all  ! 

1.  «  Four,  and  one  are  Jive." 

2.  «  Four  is  five,  and  one  is  five." 

But  is  this  Brown's  construction  1  It  is  not, — it  is  the  invention  of 
X.  himself!     The  following  is  Brown's  :     Four  with  one  are  five. 

That  is,  when  you  withe,  tie,  or  add  one  to  four,  you  have  five. 
Brown's  principles,  then,  not  only  do  not  produce  absurdity,  but  they 
remove  it!  But  X.  could  not  examine  these  principles  which  are 
presented  in  Book  I.  p.  75.  And  which  are  contained  in  the  follow- 
ing extract  : 

[•'The  man;]  (and  the  woman  bear  the  conjugal  yoke.") 
[The  man] ;  (and  the  woman  bears  the  conjugal  yoke.) 
The  import  of  and  is  that  of  add.    First,  it  is  affirmed  in  an  imple- 
nary  mono,  that  the  man  bears  the  conjugal  yoke — and,  secondly,  it 


INTRODUCTION.  XXlll 

is  affirmed  in  a  plenary  mono,  that  the  woman  bears  it.  The  true 
sense  is  this:  the  man  bears  the  conjugal  yoke,  add  that  the  woman 
bears  it. 

That  is,  add  to  the  fact  that  the  man  bears  this  yoke,  the  fact  that 
the  woman  also  bears  it. 

["The  man    ,,,,];   (anc?  the  woman  bears  the  conjugal 
<f'oke.") 

1.  Tke  man    ,,,,], 

an  implenary  unbroken  trone. 

2.  (and  the  woman  bears  the  conjugal  yoke,) 
a  plenary  unbroken  clad,  juxta  position,  first  rank,  uni  idios. 
Gnometic  reading: 
[The  man  bears  the  conjugal  yoke  ,•]  {and  the  tvoman  bears  the  con- 
jugaiyoke.) 

It  may  be  thought,  however,  that,  as  this  reading  makes  the  man 
bear  all  the  yoke,  and  the  woman  bear  all  of  it,  it  does  not  give  the 
exact  sense.  The  exact  sense  according  to  what  1  According  to  the 
import  of  the  sentence,  or  according  to  the  intention  of  the  author  of 
the  sentence  1  The  author  means  to  say  that  there  is  but  one  yoke, 
and  that  this  is  borne  by  the  concurrent  exertions  of  the  husband, 
and  the  wife.  This  particular  sense,  however,  is  not  derived  from 
the  import  of  the  language  which  is  used,  but  from  the  nature  of  the 
subject  itself.  The  same  form  of  expression  applied  to  a  subject  of 
a  different  nature,  will  make  the  writer  say  that  one  agent  derives  no 
aid  from  the  other  in  performing  the  action  expressed  inthepoetrone: 

«  The  man,  and  the  woman  died." 

[The  man    ,    ] ;  (and  the  woman  died.) 

Here  the  Gnometic  reading  is, — 

[The  man  died;]  {and  the  woman  died.) 

But  why  is  this  the  true  sense  reading  7  This  is  the  true  sense 
reading,  because  it  represents  the  exact  import  of  the  sentence. 

The  author  of  the  poetrone  predicates  of  the  man,  that  he  died^— 
and  that  he  expired  without  any  aid  from  the  woman. 

He  also  predicates  of  the  woman,  that  she  died — and  that  she  died 
without  any  aid  from  the  man. 

["The  man  rficc?,-^(and  the  woman  died.") 

"  The  man,  and  woman  bear  the  yoke." 

Is  it  not  here  predicated  of  the  man  that  he  bears  the  yokel  and  is 
it  not  here  predicated  of  the  woman  that  she  bears  it  1  How,  then, 
can  the  following  rendering  do  this  sentence  the  least  injustice  1 

[«  The  man  bears  the  yoke ,-]  (and  the  woman  bears  the  yoke." 

There  is  a  discrepancy  between  the  exact  expression,  and  the  nature 
of  the  subject. 


XXIV  INTRODUCTION. 

The  nature  of  the  subject  predicates  of  the  man  a  mere  partictpa- 
tion  in  the  act  of  bearing  the  yoke ;  but  the  language  of  the  poetene 
predicates  of  the  man,  a  full  performance  of  this  act.  What,  then,  is 
the  Syntithologist  to  do  ?  Is  he  to  substitute  the  real  thing  for  the  lan- 
guage which  is  employed  to  express  the  real  thing !  1  No,  no.  The 
grammarian  is  bound  to  give  a  solution  of  the  language  according  to 
its  true  constructive  import.  It  is  not  the  province  of  the  grammarian 
to  solve  the  subject,  the  theme  itself,  but  to  analyse  the  language  ac- 
cording to  its  constructive,  and  significant  laws. 

Where  the  agents  are  independent  of  one  another  in  the  perform- 
ance of  the  expressed  act,  a7id  should  be  used ;  as, 

The  man,  and  the  woman  died. 

But  where  the  act  expressed,  is  done  by  the  concurrent  aid  of  all 
the  agents,  with  should  be  used;  as. 

The  man  with  the  woman,  bears  the  conjugal  yoke.  Book  I. 
Page  115. 

When  two,  or  more  things  are  mentioned  by  singular  words,  there 
is  no  plurality  in  grammar,  as,  J,  thou,  and  he  must  return. 

Plurality  in  grammar,  and  plurality  in  things,  are  totally  different. 
Plurality  in  grammar  is  the  expression  of  more  than  one  thing  by 
means  of  the  same  noun,  or  pronoun  ;  as,  men,  we,  books,  they.  But 
does  the  word,  I,  express  more  than  one  1     «  i,"  then,  is  not  plural. 

I,  he,  and  Ihou  art.  Is  there  a  plurality  of  persons  here  1  There 
certainly  is.  But  is  this  plurality  expressed  by  one  word  !  1  O,  no. 
Here  is,  then,  no  plurality  in  grammar.  The  plurality  here  belongs  to 
the  things, — not  to  the  words  which  express  the  things* 

I,  thou,  or  he  is. 

Why  should  not  are  be  used  in  this  case  1 

There  is  sl  plurality  of  persons.  The  period  mentions  three  persons. 
Why,  then,  should  not  are  be  used  1  Because  there  is  no  plurality  in 
any  one  of  the  words  which  are  employed  to  denote  the  persons.  The 
plurality  is  here  confined  to  the  things — hence  are  should  not  be  used. 

«'  John,  I  hope  that  you  are  well." 

You  is  the  representative  of  "  John  " — hence  there  is  no^  a  pltirality 
in  the  thing.  But  there  is  a. plurality  in  the  word,  you,-  consequently, 
are  should  be  used  instead  of  ar^ 

The  application  of  a  plural  word  to  one  object  does  not  destroy  its 
grammatical  plurality.  There  are  two  species  of  plurality — one  may 
be  denominated  the  thing  plurality ;  the  other  the  word  plurality.  The 
word  plurality  may  exist  where  the  thing  plurality  does  not — and  the 
thing  plurality  may  exist  where  the  word  plurality  does  not. 

John,  how  are  you  1  ("not,  how  art  you.) 

Here  is  the  word  plurality— but  not  the  thing  plurality. 
J,  thou  or  he  is. 

Here  is  the  thing  plurality — but  no  word  plurality.  Hence  art 
should  not  be  used. 


*■'  INTRODUCTION.  XXV 

But  it  is  pretended  that  these  three  persons  are  taken  together,  which 
gives  a  plurality.  True,  there  is  a  thing  plurality  whether  they  are 
taken  together,  or  not.  But  to  justify  the  use  of  are  there  must  be  a 
word  plurality  in  the  nominative  case.  What  is  the  nominative  case  1 
He,  Is  there  a  word  plurality  in  he  /  ?  But  I  shall  be  told  that,  i, 
also  is  a  nominative  to  are.  Nor  shall  I  fail  to  learn  that  the  word, 
thou,  is  likewise  a  nominative  to  are.  Thou  are  !  ! — "  I,  and  he  are ! !" 

X.  says  that  I  and  he  are  taken  together,  which  gives  the  plurality 
that  requires  are. 

But  does  the  taking  of  the  joersorw  together  produce  plurality  in  their 
names  !  1  The  real  persons  denoted  by  /,  and  he,  are  not  the  nom- 
inative to  are  !  The  words,  1,  and  he,  are  the  nominative  to  are.  Hence 
to  show  that  this  nominative  is  plural,  X.  must  show  that  the  taking 
of  the  real  person  denoted  by  the  word,  /,  with  him  who  is  denoted  by 
the  word,  he,  infuses  into  these  two  pronouns,  the  plural  number  !  ' 

«I,  thou,  or  he  is." 
To  what  is  I,  in  the  nominative  case  1  To  am  understood.  To 
what  is  thou  in  the  nominative  case  ?  To  art  understood.  To  what 
is  Ac  in  the  nominative  easel  To  ts  expressed.  This  is  the  doctrine 
of  every  old  school  grammarian.  And  this  too  is  the  doctrine  of  every 
new  school  grammarian.  The  new  school  wish  to  extend  this  doctrine 
to  every  instance  where  awrf occurs  between  two  singularnominatives : 
/,  and  he  is.    That  is,  I  am,  and  he  is. 

The  new  school  grammarians  say  that  the  verb  should  be  expressed 
after  the  last  nominative  only ;  and  that  the  last  nominative  only, 
should  govern  the  verb;  as,  I,  and  he  is.  He,  and  I  am.  That  is. 
He  is,  and  lam. 

I,  thou,  or  he  is. 
I,  thou,  and  he  is. 
That  is,  I  am,  thou  art,  and  he  is. 

"  But  X.  would  have  it,  I,  thou,  and  he  are.''*  Hence  the  expression 
of  the  verbs  which  are  understood ;  would  make  the  sentence  read  as 
follows : 

I  are,  thou  are,  and  he  are  /  !  or, 
I  am,  thou  art,  and  he  are  !  !  ! 
But  this  is  not  all  the  folly  of  this  departure  from  the  principles 
established  by  usage : 

"  I,  and  he  are  pupils."  That  is, 
I  are  pupils,  and  he  are  pupils  !  1 ! 

Brown's  plan  is  not  so  wonderful  in  its  effects  upon  the  things 
which  are  introduced  into  a  sentence  :  it  does  not  perform  the  miracle 
of  making  a  plurality  of  pupils  out  of  one  person : 
I,  and  be  is  a  pupil.    That  is,  I  am  a  pupil,  and  he  is  a  pupil. 

« I,  and  he  are  pupils. !  ** 
Is  this^wi  of  expression  to  last  as  long  as  the  English  Language 
endures  1  I  think  not,  it  is  a  departure  from  the  principles  sanetioned 


XXVI  INTRODUCTION. 

by  usage.    Nay,  more,  it  is  a  departure  from  reason — it  makes  one 
thing  into  many — and  it  pats  grammatical  solution  beyond  the  reach 
of  skill.     Can  i,  and  he  in  the  following  period  be  parsed  1 
"  I,  and  he  are  pupils." 

Can  1  are  pupils,  be  parsed  !  1 

But,  absurd  as  this  form  of  expression  is,  Brown  does  not  expect 
to  repeal  instanter.  No.  He  not  only  uses  it  in  his  own  writings,  but 
he  has  provided  a  rule  to  guide  others  in  the  use  of  it.  (Rule  XIII. 
Book  II.  p.  247.) 

What  cause,  then,  can  X.  assign  for  saying  to  this  community  that 
Brown  designs  to  affect  a  revolution  in  the  English  Language  !    1 

What  excuse  can  he  give  for  avowing  to  this  community  that 
Brown  compares  "  the  structure  of  a  language  "  to  the  trunk  of  a 
tree,  and  its  branches  1 

What  atonement  can  he  make  for  avowing  that  Brown  teaches  the 
learner  to  pay  no  attention  to  the  meaning  of  words  !  1 
"  I,  and  he  are." 

Can  X.  find  any  part  of  Brown's  books  which  will  justify  the  fol- 
lowing. 

«*  He  discards  the  meaning  of  the  words,  i,  and  he,  and  considers 
nothing  but  i\ie  framework  relation  which  he  supposes  they  hold  with 
each  other ! !" 

Brown  teaches  that  1,  and  he,  hold  a  framework  relation  one  with 
the  other ! !  !     Where  can  X.  find  a  justification  for  this  course  1 

Perhaps  he  will  find  it  in  that  part  of  Brown's  theory  which  sus- 
tains him  in  saying  that,  Brown  teaches  that  we  should  say, 
*^four  and  one  are  five .'" 

«  We  say  in  accordance  with  settled  usages,  John,  and  Thomas  are 
honest  men." 

That  is.    John  are  honest  men  !  ! 

It  seems,  then,  that  out  of  a  single  John,  are  made  two,  or  more 
honest  men;  and  that  even  out  of  one  Thomas,  this  wonderful  con- 
struction makes  many  honest  men  !  I  wish,  indeed  I  wish,  that  we 
could  find  a  construction  in  the  articles  of  X.  which  could  make  out 
of  him,  even  one  honest  man  ! ! 

But  does  not  the  mind  consider  the  objects  togetherwhere  aswell  as 
occurs  1     For  instance  : 

John  as  well  as  Thomas  is  an  honest  man. 

Here  the  two  persons  are  not  only  taken  together  by  the  mind,  but 
as  well  as,  is  synonymous  with  and.  Why,  then,  should  not  are  be 
used  where  as  well  as  occurs,  as  well  as  where  and  occurs  1 

I,  as  well  as  he  is.  (not  are) 

« I,  and  he  are. !" 
John,  as  well  as  Thomas  is  an  honest  man. 
«  John,  and  Thomas  are  honest  men  7 !" 
Can  X.  "clear*'  himself  ''from"  this  difficulty  1 


SYNTITHOLOGY. 


A  LANGUAGE. 

A  Language  is  a  set  of  names  from  which  a  nation 
constructs  poetrones,  or  sentences.     (Book  L  p.  29.) 

EP-E-OL-0-GY. 

Epeology  is  the  science  of  words,  the  science  of 
speech.* 

DIVISION   OF  EPEOLOGY. 

Epeology  is  divided  into  two  parts  ;  namely, 

1.  STN-TI-THOL-0-GY,f  Uud 

2.  Ep-e-di-cox-o-gx. 

1.  Syntithology  is  that  part  of  epeology,  which  com- 
prises the  constructive  principles  of  speech. 

2.  Epedicology  is  that  part  of  epeology,  which  com- 
prises the  significant  principles  of  individual  words. 

(Ep-e-di-col-o-gy  is  taught  by  a  Dictionary.^) 

ENGLISH   SYNTITHOLOGY. 

English  Syntithology  is  that  part  of  English  epeology, 
which  consists  of  the  constructive  principles  of  the  Eng- 
lish Language. 

DIVISION  OF  SYNTITHOLOGY. 

English  Synthithology  is  divided  into  twelve  parts; 
two  of  which  are  treated  of  in  Book  III. 

*  Ep-ea,  words,  and  logos,  doctrine — the  science  of  words, 
language,  or  speech. 

j-  Syn,  with,  or  together,  iithemi,  to  put,  and  logos,  doctrine, 
principle — the  principles  on  which  the  elements  are  formed  into 
the  compound:  as,  letters, into  words ;  words,  into  monos;  monos, 
into  poetrones,  or  sentences,-  sentences,  into  paragraphs,-  paragraphs, 
into  chapters,  and  chapters,  into  books. 

t  Ep-os,  a  word,  dei-ko,  to  show,  to  signify,  and  logos,  doctrine, 
jjrinciple-^that  part  of  epeology,  which  respects  the  signification 
of  words  individually  taken.   (See  Syn-di-col-o-gy,  and  Abdidion.) 

(47) 


48  SYNTITHOLOGY. 


BOOK  I.. 


1.  Be-ma.  Po-e-trol-0-oy. 

2.  Mo-SOL-O-GT. 

3.  Dek-drol-o-gt. 

4.  Gnom-o-itol-o-gt. 


BOOK  I. 

PART  I.    BEMA  POETROLOGY. 

Bema  Poetrology  is  that  part  of  Syntithology,  which 
respects  the  mere  constructive  rank  of  syllabanes,  as 
Poet  rones,  and  Nepoetrones.     (Bema,  grade,  rank.) 

j1  Poetrone  is  a  syllabane  which  makes  a  poetene,  and 
is  so  far  independent  of  other  syllabanes,  that  it  can  stand 
alone ;  as, 

"  The  most  powerful  motives  call  on  us  for  those 
efforts  which  our  common  country  demands  of  all  her 
children.''^ 

[Such  a  syllabane  is  called  poe,  because  it  makes  poetenes — 
and  it  is  called  trone,  because,  like  a  tree,  it  must  have  a  trunk 
part  which  enables  it  to  stand  without  the  aid  of  any  other  syl- 
labane.] 

w2  Nepoetrone  is  a  syllabane  which  is  so  far  connected 
with,  and  dependent  Upon,  another  syllabane,  that  it  can 
not  stand  alone  ;  as, 

"  Which  our  common  country  demands  of  all  her 
children.^*  ^^ If  it  rains"  ^^ In  the  beginning;  and 
the  Word  was  with  God."     "  My  good  children." 

[A  Nepoetrone  may  contain  a  poetene,  and  it  may  not,] 

PART  II.    MONOLOGY. 
Monology  is  that  part  of  Syntithology,  which  consists 
of  the  doctrine  of  dividing  a  poetrone,  or  sentence,  into 
monos.     (Book  I.  p.  40.) 

PART  III.    DENDROLOGY. 
Dendrology  is  that  part  of  Syntithology,  which  consists 
of  the  doctrine  of  the  trunk,  and  the  branch  relation  of 
words,  and  of  monos.     (Book  I,  pp.  64,  183.) 

PART  IV.    GNOMONOLOGY. 
Gnomonology  is  that  part  of  Syntithology,  which  con- 
sists of  the  doctrine  of  those  gnomons,  or  indexes  which 
are  used  in  print,  and  writing  only.     (Book  I,  p.  193.) 


SYNTITHOLOGY.  49 


BOOK  lU 


f  5.  Cba-tol-0-gt. 

6.  Id-i-ol-o-oy. 

7.  Sx-XOL-O-BT. 

8.  Ec-TOL-0-GT. 

9.  Mu-TOL-O-GY. 

^10.  Oh-THO  Po-E-TROl-O-OY. 


BOOK  II. 

PART  I.    CRATOLOGY. 
Cratology  is  that  part  of  Synlithology,  which  respects 
the  doctrine  of  poetene\  and  of  nepoetene  power,  and  of 
poetene,   and   of  nepoetene   aid,  in   forming  a   poetene. 
(Book  II,  p.  2.) 

PART  II.    IDIOLOGY. 

Idiology  is  the  principle  of  classifying  clades  upon  the 
basis  of  their  appropriation  to  their  respective  supers. 
(Book  II,  p.  1.) 

The  super  of  a  clade  is  that  word  which  sustains  it  in  the 
framework  of  a  mono. 

PART  III.    SYNOLOGY. 
Synology  is  that  part  of  Syntithology,  which  respects 
the  doctrine  of  the  relation  of  principal^  and  supplement, 
(Book  II,  p.  1.) 

PART  IV.    ECTOLOGY. 
Ectology  is  that  part  of  Syntithology,  which  respects 
the  indicative  powers  which  some  words  exert  in  addi- 
tion to  their  Dictionary  signification.     {Ectos,  extra,  in 
addition  to,  and  logos j  a  word.) 

1.  Boy,  boys  J  (Addition  of  the  numerdiction.) 

2.  Boy,  girl,  (Addition  of  the  genediction.) 

3.  Man,  Moses,  (Addition  of  the  distinction  between  a 
race,  and  an  individual.) 

4.  High,  higher,  highest,  (Addition  of  the  distinction 
in  degree.) 

5.  Write,  wrote,  (Addition  of  a  distinction  in  time.) 

PART  V.    MUTOLOGY. 
Mutology  respects,  not  only  the  variation  of  a  word 
from  its  primitive  state,  but  the  translation  of  a  word 
from  one  class  to  another. 

5 


50  SYNTITHOLOGT. 

PART  VI.     NOMA  POETROLOGY. 

Noma  poetrology  respects  the  doctrine  of  the  Rules 
which  are  fixed  in  the  constructive  principles  of  the  Eng- 
lish Language,  for  the  right  formation  of  poetrones  from 
words.  Noma,  (from  nomas,  a  law,  a  rule,)  a  rule, — 
that  which  is  laid  down  as  a  guide. 

(For  the  particulars  which  noma  Poetrology  respects 
Bee  large  work.  Book  II.  p.  237.) 

unnir  ttt  ^  l^'  Stn-di-col-ohjt. 

BOOK  III. 

PART  I.    SYNDICOLOGY. 
Syndicolbgy  is  that  part  of  Syntithology,  which  re- 
spects whatever  words  derive  from  their  conjunctive  state. 

PART  II.    PLATTOLOGY. 
Plattology  is  that  part  of  Syntithology,  which  respects 
the  doctrine  of  forming  words  from  sounds,  and  letters. 
{Plasso,  to  form,  and  logos,  doctrine.) 

REMARKS. 

That  the  constructive  principles  of  the  English  lan- 
guage, constitute  a  science  which  is  naturally  divided 
into  twelve  parts,  will  appear  obvious  to  all  who  examine 
for  themselves.  If,  then,  this  science  actually  comprises 
twelve  distinct  parts,  why  should  the  pupil  be  told  that 
English  grammar  consists  of  but  four  parts  ?  That  the 
old  school  Syntithologists  admit  the  advantage  of  dividing 
grammar  into  parts,  is  apparent  from  the  division  which 
they  have  made.  And,  as  from  the  nature  of  the  case,  it 
is  obvious  that  the  true  division  is  more  advantageous  than 
a  false  one,  it  is  presumed  that  the  division  which  is  here 
made,  will  not  be  condemned  without  investigation. 

The  part  which  the  old  school  granimarians  call  Uty- 
mology,  comprises  several  distinct  branches.  Under  the 
head  of  Etymology,  fall  the  division  of  words  into  ten 


SYNTITHOLOGY.  ^l 

parts  of  speech,  and  the  case*,  the  gender,  the  number, 
and  the  person,  of  nouns.  The  truth  is,  that  this  part  of 
English  grammar,  is  made  to  embrace  almost  the  whole 
science !     This  I  have  attempted  to  show  in  the  Appeal. 

The  division  of  words  into  ten  parts  of  speech,  and  the. 
gender  of  nouns,  are  both  called  Etymology !  But  is 
there  any  analogy  between  the  division  of  words  into 
parts  of  speech,  and  the  sex  of  animals  ?  Why,  then,  is 
gender,  and  this  division  brought  under  the  same  name  ? 

To  demonstrate  that  the  science  of  Syntithology  com- 
prises twelve  distinct  parts,  I  have  given  each  branch  of 
this  science,  a  definition  under  its  appropriate  head.  And 
I  heartily  invite  the  reader  to  give  each  definition  a 
critical  examination.  If  the  cases,  the  numbers,  the  per- 
sons,  the  genders,  the  modes,  the  tenses,  the  subdivision 
of  nouns  into  common,  and  proper  ;  of  verbs  into  regular, 
irregular,  principal,  and  auxiliary,  transitive,  and  in- 
transitive, passive,  and  neuter;  of  articles  into  definite, 
and  indefinite;  of  participles  into  present,  active,  com- 
pound,  and  perfect ;  of  adjectives  into  numeral,  cardinal, 
simple,  and  compound;  of  pronouns  into  personal,  rela- 
live,  interrogative,  compound,  neuter,  and  demonstrative; 
and  of  conjunctions  into  copulative,  and  disjunctive,  can 
be  brought  under  Etymology,  what  is  there  which  belongs 
to  grammar  that  can  not  be  brought  under  this  head  !  ? 


62  LIMITATION    OF   MONOS. 

BOOK  III. 

PART  I.    SYNDICOLOGY. 

Syndicology  is  that  part  of  Syntithology,  which  respects 
whatever  words  derive  from  their  conjunctive  state. 


"He  lives  hy  rule." 
The  ep-e-dei-col-o-gy  of  the  word,  rule,  and  the  syn-dei-col-O'gy  of 
the  mono,  "  hy  rule, "  are  very  different.  The  idea  vi^hich  "  rMZ«,'* 
when  taken  alone,  raises  in  the  mind,  is  that  of  a  guide  in  action. 
But  the  idea  which  the  mono,  "  hy  rule,^  raises  in  the  mind,  is  that 
of  conformity  to,  Hence  the  idea  of  conformity  tp,  is  the  result  of 
taking  the  two  words  together.  This  idea  of  conformity  io»  is 
3yn-dei-col-o-gy. 

chapter  i. 

limitation  of  monos. 

Limitation, 
is  the  restriction  which  a  word,  or  a  mono,  receives 
from  being  taken  with  another  word,  or  with  another 
mono  ;  as,  Black  hats,  Men^s  black  hats.  These  merits 
black  hats.  These  colored  men^s  black  hats.  My  hats. 
My  black  hats.  My  man's  black  hats. 

When  taken  alone,  the  word,  liats,  applies  to  all  hats.  But,  by  the 
action  of  its  subs,  this  super  is  here  limited  to  particular  hats. 

The  sub,  we/j's  when  taken  alone,  applies  to  all  men.  But,  when 
this  clade  is  under  the  influence  of  a  sub,  it  is  more,  or  less  restricted 
in  its  application ;  as,  The&e  merCs  hats,  Black  men's  hats. 

The  following  illustrates  the  way  in  which  monos  are  restricted  in 
application : 

["And  they  came]  (over  ,  ,  }  (unto  the  other  side) 
(of  the  sea)  (into  the  country)  (of  the  Gadarenes.") 
'•'And  they  came,^ 

Who  came  ?  To  learn  who  carae  the  protacorm,  and  tlie  plerocorm, 
must  be  taken  together.  The  restriction,  then,  of  this  mono  naturally 


LIMITATION    OF   MONOS.  Jja 

fiills  under  Syndeicoloffy.  Had  the  protacorm^  however,  been  used 
instead  of  the  plero,  tne  application  of  this  mono  to  Christ,  and  to 
those  who  accompanied  him,  would  not  come  under  Syndeicology, 
There  would  be  no  necessity  for  taking  the  prota,  and  the  plerocorna 
together  to  learn  who  came  over. 

If  they  is  applied  to  Christ,  and  to  those  who  accompanied  him,  it 
follows  that  the  action  of  which  came  is  the  name,  is  ascribed  to 
them  also.  Consequently  it  may  be  said  that  the  mono  itself  ii 
restricted  to  Christ,  and  to  those  who  were  in  the  ship  with  him. 

This  is  one  way  in  which  words  are  taken  together  to  produce  that 
restriction  of  monos,  which  is  necessary  to  the  distinct  expression  of 
ideas.  The  taking  of  the  super,  and  the  sub  mono  together  is  another 
way  in  which  this  restriction  is  produced. 

["And  they  came]  (over  the  water.'^) 

*^And  they  came  "  would  be  quite  indefinite  as  to  the  place^  or  thin?, 
over  which  they  came.  But  the  mono,  ^^over  the  water^^  gives  this 
action,  and  its  agents  a  definite  topography.  The  cam^  here  mentioned 
18  a  very  particular  one — it  is  that  very  came  which  emanated  from 
these  particular  agents  while  they  were  moving  over  the  water. 

"TAey  cameP     This  may  be  any  came  which  can  be  ascribed  to 
these  persons.     But  "they  came  over  the  water,"  is  not  any  came 
which  can  be  ascribed  to  these  agents — this  came  is  the  very  camt 
which,  while  it  emanated  from  these  actors,  had  a  local  connec- 
tion with  the  water  of  this  particular  spa. 

'  ["  And  they  came]  (over  the.  sea)  (unto  the  other 
side)  (of  the  sea)  (into  the  country)  (of  the  Gada- 
renes.") 

This  came  is  limited  eiill  farther  by  the  mono,  "  unto  (he  other 
side.^^ 

The  came  mentioned  in  the  trone,  is  not  only  the  particular  one 
which-  emanated  from  these  particular  agents,  but  it  is  that  par- 
ticular came  which  emanated  from  these  particular  agents  while 
they  were  moving  over  the  sea;  and  it  is  that  particular  came 
which  terminatedf  at  the  other  side  of  the  sea. 

["And  they  came]  (over  ,  ,  )  {unto  the  other  side) 
(of  the  sea)  (into  the  country)  (of  the  Gadarenes.") 

It  was  the  came  which  emanated  from  Hiese  certain 
individuals — stretched,  extended,  over,  not  under,  not 
through,  the  sea,  and  ended  at  the  other  side. 

Ended  at  the  other  side  of  what?  Did  this  came  end  at  the  aide 
of  a  table  ?  No— did  it  end  at  the  side  of  a  river  ?  No.  The  mono 
which  follows  the  word,  aide^  will  furnish  the  limitation,  the  restriction, 
which  is  necessary  to  the  distinct  expression  of  the  writer's  idea : 

(Unto  the  other  side)  (of  the  sea.) 
5* 


54  LIMITATION    OP   MONOS. 

This  came,  however,  is  farther  particularized  by  the  mono,  "  into 
the  country^  What  came  is  it  ?  It  is  the  came  which  emanated  from 
Christ,  and  from  those  who  accompanied  him.  But  there  may  have 
been  very  many  cames  which  issued  from  these  same  individuals. 
True — but  the  came,  mentioned  in  the  corraotene,  is  that  particular 
one,  which  belongs  to  them  as  its  agents,  which  extended  over  the 
sea,  reached  into  the  country  of  the  Gadarenes,  and  terminated  at 
th€»  other  side  of  the  same  road  over  which  it  passed. 

["And  they  came]  (over  ,  ,  )  (unto  the  other  side) 
(of  the  sea)  (into  the  country)  (of  the  Gadarenes.") 

1.  [And  they  came  {over  the  ivater,) 

2.  [And  they  came]  [unto  the  other  side.) 

3.  [And  they  came]  (into  the  country.) 

Into  what  country  ? 

("  Into  the  country)  (of  the  Gadarenes/') 

"  Of  the  Gadarenes,"  then,  limits  the  word  country,  in  the  nepoe- 
clad,  ^^into  the  country^  to  the  country  possessed  by  these  people. 

This  reasoning,  however,  is  Metaphysical,  not  SyntithologicaL 
The  monos,  '^  over  the  water,^^  *^  unto  the  other  side,"  and  *'-into  the 
country^*  are  not  intended  to  limit  the  trone.  True,  it  may  be 
shown  by  a  metaphysical  process  of  discussion,  that  the  things,  or 
places,  mentioned  in  these  monos,  do  aid  in  particularizing  the 
certain  act,  here  denominated  came,  mentioned  in  the  trone.  But 
to  make  these  monos  limiting  matter  in  Syntithology,  it  must  be 
shown  that  they  are  introduced  with  a  design  to  limit,  to  restrict. 
This  trone,  then,  is  under  no  Syntithotogical  restriction  except  that 
which  is  produced  by  taking  the  joro^acorra,  and  the  plerocoria 
together. 

DIVISION    OF    MONOS    UNDER    THE    HEAD,  RESTRICTION 
OF    APPLICATION. 

Under  this  head,  monos  are  divided  into  two  classes, 
called  LiMiTORiEs. 

1.  Esoteric  limitory. 

2.  Exoteric  limitory, 

\,  The  esoteric  Limitory  is  a  class  which  is  com- 
posed of  those  monos  that  are  limited  by  something 
within  their  own  sentence.  {EsoteroSy  within,  in- 
ternal, interior.) 

["And  they  came]  (over  ,  ,  )  (unto  the  other  side) 
(of  the  sea)  (into  the  country)  (of  the  Gadarenes.") 

1.  ^'Unto  the  other  side,'' 

a  plenary  unbroken  clad,  of  the  esoteric  limitory.    (Limited  by  the 
sub,  •*  of  the  sea."} 


LIMITATION    OP    MONOS.  55 

2.  ^^Into  the  country,''^ 
a  plenary  unbroken  clad,  of  the  esoteric  limitory.     (Limited  by  the 
sub,  "0/  the  Gadarencs") 

2.  The  exoteric  Limitory  is  a  class  which  is  made 
up  of  those  monos  that  are  Umited  by  something  out 
of  their  own  sentence.  ^(JSaro/ero*,  without,  external, 
exterior.) 

[".^72^  they  came']  (over  ,  ,  )  (unto  the  other  side) 
(of  the  sea)  (into  the  country)  (of  the  Gadarenes.") 

^^And  they  came,^* 
a  plenary  unbroken  trone,  of  the  exoteric  limitory. 

This  mono  is  limited  by  the  protacorms  to  which  they  is  sup- 
plemental. And,  as  these  are  not  in  the  sentence  to  which  this 
trone  belongs,  this  mono  belongs  to  the  exoteric  class. 

Some  monos  are  limited  both  by  esoteric,  and  exetoric, 
matter.  This  twofold  restriction  seems  to  demand  a  third 
class  which  may  be  called  the  di-teric  limitory. 

That  is,  both  of  the  teric  classes.  (Greek,  dis,  two, 
or  both.) 

["  They  (who  were  seen)  came.''^'] 
"  They  earned" 
a  plenary  unbroken  trone  of  the  diteric  limitory. 

This  mono  is  limited  by  the  protacorms  to  which  they  is  sup- 
plemental— these  are  out  at  the  sentence.  Hence  the  mono  be- 
longs to  the  exoteric  limitory. 

It  is  also  limited  by  the  mono,  "  who  were  seen" — and,  as  this 
clad  is  within  the  sentence  to  "which  the  trone  belongs,  the  trone 
is  of  the  esoteric  limitory  also. 

This  trone,  then,  is  of  the  diteric  limitory.     (Di,  both.) 

There  are  some  monos  which  limit  themselves.  The  class  to 
which  they  belong,  is  denominated, 

Self  Limitory. 

The  limitories,  then,  are 

1.  The  esoteric, 

2.  The  exoteric, 

3.  The  diteric,  and 

4.  The  self. 

["And  they  came]  (over  ,  ,  )  ^unto  the  other  side) 
(of  the  sea)  (into  the  country)  (oi  the  Gadarenes.") 
1.  "^nfl?  they  came'' — of  the  exoteric  limitory. 


56  LIMITATION    OP    MONQS. 

2.  ^^Over  the  sea^^ — of  the  exoteric  limitory. 

3.  <<  Unto  the  other  side  " — of  the  esoteric  limitory. 

4.  "0/*  the  sea" — of  the  exoteric  limitory. 

5.  ^'Into  the  country" — of  the  esoteric  limitory. 

6.  "O/*  the  Gadareries^^ — of  the  earo^eWc  limitory. 

"Ooer  the  seaJ*^  Over  what  sea  ?  Over  the  sea.  But  what  sea  is 
the  sea?  "  TAc,"  say  the  old  school  Grammarians,  "is  called  the 
definite  article  because  it  shows  what  thing,  or  things  are  meant ! " 
Where  the  is  employed,  there  is  a  limiting  syllabane  expressed,  or 
implied,  with  which  the  must  be  associated.  This  limiting  mono,  or 
syllabane,  is  suggested  by  the,  but  is  formed  from  the  nature  of  the 
subject.  In  the  present  case  the  limiting  mono  which  the  suggests, 
is  (^  Galilee,     They  came  (over  the  sea)  (of  Galilee.) 

4.  "0/  the  sea  "     Of  what  sea  ?    "  Unto  the  other  side  of  the  sea." 

The  other  side  of  what  sea  ?  The  other  side  of  the  sea.  But  what 
sea  is  the  sea?  The  implied  limiting  mono,  of  Galilee,  will  reply 
to  this  question  with  much  more  satisfaction  than  this  definite 
iifticle,  the! 

Unto  the  other  side  (of  the  sea)  (of  Galilee.) 

6.  "0/  the  Gadarenes.'* 

Of  what  Gadarenes  ?  (Of  the  Gadarenes)  (who  were  distinguished 
by  the  circumstance  that  they  were  the  only  people  who  were  called 
by  this  name.  The  implies  a  distinction  arising  from  something 
or  other. 

["A  man  went]  (to  Boston.) 

^^,d  man  went/' 

a  plenary  unbroken  trone,  of  the  self  limitory. 

The  author  of  the  trone  desires  to  limit  his  ideas  io  three  re- 
spects— 1.  There  was  but  one  being  who  went.  2.  This  being 
was  a  human  creature.  3.  This  human  creature  was  a  man — not 
a  woman — a  man,  not  a  boy.  These  restrictions  are  produced  by 
the  trone  itself.  Hence  this  mono  belongs  to  that  cI^lss  pf  monos 
which  limit  themselves. 

["  The  man  went]  (to  Boston.") 

"  The  man  went" 
a  plenary  unbroken  trone,  of  the  exoteric  limitory. 

Was  the  word,  the,  a  definite  article,  this  mono  would  belong 
to  the  self  limitory.  But,  as  the  does  not  define  the  man  to  whom 
allusion  is  made  by  the  writer,  it  is  a  gross  misnomer  to  call  this 
word  definite/  The  man  went.  But  what  man  is  the  man!? 
The  man  of  whom  you  have  been  speaking,  went. 

|["  The  sun  shines]  (upon  all  men)  (who  will  receive 
his  rays)  (which  he  sends)  (from  the  heavens)  (that  are) 
(above  our  heads.)         ^j^>^ 


INDUOLOGY    OF    MONOS.  57 

"  The  sun  shines" 
a  plenary  unbroken  trone,  of  the  exoteric  limitory. 

That  is,  the  sun  which  is  the  great  source  of  heat,  and  light. 

1.  "TAe  sun  shines'' — of  the  exoteric  limitory. 

2.  "  Upon  all  men  " — of  the  esoteric  hmitory. 

3.  ''Who  will  receive  his  rays'' — of  the  esoteric 

hmitory. 

{Who  is  taken  with  men.) 

4.  ''Which  he  sends" — of  the  esoteric  hmitory. 

( Which  is  taken  with  rays.) 

5.  "From  the  heavens  " — of  the  self  hmitory. 

"  From  the  heavens''*  does  not  seem  to  be  used  to  limit  the  rays. 
That  is,  to  distinguish  these  rays  from  others  which  the  sun  may 
send  from  another  place.  Did  this  mono  suggest  the  idea  that  there 
are  rays  which  the  sun  sends  from  another  place,  the  clad,  "  who  will 
receive  his  rays^''  would  be  of  the  diteric  limitory.  But  there  is  no 
appearance  that  the  author  of  the  sentence  intends  to  identify  the 
rays  of  which  he  speaks,  by  showing  whence  the  sun  throws  them. 
This  mono  might  be  omitted  without  the  loss  of  one  idea : 

[The  sun  shines]  (upon  all  men)  (who  will  receive 
his  rays.) 

6.  "  Which  are" — of  the  esoteric  limitory. 
(from  the  heavens)  {which  are.) 

The  clad,  which  are^  is  not  designed  to  distinguish  the  heavens 
from  which  the  sun  sends  his  rays,  from  any  other  heavens.  Hence 
this  sub  can  exert  no  limiting  influence  upon  its  super,  "from  the 
heavens.''*  Which  are  seems  to  be  perfectly  redundant ;  for  in  this 
case  there  is  no  propriety  in  continuing  the  sentence :  there  is  no  call 
for  any  distinction. 

7.  "  Jihove  us''^ — of  the  exoteric  limitory. 

This  mono  also  is  redundant :  it  cannot  be  intended  to  distinguish 
the  heavens  that  are  above  us,  from  any  which  are  helow  us.  This 
mono  is  of  the  exoteric  limitory  because  the  beings  alluded  to  by  m«, 
are  ascertained  by  the  word,  men^  or  by  the  syllabane,  human  family. 


CHAPTER    II. 

Induology. 

Induology  is  that  part  of  Syndiecology,  which 
respects  the  doctrine  of  the  induements  of  monos 
with  special  embellishments,  brevity,  strength  &c. 


58  INJO^OLOGY    OP    MONOS. 

{Induo,  to  put  something  on,  and  Logos,  doctrine.) 
Indulogue,  the  word,  or  mono,  which  is  indued. 

REMARKS. 

The  word,  rhetoric,  is  made  from  the  Greek,  rheo,  to  speak,  and 
fccAntcos,  technically,  hence  means  to  speak  technically!  That  the 
application  of  this  word  to  the  doctrines  of  the  induements  with 
which  certain  monos  are  imbued,  has  produced  a  vast  amount  of 
embarrassment  to  the  learner  of  the  English  Language,  is  obvious 
from  the  utter  inapplicability  of  the  term. 

Nor  is  the  use  of  the  word,  figure,  as  applied  in  Rhetoric,  pro- 
ductive of  any  less  difficulty  to  the  learner  than  is  the  yNovA,  rhetoric. 
The  word,  figure,  in  Greek,  is  schema ;  in  Latin,  hahitum,  vestitum, 
and  signifies  the  apparel  of  the  body!  But  is  there  any  analogy 
between  a  man's  apparel,  and  the  following  sentences  which  are 
called  ^^tt  res  : 

1.  "  The  sword  is  without/^ 

2.  "  T/iei/  have  Moses,  and  the  prophets  " 

In  the   APPEAL   I   have   attempted  to  show  that  those  who  have 
written  upon  induology,  have  produced  a  state  in  this  part  of  Synti- ' 
thology,  which  would  be  styled  anarchy,  and  misrule,  in  any  political 
government  that  has  ever  been  known  to  man. 

Syndiecology,  among  other  things,  respects 

1.  The  limitation  which  one  word,  or  one  mono, 
produces  by  the  restrictive  influence  which  it  exerts 
over  another, — 

2.  The  vivacity,  dignity,  special  force,  strength 
&c.  with  which  some  monos  are  indued, — 

3.  The  want,  or  destitution,  of  all  these  indue- 
ments in  other  monos. 

Remarks. 
The  verbal  materials  of  which,  and  the  particular  manner  in  which, 
some  monos  are  constructed,  enable  them  to  express  their  ideas  with 
a  high  degree  of  vivacity,  dignity ,  force,  strength,  brevity  &c. — But 
the  materials  of  which,  and  the  manner  in  which,  others  are  con- 
structed, prevent  them  from  expressing  their  ideas  with  any  of  these 
graceful  induements : 

1.  ["  Can  we  find  out  the  Lord  fully  ?''] 

2.  ["  Can  we  acquire  God]  (to  perfection  ?") 

These  monos  are  indued  with  a  considerable  vivacity,  and  much 
force.  But  the  following  which  express  the  same  ideas,  are  without 
these  graces. 

1.  ["  We  cannot  find  out  the  Lord  fully  .^''\ 


INDUOLOGY   OP   MONOS.  £9 

2,  ["  TVe  cannot  comprehend  God]  (to  perfection.) 

The  vividness,  forccj  strength,  dignity,  special  brevity,  and  the  em- 
bellishments which  arise  from  imputing  the  import  of  one  word  to 
another,  from  introducing  one  thing  as  a  mere  index  to  another,  from 
taking  a  part  for  the  whole,  or  the  whole  for  a  part,  from  inverting 
the  meaning  of  words,  from  extravagant  exaggerations,  from  intro- 
ducing a  series  of  things,  or  circumstances  which  gradually  rise  or 
fall,  in  dignity,  upon  a  climactic  scale,  from  contrasting  contraries, 
from  emphatically,  and  abruptly,  introducing  something  which  is  not 
connected  with  the  main  thing,  from  converting  mere  things  into  per- 
sons, from  adding  metaphor  to  metaphor,  from  bringing  past  events 
back  into  pheinic  time,  from  methodical  stately  arrangements  of  the 
words  of  a  mono,  or  the  monos  of  apoetroneand  from  various  other 
things,  may  be  considered  the  graces  of  speech.  These  induements 
are  to  speech,  what  turns,  trills,  and  shakes  are  to  music. 

Upon  the  basis  of  being  imbued  with  these  special  virtues,  these 
special  graces,  and  upon  the  basis  of  being  destitute  of  these  extra 
induements,  monos  are  divided  into  two  great  classes. 

Division  of  monos  upon  the  basis  of  their  char^ 
acters  as  derived  from  their  possession,  or  from 
their  want,  of  the  graceful  induements  of  speech  : 

1.  Indutory,  and 

2.  Zerotory,     {Zeros,  empty,  destitute.) 

I.    INDUTORY. 

The  indutory  is  a  class,  composed  of  those  monos 
which  are  indued  with  some  of  the  graces  of  speech  • 

1.  ["  Can  we  find  out  God]  (to  perfection?^') 

2.  ["  Can  the  flag  grow]  (without  water?") 

3.  ["  The  kettle  boils,''] 

11.    ZEROtORY. 

The  zerotory  is  a  class,  composed  of  those  monos 
which  are  destitute  of  all  the  graceful  induements  of 
speech  : 

1.  ["  We  cannot  find  out  God]  {to  perfection'') 

2.  ["  The  flag  cannot  grow]  {without  water,") 

3.  p  The  water  boils."] 

Subdivision  of  these  classes, 
1.  The  mG?i«/ory  is  subdivided  into 

1.  Jlntilogue  Indutory. 

2.  Apologue  Indutory. 

3.  Gradulogue  Indutory, 


60  INDUOLOGY    OF    MONOS. 

4.  Cathiselogue  Indutory. 

5.  Optologue  Indutory. 

6.  Hyperlogue  Indutory, 

7.  Ec-pho-ne-logue  Indutory. 

8.  Gno-me-logue  Indutory.     (No.) 

9.  An-a-logue  Indutory. 

10.  Jim-il-logue  Indutory. 

11.  Gnom-o-logue  Indutory.    (nom.) 

12.  Pan-te-logue  Indutory. 

13.  Me-ro-logue  Indutory. 

14.  Ei-ron-i-logue  Indutory. 

15.  Sy analogue  Indutory. 

16.  Ne-them-e-logue  Indutory. 

Explanation  of  the  terms. 

The  main  part  of  each  of  these  technicals,  is  made 
from  the  word,  logos.  This  word  signifies  doctrine, 
principle,  reason,  a  discourse,  a  word,  or  a  syllabane, 
a  mono. 

1.  The  principal  part,  the  basis,  of  these  new 
names,  is  logue. 

This  part  signifies  the  word,  or  the  mono,  which  is 
indued  with  some  of  the  graces  of  speech.  As  this 
part  has  a  fixed  meaning,  it  follows  that  all  the  sig- 
nification that  any  technical  has,  which  logue  does 
not  possess,  is  brought  into  the  word  by  the  prefix 
part  of  it.     The  parts  which  are  prefixed  to  logue  : 

1.  ^nti  which  means,  against,  contrary  to. 

2.  ^po  which  means  from,  a  turning  from. 

3.  Gradu  which  is  from  gradus,  a  step. 

4.  Cathis-e  which  is  from  kathisemi,  to  establish, 
confirm. 

5.  Op'to  which  is  from  optomai,  to  see. 

6.  Hyper  which  means  above,  exaggeration. 

7.  Ec-pho-ne  which  is  from  ecphonesis,  an  excla- 
mation. 

8.  Gno-me  which  means  a  thought,  intelligence. 

9.  Analogue   which  is  from  analogia,  analogy 
among  thmgs. 

10.  Am-il  which  is  from  amilla,  to  emulate,  to  try 
to  equal. 


INDUOLOGY   OP    MONOS.  gj 

11.  Gnom-o  which  is  from  gnomon,  an  index, 
pointer. 

12.  Pante  which  means  all,  the  whole. 

1 3.  Me-ro  which  is  from  meros,  a  part. 

14.  Ei-roni  which  is  from  eironia,  to  deride. 

15.  Sy  which  is  from  syn,  with,  or  together, 

16.  Ne-themi.     JVe,  not,  and  themelion,  a  basis,  a 
foundation  principle. 

Illustration, 

1.  Antilogue  indutory :    \^He  saw  life']  {in  death,) 

2.  Apologue  indutory:  (O,)  (ye,)  (kings,)  [be  in- 
structed.] 

3.  Gradulogue  indutory:    [I  think  him  honest, 
moral,  pious.'] 

4.  Cathiselogue  indutory:  [Can  the  deaf  hear?] 

5.  Optologue    indutory:    [Yes,  he  murders  his 
brother]  (for  revenge.) 

6.  Hyperlogue  indutory :  [Saul  was  swifter]  (than 
an  eagle.) 

7.  Ecphonelogue  indutory:  (O,)  (Jerusalem,)  (Je- 
rusalem.) 

8.  Gnomelogue indutory :  [The ivorm harangued 
him  thus.] 

9.  Analogue  indutory :  [  That  man  is  a  fox.] 

10.  Amillogue  indutory:  [He  stands  like]  (  ,  a 
tower.) 

11.  Gnomologue    indutory:    [He    addressed    the 
chair]  (an  hour.) 

12.  Pantelogue  indutory:  [Jephthah  was  buried] 
(in  the  cities)  (of  Gilead.) 

13.  Merologue   indutory:   [The  ox  knoweth  his 
owner.] 

14.  Ironilogue  indutory:  [Nero  was  a  virtuous 
prince  indeed.] 

15.  Syanalogue    indutory :    [Stop    the  current,] 
(young  men,)  (the  meadows  have  drunk  sufficiently.) 

16.  Ne-them-e-logue  indutory :  [The  water  runs.] 

6 


62                             INDUOLOGY  OF   MONOS. 

The  new.  The  old. 

1.  ANTILOGUE.  ANTITHESIS. 

2.  AP-O-LOGUE.  APOSTROPHE. 

3.  GRAD-U-LOGUE.  CLIMAX. 

4.  CA.THIS.E.LOGUE.  EROTESIS. 

5.  OPTOLOGUE.  VISION. 

6.  HY-PER-LOGUE.  HYPERBOLE. 

7.  EC-PHO-NE-LOGUE.  ECPHONESIS. 

8.  GNO-ME-LOGUE.  PROSOPOPOEIA. 

9.  AN-A-LOGUE.  METAPHOR. 

10.  AM-IL-LOGUE.  SIMILE. 

11.  GNOM-O-LOGUE.  METONYMY. 

12.  PAN-TE-LOGUE.  SYNECDOCHE. 

13.  ME-RO.LOGUE.  SYNECDOCHE. 

14.  I-RON-I-LOGUE.  IRONY. 

15.  SY-AN-A-LOGUE.  ALLEGORY. 

16.  NE-THEM-E.LOGUE.  


17.  THEM-E-LOGUE. 


♦ 


2.  Subdivision  of  the  Zerotory. 
The  zerotory  is  divided  into  two  classes : 

1.  induable,  and 

2.  uninduable. 

1.  The  induahle  zerotory  is  a  class,  composed  of 
those  monos  which  can  be  readily  indued  with  some 
of  the  graces  of  speech: 

1.  ["  We  cannot  find  out  God']  (to  perfection.) 

2.  ["  The  flag  cannot  grow]  (without  water,") 

3.  [«  The  water  boils,'''] 

2.  uninduable. 
The  uninduable  zerotory  is  a  class,  composed  of 
those  monos  which  cannot  be  readily  indued  with 
any  of  the  graces  of  speech  : 

1.  "  Can  we  find  out  the  Lord  (to  perfection  V ) 

2.  "Can  the  flag  grow  (without  water 7'' ) 

3.  "The  kettle  boils  {from  the  heat)  {of  the  fire,'') 
{to  perfection)  {without  water)  {from  the  heat)  {of  the  fire.) 

1.  Antilogue  indutory. 
The  antilogue  indutory  is  a  class,  composed  of 
those  monos  which   are  indued  with  vivacity,  and 
force  by  the  introduction  of  contraries : 


INDUOLOGY   OF   MONOS.  69 

1.  ["  The  stork  knoweth  her  appointed  time;'] 
{but  my  people  know  not  the  judgments)  (of  the 
Lord.") 

2.  ["  He  saiv  life]  {in  death,)  (  ,  ,  exaltation)  {in 
debasement,)  {  ,  ,  glory)  {in  shame,)  {  ,  ,  a  king- 
dom) {in  bondage,)  {and  ,  ,  light)  {in  darkness.'^) 

3.  ["  The  foxes  have  holes-,]  {but  the  son  {of  man) 
hath  not  where  to  lay  his  head.^^) 

2.  Ap'Ologue  indutory. 
The  ap-ologue  indutory  is  a  class,  composed  of 
those  monos  that  are  indued  with  that  hfe  which 
springs  from  a  strong  desire  in  the  speaker  to  express 
the  dislike,  or  aversion  which  he  feels  to  what  he  has 
seen  in  the  main  subject : 

1.  («  O,)  {Israel,)  thou  hast  destroyed  thyself.^' 
Hos.  13.  9. 

Israel  had  long  displeased  the  Lord — and  he  had  long  expostulated 
with  them  through  his  prophet,  Hosea,  for  their  high  provocations 
against  him.  At  length,  the  Lord  turns  from  them  as  his  them,  as 
his  subject,  but  to  them  as  his  audience : 

'  ("  O,)  {Israel,)  thou  hast  destroyed  thyself,"  but  in 
me  is  thy  help."    • 

Before  this,  he  had  spoken  of  this  people,  but  to  Hosea.  But  a 
strong  aversion  which  the  Lord  felt  to  their  course,  caused  him  to 
break  off  abruptly  from  speaking  of  them,  and  to  turn  to  them  to 
express  the  dislike  which  he  felt  to  it,  and  the  surprise  which  he  felt 
at  it. 

2.  [Be  wise  now,  therefore,]  ( O,)  {ye)  {kings,)  (be 
instructed,)  {ye)  {judges)  (of  the  earth.")  Psalm 
ii.  9,  10. 

The  speech  from  which  David  turns  to  the  above  instance,  is  this: 

"  Thou  shalt  break  them  with  a  rod  of  iron  &c. 

David  is  here  speaking  to  God,  but  of  the  kings,  and  judges  of  the 
earth.  David  had  long  denounced  the  judgments  of  God  against  the 
rulers  of  the  earth ;  but  perceiving  little,  or  no  reform,  he  turns  from 
speaking  to  God,  and  addresses  the  above  words  of  admonition  to  the 
rulers  themselves. 

"  Thou  shalt  break  them  with  a  rod  of  iron ;  thou 
ihalt  dash  them  in  pieces  like  a  potter's  vessel." 


64  INDUOLOGT    OP    MONOS. 

"Be  wise  now,  therefore,  O,  ye  kings;  and  be  in- 
structed, ye,  judges  of  the  earth  !" 

3.  ["Hear,]  (O,  {heavens,)  (and  give  ear)  (O,) 
eai'th ;)  (for  the  Lord  hath  spoken,)  (I  have  nour- 
ished,) (and  brought  up  children ;)  (and  they  have  re- 
belled) (against  me.")     Isaiah  1.  2. 

Isaiah  had  long  complained  of  Judah  for  her  rebellion.  He  had 
long  exhorted  her  to  repentance,  first  with  promises,  then  with 
threatenings.  And,  under  the  excitement  of  sore  disappointment, 
and  dislike,  he  turns  abruptly /rom  them,  and  addresses  the  heavens^ 
And  the  earth. 

4.  [Death  is  swallowed  up]  (in  victory.)  (O,) 
(Death!)  [where  is  thy  sting?]  (O,)  (Grave,) 
[where  is  thy  victory  ?] 

Paul  here  abruptly  breaks  off  from  speaking  of  death,  and  turns  to 
death,  and  the  grave  which  he  addresses  in  terms  of  taunt,  and 
reproach: 

"  0,  Death,  where  is  thy  sting  7  0,  Grave^  where 
is  thy  vixitory  ? 

In  other  phrase — Death,  thou  shalt  be  put  to  deep  shame  when  the 
saying  shall  have  been  brought  to  pass,  "  Death  shall  he  swallowed  up 
in  victory"  O,  death,  it  will  then  be  demonstrated  that  thy  boasted 
sting  which  is  sin,  hath  been  extracted  from  thee  by  the  atonement 
of  Christ.  And  O,  grave,  it  shall  then  appear  that  thy  vaunted 
powers  to  hold,  in  eternal  dominion,  the  redeemed  of  the  Lord,  are 
the  subject  of  a  vain  boast. 

3.  Gradulogue  indutory. 
The  gradulogue  indutory  is  a  class,  composed  of 
those  monos  that  are  indued  with  that  exornation 
which  springs  from  gradually  ascending  from  the  least 
to  the  greatest,  or  from  gradually  descending  from  the 
greatest  to  the  least : 

1.  \^''Jidd  (to  your  faith)  virtue  f^^  (to  your  virtue) 
(  ,  ,  knowledge,)  (to  your  knowledge)  (  ,  ,  tem- 
perance,) {and  (to  your  temperance)  ,  ,  patience,) 
{and  (to  patience)  ,  ,  godliness,)  {and  (to  godliness) 

,  ,  brotherly  kindness,)  {a7id  (to  brotherly  kindness) 
,  5  charity  J) 

2.  [«  The  head  (of  every  man)  is  Christ ;]  {and 


INDUOLOGY    OF    MONOS.  gg 

the  head  (of  the  woman)  is  the  man  ;)  [and  the  head 
(of  Christ)  is  God:') 

3.  [^' His    arm    gave    blows  ,'1    {his   blows  gave 
wounds;)  [and  his  wounds  gave  death.) 

4.  (In  the  beginning)  [was  the  word;]  (and  the 
word  was)  (with  God;)  (and  the  word  was  God.'^) 

5.  ["  Hope  Cometh]  from  experience ;)  (experience 
,  )  (from  patience ;)  (and  patience  ,  )  (from  tri- 

bulation:*) 

6.  ["  Tribulation  worketh patience ;'\  (and patience 
,  experience  ;)  (and  experience  ,  hope^') 

4.  Cathiselogue  indutory. 
The  cathiselogue  indutory  is  a  class,  composed  of 
those  monos  that  are  indued  with  power  to  estabUsh, 
or  confirm,  the  idea  by  a  construction  which  seems  to 
imply  that  the  thing  stated,  is  an  axiom  : 

1.  ["t/fre  not  Jive  sparrows  sold]  (for  two  far- 
things ?'*) 

2.  [«  Can  the  blind  see .?"] 

3.  ["  Have  I  not  seen  Jesus  Christ]  (  ,  ,  our 
Lord?") 

4.  I"  Doth  God  pervert  judgment  ?*'"} 

5.  Opiologue  indutory. 
The  optologue  indutory  is  a  class,  composed  of 
those  monos  that  are  indued  with  vivacity,  and  force 
from  the  bringing  past  events  back  into  phemic  time  : 

1.  [".^?ic?  immediately  the  spirit  driveth  him] 
(into  the  wilderness.") 

2.  [Yes^  (Gentlemen)  (of  the  jury,)  the  monster 
(at  the  Bar)  plunges  this  dagger]  (into  the  heart)  (of 
his  own  brother)  (for  no  better  reason)  (than  that)  (of 
revenge.") 

Where  a  speaker  wishes  to  make  a  deep  impression,  he  often  em 
ploys  a  inono  of  the  epanaleptic  class.  By  the  use  of  the  phemic 
chronodex,  he  brings  back  the  whole  scene,  into  the  time  of  speaking 
By  this  means  those  whom  he  addresses,  are  made  to  see,  the  deed  to 
which  he  is  directing  their  attention. 
6* 


66  INDUOLOGY   OP   MONOS. 

6.  Hyperlogue  indutory. 
The  hyperlogue  indutory  is  a  class,  composed  of 
those  monos  that  are  indued,  from  the  use  of  par- 
ticular words,  with  powers  greatly  to  exaggerate^  or 
diminish  the  degree  to  which  the  objects  spoken  of, 
have  the  qualities,  ascribed  to  them : 

The  object  of  this  Indulogue  is  to  give  the  reader  a  just  idea  of 
the  remarkable  degree  to  which  the  objects  possess  the  attributes, 
imputed  to  them. 

1.  ["  The  flowers  (in  yonder  meadow)  are  stars J^~\ 

2.  [«  He  is  Lucifer."] 

3.  ["  She  is  an  angelJ''] 

4.  ["He  owned  a  piece]  (of  ground)  {which  was 
not  larger)  [than  a  Lacedemonian  letter.''^) 

5.  ["  He  was  so  gaunt]  (  ,  ,  ,  that)  {the  case  of  a 
flagelet)  was  a  inansion)  (for  him.") 

6.  ["  Man  is  a  mere  ivorm.*'] 

[f' Saul  was  swifter]  {than  an  eagle;)  {and,  , 
stronger)  {than  a  Hon.") 

7.  Ecphonelogue  indutory. 
The  ecphonelogue  indutory  is  a  class,  composed  of 
those   monos  which  are  indued  with  the  vehement 
emotions,  the  exclamatory  emotions,  of  the  speaker : 

1.  ("  O,)  {Lord,)  [how  excellent  is  thy  name?"] 

2.  ("  O,)  {wretched  man)  (that  I  am)  [who  shall 
deliver  me]  (from  the  body)  (of  this  death  !") 

3.  ("  O)  {Jerusalem.,)  {Jerusalem,)  (which  killeth 
the  prophets.") 

4.  [^-  How  is  the  golden  city  spoiled  f^^] 

5.  ("'  O,)  tyrant  heaven,)  (and  {traitor  earth,)  how 
is  this  done  ?  how  is  this  suffered  ?  Hath  this  world  a 
government  ? 

On  seeing  the  innocent  Philoclea  beheaded,  Pyrocles  burst  forth 
into  these  exclamations. 

Monoized : 
("  0,)  tyrant  heaven,)  [how  is  this  done]  {and  how- 
ls this  suffered  ?)  {and  (how  is  this  done,)  {and  how  is 


INDUOLOGY   OF    MONOS.  67 

this  suflfered,)  (tyrant  earth?)   [Has  this   world    a 
government  ?"] 

8.  Gnomelogue  indutory. 
The  gnomelogue  indutory  is  a  class,  composed  of 
those  monos  which  are  indued  with  special  impress- 
iveness,  and  animation,  by  imputing  intelligence  to 
subjects  which  are  without  mind  : 

1.  ["Behold]  {this  stone  shall  be  a  witness)  (unto 
us ;)  (for  it  hath  heard  all  the  words)  (of  the  Lord) 
(which  he  hath  spoken)  (unto  us.") 

The  intelligence  which  is  ascribed  to  the  stone,  is  implied  in 
V3itne88  and  heard. 

2.  ["  Let  the  floods  clap  their  hands ;]  Clet  the 
hills  rejoice  together." J 

The  indulogue  words  are  hands^  clap^  and  rejoice. 

3.  ["  Wisdom  crieth]  (at  the  gates.'*)     "  crieth." 

4.  ["And  he  cried]  {against  the  altar)  (in  the 
words)  (of  the  Lord,)  (and  ,  said,  (0,)  (Altar,) 
(*dltar,)  (thus  saith  the  Lord.") 

(against  Altar^  Altar.) 

'  9.  Analogue  indutory. 

The  analogue  indutory  is  a  class,  composed  of 
those  monos  which  are  indued  with  special  dignity, 
perspicuity,  and  brevity,  by  illustrating  the  qualities 
of  their  subjects  in  one  word,  by  a  substitution  of 
analagoUs  attributes  : 

1.  ["  Washington  was  the  pillar^  (of  our  country:) 

The  attributes  which  Washington  exhibited  in  relation  to  our 
country,  are  illustrated  in  the  one  word,  pillar.  The  qualities  of  a 
pillar  are  substituted  for  those  which  Washington  manifested  in 
reference  to  our  country  in  the  revolutionary  struggle.  But  instead 
of  expressing  these  qualities  in  language  unindued  with  any  of  the 
graces  of  speech,  the  writer  indues  his  mono  with  special  vividness^ 
and  strength. 

Unindued :  Washington  sustained  our  country. 

The  unindued  language  enables  us  to  understand — but  the  indued 
makes  us  see  our  country  placed  upon  Washington  to  be  preserved  in 
the  whirlwind  of  faction,  and  tempest  of  war. 


68  INDTTOLOGY   OP   MONOS. 

^.  ["  The  Queen  (of  Sheba)  saw  the  wisdom]  (of 
Solomon.) 

The  attribute  of  seeing  is  here  put  for  the  quality  of  proving,  and 
understanding. 

3.  ["  The  neighing  (of  horses)  is  heard]    (from 
Dan.") 

The  quality  of  Aeartn^  is  substituted  for  the  attribute  of  foreseeing 
The  neighing  of  horses,  is  foreseen  by  the  prophet. 

4.  ["  That  man  is  ajbx.'*'} 

The  craftiness  of  that  man  is  illustrated  by  the  cunning  of  the  foz 
The  stratagem  of  the  fox  is  substituted  for  the  craftiness  of  that 
particular  man. 

5.  ["  These  soldiers  were  lions]  (in  combart.") 

6.  \^'  A  prudent  man  bridles  his  anger. ^^'l 

The  quality  of  controlling  the  horse  with  the  bridle,  is  substituted 
for  the  attribute  of  restraining  the  anger  of  the  man. 
{Every  action  is  a  quality.) 

6.  [Opposition  Jires  courage]  (in  all.) 

.   What^re  is  to  matter,  opposition  is  to  courage. 

10.  Amillogue  indutory. 
The  amillogue  indutory  is  a  class,  composed  of 
those  monos  which  are  indued  with  that  impressive 
ness,  and  perspicuity,  that  spring  from  representing 
the  qualities  of  their  subjects  as  emulating  the 
qualities  of  other  things  which  are  known  to  possess 
the  same  attributes  in  a  remarkable  degree ; 

(ilmt7Za,  to  try  to  equal.) 

1.  ["  He  Stands  like]  (  ,  a  tower.") 

2.  [« Faith  (in  affliction)  is  like]  (  ,  light)  (in 
darkness.) 

3.  ["As  the  door  turneth]  (upon  its  hinges,)  {so 
doth  the  slothful)  (upon  his  bed.") 

This  indulogue  is  called  by  the  old  school  grammarians,  a  simile. 
But  so  laxly  have  writers,  in  general,  treated  this  subject  that  it  is 
hardly  possible  to  decide  whether  the  whole  sentence  is  denominated 
a  simile,  or  whether  a  mere  part  of  it  falls  under  this  denomination 
In  a  work,  compiled  by  Goold  Brown,  however,  I  find  a  precision  of 
wluch  others  are  destitute.     He  says. 


INDUOLOGY    OF    MONOS.  69 

'•A  simile  is  a  simple  and  express  comparison;  and  is  generally 
introduced  by  like,  as,  or  so :  as, 

"  At  first,  like  thunder^s  distant  tone^ 
The  rattling  din  came  rolling  on." 

"  Like  thunder^s  distant  tone,''^  is  marked  as  the  simile  portion  of 
the  sentence.  But,  as  a  simile  is  a  comparison  are  not  all  the  things 
which  are  compared  simile  things  ?  If  there  is  any  comparison  in 
this  example  it  is  instituted  between  the  *^  thunder's  tone,"  and  the 
rattling  din.  Why,  then,  is  not  the  rattling  din  as  much  a  simile 
portion  of  the  sentence  as  the  thunder^ s  tonef  When  John  and 
Joseph  are  compared  one  with  the  other  does  not  the  simile  character 
of  the  sentence  which  makes  the  comparison,  infuse  itself  into  both!? 

^'John  is  as  old  as  Joseph" 

Is  not  this  a  simple,  and  an  express,  comparison  ?  If  so  this  is  a 
simile ! !  Which  part  of  the  comparison  is  a  simile !  ?  •'  Dentihia 
aVba,^'*    is  as  much  a  simile  as  is  '*  like  thunder"*^  distant  tone .'" 

11.   Gnomologue  indutory. 
The  gnomologue  indutory  is  a  class,  composed  of 
those  monos  that  are  indued  with  that  grace  which 
springs  from  using  one   thing  as  a  mere  index  to 
another : 

1.  [«  Mr.  Adams  addressed  the  chair]  (an  hour.") 

2.  ["  The  kettle  boils.''] 

3.  ["  They  have  Moses ;]  {and  ,  ,  the  prophets.") 
-  4.  ["  The  house  is  building.^'] 

5.  ["  The  Lord  loveth  righteousness.''] 

1.  The  chair  is  mentioned  as  a  mere  index  to  him  who  occupied  it 
And  much  brevity  is  derived  from  the  use  of  the  chair  as  a  gnomon, 
an  index,  with  which  to  point  out  the  president  of  the  meeting. 

1.  He  addressed  the  chair. 

2.  He  addressed  the  president  of  the  meeting. 

2.  The  kettle  bears  an  index  relation  to  the  liquid  which  it  contains. 
Hence  the  kettle  is  mentioned  as  an  index  to  the  water  which  boils 
in  it. 

3.  Moses,  and  the  prophets  bear  an  index  relation  to  their  works. 
Hence,  he  and  they  are  introduced  as  gnomons  to  these  works. 

4.  "  The  house  is  building." 

They  who  reject  this  expression  upon  the  ground  that  the  house 
itself  does  not  build,  must  also  reject  the  following,  ,, . 

'<  The  kettle  boils,"  «  He  addressed  the  chair  an 
hour,"  "  We  have  Moses,  and  the  prophets." 


70  INDUOLOGY    OP   MONOS. 

Does  the  kettle  itself  boil  ?  No,  Have  we  Moses  himself?  No. 
Have  we  the  prophets  themselves  ?     No,  verily. 

The  house  advances  under  the  act  of  building.  This  act  however, 
is  not  done  by  the  house^  but  by  the  builder.  But,  as  the  house 
advances  toward  a  finish,  so  to  speak,  under  the  influence  of  this  act, 
this  act  bears  an  index  relation  to  this  advancement — hence,  in 
speaking  of  the  advancement  of  tlie  house,  this  act  is  mentioned  as  a 
mere  gnomon,  a  mere  index,  to  this  advancement.  He  that  can  wrest 
this,  and  its  kindred  expressions,  fi-om  our  language,  may  deride  the 
cathiselogue,  "  Canst  thou  draw  out  Leviathan  with  a  hook  ?" 

5.  "  The  Lord  loveth  righteousness.' ' 

Righteousness  bears  an  index  relation  to  good  men — Whence  right' 
eousness  is  used  as  the  means  of  referring  to  righteous  men. 

12.  Pantelogue  indutory. 
The  pantelogue  indutory  is  a  class,  composed  of 
those  monos  which  are  indued  with  that  brevity,  ease, 
and  embellishment  which  spring  from  taking  the 
whole  for  a  part : 

1.  ["  Whereby  the  world  (that  then  was)  ( ,  being 
overflowed)  (with  water,)  ,  perished."]     2  Peter  6. 

The  «  worW  is  the  pantelogue^  the  whole  world,  taken  for  the  earth, 
a  mere  part  of  the  world. 

2.  ["  Till  thou  return"]  (to  the  ground.'^) 

«  T^iott"  includes  the  whole  man,  soul,  and  hody.  And,  as  the  body 
only,  is  to  return  to  the  ground,  ^'^tkoiC'*  is  a  pantelogue — a  word 
which  takes  the  whole  for  a  part. 

3.  ["  These  are  the  sons]  (of  Jacob)  {which  were 
born)  (to  him)  (in  Padanaram.")     Gen.  xxxv.  2Q. 

In  verses  22,  23,  24,  25,  there  is  an  enumeration  of  the  twelve  sons 
of  Jacob.  Verse  26,  declares  that  all  of  them  were  born  in  Padan~ 
aram.  Yet  Benjamin  was  born  on  the  way  near  Ephratk,  which  is 
declared  in  verse  16. 

4.  ["  These  all  died]  (in  faith.") 

These— that  is,  all  whom  the  apostle  had  enumerated,  died  in  &ith. 
A.mong  them,  however,  was  Enoch  who,  as  is  declared  m  verse  5,  did 
not  die  at  all ! 

**By  faith  Enoch  was  translated  that  he  should  not  see  death.''* 
Verse  5. 

**  All  these  died,*  the  whole  mono  is  the  pantologue.  If  there  is 
any  one  word  in  it,  which  can  be  considered  the  pantelogue,  it  is  all. 

5'  ["And  Jephthah  was  buried]  {in  the  cities)  (of 
Gilead.") 


INDUOLOGY   OF    MONOS.  71 

6.  ["  The  thieves  also  (which  were  cracifit  d)  (with 
him,)  upbraided  him.^^'\ 

Both  are  mentioned  for  the  one  who  actually  did  upbraid  him. 

7.  ["  We  deceived  the  people,']  {and  ,  seemed 
or  at  or  s.^^) 

Cicero  here  speaks  of  himself 

When  an  editor  says  we  for  himself  only,  he  employs  a.  pantelogue. 

13.  Merologue  indutory. 
The  merologue  indutory  is  a  class,  composed  of 
those  monos  which  are  indued  with  that  brevity,  ease, 
and  embellishment,  which  spring  from  taking  a  part 
for  the  ivhole : 

1.  ["  The  horse  is  a  noble  animaU''\ 

2.  ["  Therefore  we  conclude  that]  {man  is  justified 
by  faith.") 

One  man  is  here  taken  for  many,  for  all  men. 

3.  [« Then  Abraham  took  Sarah]  (  ,  ,  his  wife,) 
{and  ,  ,  the  souls.")  (&c.) 

SouU — a  mere  part.    The  whole— -mc??,  and  women. 

4.  ["  The  Roman  was  victor']  (in  battle.'^) 

5.  ["I  am  not  worthy]  (  ,  that)  (thou  shouldst 
come)  {under  my  roof?^) 

The  roof  which  is  a  mere  part,  is  here  taken  for  the  whole  house. 
Thou  shouldst  come  into  my  house. 

6.  ["And  it  was  told]  (the  house)  (of  David) 
(Saying,)  (Syria  is  confederate)  {with  Ephraim.^') 
Isaiah  vii.  2. 

Ephraim  is  put  for  the  ten  tribes  of  Israel. 

7.  ["Because  Syria,  {Ephraim  ,  ,  ,  ,  )  (and  the 
son  ,  ,  ,  ,  )  (of  Remalia)  have  taken  evil  counsel) 
(against  thee.")     Isaiah  vii.  5. 

Ephraim  is  put  for  the  ten  tribes  of  Israel. 

8.  ["  But  blessings  shall  be]  {upon  the  head)  (of 
him)  (that  selleth  it.") 

9.  [".^  man  shall  eat  good]  (by  the  fruit)  (of  his 
mouth.") 

One  man  is  put  for  all 


72  INDUOLOGY    OP    MONOS. 

14.  Ironilogue  indutory. 
The  ironilogue  indutory  is  a  class,  composed  of 
those  monos  which  are   indued  with  that  derision, 
taunt,  and  contrariety,  which  are  derived  from  using 
words  in  direct  opposition  to  their  true  import : 

1.  ["  Cry  aloud ;]  {for  he  is  a  god.) 

2.  ["  Nero  was  a  virtuous  prince  indeed."] 

3.  ["  Pope  Hiidebrand  was  remarkable]  {for  his 
meekness.'^) 

That  is,  he  was  remarkable  for  his  want  of  this  Christian  grace. 

15.  Sy analogue  indutory. 

A  syanalogue  is  a  sentence  embellished  with  a 
series^  of  analogues  upon  the  same  subject: 

1.  [^«  Stop  the  current^  (young  men,)  {the  meadows 
have  drunk  sufficiently.") 

The  two  monos,  ["Stop  the  current;]  (the  meadows  have  druuk 
sufficiently^^)  are  a  synalogue.  These  two  monos  are  analogues. 
They  come  together — they  are  within  the  same  poetene — hence  they 
are  a  syanalogue.     {Sy  from  «yn,  together.) 

These  two  analogues  are  the  component  parts  of  the  syanalogue. 
These  monos,  then,  may  be  referred  to  an  indutory  upon  the  basis  of 
that  syanalogue  character  which  they  derive  from  constituting  a 
syanalogue. 

The  syanalogue  indutory  is  a  class,  composed  of 
those  analogues  which  aid  in  the  formation  of  a 
syanalogue : 

1.  l'^  Bub  not  the  scar.'\  {lest  you  open  again  the 
tvound)  {that  is""  healed,)  {and  cause  it  to  bleed 
afresh.' ') 

These  four  analogues  form  one  syanalogue. 

16.  Ne-theni-e-logue  indutory. 

Greek.  iVe,  not,  themelioUy  foundation,  basis,  principle. — Not 
having  a  foundation,  not  having  a  basis  principle. 

Indulogues  may  be  divided  into  themelogues^  and  Ne-them-e-logues. 
When  the  induement  has  a  sound  basis  in  the  property  of  the  thing 
whicii  is  mentioned  in  the  syllabane,  the  mono  is  a  themelogue  ;  as,  I 
have  read  Blackstone. 

*  The  word,  series^  signifies,  a  succession  of  things.  A  series  of 
analogues,  then,  is  two,  or  more  that  come  together  which  is  the 
import  of  the  prefix,  sy. 


INDUOLOGY    OP    MONOS.  73 

When  the  induement  has  not  a  sound  basis  in  the  property  of  the 
thing  which  is  mentioned  in  the  syllabane,  the  mono  is  a  Ne-tkem  e- 
logne ;  as,  "  The  water  runs.''* 

The  nethemelogue  indutory  is  a  class,  composed 
of  those  monos  which  pass  as  English,  though  their 
induement  has  not  a  foundation  in  the  properties  of 
the  things  which  the  monos  denote  : 

1.  ["  The  water  r«/w."]  • 

That  which  has  no  feet  cannot,  with  strict  propriety,  be  said  to  rniu 

2.  ["  Let  my  right  hand  forget  her  cunning." 

It  can  hardly  be  said  of  that  which  has  no  mind^  that  it  forgets. 

3.  ["  The  sword  shall  devour,  ,  ]  (and  , 
shall  be  satiate,)  (and  ,  ,  be  made  drunk) 
(with  their  blood.^^)     Jeremiah  xlvi.  10, 

1.  As  a  sword  is  not  a  living  creature,  and  as  it  has  no  teeth^  bow 
can  it  devonr  ? 

2.  As  a  sword  has  nothing  answering  to  a  stomachy  it  is  far-fetched 
indeed  to  speak  of  this  weapon  as  being  filled  to  satiety. 

3.  He  that  is  drunk,  is  stupefied  by  the  action  of  spirits  on  the 
stomachy  and  bruin.  A  sword  has  nothing  analagous  to  these  organs — 
hence  the  induement  of  the  third  mono,  is  too  far-fetched  to  be 
sanctioned  by  the  laws  of  induology.     It  is  a  nethemelogue. 

4.  Had  blood  any  thing  analagous  to  the  stupefying  power  of  spirits, 
the  induement  of  the  foiurth  mono,  might  be  sanctioned  by  induology. 
But,  as  blood  has  no  such  powers,  the  fourth  mono  also  is  a  netheme- 
logue. 

4.  ["Enoch  was  translated]  (  ,  that)  (he 
should  not  see  death.")     Heb.  xi.  5. 

"  He  should  not  see  death,"  is  a  nethemelogue. 

The  phrase,  "  see  death,''*  is  used  for  die  : 

Enoch  Was  translated  that  he  should  not  die. 

In  the  above  nethemelogue^  it  is  intimated  that  a  dead  body  can  see. 
But  as  a  corpse  has  no  power  to  enable  it  to  see,  Enoch  would  never 
have  seen  death,  even  had  he  remained  on  the  earth  till  he  had  died 
like  other  men. 

5.  ["  This  man  has  a  beautiful  voice."] 

As  a  voice  has  nothing  which  comes  to  the  mind  through  the  me- 
dium of  the  eye,  it  cannot  be  denominated  beautiful. 

6.  ["  They  build  a  horse]  by  Pallas  art  divine." 

Mechanics  do  not  build  horses — farmers  raise  them.  The  analogy 
between  the  raising  of  a  horse,  and  the  construction  of  a  house,  is  loo 
alight  to  justify  the  application  of  the  v/ord,  build,  even  to  the  act  of 
forming  the  famous  Trojan  horse. 

7 


74  INDUOLOGY    OF    MONOS. 

7.  ["  The  elbow  (of  his  nose)  is  disproportionable,**'\ 

The  crook  in  some  noses,  is  not  enough  like  the  elbow  of  the  arm, 
to  justify  this  iuduement. 

8.  ["  And  I  will  cut  down  your  images]  (and        , 
,         cast  your  carcasses)  {upon  the  carcasses) 

(of  your  idols.")     Levit.  xxvi.  30 

The  induement  which  is  given  to  the  italic  mono,  is  not  justified  by 
induology.  The  carcasses,  mentioned  in  this  nethemelogue,  are  mere 
pieces  of  images. 

9.  ["  For  the  Lord  hath  heard  the  voice"]  (of  my 
weeping.") 

As  nothing  which  has  not  the  organs  of  articulation,  can  have  a 
cotcc,  it  is  difficult  to  see  upon  what  principle  in  induology,  the  in- 
duement of  this  mono  can  be  sustained. 

"  The  Lord  hath  heard  my  weeping^''  interdicts  this  induement,  and 
improves  the  language:  it  is  better  to  use  language  un indued  with 
any  of  the  graces  of  speech  than  to  employ  that  which  is  improperly 
indued. 

Specimen. 

1.  ["  The  murmuring  (of  the  water)  is  music."] 

1.  "  The  murmuring  is  music^^ 
A  plenary  broken        trone      of  the  esoteric   limitory,  analogue 
indutory. 

2.  '^  of  the  water /' 

A  plenary  unbroken  clad  of  the  exoteric  limitory^  uninduable 
zerotory. 

This  clad  is  of  the  exoteric  limitory :  all  water  does  not  murmur—- 
hence  the  idea  is  that  the  murmuring  of  the  water  which  does  murmur 
at  all,  is  music. 

2.  ["  He  learned  his  arguments]  (from  Aristotle,) 
(and  ,    ,  his  eloquence)  (from  Tully.") 

1.  "  He  learned  his  argu?nents," 

A  plenary  unbroken  trone  of  the  exoteric  limitory,  induabl^ 
zerotory. 

2.  '''from  Aristotle^^ 

A  plenary  unbroken  clad,  exoteric  limitory,  gnomologue  indutory. 

This  clad  is  of  the  exoteric  limitory  because  the  word,  Aristotle, 
must  be  associated  with  the  syllabane,  Aristotle's  works.  Indeed  the 
word,  Aristotle,  is  used  for  this  syllabane.  But  even  was  this  clad 
not  thrown  into  the  exoteric  class  of  monos  upon  this  principle,  it 
would  still  be  of  this  limitory.  For  the  question  which  would 
naturally   arise  respecting   the   identity   of  the  Aristotle  to  whom 


INDUOLOGY    OP    MONOS.  75 

allusion  is  here  made,  must  be  answered  by  something  which  i3  out 
of  the  poetrone.  From  what  Aristotle  did  he  learn  his  arguments  1 
He  learned  them  from  Aristotle  who  was  an  ancient  Greek  philosopher, 

3.  and         ,  ,         his  eloquence" 

An  implenary  unbroken  clad,  of  the  esoteric  limitory,  uninduablc 
zerotory. 

4.  of  Tulii/y" 
A  plenary  unbroken  clad,  of  the  exoteric  limitory,  gnomologue 
indutory. 

3.  ["  It  is  not  my  sword]  (that  can  help  me.'*) 

1.  "  //  is  not  my  sword^^ 

A  i^enary  unbroken  trone  of  the  esoteric  limitory,  merologue 
indutory. 

The  sword  is  a  mere  part  of  the  weapons  of  defence  in  war — and 
this  part  is  here  put  for  aU. 

2.  " that  can  help  me" 
A  plenary  unbroken  clad  of  the  diteric  limitory,  induable  zerotory. 
This  mono  is  limited,  in  part,  by  sword^  in  the  cormotene. 

3.  ["  Canst  thou  draw  out  Leviathan"]  (with  gi 
hookP^O 

1.  "  Canst  thou  draw  out  Leviathan," 

A  plenary  unbroken  trone  of  the  exoteric  limitory,  cathiselogue 
indutory. 

2,  ^^with  a  hook^^ 
A  plenary   unbroken  clad  of  the  esoteric  limitory,  unindwMt 
zerotory. 

5.  [<<What        ,  is  more  odious]  (than  labor 

,   ,        )  (to  the  idle         ,        ,)  (         ,        ,        , 

;:      ,        ,         y  )  (         ,        fasting         ,         , 

(ia  the  glutton,)  (  ,        ,        ,        ,        ,        ,       ) 

(        ,        want  ,        )  (to  the  covetous        , 

:>)(  >  5  J  >  5  ?  )(  J 

shame        ,        )  (to  the  proud        ,        ,)  (and        , 
,        ,        ,        ,        )(        ,        good  laws    ,  ) 
(to  the  wicked        ,        .") 

1.  "  What        ,         is  more  odious," 

An  implenary  unbroken  trone  of  the  self  limitory,  antilogus 
indutory. 

2.  "  than  labor        ,         ) 
An  implenary  unbroken  clad  of  the  self  limitory,  antilogue  indutory 


76  INDUOLOOY   OF   MONOS. 

3.  "  to  the  idle"         j         )> 

An   imfrfenary   unbroken   elad   of  the   self  limitory,  uninduM^ 

zcrotory.  •( 

^*    (  >  J  >  >  ?  ^  ) 

A  plenary  unbroken  clad  of  the  self  limitory,  antilogue  indutory, 

5.  (         ,        fasting         ,         ), 

All  implenary  unbroken  clad  of  the  »«!/ limitory,  a»fifog7#«  indutory. 

Learner, 
Give  the  Syndiecology  of  the  following  rnonoi 
according  to  the  preceding  specimen. 


1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 


TVhat        ,        is  more  odiousj 
than  labor        ,         ), 
to  the  idle        ,         ), 


> 


,       fasting 
to  the  glutton,) 

>  }  9  9 

,        want         ,        ), 
to  the  covetous        ,        ), 

y  y  }  y  >  >  / 

,        shame        ,         )» 
to  the  proud        ,         ), 
and        ,        9        ,        y        ,..  ,,  \ 
to  the  wicked        ,        ), 

,        good  laws        ,        .) 


REMARKS. 

Before  referring  the  pupil  to  Exercises  in  other 
books,  I  deem  it  a  duty  to  say  that  nothing  but  a 
thorough  drilling  in  syndiecology,  can  give  that 
knowledge  of  the  English  Language,  which  is  abso^ 
lutely  necessary  to  enable  one  to  use  it  with  ease,  and 
propriety. 

Exercises  in  Syndi  cology.    *''"'  ^'  *  •^• 

1.  Take  the  various  Exercises  in  book  i. 

2.  Take  the  following  portions  of  the  scriptures  ; 
1.  Kings  xvii.  1.     1.  Samuel  xvii.  6,  7.     Gen.  vii. 

*  The  noetons  are,  and  what  thing  h  more  odiou*. 


INDUOLOGT    OF    MONOS.  77 

7.  Isa.  iv.  1.  Matt.  x.  30,  24,  20.  Acts  xxiv.  26. 
Matt.  xxvi.  15.  1.  Kings  xii.  10.  Isa.  ii.  9.  Luke 
vii.  44.  Matt.  xxi.  3.  John  xi.  3, 12,  28.  Matt.  viii. 
20.  and  ix.  6.  Gen.  xlviii.  16  Exodus  iii.  2.  Isa. 
Ixiii.  9.  Gen.  xxxi.  2.  Dan.  xi.  22.  Gen.  iii.  15. 
Hebrews  xxii.  24.  I  Kings  x.  4.  Hagg.  i.  9.  Jer. 
viii.  15.  Ecclesiastes  i.  8.  Hab.  ii.  11.  Lam  i.  4. 
Matt.  iii.  11.     Ps.  Ixxx.  8. 


7* 


.j^  CONMCTION. 


CHAPTER  III. 

COKDIGTIOIf. 


Condiction  is  that  part  of  Syndicology,  which  respects 
the  injport  of  monos.     (Con,  together^  and  Dictio,  speech.) 

Diction  is  the  expression  of  thoughts. 

There  is  a  difference  between  the  diction  of  words,  a»d  the  sig- 
nificaiion  of  words.  Signification  respects  the  mere  pouter  of  a 
word  to  raise  an  idea  in  the  mind;  but  diction  respects  the  «rer- 
Hon  of  that  power  in  the  act  of  raising  an  idea  in  the  mind.  For 
instance,  a  certain  word  has  the  significant  power  to  raise  a  par- 
ticular idea  in  the  mindy  but,  then,  this  power  is  not  exerted,  in  the 
raising  of  this  idea,  till  the  certain  word  which  has  this  power,  is 
written,  or  spoken.  Let  this  be  illustrated  in  the  expression  of 
some  word  which  you  have  not  in  your  mind  at  the  this  moment: 
for  instance,  ear. 

This  word  had  the  power  of  raising  in  your  mind,  the  idea  of 
the  organ  of  hearing, before  you  saw  the  word — but  it  did  mil  exert 
this  power  till  you  saw  the  word.  The  poxver  itself  is  significa- 
tion :  but  the  eaeertion  of  the  power  is  denominated  diction. 

Diction  is  the  expression  of  thoughts.     Or, 

Diction  is  the  expression  of  separate  thoughts,  and  eon- 
fleeted  thoughts,  and  finally  of  information,  intelligence. 

There  are  three  kinds  of  diction  ;  namely, 

1.  .^^diction ;  2.  Condiction ;  and,  3.  Cardietion.* 

1.  w^6diction  is  that  act  of  words,  which  presents  thoughts 
as  separate^  as, pen,  moon,  ice,  new,  reads,  walks,  in,  at,  to, 

2.  Candiction  is  that  act  of  words,  which  presents 
thoughts  as  connected^  as,  new  pen,  in  ice,  moon  light 
night,  at  church. 

3.  Cordietioa  is  the  information,  the  inteUigenee,  which 
the  mono  gives  ;  a?, 

1.  [John  went]  [to  Boston.) 

2.  [Go  thou}  (to  Boston,)  (John.) 

3.  (Gentlemen,)  [will  John  go]  (to  Boston  ?) 

4.  [John  will  see  his  friends,]  (if  he  goes)  (fe>  Boston^) 

5.  [Forgive  thou  our  sins.] 

*  A  cordiction  differs  from  a  poefene  .*  a  cordiction  embraces  the 
poetene,  and  the  information  given  by  means  of  the  poetene.  But 
a  poetene  embraces  the  mere  abstract  affirmation,  the  abstract  in- 
ierrogation,  the  abstract  command^  the  abstract  petition,  or  the  a^ 
struct  subfirmation^ 


'^ICONDICTION  OF  NBPOECLADS.  79 

1.  [John  went]  (to  Boston.) 

Cordiction  is  the  information  which  the  mono  gives. 
The  cordictioii  of  this  sentence,  then,  is  confined  to  the 
trone.  The  trone  not  only  informs  the  reader  that  John 
wenfj  but  it  informs  him  that  he  went  to  Boston,  From  a 
slight  glance  at  this  subject,  however,  it  may  seem  to  some 
that  the  nepoeclad  gives  information,  and  that,  therefore, 
the  diction  of  this  mono  also  is  cordiction,  information  dic- 
tion. But  what  information  does  this  nepoeclad  impart?  It 
does  not,  as  from  a  first  view  it  seems  to  do,  inform  the 
reader  where  John  went.  The  word,  Boston,  raises  in  the 
mind  of  the  reader,  the  idea  of  a  place,  a  town,  a  city  ;  but 
it  does  not  inform  the  reader  that  any  person  ever  went  to 
this  place,  this  town  !  This  may  be  seen  from  the  omis- 
sion of  the  trone : 

[  ]  (to  Boston.) 

The  philosophy  of  the  thing  seems  to  be  this :  the  word, 
Boston,  denotes  a  place  ;  and  the  trone,  "  John  went,^  in- 
forms the  reader  that  John  went  to  this  certain  place.  The 
word,  Boston,  is  employed  to  hold  up  this  certain  town 
before  the  mind;  and  the  words,  ^^John  went,^^  are  con- 
nected, and  employed,  to  inform  the  reader  of  the  fact  that 
John  visited  this  particular  place. 

2.  [Go  thou]  (to  Boston,)  (John.) 

The  information  which  is  communicated  in  this  sentence, 
is  communicated  to  John.  This  information  is  the  cordic- 
tion of  the  sentence,  and  is  given  in  the  trone,  "  Go  thou.^* 
This  mono  informs  John  that  he  must  go  to  Boston.  The 
trone,  then,  is  the  only  mono  which  contains  a  cordiction. 
That  the  two  nepoeclads  express  thought3,  and  connected 
thoughts,  is  obvious.  These  connected  thoughts,  however, 
amount  to  nothing  more  than  mere  condiction  which  can 
never  give  information,  intelligence.  These  two  monos 
do  not  rise  to  cordiction,  because  they  do  not  give  informor 
tion  which  is  the  heart,  the  life,  the  sole  object  of  speech. 
•**  To  Boston,^^  gives  no  information ;  nor  does  the  word, 
John,  impart  any  intelligence.  But  the  mono,  "  Go  thou,^^ 
does  give  information :  it  informs  John  that  he  must  not 
only  go,  but  that  he  must  go  to  Boston  : 

[Go  thou]  (to  Boston,)  (John.) 

3.  (Gentlemen,)  [will  John  go]  (to  Boston?) 


et)  OONDICTION    OP   NEPOECLADS. 

The  trone  informs  the  gentlemen  addressed,  that 
the  speaker  desires  them  to  inform  him  whether  John  will, 
or  will  not  go  to  Boston.  If  the  word,  gentlemen^  should 
be  omitted,  all  who  read  the  sentence  would  be  informed  by 
the  trone  of  the  fact  that  the  speaker  desires  to  know 
whether  John  will,  or  whether  he  will  not  go,  to  Boston : 
ITVill  John  go]  (to  Boston  ?) 

Here,  whoever  reads  is  informed  that  the  speaker  desires 
to  know  whether  the  act  which  now  stands  connected  with 
Jahn  and  Boston^  in  idea  only,  will  have  a  future  reality. 
The  speaker  may  inform  the  readers  of  his  desire  in  the 
following  form : 

Reader,  I  desire  to  know  of  you  whether  John  will  go  to 
Bjston. 

ITfill  John  go]  (to  Boston  ?) 

There  is  another  point  which  deserves  particular  atten- 
tion :  and  this  point  is  the  fact  that  the  information,  the  in- 
telligence, given  in  the  whole  sentence,  is  imparted  by  the 
joint  action  of  the  two  words,  will  and  John.  The  word, 
go  J  gives  no  information  :  *'  TVill  John  "  raises  the  ques- 
tion which  informs  the  reader  of  the  fact  that  the  speaker 
desires  to  know  whether  John  will  go  to  Boston.  The  in- 
formation which  is  communicated  to  the  reader,  is  the  fact 
that  the  speaker  has  this  special  desire.  This  fact  is  com' 
municated  by  the  simple  question  which  is  raised  by  the 
two  words,  "  Will  John.^^ 

.  "  Go"  is  the  sign  of  an  action — and  it  is  here  used,  not 
to  inform  the  reader  that  the  speaker  has  a  desire  of  any 
kind,  but  simply  to  connect  an  action  in  idea,  with  John,  and 
Boston.  Yes,  the  condiction  presents  an  action  in  idea, 
which  extends  from  John  to  Boston — and  the  cordiction 
informs  the  reader  that  the  speaker  has  a  desire  to  ascertain 
whether  this  condiction  of  mere  ideas  will  ever  have  a 
reality. 

The  cordiction  is  not  only  confined  to  two  words  in  the 
interrogative  form  of  giving  information,  but  in  the  affirma- 
tive form  also : 

1.  [Will  John  go]  (to  Boston?) 

2.  [John  will  go]  (to  Boston,) 

In  the  first,  information  is  given  that  the  speaker  desires 
to  ascertain  whether  John  will  visit  Boston. 


CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS,  81 

In  the  second,  information  is  given  that  John  will  go  to 
Boston.  And  both  items  of  information  are  given  by  willf 
and  John.  The  reader  is  informed  respecting  the  speaker's 
desire  by  placing  will  before  John,  {Will  John).  And  the 
speaker  is  informed  respecting  the  fact  which  he  desires  to 
know,  by  placing  ^^wilV^  after  '■'•  John.''^ 

4.  "  [John  will  see  his  friends]    (if  he  goes)  (to 
Boston.") 

In  the  trone  the  speaker  informs  the  reader  that 
John  will  see  his  friends.     John  will. 

In  the  poeclad,  "  if  he  goes"  the  speaker  informs  the 
reader  that,  the  condition  upon  which  John  will  see  his 
friends,  is  that  he  must  go  to  Boston. 

5.  *'  Forgive  thou  our  sins.'* 

Here  the  being  addressed  is  informed  that  we  desire  him 
to  forgive  our  sins.  This  information  is  imparted  by  the 
two  words,  *'  Forgive  thou.'^  And  as  the  cordiction  is  the 
information  which  the  mono  g^ives,  the  cordiction  of  this 
mono  lies  in  the  two  words,  "  Forgive  thou."  But  it  may 
be  said  that  '*  our  sins"  are  necessary  to  the  giving  of  this 
information.  This  fact  is  admitted.  But  it  does  not  follow 
that  because  these  two  words  are  necessary  to  the  giving  of 
this  particular  information,  that  these  words  give  this  infor- 
mation ;  nor  does  it  thence  follow  that  they  give  any  part  of 
this  information.  A  head  is  necessary  to  an  eye — but  it 
does  not  thence  follow  that  a  head  sees,  or  that  the  head  has  the 
power  of  vision.  Breath  is  necessary  to  life — yet  it  does 
not  follow  that  breath  is  life.  A  pen  is  necessary 
to  write — yet  it  does  not  follow  that  the  pen  itself  actually 
writes.  It  may  be  well  to  repeat  the  sentence : 
*'  Forgive  thou  our  sins." 

What  is  the  information  imparted  by  this  mono  ?.  The 
information  communicated  in  this  mono,  is  that  we  have  a 
desire  to  have  the  being  addressed,  to  forgive  our  sins.  Upon 
a  cursory  glance  at  ihis  sentence  every  thing  appears  so 
clear  that  no  particular  attention  is  necessary  to  a  full  appre 
hension  of  its  entire  philosophy.  The  sentence,  however, 
is  not  so  simple  in  its  philosophy  as  it  seems  to  be  from 
such  a  glance.  It  becomes  important,  then,  to  give  minute 
attention  to  it.  In  giving  this  attention,  it  may  be  well  to 
consider  words  in  the  first  place  both  in  their  general,  and 


82  CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS. 

in  their  special^  or  restrained  application.  For  instance: 
The  word,  John,  has  its  unrestricted,  and  its  restricted 
application.  Under  its  unrestricted  application,  the  word, 
John,  means  every  John  in  the  universe  ;  as,  John. 

But  the  word,  John,  under  its  restricted  application,  does 
not  mean  every  John ;  as,  that  John,  my  John,  John 
Bacon. 

Where  there  is  no  word  restrained  in  its  application, 
speech  is  not  even  begun  j  as,  hook,  pen,  kite,  virtue,  vice, 
red,  black,  in,  my,  forgive. 

This  is  mere  addiction  :  a  presentation  of  separate,  un 
connected,  thoughts. 

But  where  a  word  can  be  found  which  is  in  any  degree 
restrained  in  its  application,  speech  is  begun  :  as,  this  hook, 
my  pen,  his  kite,  virtue  of  plants,  vice  of  men,  red  ink, 
black  ink,  in  water,  my  hat,  io  forgive  Joseph. 

This  is  condiction.  Speech  has  its  commencement  in 
condiction,  but  its  perfection  in  cordiction,  in — informa- 
tion; as.  Forgive  thou  our  sins. 

The  word,  forgive,  as  here  used,  is  restricted  :  it  means 
here  a  particular  act.  In  the  first  place  it  is  restrained  to 
the  forgiving  act  of  the  Supreme  Being :  the  word  as  here 
used  does  not  apply  to  the  forgiving  act  of  m,en — since 
men  cannot  forgive  sins.  The  word,  forgive,  is  farther  re- 
strained in  its  application  by  the  word,  sins.  The  for  giving 
act  to  which  the  word,forgive,  is  here  applied,  is  confined 
to  sins:  the  act  is  removed  from  debts,  and  from  every  other 
thing  which  can  be  forgiven.  And  this  forgiving  act  is 
farther  restrained  by  the  word,  our :  this  act  of  forgiving  is 
removed  from  all  sins  except  those  which  have  been  com- 
mitted by  the  very  persons  who  make  this  petition : 
*'  Forgive  Thou  our  sins." 

Now,  then,  this  very  act — the  act  which  is  restricted  to 
the  Supreme  Being  as  its  agent,  and  to  our  sins  as  its  sub- 
ject, is  the  act  which  we  desire  to  have  performed.  And 
what  is  it  which  informs  him  who  is  addressed,  of  the  fact 
that  there  is  any  desire  in  existence  to  have  this  special,  this 
identical,  act  performed  ?  Is  this  information  given  by  the 
condiction,  *'  our  sins  .^"  "  Our  sins  "  aids  in  restricting 
the  act — '*  oursins,^^  however,  does  not  give  any  intimation 
that  there  exists  a  desire  to  have  this  z.ct performed. 


rovUTCTION   OF   NEPOECLADS.  83 

The  information  which  this  mono  gives  is  the  intelhgence 
of  the  fact  of  the  existence  of  this  desire.  This  intelligence 
is  the  cordiction,  and  is  given  by  the  joint  action  of  the 
words,  "  Forgive  Thou." 

6.  ''John  is  dead.'' 

1.  **  John  '*  denotes  a  human  being — but  this  word  gives 
no  information. 

2.  ''Dead''  denotes  a  state — but  this  word  gives  no  in- 
formation.    But, 

'*  John  is  dead  "  informs  the  reader  that  this  state  of  dsat*, 
belongs  to  John.     This  information  is  the  cordiction. 

1.  Condiction  is  found  in  every  mono. 

2.  Cordiction  is  found  in  the  trone,  and  poe- 
clad  only.  The  nepoeclad  can  give  no  information  : 
it  consists  of  condiction  only.  Information,  as  the  word 
cordiction  indicates,  {cor,  the  heart,)  is  the  life,  the  heart  of 
speech. 

From  information. 
All  speech  emanates ; 
In  information. 
All  speech  terminates. 
Condiction,  without  this, 
Could  not  to  speech  pretend ; 
Condiction,  but  for  this. 
Is  diction  to  no  end. 
Body,  without  the  heart, 
Could  not  to  life  aspire ; 
So  words  without  this  part 
Gould  give  no  mind's  desire, 

1 .  To  dbdict  is  to  express  thoughts  in  an  unconnected 
state  ;  as,  hook,  hand,  in. 

2.  To  condict  is  to  express  thoughts  in  a  connected  state ; 
as,  my  600A:,  in  hand. 

3.  To  cordict  is  to  express  information,  the  only  thing 
which  moves  the  mind  to  speak ;  as,  my  hooik fell. 

All  words  have  the  addictive,  and  the  condictive  power 
But  all  have  not  the  cordictive. 


f^.^M  '       ■        "^^ 


84  CONDIOTION  OP  NEPOECLADS. 

I.  Division  of  the  Cordiction. 
1.  Affirniative  "^ 


2.  Subfirmative 

3.  Interrogative 

4.  Imperative 

5.  Petitionative^ 


>C0RDICTI0N. 


A    DiCATORY. 

A  dicatory,  as  has  been  said  already,  is  a  class  to  which 
monos  are  referred  upon  the  basis  of  their  diction.  There 
are  two  general  Dicatories,  viz.     Cordicatory,  and  Con- 

DICATORY. 

1.  A  cordicatory  is  a  class  to  which  monos  are  referred 
upon  the  basis  of  their  cordiction. 

2.  A  condicatory  is  a  class  to  which  monos  are  referred 
upon  the  basis  of  their  condiction. 

I.  Subdivision  of  the  Cordicatory. 
There  are  five  kinds  of  cordicatorieSf  namely,  Affirma- 
tivCt  Subfirmative,  Interrogative,  Imperative,  Petitiona- 
tive. 

1.  The  affirmative  Cordicatory  is  that  class  which  is  com 
posed  of  monos  that  contain  affirmative  cordictions. 

2.  The  subfirmative  Cordicatory  is  that  class  which  is 
composed  of  those  monos  that  contain  subfirmative  cordic- 
tions. 

3.  The  interrogative  Cordicatory  is  a  class  which  is 
composed  of  those  monos  that  contain  interrogative  coxd^ic- 
tions. 

4.  The  imperative  Cordicatory  is  a  class  which  is  com- 
posed of  those  monos  that  contain  imperative  cordictions. 

5.  The petitionative  Cordicatory  is  a  class  which  is  com- 
posed of  those  monos  that  contain  petitionative  cordictions. 

Division  of  Condiction. 
Condiction  is  divided  into, 

1.  Rudiction. 

2.  E-diction. 

3.  Ex-e-diction. 

1.  Rudiction  is  that  part  of  Condiction,  which  is 
the  rudimental,  the  radical,  idea,  from  which  another 
thought  springs,  or  upon  which  another  thought  de- 
pends. (Latin.  Rudimentum,  original,  primary,  root, 
first  principle.) 


CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS.  85 

2.  E-diction, 
E-diction  is  that  part  of  Condiction,  which,  in  some 
sense  or  other,  springs  from,  or  goes  beyond  Rudiction, 
(E,  springing  out  of,  or  going  beyond.) 
3.  Ea:-e-dictio7i, 
Ex-e-diciion  is  that  part  of  Condiction,  which,  in 
some  sense,  or  other,  springs  from,  or  goes  beyond 
c-diction.     [Ex,  springing  out  of,  or  going  beyond.) 

Illustration, 

1.  "He  was  troubled  [at  this  report.^^) 

2,  "Henry  is  now  (at  the  law") 

1.  The  rudimental  idea  in  the  condiction  of  both  nepoeclads,  is  that 
of  place.     He  is  at  the  door. 

This  local  idea  is  the  Rudiction. 

2.  The  idea  of  presence  which  is  obviously  a  part  of  the  condiction 
of  both  nepoeclads,  not  only  springs  from  the  rudiction^  but  actually 
goes  beyond  it.  The  idea  of  presence  is  not  necessarily  connected 
with  that  o? place;  as,  "John  is  beyond  the  mark."  (Here  John  is 
not  in  the  presence  of  the  mark.) 

John  was  {present)  (at  church.) 

"He  was  troubled  {at  this  report.") 

That  is,  when  this  report  came  into  his  presence^  he  was  troubled. 
Or — while  he  was  in  the  presence  of  this  report,  he  was  troubled. 

3.  The  trouble  which  he  had,  sprang  out  of  the  presence  of  "  this 
report."  The  presence  of  the  report,  was  a  cause :  the  presence  pro- 
duced the  trouble.  The  report  would  not  have  given  him  trouble,  had 
it  not  come  into  his  presence.  This  causative  idea,  then,  is  not  only 
derived  from  the  e-diction,  the  presence,  but  actually  goes  a  step  be- 
yond  it.  Hence  this  idea  of  cause,  which  springs  from,  and  goes  be- 
yond, the  presence,  is  the  jEx-e-diction. 

1.  Rudiction — the  idea  of  place.  1 

2.  £-diction — the  idea  of  presence.  >      {at  this  report.) 

3.  JSx-e-diction — the  idea  of  cause.  j 

1.  "  He  was  troubled  [at  this  report.^^) 

Remark. 

That  the  pupil  may  be  exercised  in  the  analysis  of  the  condictions 
of  nepoeclads,  I  shall  give  three  places,  or  classes  to  which  each  ne- 
poeclad  may  be  referred  in  the  order,  and  upon  the  basis,  of  the  three 
parts  of  its  condiction. 

(The  three  parts — Rudiction,  E-diction,  Ex-e-diction.^        8 


8^t 


CONDICTION   OP   NEFOECLADS. 


These  places,  or  classes  are, 

1.  Rudicatory. 

2.  E-dicatory. 

3.  Ex-e-dicatory. 

1.  Rudicatory. 

The  liudicatory  is  a  class  to  which  a  nepoeclad  is 
referred  upon  the  basis  of  its  rudiction. 

2.  E-dicatory 

The  edicatory  is  a  class  to  which  a  nepoeclad  is 
referred  upon  the  basis  of  its  ediction. 
3.  Ex-e-dicatory, 

The  exedicatory  is  a  class  to  which  a  nepoeclad  is 
referred  upon  the  basis  of  its  exediction. 

These  three  Dicatories  are  subdivided  by  the  use 
of  technicals  which  express  the  traits  of  Rudicative, 
E-dicative,  and  Ex-edicative,  character. 

1.  The  Rudicatory  is  divided  into  Local,  •Adver- 
sative, Causative,  Sotcrcitive,  Conjunctive,  Detrac- 
tive,  Continuative,  Themitive,  Exclusive,  Charac- 
teristic, Auditive,  and  Passionative. 

2.  The  Edicatory  is  divided  into  Positional,  Ap 
proximate.  Presence,  Themitive,  Vocational,  Frank, 
Independence,  Plus  8fC. 

3.  The  Exedicatory  is  divided  into  Elevative,  Ex- 
cessive, Pride,  Preferal,  Superiority,  Compensative, 
Contradictive,  Preventive,  Resistive,  Conducive, 
Partial,  Service,  Procurative,  Proprius,  Sourcitive, 
Adversative,  Positional,  Minus,  and  Subjectional. 

(See  the  table  in  which  the  subdivisions  of  each 
Dicatory  are  methodically  presented.) 

Specimen, 
1.  "He  was  troubled  {at  this  report.'') 

(at  this  report,) 
A  plenary  unbroken  nepoeclad  of  the  Local  RudicvLioxjy  Presence 
Edicatory,  Causative  Exedicatory. 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS.  '        87 


APPKOPBIATIOIT    OP   IMOKOS. 

The  appropriation  of  monos  is  the  referring  of  the 
monos  of  a  poetrone  to  their  respective  classes,  or  places,  by 
applying  to  them  their  respective  Syn-dic-o-log-ic-al  namesv 

SPECIMEN. 

"(By  grace)  [are  ye  saved]  (     ,     ,     )  (through  faith.") 

1.  Are  ye  saved, 
A  plenary  unbroken  trone,  of  the  affirmative  cordicatory. 

2.  by  grace, 

A  plenary,  unbroken  nepoeclad,  of  the  local  rudicatory,  instrumen. 
tal  edicatory. 

Gnometic  reading  ;  [Ye  are  saved]  {by  grace.  ) 

3.  which  Cometh, 

A  plenary,  unbroken  poeclad,  affirmative  cordicatory. 

Gnometic  reading :  (By  grace)  (which  cometh.) 

4,  through  faith, 

A  plenary,  unbroken  nepoeclad,  local  rudicatory,  medium  edicatory. 

Gnometic  reading:  (which  cometh)  (through faith.) 
[Ye  are  saved]  (by  grace)  (which  cometh)  (through 
faith 

Doctrine. — Grace  is  the  instriunent  or  means  by  which  ye  are 
saved;  s.nd  faith  is  the  medium  through  which  the  grace  comes.  We 
procure  the  instrument  which  is  employed  in  this  saving  act,  by 
another  instrument  whi^h  is  called  faith. 

The  idea  may  be  better  seen  from  the  following : 

(By  books)  [are  ye  instructed]  (  ,         >  ) 

(through  the  press.) 

That  is, 

(By  books)  [ye  are  instructed,]  (which  come) 
(through  the  press.) 

[Ye  are  instructed]  (by  books)  (which  come) 
(through  the  press.) 

1.  (By  grace)  [are  ye  saved,]  (through  faith.) 

2.  (By  books)  [are  ye  instructed,]  (through  the 
press.) 


88 


NEPOECLAD   CONDICTION, 


NEPOECLAD   CONDICTION. 


The  condiction  of  those  nepoe- 
clads  which  commence  with  uboutf 
is  fully  illustrated  in  the  instances 
that  follow  "  about.'' 


1.  The  belt  was - 

2.  "  Bind  them    - 

3.  It  was  six  feet 

4.  "  Get  you  up  from  - 

5.  They  were  sitting   - 

6.  "  He  went  out 

7.  "  Paul  was     - 

"  To  open  his  mouth' 

8.  «  They  were 

9.  They  were  then 

1 0.  Every  thing    - 

11.  They  stood    - 

12.  His  knife  was  not  - 

13.  My  father  is  - 

14.  I  was  speaking 

15.  He  was  reading 

16.  «I  must  be     - 

17.  James  was  then 

18.  John  is  now   - 


19.  He  is  wandering 

20.  Why  go  ye     - 

21.  Scatter  the  sands     - 


Mout, 

L  Local  Rudicatory. 

II.    PoSITIOISrAL  E-DICATOBT. 

(about  his  waist.) 
(about  thy  neck.") 
(about  the  trunk.) 

II.  Approximate         E-dicatort. 
(about  the  tabernacle.") 
(about  the  fire.) 
(about  the  third  hour.") 
(about  to  open  his  mouth.") 

the  nepoecorm  of  about. 
(about  to  flee  out)  of  the  ship." 
(about  sixty  men.) 
(about  you)  is  in  order. 

II.  Presence  E-DiCAxoBr. 

(about  the  room.) 
(about  him.) 
(about  the  house.) 

II./rHEMITIVE  E-DICATORT. 

(about  my  brother's  house.) 
(about  General  Washington.) 

II.    VOCATIOHTAL  E-DICATORT. 

(about  my  father's  business.") 
(about  his  work.) 
(about  his  writing.) 

II.  Erratic  E-dicatort, 

(about  ,  f)  from  place  to  place. 
(about  ,  ,)  to  injure  me. 
(about  ,  ,) 


CO^DICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 


89 


The  condiction  of  those  nepoe- 
clads  which  begin  with  above,  is 
illustrated  in  the  instances  which 
follow  " above" 


Above. 


I.  Local 


Rudicatory. 

E-DICATOKT. 


E- 


SICjLTOBT 


E-DICATORT. 


E-DICATOBT. 


11. 
12. 

13. 

15. 
16. 


II.  Positional 
(above  his  head.) 
(above     ,     ,     .) 
(above  me.) 
II.  Fkank 
(above  boatd.) 

II.    IXDEPEITDBITT 

(above  board.) 
•II.  Plus 

•  (above  an  hour.) 

•  (above  the  sun*s  brightness.) 

•  (above  five  hundred  brethren.) 

•  (above  six  pounds.) 

•  (above  many     ,     .) 
*III.  Elevative  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 

(above  mean  actions.) 
(above  disguise.) 
*III.  Excessive  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 

•  (above  measure.) 
*III.  Pride  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 

■     (above  his  business.) 

•  (above  himself.) 
*III.  Preference  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 

•  (above  all  other  things.) 
-     (above  all     ,     ,     .) 

*III,  Superiority  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 
"  The  Lord  thy  God  will 

set  thee      -         .         -     (above  all  nations.") 
The  law  should  be  -        -     (above  all  men.) 


1.  My  hand  was 

2.  The  powers  which  are 

3.  Henry  then  went    - 

1.  His  conduct  was 

2.  They  now  live 

3.  They  wrote  copies  - 

4.  The  light  was 

5.  He  was  seen  by 

6.  The  weight  is  now  - 

7.  Hannaniah  feared  God 


8.  This  man  is   - 

9.  A  real  gentleman  is 

10.  They  gave  stripes   - 


He  is  now 

Indeed  he  is  almost 

Give  me  peace 
But 


The  condiction  of  those  nepoe- 
clads  which  begin  with  after,  is 
illustrated  in  the  monos  which 
follow  this  nepoeclide. 


I.  Local 


After. 

Rndicatory. 


1.  These  men  stood  one 

2.  He  came 


8* 


II.    POSITIONAI. 

(after  another.) 
(after  me.) 


E-DICATORT. 

Behind. 
Behind,   ^^   •' 


90 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 


1.  He  was  named 

2.  He  made  this  machine 

3.  Did  he  cut  his  coat  - 


4.  John,  have  you  come 

5.  I  will  send  an  officer 

6.  I  have  now  come     - 

7.  "  Ye  shall  not  go    - 

-  8.  They  walk     - 
9.  They  judge    - 
10.  Does  he  consider  things 


II.  Imcitiative  E-bicatobt. 

(after  his  uncle.) 
(after  that  model.) 
(after  mine  ?) 

II.  Objective  E-dica.tobt 

(after  your  book  ?) 
(after  you.) 
(after  the  papers.) 
(after  other  gods.*') 

II.   ACCOKDAS-T  E-DICATOaX. 

(after  the  flesh.)  .^^  .  , 

(after  the  sight.)  ' 

(after  their  real  value  ?) 


II.  The  UiccLEAirsED  Thitj-g 

E-niCATORT. 

U.  Can  you  drink        -        -     (after  me?) 

That  is,  can  you  drink  from  the  same  glass  from  which  I  have 
drunk,  without  Jirst  cleansing  it. 

Note. — Where  after  denotes  time,  it  is  not  a  nepoclide,  but  a  nepeo- 
ded;  as,  I  will  go  after  supper.  That  is,  [I  will  go  after]  (supper 
is  over.)  ^ 


The  condiction  of  those  nepoe- 
clads  which  begin  with  acrossy  is 
illustrated  in  the  examples  fol- 
lowing this  nepoeclide. 


1.  He  went 

2.  We  looked     - 

3.  There  was  a  bridge 


Across. 

I  Local Rudioatory, '-'* 

II.    POSITIOKAI.  E-]>ICATOHI« 

i across  the  street.) 
across  the  river.) 
(across  the  stream.) 


Note. — Across  is  never  blank  in  its  Rudiction. 


Illustration  of  the  condiction 
of  the  nepoeclads  which  begin 
with  amid,  and  amidst. 


1.  He  is  now      -        -        - 

2.  I  was     -         -         -         - 

3.  The  shepherd  was  - 

4.  How  could  I  comprehend 


Amid,  Amidst. 
I.  Local  Rudicatory 

II.    POSITIOBTAE  E-DICATORT. 

(amid  the  waves.) 
(amidst  the  shade.) 
(amidst  his  flock.) 
(amid  all  this  confusion  ?)    - 


CONDICTION   OF   NEPOECLADS. 


di 


Dlustration  of  the  condictiou 
of  the  nepoeclads  which  begin 
with  among,  and  amongst. 

''^'  1.  He  is  sending  agents 

2.  "  He  sends  his  blessings  - 

3.  He  immediately  went 

4.  And  he  is  now 

Illustration  of  the  condiction  of 
the  nepoeclads  which  begin  with 
aroundy  and  round. 

1.  There  was  a  belt  - 

i:  2.  They  all  sat  •-  -         - 

V  3.  He  has  sailed - 

4.  They  then  went 

5.  They  were  seated  - 

6.  The    mother   called   her 

children     -  - 

7.  They  are  now  strolling    - 

8.  They  rove      -        -         - 

9.  "  They  went  - 

10.  They  are  fond  of  riding  - 

Illustration  of  the  condiction 
of  the  nepoeclads  which  begin 
with  at. 


Among,  Amongst. 
I  Local  Rudicatory. 

II.  Distributive       E-dicatobt 
(among  his  friends.) 
(amongst  his  enemies.") 
(amongst  the  people.) 
(among  them.) 

Around,  Round, 

I.  Local  Rudicatory. 

II.    POSITIOITAL  E-DICATOar. 

(aronnd  his  waist.) 
(round  the  fire.) 
(round  the  world.) 
(around  the  hill.) 
(round  the  table.) 

(around  her.) 

n.  Erratic  E-dicatort. 

(around  the  country.) 
(round  the  world.)  ^ 

(around   ,  ,)  about  the  camp. ''^ 
(round     ,     ,     .) 

At,      (^Presence.) 

I.  Local  Rudicatory. 

*Il.  Presence  E-dicatobt. 

(at  church.) 
(at  the  trial.) 
(at  home.) 
(at  ease.) 


1.  John  was 

2.  I  was  (^present) 

3.  My  father  is  not 

4.  They  are  now 

That  is,  they  are  in  the  presence  of  ease. 

5.  They  are  now        -         -     (at  play.) 

6.  The  pen  is  now      -        -     (at  hand.) 

7.  He  was  then  -         -        -     (at  a  loss)  for  words. 

A  loss  for  words  was  present. 

8.  The  bill  was  to  be  paid    -     (at  sight.) 

9.  I  told  you  this         -         -     (at  first       ,       .) 

When  the  first  time  was  present,  I  told  you. 


92  CONDICTION   OF    NEPOECLADS 

10.  He  is  a  poor  tool    -        -     (at  best.) 

When  his  best  skiU  is  present,  he  is  only  a  poor  tool. 

11.  He  made  no  reply  -        -     (at  all     ,     )  to  them. 

That  is,  he  put  no  reply  into  their  presence,  to  all  that  passed,  or  to 
all  that  was  said. 

12.  He  aims         -        -        -     (at  this  mark.) 

•That  is,  his  aim,  or  direction  is  in  iki^  presence  of  this  mark   - 

13.  I  shall  not  be  there  -         -     (at  all  events.) 

That  is,  although  all  the  events  which  are  calculated  to  take  me 
there,  shmild  happen,  should  be  prestnU  should  come  up  before  me, 
still  I  shall  not  be  there. 

14.  He  purchased  the  gloves  -    (at  a  small  price.) 

A  price  is  a  mark  of  value :  there  are  various  price,  marks,  and 
sometimes  for  the  same  thing.  The  idea  is,  that  these  gloves  were 
put  into  the  presence  of  a  small  price  mark.  Where  did  the  gloves 
stand  at  the  time  of  his  purchase  1  That  is,  against  what  price  mark 
did  they  stand?     They  were  in  X\ie presence  of  a  lovr price  mark. 

15.  I  am      -        -         -        -     (at  your  service.) 

That  is,  I  am  in  i)[iQ  presence  of  your  service — I  am  not  absent  from 
your  service ;  but  present  with  it. 

16.  lam      -        -        -        -     (at  your  command.) 

That  is,  I  am  in  ihe  presence  of  your  command — ^I  am  in  the  presence 
of  your  command  to  yield  obedience  to  it.  The  idea  of  obedience  is 
inferred  from  the  declared  presence, 

17.  You  shall  return      -        -     (at  my  cost.) 

That  is,  my  cost,  my  money  shall  be  present  to  pay  the  charges  of 
your  return.  Or  my  money  shall  not  shrink  away,  but  shall  be  in  the 
presence  of  the  demand  which  may  be  made  of  you  for  your  return. 

18.  It  was  done    -        -         -     (at  his  suggestion.) 

That  is,  his  suggestion  was  present  in  the  character  of  a  caxtse,  and 
produced  this  act.  ^ 

19.  He  deserves  well    -         -    (at  our  hands.) 

That  is,  while  he  is  in  the  presence  of  us,  for  "our  hands^^  means 
us,  he  deserves  well.    Presence  here,  is  business,  or  concern  with. 

*III.  Cvusitive  Ex-e-dic-a-tory, 

20.  He  was  surprised    -        -     (at  this  statement.) 

That  is,  when  this  statement  came  into  his  presence,  it  caused 
surprise. 


CONDICTION   OF    NEPOECLADS. 


n 


21.  He  was  troubled 

22.  He  was  much  pleased 


23. 
24. 
25. 
26. 


He  is  now 
He  is  a  student 
He  is  good 
He  was  good  - 


27.  He  struck     .  r  .^  - 

28.  They  shot      ^^^^1        - 

29.  He  laughed    - 

30.  They  are        -         -        - 

31.  They  have  long  been 

32.  Texas  is 

33.  He  longs  to  be 

Illustration  of  the  condiction 
of  the  nepoeclads  which  begin 
with  athwart. 


1.  He    advanced    his     mis- 

created front 

2.  The  fleet  stood 

Illustration  of  the  condiction 
of  the  nepoeclads  which  begin 
with  before. 

1.  He  stood        -        -        . 

2.  He  is  not  behind,  but 

3.  "Wherewithal  shall  I  come 

4.  They  are  now 

5.  "  Abraham  bowed   - 

1.  "The  world  was  all 
That  is,  it  was  all  at  their  choice. 


-  (at  this  report.)  ^^  A 

-  (at  this  event.) 

*in.   Vocational  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 

-  (at  the  law.) 

-  (at  law.) 

-  (at  figures.) 

-  (at  engraving.) 

*ni.  Hostile  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 

-  (at  me.) 

-  (at  him.) 
*  (at  them.) 

-  (at  variance.) 

-  (at  swords'  points.) 

-  (at  war.) 

-  (at  him.) 

Athwart. 
I.  Local  Rudlcatory. 

II.  Positional  E-sicato&t. 


(athwart  my  way.) 
(athwart  our  course.) 

Before. 

I  Local  Rudlcatory. 

II.    POSITIOKAI.  E-1)ICAT011T. 

(before  his  desk.) 
(before  me.) 

II.  Preseitcb  E-dicatobt. 

(before  the  Lord.") 
(before  this  court.) 

*ni.  Respect  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 
(before  the  people)  oftheland." 
*in.  Choice  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 
(before  them.") 
Milton  here  puts  the  entire  world 

into  the  presence  of  our  first  parents,  with  the  power  to  select  such 

as  would  best  suit  them.         •   -  / 


94 


CONDICTION   OF   NEPOECLADS. 


He  that  cometh  after  me, 
is  preferred 


(before  me,)  [above  me] 
for  he  was  before  me 


1.  "  And  he  set  Ephraim     - 

2.  "  He  esteemed  virtue 

3.  "  Poverty  is  desirable 

Illustration  of  the  condiction 
of  the  nepoeclads  which  begin 
with  behind. 


The  syntax  of  this  verse  is  not  correct.  The  word,  after,  denotes 
time,  and  is  a  nepoecled,  not  a  nepoeclide,  not  a  preposition.  In  the 
second  instance,  the  word,  before,  means  time,  and  is  a  nepoecled,  not 
a  nepoeclide.    The  plerocorme,  me,  then,  should  give  place  to  1: 

[He  (that  cometh  after)  (I  come,)  is  preferred]  (6e/ore  me;)  (for 
he  was  before)  (1  was.)  When  before  means  place,  preference,  or  supe- 
riority, it  is  a  nepoeclide  ;  in  other  instances  it  is  a  nepoecled. 

II.  Pkefiebitce  E-dicatort. 

(before  Manasseh.") 
(before  gold.") 
(before  torments.") 

Behind, 
I.  Local  Rudicatory. 

II.   PoSITIOIfAI.  E-DICATOaT. 

(behind  me,)  Satan.''^ 
(behind  the  table.) 
(behind  that  tree.) 
(behind  me.) 
(behind     ,     .) 
(behind     ,     .) 

II.    StTB-ATTAIUMEKT  E-SICATORT. 

(behind  his  brother.)  >* 

(behind  my  class.) 

II.    StTBHAITK  E'SieATOKT. 

(behind  the  very  chiefest  apos- 
tles.") 

•II.    Slir-I-HEED  E-DICATOHT. 

(behind  their  back.")  Heb, 
xix.  Without  heed. 
Sin-i,  without. 

n.  Past  E-dicatort. 


1. 

«  Get  thee 

:  hKiC', 

.1-., 

2. 

The  book  lies 

3. 

He  sat  - 

- 

4. 

He  rode 

- 

5. 

He  rode 

- 

6. 

Look      - 

— 

1.  In  Syntithology  John  is 

2.  In  history  I  am 

3.  "  I  was  not  a  whit  - 


4.  "  They  cast  thy  laws 


5.  Forgetting    those    things 

which  are  -        -        - 

6.  We  should  not  forget  what 

is       -  _        -        - 


(behind     ,     .)     Phil,  iii. 
(behind     ,    .) 


CONDICTION   OP   NEPOECLADS.  95 

»    J    i:ii  ^u  *  11'  Future  E-dioatoby 

7    7.  "And    fill    up    that  ^.    . 

which  IS         -        -     (behind     ,     ,     )  of  the  afflictions 
of  Christ  in  my  flesh." 

8.  Alas !  we  do  not  know 

what  is  -        -     (behind     ,     .) 

9.  Is  there  much  evidence 

yet        -        -        -     (behind    ,     ?) 
l(h  We  know   not  what 

evidence  is    -        -     (behind     ,     .) 

II.  Deficit  E-dioatory. 

11.  There  is  a  small  sum  (behind     ,     ,     .J 

12.  There  are  sixty  dollars  (behind     ,     ,     .) 

II.  Antiabandonment  E-dica- 

13.  He  has  gone,  and  left  toby. 

us  -         -         -     (behind     ,     .) 

14.  ^e  went  there,  but  left 

us  -         -         -     (behind     ,     .) 

Note. — The  omission  of  behind  would  convey  the  idea  that  he  had 
abandoned  us,  totally  deserted  us. 

He  has  gone^  and  left  us. 

The  word,  behind,  is  a  preventive  against  the  idea  of  an  abandonment — 
hence  the  class  to  which  this  mono  is  referred,  is  denominated  antiaban- 
donment.  The  word,  behind,  in  cases  like  the  above,  shows  that  there 
is  not  an  abandonment  of  what  is  left,  by  the  leaver;  as,  I  have  left  my 
trunk  behind.  But,  then,  I  have  not  abandoned  it  even  so  far  as  this 
journey  is  concerned  ;  for,  by  the  word,  behind,  I  show  thai  I  expect  the 
trunk  will  be  conveyed  to  me.    The  trunk,  then,  is  not  abandoned  by  me^ 

I  went  to  New  York,  where  I  left  my  trunk,  and  proceeded 
to  Boston. 

The  idea  here  expressed,  is  that,  so  far  as  regards  my  journey  from 
New  York  to  Boston,  there  is  an  abandonment  of  my  trunk.  If,  however, 
the  nepoeclide,  behind,  should  be  inserted  after  the  poeclade,  left,  the 
sense  would  be  that  I  left  the  trunk  under  the  idea  that  it  would,  by  some 
means  or  other,  follow  me  to  Boston.  I  went  to  New  York,  where  I  left 
my  trunk  behind,  and  proceeded  to  Boston.  Behind  puts  the  trunk  on 
the  way,  on  the  road — and  why  should  it  be  put  upon  the  way  if  it  is  not 
to  follow  ?  Let  us  illustrate  the  use,  and  power  ofbehind,  in  putting  things 
on  their  way  to  places  :  "  Why  did  your  father  not  come  ?"  He  is  just 
behind."  "Ah!  he  is  coming,  then."  Behind  puts  things  on  their 
way  ;  and  consequently,  prevents  the  notion  of  an  abandonment. 

In  illustrating  the  word,  behind,  Mr.  Webster  says,  *'A  man  dies,  and 


CfONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 


leaves  his  estate  behind^'  But  as  there  is  no  Bible  doctrine  that  a 
maai's  property  follows  him  into  the  other  world;  it  is  not  right  in 
ifAeo/o^i/,  to  express  such  an  idea! 

A  man  dies,  and  leaves  his  estate. 
Illustration   of   the   condicliott  Below. 

of  the   nepoeclads   which   begin  _    t  «««.i  i>»^j^»«^.». 

with  below.  ^  ^ocal  Rudicatory. 

II.  Positional         E-DicAxoay. 
-     (below  the  heavens.) 


1. 
2. 
3. 
4. 
5. 

6. 

7. 
8. 
9. 

10. 
11. 
12. 


The  earth  is  - 
The  chin  is  - 
Man  lives 

Man  is  the  fairest  one 
He  hit   -        -        - 

The  water  is  - 
The  water  is  - 
He  purshased  it 
This  note  is    - 


(below  the  mouth.) 
(below     ,     ,     .) 
(below     ,     ,     .) 
(below  the  mark.) 

*II.  Minus         E^dicatokt 
(below  the  mark.) 
(below  the  banks.) 
(below  the  first  cost.) 
(below  par.) 
*III.   Subrank  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 
(below  me)  in  the  class. 
(below  a  captain.) 


He  is     -         -         - 

A  lieutenant  is 

He    appealed    from    the 

court  -         -         -     (below     ,     ,     .) 

[He  appealed]  (from  the  court)  (which  is)  (below  this  court.) 


Illustration  of  the  condiction 
of  the  nepoeclads  which  begin 
with  beneath. 

1.  He  stood         -         -         - 

2.  The  earth  is    - 

3.  He  had  a  cushion    - 

4.  The  earth  from 

5.  Has  he  conducted  - 

6.  This  act  is      - 

7.  He  was 


8,  They  will  sink 

9.  Did  Milo  sink 


Beneath. 
I.  Local  Rudicatory. 

II.  Positional         E-dicatory. 
(beneath  the  branch.)  under. 
(beneath  the  heavens.)  under. 
(beneath  him.)  under. 
(beneath     ,     .) 
II.  Unwoutht-of         E-bicatort 
(beneath  his  station  ?) 
(beneath  a  gentleman.) 
(beneath  her  notice.) 

*II.  Onkrous         E-dicatort 
(beneath  their  burden.) 
(beneath  the  ox)  which  he  car 
ried  on  his  back  ? 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS.  97 

li.  SUBRANK  E-DICATORY. 

10.  An  ox  ranks    -         -     (beneath  a  man.) 

11.  Man  is   -         -         -     (beneath  angels.) 

*  III.  Oppression  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 

12.  "Our  country  sinks     (beneath  the  yoke.") 

13.  We  have  sunk  -     (beneath  this  taxation.) 

14.  He  was  borne  down     (beneath  the  burden)  of  hU  sins. 

Illustration  of  the  condic-  Beside. 

tionofthe     oepoeclads  which  I.  Local  Ru-dicatory. 

begin  with  beside.  U^  Positional  E-dicatory. 

1.  He  sat    -         -         -  (beside  me.) 

2.They  were  seated      -  (beside  the  stream.) 

n.  Addition  E-dicatory. 

3.  -        -        -        -     (Beside  all  this),  there  is  a  great 
gulf  between  «s,  and  you. 

The  rich  man  makes  application  to  father  Abraham  for  mercy ;  and  in 
the  application  he  desires  Abraham  to  send  Lazarus  that  Lazarus  may  dip 
the  tip  of  his  finger  into  water,  and  cool  the  rich  man's  tongue.  In  verse 
25,  Abraham  gives  a  reason  to  the  rich  man  for  not  complying : 

"  Son,  remember  that  thou  in  thy  lifetime  receivedst  thy -good,  things; 
and  likewise  Lazarus  evil  things :  but  now  he  is  comforted,  and  thou  art 
tormented." 

In  verse  26,  father  Abraham  says,  along  with,  or  by  the  side  of  all  this 
excuse,  **  for  my  non-compliance,  you  must  place  the  fact  that  there  is  a 
great  gulf  between  us  and  you,  which  prevents  all  intercourse."  And  as 
this  last  reason  for  the  noncompliance  is  placed  beside  the  first,  the  last  is 
added  to  the  first — hence  the  idea  of  addition  which  is  so  prominent  in  this 
nepoeclad.  Beside  all  this,  between  us  and  you  there  is  a  great  gulf 
fixed.  That  is,  in  addition  to  all  this  reason  for  my  noncompliance  there 
is  a  great  gulf  between  us  and  you. 

II.  FOREIGN-FROM  E-DICATORY. 

4.  *'  It  is  -  -  -  (beside  my  present  purpose)  to  en- 
large upon  this  subject.^* 

How  is  it  shown  that  "  to  enlarge  upon  this  subject'^  is  not  my  present 
purpose  1  By  taking  this  act  out  of,  or  away  from,  my  present  purpose. 
And  how  is  this  act  taken  out  of  my  present  purpose  1  Simply  by  remov- 
ing the  act  out  from  the  purpose  to  the  side  of  the  purpose.  It  is  beside 
my  present  purpose  to  enlarge  upon  this  subject.  "  To  enlarge  upon 
tfus  subject"  is  not  my  present  purpose.  I  show  this  fact  by  removing  the 
act  from  my  present  purpose.  How  far  do  I  remove  it  from  my  present 
purpose]  Just  out  on  the  side  way  of  my  present  purpose—just  far 
flDough  to  show  that  this  act  ia  foreign  to  the  purpose. 

9 


915  CONDICTION    OF    BIEPOECLADS 

II.    Loss  E-DICATORY. 

5.  John  is  -        -        -     (beside  himself.) 

6.  "  Paul,  thou  art       -     (beside  thyself.'*) 

Whatever  becomes  useless  is  generally  cast  aside.  Thus  a  broken,  uae- 
fess  vehicle  is  often  seen  beside  the  street,  or  highway  in  which  it  was  wont 
to  be  used.  So  it  is  with  human  beings  who  have  become  useless  from  the 
loss  of  their  reason,  or  virtue.  They  are  removed  from  themselves,  and 
placed  on  the  sideway  of  themselves:  beside  themselves.  To  show  that 
John  has  lost  his  reason,  and  is  consequently  useless,  he  is  taken  out  of  him- 
self, and  put  beside  himself.  '  This  is  one  of  the  many  ingenious  contri- 
vances with  which    nepoeclads  abound. 

II.  Exclusive  E-dicatory. 

7.  To  all    -        -        -     (beside      ,      )  as  much  an  empty 
shade. 

To  all  beside.  .  That  is,  to  all  beside  this,  to  all  except  this ;  to  all  but 
this;  to  all  exclusive  of  this.  r. 

8.  I  saw  nothing  -         -     (beside  this  book.) 

niat  IS,  I  saw  nothing  except  this  book.  In  other  words,  except,  ex- 
clude, take  away  this  book,  and  I  saw  nothing.  It  may  be  well  to  make  a 
remark,  or  two  upon  the  source  of  this  import  of  beside.  This  application 
of  beside  springs  most  naturally  from  the  primary,  the  local  import,  of  this 
nepoeclide.  Beside  under  its  primary  meaning,  under  its  general  significa- 
tion, denotes  a  side  place,  or  a  place  on  \h.e  side;  as,  James  stood  beside 
the  street 

Here,  James  is  excluded  from,  kept  out  of  the  street  by  the  word,  be- 
nde.  This  word  places  James  on  the  side  of  the  street — and  thus  it  ex- 
cludes him  from  the  street.  Should  the  word,  in,  be  used  instead  of  beside, 
the  position  of  James  would  be  quite  different ;  as,  James  is  in  the  street. 

In  is  inclusive  ,•  beside  is  exclusive.  From  the  general  capacity  of  be- 
side to  move  one  thing  out  from  another  in  place,  this  nepoeclide  has  ac- 
quired the  special  power  of  denoting  the  exclusion,  separation  of  one  thing 
from  another  where  there  is  no  idea  of  place  in  the  mind  ;  as,  I  have  no 
property  beside  this  lot.  That  is,  exclude  this  lot  from  my  property,  and 
I  have  no  property. 

The  word,  beside,  howev&T  m^y  mean  addition,  instead  of  subtraction, 
exclusion ;  as,  I  have  a  lot  beside  this  lot.  That  is,  I  have  a  lot  in  addition 
to  this- lot.  , 

Where  beside  is  exclusive,  but,  except,  or  excepting  can  be  substituted 
for  it ;  as,  I  have  no  property  except  this  lot. 

Where  beside  is  additory,  except  can  not  be  substituted ;  as,  I  have  a  lot 
except  this  lot ! 

Illustration   of  the   condic-  SJeyOTlCl. 

tion  of  the    nepoeclads  which      I.  LOCal  Ru-dicatory« 

begin  with  beyond.  n.  Positional  E-dicatort,  , 

I.  He  went         -        -     (beyond  that  tree.) 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 


99 


2.  He  travelled  far 

3.  My  stick  reached 

4.  "Let  no  man  go 

brother. ^^ 


(beyond  that  river.) 
(beyond  his  ,  .) 
(beyond     ,     ,     )  and  defraud  hh 


*  III.  Future  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 
)  (beyond  us)  even  before  our  death.* 

POJB. 

*  III.  Infeasible  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 
beyond  my  power.) 
beyond  human  comprehension.) 
beyond  his  power.) 

*  III.  Super  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 
9.  Washington  was  great  (beyond  any  other  man.) 


5.  ["A  thing]  ( 


6.  To  comprehend  this  is 

7.  This  doctrine  is 

8.  To  pay  this  note  is  - 


(beyond  all  others.) 
(beyond  what     ,     )  ( 


)( 


10.  This  matter  is  myste-   (beyond  any  other 

rious     *         -         - 

11.  This  night  is  dark   - 

12.  Let  no  man  think  that 

he  is  wise 

is  written.) 
Illustration  of  the  condio 
tion  of  the    nepoeclads  which 
begin  with  6y. 

1.  He  came 

2.  There  have  been  great 

battles  -        -         -     (by  water.)    on  water. 

3.  We  shall  return       -     (by  wateh)    on  water. 

t.  Local  Ru-dicatory. 


■Oy.      (near  to.) 

I.  Local  RuHiicatory. 

n.  Positional  E-dicatory. 

(by  land.)    on  land. 


(by  mine 
(by  the  fire.) 


•) 


4.  His  house  stands 

5.  1  was  sitting   - 

6.  I  stood   - 

7.  The  man  had  come  -     (by  this  time.) 
That  is,  the  coming  of  the  man  was  bi/,  or  at  this  period  of  time:  the 

coming  is  represented  as  being  as  near  to  this  particular  period  of  time 
as  I  am  to  the  fire,  in  the  fifth  example:  I  stood  by  the  fire.  **By  this 
time  the  man  had  come.'* 

8.  He  just  passed 

9.  Who  passed    - 

10.  A  gentleman  was 

11.  Was  any  one  - 


(by  the  river  side.) 

(1   ■    ■    ■ 


!by  the  window.) 
by    .     ?) 


*  n.  Presence  E-dicatort. 

the  time, 
the  time? 


(by    ,    )at 
(by     ,    }at 


100  CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS*  ; 

12.  Joseph  remained  there  *'  (by  the  space)  of  seven  years/*}  : 

That  is,  he  remained  in  the  presence  of  this  amount  of  time.  Th» 
may  be  illustrated  by  the  following  instance  : 

"  John  remained  by  a  pile  of  thirty  logs." 

Here  there  is  a  pile  which  is  made  up  of  thirty  logs ;  and  John  remained 
in  the  presence  of  this  pile.  In  the  case  where  Joseph  is  represented  as 
remaining  in  the  presence  of  a  pile,  the  pile  is  not  composed  of  logs,  but 
of  years.  Seven  years  are  rolled  together;  and,  as  John  remained  in  the 
presence  of  the  pile  of  logs,  so  Joseph  remained  in  the  presence  of  this 
pile  of  years. 

It  is  worthy  of  remark  that  in  order  to  use  by  in  cases  like  that  in  the 
1 2th  instance,  the  time  must  be  made  into  a  pile,  a  mass  ;  for  we  can  no4 
say,  he  remained  there  by  seven  years.  This  word,  in  such  instances  as 
the  above,  is  not,  as  Mr.  Webster,  and  others  say,  synonymous  with  dur- 
ing f  for  we  can  say,  He  remained  during  seven  years. 

*  III.  Obligation  Ex-e-dic-a-tory . 
Obligation  is  the  binding  power  of  a  vow,  an  oath,  a  promise,  an  of" 
Jirmation,  or  a  contract     And  to  secure  this  power,  the  vow  is  made,  oi 
the  oath  taken  by  witnesses.     That  is,  in  the  presence  of  witnesses. 

13.  He  swore        -        -     (by  heaven)  to  be  just. 

That  is,  in  the  presence  of  heaven. 

14.  He  affirmed    -        -     (by  all)  that  is  sacred. 

That  is,  he  affirmed  in  the  presence  of  every  thing  sacred.  Or  in  other 
words,  he  called  every  thing  which  is  sacred  into  his  presence  to  witness 
against  him  if  he  should  disregard  his  affirmation.  I  affirm  in  the  pre- 
sence  of  men,  and  angels  that  this  was  not  so. 

Again. — He  declared  before  his  God  that  he  would  tell  the  truth.  That 
is,  he  declared  in  the  presence  of  his  God.  He  called  God  into  his  pre- 
sence to  witness  against  him  should  he  not  tell  the  truth.  I  swear  by  earth. 
That  is,  I  swear  in  the  presence  of  earth  that  you  may  have  a  host  of 
witnesses  against  nw  if  I  do  not  speak  the  truth.  I  swear  by  all  that  is 
good  and  bad.  That  is,  I  swear  in  the  presence  of  every  thin^  that  there 
may  be  nothing  which  will  not  be  able  to  testify  against  me  if  I  swerve 
from  truth  in  my  statement.  Or  I  go  into  the  presence  of  every  thing,  that 
every  thing  may  cry  shame,  shame,  if  I  open  my  mouth  to  utter  a  lie  upor» 
this  subject. 

Because  God  could  swear  by  no  greater,  he  swore  by  himself.  That 
is,  because  God  could  swear  in  the  jM-esence  of  no  being  greater  than  him- 
self, he  swore  in  the  presence  of  himself  that  he  himself  might  be  a  wit- 
ness against  himself  in  case  of  a  failure  to  fulfil  that  which  he  bomid 
himself  by  an  oath  to  accomplish. 

That  by  denotes  presence  in  the  above  instances,  is  obvious  from  its 
sense  in  several  compound  words;  as,  bystander.  When  the  oath  is 
taken,  beings,  and  things  are  called  up  as  bystanders  to  witness  the  act 

*  III.  Criterion  Ex-e-die-a-tory. 

15.  The  stick  is  too  long   (by  an  inch.)  '^ 


CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS.  101. 

That  is,  the  overplus  expressed  by  the  words,  too  long,  occupies  the  en« 
tire  presence  of  an  inch.     The  philosophy  of  the  process  is  this  : 

We  first  express  a  redundancy,  "  too  long" — and,  because  this  is  indefi- 
nite,  we  lay  down,  or  bring  forth  a  definite  measure,  inch.  And  to  bring 
this  overplus  alongside  of  this  inch  to  measure  it,  we  place  bi/,  which 
means  in  the  presence  of,  before  this  criterion.  This  is  an  ingenious  ope- 
ration, yet  it  is  as  simple  as  is  that  of  measuring  a  board  by  a  rule.  The 
only  difference  between  the  two,  is  this :  in  measuring  a  board  the  carpen- 
ter carries  the  rule  into  the  presence  of  the  board,-  but  in  measuring  an 
overplus  in  speech,  the  speaker  brings  the  overplus  into  the  presence  of 
the  rule. 

(overplus.)  criterion. 

16.  The  tea  is  too  heavy      (by  six  pounds.) 

Here  the  writer  is  presumed  to  know  the  exact  amount  of  the  overplus ; 
and  to  communicate  this  amount  to  the  reader,  he,  the  writer,  carries  thi« 
overplus  into  the  presence  of  the  measure,  six  pounds,  by  means  of  by. 
As  much  as  to  say — ^reader,  there  is  too  much  tea — and  if  you  will  take 
this  too  much,  and  place  it  alongside  of  this  standard,  this  measure, 
six  pounds,  you  will  learn  the  exact  amount  of  this  overplus.  In  what 
way  is  the  reader  informed  that  this  overplus  is  to  be  carried  into  the  pre- 
sence of  this  measure,  six  pounds  ?  By  the  word,  bi/.  This  word  means 
presence,  or  presence  of;  as,  was  any  one  by  when  he  told  you  1  Was  any 
one  present  whejn  it  happened  1     Was  there  any  bystander  ? 

*  III.  Terms  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 

The  monos  which  fall  under  the  Terms  Ex-e-dic-a-tory,  are  by  the  percJi, 
by  the  yard,  by  the  pint,  &c.  From  a  slight  glance  at  these  nepoeclads 
it  may  seem  that  Quantity  is  better  calculated  to  express  the  leading  idea 
of  these  monos  than  Terms.  The  word,  quantity,  is  certainly  well  calculated 
to  denote  the  addiction  of  the  cormes  in  such  monos.  But  the  abdiction 
of  a  word,  and  the  condiction  of  a  mono,  are  different  things.  The  idea 
of  quantity  is  the  mere  abdiction  of  the  word,  pint,  perch,  yard.  But 
quantity  is  not  the  condiction  of  the    nepoeclad  in  the  following  sentence : 

"  He  works  (by  the  perch.") 
■    The  point  is  not  what  does  the  word,  pcrcA,  mean  ;  but  what  does  the 
mono,  by  the  perch,  import.     This     nepoeclad  fixes  one  of  the  ternUt 
one  of  the  conditions   on  which  the  contract  is  made  between  the  parties. 

"  He  sells  brandy  (by  the  pint.") 

The  word,  pint,  means  a  certain  quantity ;  and  the  mono,  by  the  pint, 
converts  this  certain  quantity  into  one  of  the  conditions  on  which  the  peif- 
Bon  sells  this  liquid  poison. 

By  the  day,  by  the  year,  by  the  job  are  all  of  the  Terms  ex-e- 
dic-a-tory. 

17.  He  works       -         -     (by  the  perch.) 

That  is,  hb  labour,  \aa  price,  his  attention,  and  his  contract  is  brought 
up,  not  into  the  presence  of  the  whole  road,  the  entire  distance,  but  simply 
into  the  presence  of  a  perch.  He  is  there,  his  presence  is  confined  to  a 
perch  at  i»  time. 

9*  '     ■  . 


102  CONDICTION   OF  NEPOECLADS. 

*I1I.  Conformity  Ex-e-dic-a-tory, 
\%.  This  fact  appears      -  (by  John's  own  statement.) 

That  is,  this  fact  appears  even  while  we  remain  in  ihe  presence  of  John's 
own  statement.  Hence  it  is  not  necessary  to  leave  John's  statement  for 
that  of  another  person  in  order  to  make  out  this  particular  feet. 

19.  Does  he  live     -         -  (by  any  fixed  rules  ?) 

That  is,  does  he  keep  in  the  presence  of  any  fixed  rules  in  living. 
There  may  be  fixed  rules  which  he  may  leave  by  living  contrary  to  them. 
But,  when  he  adheres  to  fixed  rales  he  remains  by  them.  That  fey  m  theii 
presence. 

It  may  be  well  enough  to  remark  that  great  attention  should  be  paid  to 
the  difference  between  abdiction  and  condiction.  The  abdiction  of  the 
word,  ruk,  ami  the  condiction  of  the  mono,  "  by  ruk,'^  are  very  different. 
The  idea  which  "ru/e"  raises  in  the  mind,  is  that  of  ai  guide  in  action.  Ba4 
the  idea  which  the  mono,  "by  rule"  raises  in  the  mind,  is  that  of  conform-' 
ity  tov  To  be  in  the  presence  of  a  rule  unplies  a  conformity  to  it — hence 
the  idea  oi  conformity  expressed  in  the  monto,  "  by  ruk.^^ 

*  III.  Immediate-Pos&ession  Ex-e-dic-aHory, 

20.  He  has  a  cask  of  wine  (by  him.) 

21.  He  had  thirty  dollars  (by  him.) 

That  is,  the  v<rine  is  not  only  owned  by  him,  bat  is  actually  in  his  pos- 
session at  this  very  moment. 

He  had  thirty  dollars  (by  him)  last  week. 
A  man  in  Philadelphia  may  have  had  thirty  dollars  in  Bost(m  last  week  t 
in  this  case,  it  cannot  be  said  of  him  that  he  had  thirty  dollars  by  him,  far 
he  hatl  not  immediate  possession. 

*III.  SoHtarious  Ex-e-dic-a-tory,   ' 
22;  He  lives  -         -     fby  himself.) 

23.  He  sat  -        -         -     (by  himself.) 

24.  Put  this  book  -     (by  itself.) 

Nepoeclads  which  begin  with  by,  are  often  used  to  show  where  some- 
thing is  \  as,  The  book  is  by  the  chair. 

In  this  way  the  book  is  put  into  the  presence  of  the  chjur.  But  when 
there  is  a  thing  mentioned,  which  does  not  appear  to  be  in  the  presence 
of  any  other  object,  we  put  the  thing  into  the  presence  of  itself — hence,  when 
a  thing  is  put  into  its  own  presence,  the  conclusion  is,  that  it  is  alone,  soli- 
tary. In  the  above  instance,  the  book  is  put  into  its  own  presence  :  from 
this  fact  it  is  inferred  that  there  is  no  other  object  into  whose  presence  we 
can  put  the  book ;  and,  as  there  is  no  other  object  near,  the  book,  as  said 
above,  is  solitary. 

*  HI.  Support  Ex-e'dic^a-tory, 

25.  "  I  shall  stand         -     (by  him,)  come  what  wilU^ 

Here  it  is  inferred  from  a  declaration  to  rwnain  in  his  presence,  that  1 
continue  there  to  aid,  to  protect,  to  support  him. 


CONDICTION  OP   NEPOECLADS.  103 

*  III.  Modos  Ex-e-dic-a-tory* 
26.  I  was  at  court  -     (by  my  attorney.) 

There  are  two  modes  in  which  a  person  may  be  present.  One  is  by  being  at 
the  place  in  his  own  proper  person ;  the  other  is,  by  being  at  the  place 
in  a  proxy,  in  a  representative,  in  an  attorney.  "  I  was  at  courty  But 
how,  in  what  way,  in  what  manner  was  I  there  ?  Was  I  present  in  my 
own  proper  person  ?  No.  My  attorney  was  there,  and  I  was  by  him. 
That  is,  my  attorney  was  at  court,  and  I  was  in  his  presence.  In  what 
way  was  I  in  his  presence  1  Was  my  person,  my  body  in  his  presence '? 
No.  The  word,  Z,  here,  does  not  mean  my  person,  but  my  will.  I  was 
at  court,  then,  in  this  manner :  my  attorney  was  at  court,  and  my  ivill  was 
in  his  presence.  I,  my  will,  was  at  court  because  it  was  in  the  presence  of 
my  attorney  who  attended  court. 

"  We,  the  people  of  the  TTnited  States  are  at  Washingtoii  by  our  repre- 
seniativet^."  That  is,  we,  our  will,  are  at  Washington,  because  we  are  in 
tlie  presence  of  our  representatives  who  are  there.  But  experience  shows 
that  it  is  a  poor  way  of  being  at  Washington ;  for  when  we  go  to  that 
,  place  by  appending  our  will  to*  our  representatives,  we  are  dropped  by  the 
way ! 

N.  B.  The  condiction  of  this  mono  is  not  that  of  medium,  instrument 
or  agent,  but  mode. 

*  III.  Supervision  Ex-e-dic-a'tory, 

37.  The  temple  was  built  (by  Solomon.) 

28.  These    houses    were 

built    -        -        -     (by  Stephen  Girard.) 

*  III.  Instrumental  Ex-e-dic-a-tori/ 

29.  He  works       -         -     (by  a  candle.) 

30.  He  saw  the  pin       -     (by  moon-light.) 

*  III.  Order  Ex-e-dic-a-tory . 

31.  He  travelled  day      -     (by  day.) 

That  is,  the  days  on  which  he  travelled,  were  so  near  to  each  other  that 
onp  succeeded  the  other.  In  other  words,  there  was  iio  time  between  the 
days  on  which  he  travelled.     The  expression  is  quite  implenary. 

The  idea,  here  expressed,  is  that  he  travelled  several  days,  and  that  these 
several  days  stood  so  near  to  each  other,  that  no  day  on  which  he  did  not 
travel,  fell  between  any  two  days  on  which  he  did  travel.  That  is,  the  first 
day  on  which  he  travelled,  stood  by  the  second  day ;  and  the  second,  by 
the  third,  and  the  third,  by  the  fourth,  and  so  on.  The  idea  may  be  seen 
by  transferring  the  sentence  from  days  to  persons. 

The  company  stood  man  by  man.  That  is,  one  man  stood  by,  or  next 
to  another,  so  that  no  one  who  did  not  belong  to  the  company,  was  found 
between  any  two  that  did  belong  to  it.  Rendered  plenary — [the  company 
stood]  {in  the  order)  (of  man)  (by  man.) 

[He  travelled]  (in  the  order)  (o/day)  (by  day.) 


104  CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 

32.  He  counted  his  army 

man        -        -        -  (by  man.) 

33.  He   commanded    the 

army  year     -         -  (by  year.) 


n.  Possessive  E-dicaI-ort.  ^ 

1.  How  came  he  *  (by  so  much  land?) 

2.  How  came  James     -  (by  that  house  ?) 

The  idea  of  presence,  place,  or  nearness  is  entirely  lost  in  that  of  posses- 
sion. The  lost  idea,  however,  must  have  been  the  source  of  the  possessive 
one.  By,  originally  means  near  to ;  and  because  an  individual  who  pos- 
sesses property  is  generally  by  it,  by,  the  very  word  which  denotes  this 
nearness,  has  come  to  be  used  to  aid  in  the  expression  of  possession.  This 
is  natural ;  for  when  a  person  is  by  a  piece  of  property,  generally  in  the 
presence  of  a  piece  of  property,  the  natural  conclusion  is  that  he  possesses 
this  property.  For  instance,  if  D.  is  seen  day  after  day  in  the  presence  of 
any  certain  house,  it  would  be  natural  enough  to  conclude  that  he  was 
in  possession  of  this  house.  Hence  it  would  be  in  exact  accordance  with 
the  principles  on  which  the  application  of  words  is  extended,  to  employ  the 
word  which  would  be  used  to  denote  his  local  relation  to  the  house,  to 
express  the  notion  of  possession  which  had  been  inferred  from  this  relation. 

n.  Active  E-dicatort. 

3.  This  pen  was  made  -  (by  John.) 

4.  This  land  is  owned  -  (by  my  brother.) 

5.  The  sinner  is  converted  (by  Christ.) 

6.  I  am  commanded  .    -  (by  the  people)   of  the  State  of 


Pennsylvania. 


n.  Causative  E-dicatory 


7.  The  grass  was  killed  (by  the  frost.) 

8.  He  was  hurt     -         -  (by  a  fall.) 

9.  He  has  been  injured  (by  the  tricks)  of  Jude. 

II.  Instrumental  E-dicatort. 

10.  He  was  killed  -  (by  a  sword.) 

11.  He  saw  the  pin         -  (by  moon-light.) 

12.  rhey  live         -     "   -  (by  speculation.) 

13.  They  applied  -         -  (by  a  petition.) 

14.  Do  you  know  a  man  (by  the  name)  of  Paul? 

That  is,  do  you  know  a  man  who  is  distinguished  from  other  men  by 
the  name  of  Paul  I  or  who  passes  by  the  name  of  Paul. 

N.  B.  Where  will  you  place  the  following     nepoeclads? 

1.  He  reads  -         -  (by  a  lamp.) 

2.  He  counted  his  army 

man        -        -        -  (by  man.) 


CONMCtlON   OF    NEPOECLADS.  ,  1 05 

I  have  placed  «  by  moon  light"  under  the  head  of  Local  Rudic- 
tion,  under  Presence  E-didion,  and  Instrumental  Exediction,  I 
have  also  placed  "  hy  moon  light"  under  the  Blank  Local  Rudic- 
tion,  and  Instrumental  E-dietion.  I  have  done  this  to  employ  the 
perceptive  powers  of  the  student  in  deciding  to  which  class  this 
mono  belongs.  « By  a  lamp"  and  " by  moon  light"  belong  to  the 
sanje  class. 

Will  you  class  the  nepoeclad,  by  graee^in  the  following  sentence? 

("  By  grace)  are  ye  saved  through  faith." 

Illustration  of  the  condiclion  Down. 

of  the  nepoeclads  which  begin    L  Local  RlldicatOryt 

with  down.  II.  Positio2!Tal      Edicatobt. 

1.  He  is       -        -  -  Mown  the  country.) 

2.  They  went       -  -  mown  the  hill.) 

3.  They  sailed      -  -  (down  the  river.) 

4.  We  are  all  going  -  Tdown  the  stream)  of  life. 

5.  He  went  up  and  -  (down       ,         ,         .) 

Thenepoeclidecfoujn,  denotes  that  place  which  is  opposed  to  the  place 
signified  by  up ,-  as,  He  is  down  the  country,  not  up. 

Hence  "down  the  country"  is  local  in  its  condiction.  But  the  word,  downf 
not  only  denotes  place,  but  it  marks  a  definite  place, — down,  and  not  up. 
As  down  points  out  a  definite  place,  it  shows  the  exact  relative  position  of 
one  thing  to  another ;  as,  He  is  down  the  river. 

In  some  instances,  the  monos  which  commence  with  downy  convey  the 
notion  of  space  or  distance  /  as.  He  went  down  the  river.  He  went  down 
the  ladder.  And  to  embrace  this  shade,  the  following  ex-e-dic-a-tory  ia 
employed : 

*  HI.  Space  Ex-^-dic-a-tory. 

6.  They  went      -  -  Mown  the  hill.) 

7.  He  came  -  -  fdown  stairs.) 

8.  The  squirrel  ran  -  (down  the  tree.) 

9.  The  deer  swam  -  (down  the  stream.) 

Down  is  often  anepoecled;  as,  He  threw  down  the  book.  Hold  hira 
down,  He  sat  down,  He  attempted  to  preach  doum  folly,  The  banks  are 
down. 

Down  may  be  a  poeclade,  as,  down  with  the  house.  That  is,  demo* 
Ushit. 

Illustration  of  the  condio-  FTOfJl.    (place  of  beginning.) 

lion  of  the    nepoeclads  which  I,  Local  Ru-dicatory. 

begin  with /row.  ♦II.  Inceptive  E-dioatory. 

1.  Henry  went     -        -  (from  Boston)  to  Texas, 

2.  Separate  the  good     -  (from  the  bad        ,        ,         .) 


106         CONDICTION  OP  NEPOECLADS. 


d. 

Men  go   - 

-  (from  good       , 

-  (from  bad       , 

J 

)  to  bad. 

4. 

And         ,         , 

> 

)  to  good. 

5. 

He  looked  down 

-  (from       ,       , 

) 

,      ,  above. 

-That  is,  (from  the  place)  (which  is)  above. 

0.  He  came  -         -  (from       ,       ,       )  beyond. 

That  is,  he  came  (from  a  place)  (which  is)  beyond  the  river,  or  beyond 
any  other  thing  which  the  sense  will  justify. 

7.  Call  the  dog     -         -  (from    ,     ,     )  ,  ,  under  the  table. 
That  is,  call  the  dog  ((rom  the  place)  (which  is)  (under  the  table.) 

*  III.  Sour citive  Ex'S-dic-a-tory 

8.  Light  proceeds     ^     -  (from  the  sun.) 

9.  Men  have  all  sprung    (from  Adam.) 

10.  Water  springs  -  (from  the  earth.) 

11.  Money  is  acquired    -  (from  industry.) 

12.  He  descended  -  (from  a  noble  race.) 

13.  All  things  sprung      -  (from  God.) 

14.  This  light  is     -         -  (from  that  lamp.) 

15.  *'And       -         -         -  (from  this       ,      )  it  seems  that  he 
,  is  not  dead." 

16.  This  yarn  v^ras  spun  (from  that  wool.) 

17.  Can  any  good   thing 

come       -         -         -  (from  Nazareth.) 
That  is,  can  Nazareth  be  the  source,  the  parent  of  any  good  thing  ? 
Illustration  of  the  condiction  /^^ 

of  the    nepoeclads  which  be-       I.  LOCal  Ru-dicatory. 

gin  with  in.  *  Ij^  Positional  E-dicatory. 

1.  The  horse  is     -         -  (in  the  stable.) 

2.  The  horse  is     -         -  (in  the  harness,) 

3.  The  horse  is     -        -  (in  the  carriage.) 

4.  The  fork  is       -         -  (in  the  knife  case.) 

5.  Henry  is  good  -  (in  deed.) 

That  is,  Henry  is  not  only  good  in  repute,  but  he  is  good  in  his  deeds, 
in  his  acts.  In  other  words,  let  Henry  remain  within  his  deeds,  and  he  is 
a  good  man.  You  need  not  drag  him  out  of  his  deeds  into  his  reputation 
to  make  him  good — standing  in  his  deeds  he  is  good.  There  are  many 
men  who,  to  be  made  goodf  must  be  removed  from  their  deeds  into  their 
reputation. 

The  mono,  ''in  deed,"  means  truth,  and  that  too  with  much  ease,  and 
with  striking  propriety ;  for,  if  a  man  is  good  in  deed,  in  act,  he  must  be 
good  in  truth. 


CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS.  107 

6,  Washington  was  great  (in  fact.) 

That  is,  he  was  not  only  great  in  reputation,  but  he  was  so  in  fact.  The 
post-position  of  this  mono  is  important  to  the  expression  of  this  exact  idea ; 
for,  if  this  mono  should  be  placed  before  the  trokb  the  distinguish- 
ing peculiarity  of  the  idea  would  be  lost. 

In  fact,  Washington  was  great.  This  sentence  conveys  no  allusion  to 
what  he  was  in  reputation. 

The  word  fact,  strictly  speaking,  means  a  deed  done — ^hence  we  see  why 
the  mono,  "  in  fact,"  is  synonymous  with  the  mono,  in  truth. 

"  Washington  was  great  in  fact." 

Many  are  great  when  you  measure  them  in  their  reputation,  but  quite 
small  when  you  measure  them  in  truth,  in  fad;,  iii  deed.  Washington, 
however,  was  great  in  both  places — in  reputation,  and  in  fact. 

7.  These  balls  are  alike  (in  size.) 

That  is,  the  similarity  between  the  two  balls,  lies  in  the  size.  If  you 
go  out  of  the  size,  no  similarity  is  found.  They  are  alike.  But  where  is 
the  likeness  T  It  is  within  the  limits,  the  boundaries  of  the  size.  Outside 
of  these  limits,  no  likeness  is  found.  The  likeness,  then,  is  in,  or  within 
the  size. 

8.  God  will  judge  all     -  (in  that  hour.) 

That  is,  the  act  of  judging  all  will  fall  into  this  specified  point  of  time 
In  other  words,  this  act  will  come  within  this  measure  of  time. 

We  put  apples  into  baskets,  but  events  into  hoursj  days,  weeks,  ice.-' 

9,  One         -         -         -  (in  five.) 

The  mono,  "  in  five"  as  here  used,  means  a  family  of  five  individuals 
The  expression,  one  out  of  five,  is  sufficient  to  show  the  local  import  of  the 
mono  in  five. 

10.  He  is       -        -        -  (in  that  office.) 

That  is,  his  province  falls  within  the  circle  of  duties,  which  that  ofiice 
comprises. 

11.  John  is     -        -         -  (in  sight.) 

"  In  sight"  means  that  space  over  which  the  eye  may  extend  m  the  act 
of  seeing :  and  John  is  within  or  in  this  space. 

12.  John  did  right  -  (in  replying)  to  me. 

That  is,  he  did  right  in  the  act  of  replying.  Every  person  is  either  in 
or  out  of  acts:  he  who  does  acts,  is  in  them — and  he  that  does  not  do  them, 
is  out  of  them.  There  is,  then,  an  in,  and  an  out  to  an  act ;  and  these 
places  are  large  enough  to  hold  the  agent,  whether  he  is  a  fly,  or  an  e/e- 
,phant.  The  in  is  just  as  large  as  the  agent  himself — and  the  out  is  as 
large  as  the  universe  ! 

*  III.  Condition  Ex-e-dic-a-tory* 

13.  The  horse  is    -        -  (in  a  good  case.) 


108  CONDICTION    OP   NEPOECLADS. 

In  is  the  name  of  a  place:  the  m  of  a  room,  is  all  that  space  which  fallg 
tvithin  the  walls  that  divide  this  in,  this  in  space,  from  all  other  spaces.  The 
in  of  a  stable  is  that  place  which  falls  within  the  walls  of  the  stable.  It  is 
easy  to  see  that  a  horse  may  occupy  the  in  of  a  stable :  nor  is  it  hard  to 
see  that  a  horse  may  occupy  the  in  of  a  harness.  But  to  see  in  what 
way  a  horse  can  be  said  to  occupy  the  in  of  a  good  case,  the  zV*  of  a  good 
condition,  demands  thought.  Nor  is  this  the  only  point  which  demands 
reflection,  for  it  is  not  easy  even  to  find  the  in  of  a  good  condition.  The 
in  place  of  a  stable  is  obvious,  but  the  in  place  of  a  good  case  is  obscure, 

"  The  horse  is  in  a  good  case, ^^ 

That  is,  he  has  a  good  coat  of  flesh  on  him — ^he  is  enveloped  in  a  good 
eoat  of  flesh.  This  envelope  of  flesh  in  which  the  horse  is  wrapped,  is 
called  a  case. 

The  fork  is  in  the  knife  case. 

It  may  be  said,  however,  that  the  two  monos,  "  in  a  good  ease,"  and  "in 
a  knife  case"  differ  in  condiction. 

One  mono,  it  may  be  said,  marks  the  condition  of  the  horse ;  the  other, 
the  place  of  the  fork.  In  what  way  does  the  writer  mark  the  condition  of 
the  horse  ?  By  putting  him  into  a  good  case.  From  knife  cases,  we  have 
formed  condition  cases ;  and  to  indicate  the  condition  of  an  animal,  we 
exhibit  him  in  one  of  these  condition  cases.  "  In  a  knife  case"  marks  in 
what  case  the  fork  is :  and  "  in  a  good  case"  marks  in  what  case  the  horse 
is.  One  great  difference  between  these  two  kinds  of  cases,  springs  from 
the  different  mechanics  by  whom  they  have  been  formed :  one  is  con- 
structed by  the  mind,  the  other  by  the  hands.  The  knife  case  is  made 
from  wood,  and  by  the  hands :  the  condition  case  is  constructed  out  of 
thought,  and  by  the  mind.  But  does  it  follow,  because  the  condition 
cases  are  made  of  different  materials,  and  by  different  workmen,  that  a  horse 
can  not  be  in  them  just  as  much  as  a  fork  can  be  in  a  knife  case  ?  If  a  house 
is  constructed  in  the  m,ind  only,  has  it  not  an  in  place  ?  and  can  not  a  man 
that  is  created  in  the  mind  only,  be  made  to  occupy  the  in  place  of  this 
imaginary  temple  1 

14.  John  is  kind     -         -  (in  sickness.) 

That  is,  if  cases  of  sickness  surround  him,  he  is  kind.  In  other  words, 
where  John's  fellow-beings  are  in  the  condition  of  sickness,  he  shows  his 
kindness,  exhibits,  manifests  his  kindness  within  this  condition. 

15.  He  is       "    ,     -.        -  (in  good  spirits.) 

That  is,  he  stands  in  the  coiiditibn  of  mind,  which  is  denominated  "good 
spirits." 

16.  He  is       -         -        -  (in  good  health.) 

That  is,  he  is  in  that  state,  or  condition  of  body,  which  is  called,  "good 
health. 

17.  Henry  is  -         -  (in  pain.) 


CONDICTION  OP   NEPOECLADS.  109 

Is  Henry  in  the- pain,  or  is  the  pain  in  him  1  the  pain  is  certainly  in 
Henry.  Hence  Henry  is  in  a  painful  condition.  *^In  pain"  does  not 
mean  pain,  but  this  mono  means  a  condition  arising  frorn  pain.  Now,  it 
is  not  the  joatn  which  is  in  this  painful  condition,  but  it  is  Henry  himself: 
hence  to  say  that  "  Henry  is  in  pain,"  is  both  according  to  truth  and  Syn- 
tax. There  is,  then,  a  difference  between  the  addiction  of  the  word  pain, 
and  the  condiction  of  the  mono  in  pain.  "  Pain"  means  the  sensation 
itself — "  in  pain"  denotes  the  condition,  which  the  sensation  produces  in 
the  animal,  or  part  in  which  the  pain  is. 

18.  The  man  is  -  -  (in  a  severe  fit.) 

19.  John  is  kind  -  -  (in  sickness.) 

20.  He  is       -  -  -  (in  good  spirits.) 

21.  Henry  is  -  -  (in  a  high  fever.) 

22.  He  is       -  -  -  (in  good  heart.) 

23.  He  is       -  -  -  fin  good  courage.) 

24.  He  did  it  -  -  (in  good  faith.) 

25..  He  was  -  -  (in  his  right  reason.) 

26.  He  is  -  -  -  (in  the  darkness)  of  the  night. 

27.  He  is  -  .  -  (in  doubt.) 

28.  He  was  -  -  -  (in  fear.) 

To  the  upright  there  ariseth  light  (in  darkness.) 

29.  I  command  you        -  (in  the  name)  of  the   people    of 
Pennsylvania. 

30.  I  got  the  wine  -  (in  John's  name.) 

In  the  first  place,  it  seems  important  to  arrive  at  the  exact  condiction  of 
the  mono,  in  the  name,  as  found  in  the  above  instances.  "  In  the  wawe" 
b  a  .merologue  for  it  is  apart  put  for  the  whole.  The  simple  mono,  "  in 
the  name,"  stands  for  the  entire  paper  of  commission.  It  is  the  name,  the 
signature  of  him  who  imparts  power,  which  renders  the  paper  specifying 
the  powers  imparted,  valid,  efficient.  Hence  his  name  is  used  as  the  entire 
commission. 

"  In  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Nazareth,  I  command 
you  to  rise  up,  and  walk." 

That  is,  in  the  commission  of  Jesus  Christ,  &c.  I  command  you. 
Why  is  the  mono,  *'  in  the  name,"  used  1  because  the  efficiency  of  the 
entire  letter  of  commission,  lies  in  the  name,  in  the  signature. 

What  is  a  commission  ? 

1.  A  commission  is,  "letters  patent,  or  any  writing  from 
proper  authority,  given  to  a  person  as  his  warrant  for  exercis- 
ing certain  powers,  or  for  the  performance  of  any  duty, 
whether  civil,  ecclesiastical,  or  military." 

2.  The  state  of  that  which  is  entrusted ;  as,  *'  The  great  seal 
was  put  into  commission.'" 

10 


110  CONIUCTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 

It  may  be  well  for  you  to  take  particular  notice  of  the  fact  that  the  word, 
commission,  in  the  above,  and  in  the  following,  means  a  state,  a  condition  .• 

.    3.  The  state  of  being  authorised  to  act,  or  to  perform  ser-. 
vice  ;  as,  the  ship  is  put  into  commission. 

The  power  of  the  commission  puts  the  ship  into  a  state,  or  condition  to 
act — ^hence  this  condition  is  called  commission.  The  ship  is  put  into  com- 
mission. That  is,  she  is  put  into  a  state  to  act  in  buying,  or  selling,  or 
in  exporting,  and  importing,  in  the  name  of  another  person.  Now,  as  we 
say,  the  ship  is  put  into  commission ;  so  we  say,  the  ship  is  in  commission. 
And,  as  "in  the  name,"  means  that  state,  or  condition  which  the  commis- 
sion produces,  it  is  obvious  that  "  in  the  name"  is  just  as  much  local,  and 
positional  in  its  condiction,  as  is,  "  in  the  state,"  "  in  the  condition." 

1 .  John  is  in  a  bad  state. 

2.  Joseph  is  in  a  bad  condition. 

A  state,  n  condition,  is  that  which  surrounds  him, — that  in  which  he  is — 
hence  we  say  m  a  state,  in  a  condition.  If,  then,  you  consider  that  "  in 
the  name"  means  a  commission,  and  that  commission  means  a  state,  a  con- 
dition, you  will  understand  why  it  is  that  in  is  used  instead  of  Z>y.  A 
man  does  not  command  6y  his  condition,  but  he  commands  in  his  condi- 
tion. A  man  receives  power,  authority  to  command — this  authority  puts 
him  into  a  condition  to  act ;  and,  in  this  condition,  not  by  it,  he  does  act. 

I  got  the  wine  (in  John's  name.) 

"  In  John's  name"  means  that  condition,  or  state  into  which  John's 
commission  puts  me  to  act. 

31.  The  apple  is     -         -  (in  three  pieces.) 

*  III.  Belonging-to  Ex-c-dic-atory. 

1.  There  is  carbonic  acid  (in  coal.) 

2.  Latent  heat  is  -  (in  air.) 

3.  There  is  nourishment  (in  bread.) 

4.  We  find  the  fishes     -  (in  the  water,) 

5.  and  the  birds     -         -  (in  the  air.) 

6.  There  are  1000  pages  (in  the  book.) 

7.  There  are  three  pieces  (in  the  apple.) 

Illustration  of  the  condiction  In  tO.     (in,  and  to.) 

of  the     nepoeclads  which  be-  I.  Local  Ru-dicatory. 

gin  with  into.  ^  11^  Positional  E-dicatorv. 

1.  He  went  -         -         -  (into  the  house.) 

2.  I  put  the  knife  -         -  (into  my  pocket.)    not  in. 

3.  "  Water  enters-         -  (into  the  fine  vessels)  of  plants.'* 

4.  I  looked  -         -         -  (into  the  room.) 

5.  «*  Put  these  ideas       -  (into  other  words.") 


GONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS.  HI 

*III.  Immersion  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 

6.  One  river  runs  -         -  (into  another.) 

7.  "  They  went  down  -  (into  the  water.") 
^  8.  He  plunged      -         -  (into  the  snow.) 

9.  He  turned  some  water  (into  wine.) 

*  in.  Conversion  Ex-e-dic-a-tory, 

.10.  "  He  turned  water     -  (into  wine.") 

11.  "Command  that  these 

stones  be  made  -  (into  bread.") 

12.  Make  this  leather      -  (into  boots.) 

13.  Reduce  all  these  sub- 
stances   -        -         -  (into  one  mass.) 

*III.  Infusion  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 

14.  *' Put  more  animation  (into  your  composition.") 

15.  The  instillation  of  ar- 
dour       -         -         .  (into  the  mind.) 

16.  There  is  an  infusion 

of  zeal    -        -        -  (into  the  mind.) 

17.  I  dislike  the  infusion 

of  Gallicisms  -         -  (into  English.) 

*  HI.  Mixture  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 

18.  "Put  other  ingredients  (into  the  compound.") 

19.  How  many  ingredients 

have  been  put  -         -  (into  this  medicine.) 

20.  You  should  not  put 

horses,  and  sheep     -  (into  the  same  drove.) 

*ni.  Condition  Ex-e-dic-a-tory, 

21.  The  child  was  fright- 
ened       -         -         -  (into  fits.) 

22.  Evidence  puts  us       -  (into  a  belief)  of  truth, 

23.  "  We   reduce    many 

distinct  substances    -  (into  one  mass.") 

24.  Men  are  often  enticed  (into  the  commission)  of  crime. 

25.  "We  are  all  liable  to 

be  seduced       -         -  (into  error.") 

26.  The  cup  was  broken  (into  several  parts.) 

27.  The  land  was  divided  (into  six  lots.) 

The  whole  land  was  placed  in  the  six  lots. 


112  CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECiADS. 

Illustration  of  the  condiction  ^JU' 

of  the     nepoeclads  which  be-  I«  XjOC£il  Ru-dicatory* 

gin  with  off.  II.  Inoccupancy  E-dicatory. 

1.  James  is  now  -         -  (off  his  seat.) 

2.  James  is  not     -         -  Toff  his  bed.) 

3.  James  was        -         -  (off  his  guard.) 

"  On  his  guard"  is  a  common  expression.  "Off  his  guard '^  and  "  on 
his  guard*^  are  opponents  in  condiction.  What  is  the  import  of  the  word, 
guard  ?  This  word  must  mean  something  which  a  person  can  be  on, — and, 
if  it  means  something  which  a  person  can  be  on,  it  means  something 
which  a  person  can  be  off  of.  "  He  is  on  his  guard."  "  He  is  off  his 
guard." 

Men  saw  that  a  book  which  is  on  a  table,  is  sustained,  held  up,  kept  from 
felling  by  the  table.  From  this  result  they  have  learned  to  place  them- 
selves on  whatever  they  seek  to  support,  to  sustain,  or  protect  them. 
Hence  they  have  come  to  place  themselves  on  care,  not  at  care,  on  care, 
not  under  care,  on  care,  not  over  care,  when  they  seek  care  to  sustain  them, 
to  keep  them  up  from  danger,  or  trouble.  The  word,  guard,  means  that 
care,  that  heed,  Uiat  watching,  that  vigilance,  which  is  exercised  to  prevent 
surprise,  or  attack.  The  analogy  between  the  table  in  sustaining  the  book, 
and  the  guard,  the  vigilance,  in  sustaining,  in  protecting  men  from  danger, 
is  so  obvious  that  it  is  easily  seen  why  men  place  themselves  on  their 
guard.  A  house  rests  on,  not  at,  not  under,  its  foimdation :  a  man  in  dan- 
ger rests  on  his  guard.  As  the  house  is  saved  by  being  on  the  foundation; 
£0  a  man  is  saved  by  being  on  his  guard. 

II.   Neighbourhood  E-dica- 

TCRY. 

1.  "They  were  seen    -  (off  the  Cape)  of  Good  Hope.''^ 
That  is,  they  were  in  the  neighbourhood  of  the  cape,  near  the  cape. 

Illustration  of  the  condic-  L/Tl. 

tion  of  the    nepoeclads  which      I,  Local  Ru-dicatory  ■ 

begm  with  on.  H^  Positional  E-dicatory. 

1.  The  paper  is     -        -  (on  the  desk.) 

2.  Some  fell  -         -  (on  good  ground.) 

3.  The  ball  rolled  -  (on  the  carpet.) 

4.  He  plays  -         -         -  (on  the  drum.) 

5.  Joseph  plays    -         -  (on  the  violin.) 

A  violin  is  a  musical  instrument — from  this  fact  it  would  seem  to  be 
proper  to  use  with  instead  of  on.  We  do  not  say,  he  saws  on  a  saw,  he 
cuts  on  a  knife ;  but  he  saws  with  a  saw,  he  cuts  with  a  knife. 

A  violin  is  as  much  an  instrument  as  is  a  saw,  or  a  knife.  Yet,  we  say, 
he  plays  on  a  violin  j  and  he  cuts  with  a  knife.  And  to  understand  why 
on,  and  not  with,  is  used  in  agnomeclads  which  are  founded  upon  a  certain 
class  of  instruments,  the  subject  of  the  relation  of  one  thing  to  another. 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS.  113 

must  receive  considerable  attention.  A  nepoeclad  may  be  constructed, 
formed,  upon  a  thing  which  bears  two  different  relations  to  the  thing 
on  which  the  trone,  or  the  poeclad  to  which  the  nepoeclad  is  con- 
jected,  is  formed.  For  instance:  industry  may  be  a  source,  and  an 
instrument,  or  means.  Hence  we  may  say  with  propriety, /row  indus- 
try, and  hy  industry. 

1.  "These  men  accumulate  money fiofn  industry." 

2.  "  These  men  accumulate  money  by  industry." 

In  the  first  instance,  industry  is  taken  as  the  source  whence  the  money 
springs — in  the  second,  it  is  taken  as  the  instrument,  or  mea»s  employed 
by  these  men  in  procuring  money. 

The  relation  that  the  thing  on  which  the  nepoeclad  is  built,  bears  to 
the  thing  in  the  super  mono,  is  a  subject  on  which  he  who  desires  to 
become  a  good  writer,  should  bestow  much  attention.  It  is  from  a  clear 
comprehension  of  the  exact  relation  which  the  nepoeclad  thing  bears  to 
the  Trone,  or  to  the  poeclad  thing,  that  one  is  able  to  form  the  nepoe- 
clads  of  proper  materials.  The  relations  which  the  nepoeclad  things 
bear  to  other  things,  are  too  subtle  for  the  comprehension  of  him 
who  has  no  powers  of  reflection,  and  for  him,  also,  who  has  these 
powers,  but  who  will  not  exert  them. 

1.  "The  fingers  of  his  hand,  are  familiar  with  deeds  qf 
charity."     (Cy  his  hand.) 

2.  "  The  fingers  on  his  hand^  are  familiar  with  deeds  of 
charity."     {On  his  hand.) 

Both  of  these  nepoeclads  are  correct.  The  fingers  bear  a  possessive, 
a /jroperfy,  relation  to  the  hand — Xhey  belong  io  the  hand.  Hence  o/ 
may  be  used.  And  the  fingers  bear  a  local  relation  also  to  the  hand — 
they  are  on  the  hand.    Hence  on  may  be  used. 

In  the  following  instance,  the  nepoeclad  basis  bears  but  one  relation 
to  the  trone : 

He  cuts  (with  a  knife.) 

The  knife  is  the  nepoeclad  things  or  the  nepoeclad  basis  ;  and,  as  it 
has  an  instrumental  character  only,  some  nepoeclide  which  denotes 
the  idea  of  instrumentality,  or  means,  is  the  only  one  with  which  this 
mono  can  be  commenced. 

In  general,  the  nepoeclad  beeis  bears  but  one  relation  to  other  things  ; 
and,  in  erecting  a  superstructure  upon  this  basis,  we  must  commence  with 
a  nepoeclide  which  will  express  this  relation.  To  this  principle,  however, 
there  are  exceptions;  for  there  are  instances  in  which  the  relation  that  the 
nepoeclad  thing  bears  to  the  action  in  the  super  mono,  must  be  en- 
tirely disregarded  in  constructing  the  nepoeclad  mono.  This  is  the  case 
where  a  particular  nepoeclad  is  founded  on  a  musical  instrument :  for 
instance,  the  drum.  The  drum  is  an  instrument  which  is  employed  in  the 
production  of  music — yet  we  do  not  commence  the  nepoeclad  which  is 
founded  on  this  instrument,  with  a  nepoeclide  that  expresses  the  relation 

10* 


114 


CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS. 


which  this  instrument  bears  to  the  act  of  producing  the  music.  We  do 
not  say  John  plays  with  the  drum;  but  we  say,  John  plays  on  the  drum. 
Men  seem  to  have  been  so  struck  with  the  peculiarity  of  the  fact  that,  in 
making  music  by  the  instrumentality  of  these  instruments,  the  hand,  or 
lips,  the  bow,  or  sticks  are  uniformly  placed  on  the  instrument,  that  they 
commenced  the  mono  with  a  ne/?oec/t</e  expressive  of  this  on  position  which 
the  hand,  the  lips,  the  how,  and  the  sticks  occupy  in  common,  instead  of 
with  one  expressive  of  the  instrumental  bearing  of  these  instruments  upon 
the  act  of  making  the  music.  If  the  act  of  playing  on  the  drum  was  done 
sometimes  by  striking  in,  sometimes,  under,  sometimes,  against,  sometimes, 
on,  and  sometimes,  at,  the  drum,  we  might  find  all  the  following  ne- 
poeclads  in  English : 

Cwith  the  drum. 


John  plays 


on  the  drum. 
in  the  drum. 
under  the  drum. 
against  the  drum. 
beneath  the  drum. 
at  the  drum. 


Was  it  common,  however,  to  place  the  sticks  in  all  these  positions^  it  is 
quite  probable  we  should  find  the  following  only : 

'with  the  drum. 


John  plays 


'  6.  John  is     -         -         -  (on  his  horse.) 

7.  "They  depend  -  {on  him)  to  pay  the  note." 

The  doctrine  is  this :  From  seeing  that  whatever  is  placed  on,  is  sus- 
tained, supported,  men  have  come  to  put  many  conditions,  and  principles 
on.  The  on  position  may  be  called  the  sustaining  position.  He  that  is  on 
his  horse,  is  supported  by  his  horse.  Men  learned  from  observation,  that 
the  on  position  among  tangible  things,  is  the  sustaining  position :  they 
saw  that  a  house  is  on  its  foundation ;  and  they  saw  that  from  this  posi 
tipn  of  the  house,  it  is  sustained  by  the  foundation.  Having  acquired  this 
knowledge  through  the  medium  of  the  eye,  they  have  come  to  place  untan- 
gible  things  which  they  desire  to  sustain,  in  the  on  position,  or  in  the  on 
place  of  whatever  is  made  to  render  the  support  which  is  desired.  Hence 
certain  states  of  the  mind,  as  well  as  principles  of  art,  and  science,  and 
events  themselves,  are  placed  on  something. 

8.  His  cure  depends      -  (on  his  care.) 
My  dependence         -  (on  him)  is  well  known. 


9. 


10. 
11. 


"  Man  should  depend 
Man's    salvation    de- 


[on  the  promises)  of  God" 


CONBICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS.  115 

'         pends      -        -         -  (on  this  condition.) 

12.  I  agreed  to  go  -         -  (on  condition)  that  you  would  pay 
me. 

That  is,  the  agreement  was  held  in  being  by  this  condition.  And  to 
procure  this  support  from  this  condition,  the  agreement  is  placed  on  tho 
condition.  Where  is  a  house  placed  that  it  may  derive  its  support  from  its 
foundation  1  It  is  placed  on  its  foundation.  The  agreement  is  to  derive  its 
support  from  tliis  condition — what,  then,  is  more  natural  than  to  place  the 
agreement  on  the  condition  1 

13.  I  affirm    -         -         -  (on  my  word)  that  he  was  well. 
Doctrine. — I  attempt  to  support  my  affirmation,  not  by  proof,  not  by 

argument,  i\ot  by  circumstances,  but  by  my  word  of  honour.  For  this 
purpose,  I  make  my  word  the  basis,  the  foundation,  and  place  my  affirma- 
tion, not  under  it,  not  in  it,  but  on  it. 

14.  He  declared     -         -  (on  his  honour)  that  I  should  he 
well  treated. 

That  is,  he  sustained  his  declaration  by  placing  it  on  the  basis  of  his 
honour.  But  honour  is  not  a  solid  foundation  in  all  cases :  it  is  not  a  rock. 
Hence  a  declaration  may  not  be  sustained,  though  it  is  placed  an  a  basis  of 
honour. 

15.  His  blood  be    -         -  (onus;) 

16.  and  his  blood  be        -  (on  our  children.) 

The  condiction  of  "  on  us/^  and  of  "  on  our  children,"  is  not  so  obviously 
local,  and  positional,  as  to  render  a  discussion  of  the  subject  useless  to  the 
young  student.  In  order  to  understand  the  doctrine  of  the  condiction  of 
these  two  monos,  it  may  be  well  to  recur  to  the  occasion  on  which  they 
were  uttered : 

Pilate  had  just  washed  his  hands  in  the  presence  of  the  people  to  indi- 
cate to  them  that  he  did  not  intend  that  any  of  the  blood  of  Christ  should 
be  found  on  him.  And,  when  the  people  saw  that  Pilate  did  not  intend 
that  the  act  of  putting  Christ  to  death,  should  be  traced  to  him,  they  said, 

Pilate,  let  "Ms  blood  be  on  us,  and  on  our  children.''^ 

As  it  is  obvious  that  the  people  did  not  intend  that  the  blood  of  Christ 
should  actually  be  put  on  them,  the  mind  that  is  unschooled  in  the  doctrine 
of  nepoeclad  condiction,  is  slow  to  admit  that  the  condiction  of  the  ne- 
poeclads,  "on  Ms,and  on  our  children,"  is  local. 

The  doctrine  is  this :  In  deciding  upon  the  condiction  of  a  mono,  the 
representation,  not  the  reality,  is  the  rule  of  action.  We  are  not  to  ask, 
then,  whether  the  blood  of  Chirst  has  actually  been  put  on  the  Jews,  and 
their  children,-  but  we  are  to  inquire  what  is  the  representation  in  the  lan- 
guage of  the  two  monos,  on  us,  and  on  our  children.  If  the  reality,  and 
not  the  condictive  import,  is  to  be  made  the  ground  of  deciding  on  the  con- 
diction of  monoa,  in  the  moon,  in  the  following  poetrone,is  not  A>ca/.' 

"  My  chair  is  (in  the,  moon.") 


* 


116  CONDICTION   OP    NEPOECLADS. 

Can  it  be  argued  that  "  in  the  moon"  does  not  mean  in  the  moon  be 
cause  the  thing  which  is  represented  to  be  in  this  planet,  is  not  in  it  ] 
Surely  they  who  said  to  Pilate, 

*'His  blood  be  on  us,  and  on  our  children," 

did  not  believe  tbiat  Pilate  had  the  power  to  spot,  to  mark,  them  and  all 
their  present,  and  future  children  with  the  blood  of  Christ!  But  does  this 
justify  the  position  that  "on  us"  does  not  mean  on  us— and  that  "on  our 
children"  does  not  mean  on  our  children  T  The  Jews  require  the  cruci- 
fixion of  Christ  at  the  hands  of  Pilate ;  but  Pilate  manifests  a  want  of 
courage,  or  a  want  of  desire  to  gratify  them.  But  the  people,  to  indicate 
their  courage,  and  desire  to  perpetrate  this  deed,  inform  Pilate  that  they  are 
willing  to  do  the  act  in  the  very  faces  of  the  most  indubitable,  and  lasting 
proofs  of  their  guilt.     Pilate  says, 

"I  am  innocent  of  the  blood  of  this  just  pierson ;  see  ye 
to  it:'  ' 

They  reply, 
-  **  His  blood  be  on  us,  and  on  all  our  children."  ,  >  - 

That  is,  Pilate,  you  may  show  to  the  world  that  you  are  innocent  of  his 
blood  by  marking  us  as  his  executioners.  How  mark  them  i  By  putting 
his  blood  on  them.  What,  put  the  blood  actually  on  them  1  So  is  the 
representation  which  is  sufficient  to  settle  the  condiction  of  the  mono. 

The  preceding  remarks  proceed  on  the  ground  that  the  import  of  the 
language,  "  His  blood  be  on  us,  and  on  our  children,"  is  that  the  blood  is  to 
be  put  on  the  Jews  as  a  teken,  as  the  means  of  identity,  as  a  proof  thai 
the  people,  and  not  Pilate,  put  Christ  to  death.  I  have  taken  this  par- 
ticular ground,  not  because  I  think  it  the  theological  idea,  but  becau>;e 
i  wished  to  examine  the  doctrine  oi  reality,  and  representation,  as  a  cri- 
terion in  deciding  on  the  condiction  of  monos.  Having  shown  that -it  is 
the  representation,  and  not  the  reality,  of  the  thing  represented,  which 
decides  the  condiction  of  monos,  I  shall  now  attempt  to  establish  the 
condiction  of  this  mono,  "  oti  ms,"  upon  the  theological  basis.  ^ 

17.  "  His  blood  be  {on  us,)  and  {on  our  children.") 

That  is,  4et  the  consequences  of  putting  Christ  to  death,  rest  on  us,  and 
on  our  children.  Put  the  consequences  of  his  crucifixion  into  the  sustain- 
ing position:  we  will  pledge  ourselves  to  sustain,  to  bear  up,  to  support, 
all  the  bitter  results  which  you  think  will  flow  from  the  sacrifice  that  we 
intend  to  make.  Put  these  consequences,  therefore,  o?i  us.  "  On  us  be  all 
the  blame." 

*n.   Contact  E-dicatory 

18.  "  They  will  have  compassion  (on  him.") 

DocTBjNE. — They  will  touch  him  with  compassion  ;  or  they  will  bring 
their  compassion  in  contact  with  him.  The  idea  of  position  does  not  seem 
to  enter  into  the  condiction,  for  there  is  no  intimation  that  the  compassion 
is  to  be  applied  to  the  upper  part  of  the  person.  The  prominent  idea  is 
that  of  locating,  of  placing,  compassion  in  contact  with  him. 

Dr.  Webster  says  that  on  means. 


CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS.  117 

"  Being  in  contaet  with  the  surface  or  nppsr  part  of  a  thing ;  as,  my 
book  is  on  the  table." 

This  is  his  first  definition  of  on,  and  although  it  is  lax,  it  may  answer 
the  purpose  of  a  Dictionary.  But,  although  it  may  answer  the  purpose  of 
a  Dictionary,  it  will  not  accomplish  the  object  of  a  Syntax.  The  word,  on, 
is  the  name  of  a  certain  place  which  belongs  to  a  great  variety  of  objects. 
Thete  is  one^lace  which  belongs  to  a  table,  that  is  named  on.  There  is 
another  place  which  belongs  to  a  table,  that  is  named  under,  A  book  may 
occupy  both  of  these  places ;  hence  we  may  say, 

1.  The  book  is  07i  the  table,  and 

2.  The  book  is  under  the  table. 

Now,  book  is  the  name  of  a  thing  ;  and  tahU  ia-the  name  of  a  thing—' 
but  on  as  well  as  under  is  the  name  of  a  place.  And,  as  a  noun  is  the 
name  of  any  person,  place,  or  thing,  on  and  under  are  as  much  nouns  as 
are  book,  and  table  / 

Dr.  Webster  says  on  is  the  sign  of  a  contact.  "On,"  however,  is  the 
name  of  a  certain  place  the  occupying  of  which  produces  a  contact.  The 
word,  on,  is  not  the  name  of  the  contact — on  is  the  name  6f  the  place 
itself.  It  is  true,  however,  that  contact  is  a  prominent  trait  in  the  condic- 
tion  of  many  agnomeclads  which  begin  with  on.  But  this  idea  is  a  derived 
one :  As  the  occupancy  of  the  place  of  which  on,  under  its  primary  mean- 
ing, is  the  name,  always  produces  contact,  the  idea  of  position,  the  idea  of 
upper,  is  lost,  and  the  notion  of  contact  acquired ;  as,  he  appears  on  pub- 
be  occasions.  That  is,  he  does  not  remain  at  home,  but  comes  out,  and 
connects  himself  with  public  occasions — he  comes  up  to  the  occasions — he 
puts  himself  in  actual  contact  with  the  occasions  as  much  as  does  he  who 
occupies  the  on  of  a  stage,  in  contact  with  the  stage.  But,  then,  there  is 
no  upper  to  the  public  occasions — hence  the  positional  idea  is  lost.  The 
local  idea,  however,  is  still  prominent,  for  he  is  placed  up  to  the  occasion. 

19.  He  preached     -         -  (on  last  Sabbath.) 

Doctrine. — His  act  of  preaching  was  in  contact  with  that  portion,  with 
that  block  of  time,  which  is  denominated,  "  last  Sabbath."  Or  his  action 
was  so  placed,  so  heated,  that  it  came  in  contact  with  last  Sabbath.  We 
place  matter  in  contact  with  matter,  but  events,  in  contact  with  time. 

He  spake  on  the  stage  on  last  night. 
He  on  stage ,-  spake  on  night. 
His  action  was  on  last  night. 

That  is,  his  action  was  in  contact  with  the  piece  of  time,  which  is  here 
called,  last  night. 

He  was  on  the  stage. 

That  is,  there  was  nothing  between  him,  and  the  stage,  to  separate  him 
from  the  stage — hence  he  was  on  the  stage. 

The  speaking  was  on  last  night. 

That  is,  there  was  neither  a  thin,  nor  a  thick  portion  of  time  which  pre- 


118  COiffDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS.  ' 

rented  the  speaking  irom  coming  in  contact  with  the  n/g-/*^  here  men- 
tioned. 

In  reference  to  the  places  of  things f  we  use  ivheri;  as,  where  is  the 
bookl  on  the  table,         ^ 

But,  in  relation  to  the  place  of  events,  we  use  when;  as,  tuAen  was  the 
book  placed  on  the  table  ]  on  last  night. 

When,  then,  signifies  place  in  time — and  where,  place  in. reference  to 
things.     {English  Syntascope,  page  \&Q.)  -.'../       -r"^-   -  v 

20.  John  retired      -         -  (on  your  approach.)  "         * 

DocTHiiTE. — The  act  of  retiring  came  in  contact  with  the  act  of  ap- 
proaching. That  is,  no  portion  of  time  fell  between  the  two  acts.  The 
act  of  retiring  was  so  soon  after  the  act  of  approaching,  that  not  a  parti- 
cle of  time  fell  between  the  two  events:  one  came  in  ^d^ac/  with  the 
other.  -    '' :  ■';  _  ■  --^ /•  '''■',.-  •-/■■;■  ■    -  -  ;■ 

21.  "He  was       ,   -         -^(on  |he  look  out)jroi^ /iiwi.*' 

22.  They  were       -         -  (oc^lie  alert.) 


23.  He  is       -  -  -  (pi  ^ 

24.  He  was    -  -  -  Ton  gu|r|k) 

25.  They  were  -  -  (on  th^ir  guard.)       ^    ;.';.'  /       ,  *    .  ' 

26.  He  appears  -  -•  (on  public  o6casibns.)    ;'     '^         ; 

Doctrine. — Whenever  there  i^  any  public  occeisitwh  he  cohnes  in  con- 
tact with  it — he  comes  out  to  it — he  connects  himself  ^ith  it.  But  Jio 
keeps  himself  detached  from  all  other  occasions.-     ^-^  • .    T,i  r.  V 

'   •  ;       ■'  -.       ■ ''--  '-1    }.     . 

27..  We  find  ruin    -         -  (on  ruin.)      '  >' ^  : 

28.  Men  nieet  with  loss  -  (on  loss.) 

29.  He  suffered  affliction    (on  affliction.) 

30.  The  thunder  came  peal  (on  peal.) 

31.  He  saw  heap    -  -  (on  heap.)  ^         , 

Doctrine. — Ruin  was  so  frequent  that  nothing  fell  between  one  s|lne 
of  ruin,  and  another — hence  ruin  came  in  contact  with  ruin.      '   ,    V  v   •    '  ' 

One  peal  of  thunder  came  so  close  to  another  that  the  second  came  in 
contact  with  the  first. 

"Heap  on  heap."  That  is,  heap  stood  so  close  to  heap  that  t|tiere  was  a 
contact  among  the  heaps. 

If  the  idea,  however,  is,  that  one  heap  stood  on  the  top  of  aiiother,  the 
minocondiction  is  not  contact,  but  positional :  He  heaped  one  heap  on,  or 
upon  another.  ^ 

32.  He  came  -         -         -  (on  a  sudden.)  '' 

33.  He  came-         -         -  Ton  an  errand)  o/*  7pt;e.  > ) ^    *■ 

34.  The  ship  is      -         -  (onshore.)  .  ''"^^^f/ 

'DocTRiifE. — His  coming  came  in  contact  with  our  want  of  preparatHqi^  ^ 
— or  his  appearance  came  so  near  our  state  of  unexpectedness  that  ms  i 
appearance  came  in  contact  with  our  state  of  unexpectedness.  C 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS.  119 

2.  The  errand  was  his  business ;  and  he  had  come  to  that  business — ^he 
was  at  that  business— yea,  more,  he  was  engaged  in  it — hftnce  he  was  in 
contact  with  it.  Can  a  man  be  in  water,  and  not  be  in  contact  vi'wh 
water '?  How,  then,  can  he  be  in  business^  and  not  be  in  contact  with 
business  1  .' 

3.  «  On  shore"    That  is,  aground. 

^\\\.  Progression  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 

35.  He  is  now         -         -  (on  his  way.) 

Doctrine. — He^is  now  in  contact  with  his  way,  with  his  journey,  with 
his  aet  of  traveUingr  And  as  he  is  in  contact  with  his  way,  he  makes  pro- 
gress in  his  Af  ay.  ' 

36.  He-^as  then    -      ^  (on  the  road.) 

DocTjiiNE. — The  word,  road,  may  be  considered,  here,  as  meaning  jour 
ney,  or  way.  In  this  case  the  doctrine'  of  the  condiction  is  that  he  was 
then  .in  contact  with  his  traA)elllng.  That  is,  there  was  not  such  a  pause, 
mich  a  cessation  of  action  as  is  necessary  to  break  one  off  from  his  jour- 
,ney,  or  to  produce  a  Want  of  contact  bei^i;5eu  him  and  his  journeying  act. 
A  3ay 's  rest  Bt  a  friend's  house,  is  not  aWe  to  destroy  the  contact  of  the 
traveller  with  his  jou^CTjir^in  short'he  is  in  constant  contact  with  it  till 
his  place  of  destinaUo|i?ip  reached,  y  -  ^ 

But,  if  the  word,  roac/,  as  here  used,  means  the  highway  over  which  he 
travelled,  the  doctrine  of  the  condiction  is  that  he  was  in  contact  with  the 
fdghivay  :  he  was  on  his  road  to  Boston.  That  is,  he  had  left  home,  and 
entered  the  road  with  which  he  was  in  contact  when  I  saw  him. 

37.  He  is       -^  -  '•  ion  the  road)  to  fame. 

38.  They  are  -*  '   -  (on  their  way)  home. 

39.  Henry  was  /  -         -  (on  his  way)  to  ruin. 

40.  He  is  always  -         -  (on  the  wing.) 


41,  He  was    -         -         -  (on  the  alert.) 

Where  the  idea  is  action ,-  on  the  alert  falls  into  the  Progression  Ex-e- 
dicalory.  But  where  the  idea  is  that  of  vigilance  only,  this  mono's  con- 
dition is  exhausted  at  the  E-dic  a-tory.  , 

Class  t^e  agnomeclads  in  the  following  gnomod  * 

^  1.  Tlie  house  was  -  {on  fire.) 

-!^.  He  is  bent        -         -  {on  mischief .) 

■>  .  II.  Contiguous  E-dicatory. 

42h  The  ship  was  -  -  (on  Galveston  Island.) 

43.^  Jefferson  City  is  -  (on  the  Missouri  river.) 

44.  Vandalia  stands  -  (on  the  Kaskaskia  river.) 

45.  The  British  fleet  -  (was  on  the  American  coast.) 

That  is,  near  the  American  coast.  /    . 

"  The  ship  is  on  shore.    That  is,  aground :  contact^  • 


120  CONDICTION    OP    NEPOBCLADS. 

Illustration  of  the  condiction  \JV6T.  .   \ 

of  the     nepoeclads  which  be-      I.  LOCal  Ru-dicatOry. 

gin  with  over.  II.  Positional  E-dicatory.*- 

1.  He  held  the  umbrella    Tover  his  head.) 

2.  The  smoke  rose        -  (over  the  city.) 

3.  The  flag  was  waving   (over  our  heads.) 

4.  «*  The  mercy-seat      -  (over  the  testimony.") 

5.  There  was  a  window  (over  the  door.) 

6.  The  hat  hung  -         -  (over  the  table.) 

*  III.  Meta*  Ex-e-dic-a-tory.' 

7.  The  cat  jumped         -  (over  the  table.) 

8.  The  deer  jumped      -  (over  the  stream.) 

9.  TheVater  ran  -         -  (over  the  dam.) 

10.  The  horse  jumped  -  /over  the  fence.) 

1 1 .  The  lad  stepped  -  (over  the  pin.) 

12.  He  went  -         -  -  (over     ,     ,     )  to  England.  ^ 

13.  He  went  -         -  -  (over     ,     ,     )  to  the  other  party, 

14.  **  He  remained  -  -  (overnight.") 

*  Meta,  from  one  side  to  the  other. 

*1II.  Contact Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 

15.  He  sailed  -        -  (over  the  lake.) 

16.  They  travelled-         -  (over  all  the  earth.) 

17.  The  cap  was    -         -  (over  his  face.) 

18.  We  put  cloths  -         -  (over  his  hand.) 

19.  Spread  a  counterpane  (over  us.) 

*III.  Emersion  Ex-e-dic-a-lory* 

20.  The  water  was  -  (over  his  head.) 
21    Thesnovvwas-         -  (over  his  boots.) 

*  HI.  Causative  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 
22.  "Devout  men  carried 
Stephen  to  his  burial, 
and    made    great   la- 
mentation        -         -  (over  him.") 

They  were  looking  down  upon  him — hence  they  were  over  him  as  much  as 
the  clouds  are  over  our  heads — and  he  was  the  cause  of  the  lamentation — 
hence  the  positional,  and  the  causative  traits  in  the  condictive  character  of 
this  mono. 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLABS.  121. 

-  -  II.  Meta  E-dicatorv. 

1    He  remained  with  me  (over  Sunday.)  . 

2.  **  He  kept  it  fresh      -  (over  winter.") 

3.  Will  you  stay  -         -  (over  night?) 

4.  *'  They  prepared  for  '         ' 
each  day-         -  -      -  (overnight.") 

DocTniJfi:.— ^The  things  prepared  passed  from  the  beeinning  to  the  end 
of  the  night.  Or,  th«  prepared  state  began  on  one  side  of  the  night,  and 
went  over  to  the  other  side.  ' 

They  went  over  the  river.  That  is,  they  went  from  one  side  to  the  other. 
The  prepared  state  did  not  go  over  a  stream  of  water,  but  it  -passed  over  a 
stream  of  time.  , 

I  have  placed  this  kind  of  mono  under  the  Zoca/  Gefnecon- 
dicatory.  But,  from  an  apprehension  that  some  might  not 
see  the  local  trait  in  its  condictive  character,  I  have  placed  it 
under  the  Blank  Local.     (See  Meta  E-dicatory,  under 

Lo4iat  Hu-dicatory. 

*  11.  Superiority        .     E-dicatory. 
u',-\  .  '^IW,  Excellence Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 

1.  Christianity   has   ad- 
vantages -         -         -  (over  every  other  religion.) 

2.  Has  John  an  advan- 
tage        -         _         -  (over  Joseph  ?)  r 

3.  '*  Young  Pallas  shone 
conspicuous     -         -  (o'er  the  rest.") 

4.  What  advantages  has 

learning  -         -         -  •  (over  ignorance  ?) 

5.  What  advantages  has 

Texas     -         -         -  (over  the  United  States  ?) 

*III.  Authority  Ex-e-dic -a -tory. 

6.  Who  put  thee  -         -  (over  us  ?) 

7.  "I  will  make   thee 

ruler        -         -         -  (over  many  things.") 

8.  "Thou  shalt  be         -  (over  my  house.") 

^  III.  Guardian  Ex-e-dic-a-tory,    ~ 

9.  "  Parents Avatch        -  (over  their  children.") 

10.  *'  His  tender  mercies 

are-         -         -         -  (over  all  his  works.") 

11.  "  Dost  thou  not  watch  (over  my  sin  ?") 

11 


122  C0NDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 

Over  is  frequently  a  nepoeekd,  an  adverb  ,•  as,  He  will  pay  over 
the  money  to  you. 

In  many  instances,  however,  where  from  a  slight  glance,  over 
appears  to  be  a  nepoeded,  it  is  a  nepoedide,-  as.  How  shall  I  get  over? 

That  isi  How  shall  I  get  over  the  ice,  the  river,  the  lake. 

Will  you  appropriate  the  nepoeclad  in  the  following  7?oe<rowc.5 

How  will  he  get  {over  thh  objection  ?) 

He  wants  to  pass,  but  this  objection  is  placed  athwart  his  way.  Was  it 
a  stream  of  water  over  which  he  desired  to  get,  he  would  begin  on  one  side, 
and  work  his  way  over  to  the  other.  We  get  over  objections,  difficulties,  ob- 
stacles, and  arguments  much  in  the  same  way  in  which  we  get  over  rivers, 
and  seas :  we  construct  logical  steamboats,  subtle  packets,  or  some  other 
cunning  craft,  and  dash  over  the  muddy  water  with  great  speed,  and  some- 
times, with  a  good  grace  !    . 

Illustration  of  the  condiction  Past,     (beyond.) 

of  the      nepoeclads  which  be-      j_  LOCaJ  Ru-dicatOry^ 

gin  vnth  past.  *  II.  Positional  E-dicatory.  .- 

1.  He  was  then     -      .  -.(past  the  true  line.) 

2.  It  is  now  -      '  -         -  (past  ten)  o'clock. 

That  is,  the  hour,  the  time,  is  beyond  the  mark  of  ten,  which  is  on  the 
clock :  X.     Or  the  hour  hand  has  gone  beyond  X. 

*  111.  Loss  Ex-e-dic-a-tory, 

3.  He  was  then    -         -  (past  feeling.) 

DocTiiiirE. — He  had  travelled  upon  a  vehicle  of  disease  so  far  into  a 
state  of  death  that  he  was  then  beyond  the  state  of  sensation.  How  did  he 
arrive  at  this  place  ]     By  a  loss  of  the  power,  of  the  capacity,  to  feel. 

*  III;  Infeasible  Ex-e'dic-a-iory. 

4.  He  is  now         -         -  (past  recovery.) 

5.  He  was  then     -         -  (past  cure.) 

DocTHiNE. — ^*rhe  cormes  in  these  clads  must  be  considered  as 

meaning  a  condition,  a  state.  Hence  the  idea  is  that  he  is  now  beyond 
the  state  of  recovery. 

2.  When  a  diseased  person  is  taken  in  a  particular  condition,  he  may  be 
cured.  But  in  this  case  the  disease  had  carried  him  beyond  that  condition, 
past  the  state  of  cure.  How  was  he  carried  beyond  that  state,  that  condi- 
tion! ^y  the  infeasibility,  the  impossibility,  to  cure  him:  the  impossi- 
bility  to  cure  him  placed  him  beyond  a  cure.  Or  the  impossibility  to  cure 
him  placed  him  jOflw^  a  cure. 

Fast  may  be  a  nepoeclide ;  as,  Fast  deeds  may  give  us 
pleasure,  or  pain  according  to  their  character. 


C0NDICT];0N    OP    NEPOECLADS.  123 

"lilustration    of  the   condic:  ThrOUgh      (door.) 

lion  of  the     nepoeclads  which      I-  LOCal  Ru-dicatory- 

begin  with  fArow^//.  II.  Positional  E-dicatory. 

III.  Passage  Ex-e-dic-a-tory, 

1.  He  pulled  the  thread    (through  the  eye)  of  the  needle. 

2.  The  breath  comes     -  (through  the  glottis)  of  the  wind- 
pipe, 

l)ocTRiNKi — 'HiQ  leading  idea  of  through  is  a  passage  place,  a  door. 
Indeed  Home  Tooke  attempts  to  show  that  through  is  formed  from  a  Saxon 
word  which  means  door,  ^  place  for  i)§ssage:  This  etymology  ^ows  how 
this  word  has  come  to  mean  from  enof  to  end^  as  in  the  instance,  he  pulled 
the  thread  through  the  eye  oi  the  needle.  That  is,  from  one  end  of  the 
thread  to  the  other  end. 

This  account  of /[Arouo-^  shows  also  how  this  nepoeclide  has  come  to 
indicate  from  side  to  siae,  and  from  beginning  to  end^  as.  He  bored 
through  the  board,  He  read  through  the  book.  He  remained  through  the 
night. 

If  the  parent  word  of  through  means  a  dooTy  an  aperture,  which  is 
filled,  or  stopped,  by  a  frame-work,  hung  on  hinges,  the  power  of  this  stero- 
clade  to  denote  from  beginning  to  end,  from  side  to  side,  and  from  surface 
to  surface,  ia  a  legitimate  descendant  from  its  Saxon  original :  the  door,  the 
aperture^  of  which  the  parent  of  through  is  the  name,  extends  from  one 
hide  of  the  wall  to  the  other  side,  from  one  surface  to  the  other  surface. 

I  went  through  the  fields,  to  the  house  of  John. 

I  made  the  ^elds  the  passage  place,  the  door  through  which  I  passed 
in  going  to  his  house. 

3.  "  He  went        -         -  (through  the  land)  of  Judea  to  Je- 
rusalem.''* 

That  is,  the  land  of  Judea  was  the  passage  place. 

4.  The  deer  ran    -         -  (through  the  forest.) 

The  deer  passed — and  the  passage  place  of  them  was  the  forest. 

5.  Fishes  swim     -         -  (through  the  water.) 

The  passage  place  is  in  the  water.  That  is,  the  door,  the  passage  place, 
is  not  cut  through  a  wall,  .but  through  water. 

6.  He  bored  -         -  (through  the  log.) 

That  is,  he  formed  an  aperture :  he  bored  from  one  side,  or  from  6ne  end, 
of.  the  log  to  the  other.  7%roMg-A  denotes  a  passage  place;  The  passage 
place  in  this  instance  is  in  a  log.  But  what  is  it  which  occupies  this  pas- 
sage place — what  is  it  which  goes  through  the  log — what  is  it  which  passes 
thiough  this  dear  which  the  word,  through,  denotes?    It  is  the  hole  itself. 


124  CONDICTION   OF   NEPOECLADS. 

He  bored  a  hole.     But  how  far  did  the  hole  extend,  how  far  did  it  paw 
The  hole  passed  through  the  log. 

7.  They  passed     -        -  (through  the  gate.) 

8.  They  came       -         -  .(through  the  canal.) 

9.  All  business  must  pass  (through  his  hands.) 

10.  He  remained    -         -  (through  the  night.) 

What  went  ^^roM^/t  the  night ?  Did  he  go  through  the  night?  ^oi 
men  do  not  go  through  time :  events  only,  j5nd  a  passage  place  in  time. 
The  passage  place,  the  door,  for  men,  is  cut  in  matter — and  the  passage 
place,  the  door,  for  events,  is  cut  through  time.  Events  may  be  located  in 
a  night,  on  a  night,  and  at  a  night;  and  they  may  even  pass  perfectly 
through  a.  night.  In  the  present  case  the  event  passed  entirely  throitgh  the 
block  of  time,  which  is  called  a  night. 

1 1 .  I  will  go  -         -         -  (through  this  business.) 

12.  He  has  gone     -        -  (through  many  hardships.) 

Through  indicates  a  passage  place  in  the  business,  and  in  many  hard- 
ships. The  act,  denoted  by  go,  is  to. occupy  the  passae;e  place  which  is 
opened  in  business  ^  and  the  act  denoted  by  gone,  occupied  that  opened  in 
hardships.  That  is,  these  two  deeds  travel  on  till  they  pass  through  the 
entire  distance  over  which  these  things,  business  and  hardships,  extend. 

H.  Passim*  E-dicatory. 

13.  They  went       -         -  (through  the  city)  in  searcA  q/"  ^AeiV 
Jriend. 

14.  '"  Their  tongue  walketh  (through  the  earth.")   Ps.lxxxiii. 

*Everywh£rey  throughout  the  place. 


II.  Medium  E-dicatory. 

1.  By  grace  are  ye  saved  (through  faith.) 

DocTHiNE.^From  denoting  the  place  for  the  passage  of  events,  through 
has  come  to  convey  an  allusion  to  the  medium,  or  means  by  which  events 
are  produced.  Hence  in  certain  instances  where  the  basis  of  the  agnome- 
clad,  is  the  medium,  or  means  by  which  the  event,  mentioned  in  the  supe-. 
rior  mono,  is  produced,  the  medium  character  of  this  basis,  is  indicated  by 
through ;  as.  Ye  are  saved  by  grace  (through  faith.) 

Now,  faith  is  the  basis  of  the  agnoraeclad  under  consideration ;  and  this 
basis  is  the  medium  through  which  the  g;race,  by  which  men  are  saved,  is 
procured.  The  event,  then,  which  is  produced  by  the  instrumentality  of 
faith,  is  in  this  implied  moiixo— which  is  procured. 

[Ye  axe  saved]  (by  grace)  (^whi^i,  jsprocjuredy  (through 
faith.)     ;  -       "     '  ' 


CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS,  125 

2.  "It  will  bud     -         -  (through  the  scent)  of  water. '^ 

DocTBiiyE. — Job  is  here  contrasting  man  with  a  tree :  he  says,  Man  is 
incapable  of  springing  up  anew  ;  he  must  lie  till  God  calls  him  forth.  But 
of  a  tree  he  says,  "  Though  the  root  thereof  wax  old  in  the  earth,  and  the 
stock  thereof  die  in  the  ground;  yet  through  the  scent  of  water,  it  will  bud, 
and  bring  forth  boughs  like  a  plant." 

3.  *'  Sanctify  them         -  (through  thy  truth." 

4.  The  gift  of  God  is 

eternal  life       -        -  (through  Jesus  Christ.") 

That  is,  [«The  gift  is  eternal  life"]  (which  comes)  ("through  Jesus 
Christ.") 

5.  But    some    of   them 
said,  He  casteth  out 

devils      -         -         -  ^through  Beelzebub.) 

6.  He  slew  his  brother  -  (through  thirst)  for  gold. 

7.  He  sold  his  country  -  (through  a  false  ambition.) 

8.  We  see  things  -         -  (through  the  medium)  of  the  eye, 

9.  The  crime  was  disco- 

vered     -        -        -  (through  the  folly)  of  the  offender, 

10.  An  artery  is  a  vesser  -  (through  which)  Me  hlood  is  con- 
veyed from  the  heart  to  all  parts  of  the  animal  body. 

11.  A  vein  is  a  vessel      -  (through  which)  the  blood  is  re* 
turned  to  the  heart. 

The  condiction  of  many  of  the  nepoeclads  which  begin  with  throught 
demands  close  reflection.  '  • 

Instances  of  this  description  occur  where  thfe  basis  of  the  nepoeclad, 
is  naturally  a.  passage  place ;  as,  canals,  gates,  tubes,  vein»,  arteries,  &c. 

For  instance:  **  Verily,  verily,  I  say  unto  you,  He  that  en- 
tereth  not  through  the  door,  into  the  sheep-fold,  but  climbeth 
up  some  other  way,  the  same  is  a  thief  and  a  robber, 
(through  the  door.) 

Is  the  door  spoken  of  as  the  means  by  which  the  act  of  entering  is 
effectuated ;  or  is  it  spoken  of  as  the  mere  place  of  entering  into  the  sheep- 
fold  1  The  condiction  of  this  mono,  cannot  be  determined  without  a  care- 
ful examination  of  the  context  with  which  the  ideas  of  this  verse;  are 
closely  connected. 

I  have  substituted  through  for  by  ••  "  bt/ the  door."  This  substitution, 
however,  does  not  change  the  condictive  character  of  the  mono ;  for  if  we 
replace  br/,  the  question  would  still  be,  is  the  condiction  of  the  mono,  /n- 
strumental,  or  is  it  local?  21* 


126  CONDIGTIOJS    OE    NEPOBCLAJDS.  '      .. 

Illustration  of  the  condic-  ThvOUghoUt.  {through  and  out.}- 
tionofthe    nepoeclads  which      I.  Local  Ru-dicatory. 

hegm^^ith  throughout.  II.  Passim  E-dicatory.       ' 

{Passinif  everywhere,  in  every  part.) 

1.  This  measure  was  ap- 
proved   -         -         -  (throughout  the  country.) 

2.  This  is  a  practice      -  (throughout  France.) 

3.  He  has  been  consist- 
ent -         -         -  (throughout  his  political  course.) 

IllustratioHofthecondiction  ^^>    UfltO.     {end.) 

of  the     nepoeclads  whidi  be-  I.  Local  Ru-dicatOry. 

gpin  with  to  and  with  urhto.  n.  Final  E-digatohy. 

1.  John  went         -        -  (to  church.) 

DocTRXKB. — ^There  are  various  places  which  belong  to  a  church:  there 
is  the  under  of  a  church,  the  in  of  a  church,  the  on  of  a  church,  the  over 
of  a  church,  the  to  of  a  church,  the  at  of  a  church,  the  from  of  a  church, 
&c.  &c.  Now,  there  is  one  of  these  places  which  is  called  by  three,  or 
more  different  names :  these  are  to,  at,  from,  and  in.  When  the  act  ends 
at  this  place,  the  place  is  called  to ,-  as,  he  went  to  church. 

When  the  act  begins  in  this  place,  the  place  is  called  from  ,•  as,  he 
came  from  church.  And  when  the  superior  mono  speaks,  not  of  one's 
going  to,  nor  of  his  coming  from  church,  but  simply  of  bi«  being  there, 
this  certain  place  is  called  at;  as,  he  is  at  church. 

There  is  a  place  about  a  door,  which  is  called  by  the  name  of  to,  at,  and 
from.  When  the  door  is  approached,  this  place  is  called  to ;  as,  he  went 
to  the  door. 

When  the  door  is  kft,  thievery  place js  cilied  from ,-  as,  he  went  from 
the  door. 

When  a  person  remains  in  this  ^w  place,  ai>d  this  from  place,  this  place 
is  called  at,  or  by,-  as,  he  is  at  the  <loor;  he  was  bi/  the  door. 

We  are  told  that  to,  from,  at,  &c.  are  not  nouns,  because  they  are  not 
the  names,  the  signs,  of  any  person,  place,  or  thing !     {See  Exegesis.) 

He  went  to  church. 

That  is,  the  act  of  going  terminated  in  this  place  which  has  so  many 
names — hence  jftnal. 

2*  "John  is  equal  -  (to  his  brother)  in /a/en/s." 

^  DocTRiiiri;. — John  has  an  equality  in  mind — and  this  equality  ends  at 

his  brother.     The  equality  of  John  does  not  extend  beyond  his  brother, 

but  ends  at  him. 

3.  Six  units  are  equal    -  (to  half)  of  one  dozen. 
Where  does  the  equality  which  belongs  to  six  units,  end  1     Does  it  end 
at  half  of  a  dozen?     Or  does  the   equality  of  six  units  extend  to  a 
dozen  units? 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS.  127 

4.  *'  He  is  going  -         -  (to  a  trade.")       ^ 

Doctrine. — "  To  a  Irade'*  means  a  trade-learning  place — hence  the 
idea  is  that  his  going  is  to  end  at  this  place.  He  is  going.  But  where  is 
he  to  stop  ?     He  is  to  stop  at  the  trade-learning  place. 

5.  They  are  rising         -  (to  honour.) 

But  where  is  their  act  of  ascension  to  end  P  at  honour.  To  conveys  the 
act  to  honour  as  the  stopping,  as  the  terminating  place. 

It  may  be  asked  whether  honour  is  a  place.  Honour  is  not  a  place : 
nor  is  a  table  a  place.  Yet  to  a  table  has  a  place  idea ;  and  to  honour  has 
a  place  idea  This  place  idea,  is  the  condiction  of  the  entire  mono— the 
mere  abdiction  of  tabk)  and  honour,  has  no  local  trait  of  character. 

6.  This  business  is  suited  (to  his  health.) 

There  is  a  suitableness  vibifii  belongs  to  this  business:  but,  th^n,  this 
adaptation  does  not  extend  to  every  thing :  it  ends,  it  stops,  it  terminates^ 
at  his  health. 

7.  "  She  has  a  husband  -  (to  her  mind.") 

Does  the  husband  end  at  her  mindl  O,  no — his  qualifications,  disposi-^ 
tion,  talents,  age,  manners,  &c.,  come  up  to,  and  end  at  her  mind.  These 
things  do  not  extend  ^o  the  wishes  of  every  woman — they  end  at  this  cer- 
tain place  which  is  called,  "  to  her  mind.^* 

I^She  has  a  husband]  (t^/io  isMdapted)  [to  her  mind.) 

8.  These  remarks  were 

addressed         -         ^  (toa  large  audience.) 
"What  circulation  had  these  remarks  before  they  ended—- did  they  end  a^ 
the  ears  of  one  person  ?     No — they  ended  at  the  ears  of  many. 

9.  "  They  pledge  their 

honour    -        -        -  (to  you.") 
Where  does  this  act  of  pledging  their  honour,  end  ?  at  you.     They  do 
not  extend  the  act  of  pledging  their  honour  beyond  you :  this  pledging  act, 
then,  ends  at  you. 

10.  "  Go,  buckle    -         -  (to  the  law.") 

"Buckle."  That  is,  act  with  energy — ^but,  then,  you  must  not  extend . 
this  energetic  action  beyond  the  law — you  must  not  apply  yourself  closely 
to  theology,  to  literature — you  must  let  this  close  application  act  end  at 
the  law. 

11.  Give  yourself  wholly  (to  it.) 

But  where  is  this,  act  of  giving  yourself  to  end?  at  the  law-  bring  the 
act  up  to  the  law,  but  extend  it  no  farther — carry  it  to  nothing  else :  end 
the  act  at  the  law. 

12.  Add  virtue        -         -  (to  your  faith.) 

Where  shall  this  act  of  adding  virtue,  end?    Shall  I  «;i:te&d  this  act  i^ 


128  CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 

every  thing — shall  I  add  virtue  to  the  stars  ?  "  Add  virtue."  But,  to  how 
many  things  shall  I  add  it  ]  The  writer  tells  me  plainly  by^  to,  to  end  this 
vsrork  of  addition  at  faith  :  add  virtue  to  your  faith.  That  is,  add  virtue 
- — but  let  the  act  of  adding  end  at  faith. 

13    "They  met  us  -        -  (to  the  number)  of  three  hundred^ 

They — ^how  many  1  where  did  the  number  embraced  in  the  company^ 
alluded  to  by  the  proxy  corme,  they,  end]  at  three  hundred.  The  num- 
ber of  persons,  that  composed  the  company,  did  not  extend .  beyond  three 
hundred.  . 

[They  {who  came  up)  {to  the  nuipber)  (of  three  hundred,) 
met  us.] 

or, 

[Individuals  (whose  number  ended)  (at  three  hundred,) 
met  us.] 

To  render  this  point  still  more  clear,  let  us  ask  if  the  number  of  indivi- 
duals that  compose  the  company,  should  be  coimted,  wher6  the  act  pf 
counting  would  end.  Would  it  not  end  at  three  hundred  ?  And  would 
not  the  number  end  where  the  act  of  counting  ends'? 

14.  Six  is       -         -         -  (to  twelve)  what  twenty 

15.  is    -         -         -         -  (to  forty.) 

What  is  it  which  goes  up  to  twelve,  and  ends  there]  It  is  the ^emi-pro- 
portion  of  six.  The  semi-proportion  of  six,  does  not  stop  this  side  of 
twelve — nor  does  this  proportion  pass  by  twelve :  six  is  the  half  of  twelve 
only.  Is  it  not  obvious,  then,  that  this  sewt-proportion  which  belongs 
to  six,  ends  at  twelve  P 

What  is  it  which  ends  at  forty?  Is  it  twenty?  No :  it  is  the  semi- 
proportion  of  twenty,  which  comes  up  to  forty,  and  which  ends  at  this 
numeral  place.  If  you  understand  these  remarks,  you  are  not  only  pre- 
pared to  comprehend  this  sentence,  but  to  enjoy  it  also. 

"  Six  is  to  twelve  what  twenty  is  to  forty."  . 

16.  They  were  engaged  man  (to  man!) 

That  is,  the  engagement  of  one  man  ended  at  one  man.  In  other  words — 
one  man  was  not  placed  against  two  or  more ;  for  they  were  placed  man 
against  man :  ,  . 

"  They  were  engaged  man  to  man.^^ 

Did  the  action  of  one  man  extend  beyond  one  other  main?  no:  A  was 
brought  up  to  B,  not  to  B,  and  C.     . 

17.  "It  is  ten         -         -  (to  one)^/m^  he  will  fail.' ^ 

That  is,  the  chance,  for  if,  here,  means  chance,  is  ten  to  one  that  he  will 
fail.  That  is,  the  chance  that  he  will  fail,  is  as  ten  is  to  one.  That  is,  the 
probabilities  that  he  will  fail  out-number  the  probabilities  that  he  will  suc- 
ceed as  ten  out-numbers  one.  Thus  much  for  the  general  idea  of  the  en- 
tire sentence.  Let  me  now  attempt  to  find  something  to  occupy  the  ier- 
minating  place  which  is  denoted  by  to. 


CONDICTION    or    NEPOECLADS. 


129 


"  It  is  ten  to  one  that  he  will  fail." 

What  is  it  which  comes  up  to  07ic,  and  thiere  ends  ]  The  ten  chances 
come  up  to  the  one  chance.  There  are  in'  all  eleven  chances :  One  for  suc- 
cess ;  and  ten  against  it.  These  chances,  then,  when  arranged  for,  and 
against  success,  do  not  fall  one  against  one  ,•  but  ten  against  one,  as  in 
Figure  I. 

Fig.l.  Fig.  II. 

1. to 


1.- 
2." 
3.- 

4.- 

5. 

7.- 

8.- 

9.- 

10.- 

18. 


agninst. 


^ 


s. 

3.- 

^ 

4. 

^ 

s 

5. 

1  o 

^ 

-1 

6. 

6 

e5 

7. 
8, 
9. 

10. 

against. 


The  ten  chances  against  suc- 
cess are  brought  up  to  the  one 
for  success ;  and  there  they  end, 
as  exemplified  in  Fig.  I.  These 
ten  chances  do  not  extend  to  two 
chances  for  success  as  they  are 
seen  to  do  in  Fig.  If. 


Figure  II.  is  an  exemplifica- 
y  t^  tion  of  the  following  sentence : 
It  is  ten  to  two,  that  he  will 
fail. 


"  Few  of  the  Esqui- 
maux can  count        -  (to  ten." 


With  some  of  these  people  the  s^ct  of  counting  can  continue  up  to  ten — 
but  this  act  with  these  people  in  general^^must  end  before  it  arrives  at  this 
numeral  place. 

19.  *'  The  prince  was  flat- 
tered        -         -         -  (to  his  ruin.") 

That  is,  the  flattery  was  continued  down  to  the  ruin  of  the  prince,  where 
it  ended.  "  Ruin,"  and  "  to  the  ruin"  differ  very  much  one  from  the  other. 
"  Ruin"  means  destruction ;  but  "  to  the  ruin"  signifies  the  place  where 
the  act  which  produced  the  destruction  teirminated.  The  first  is  abdiction  ,• 
the  second  is  condiction. 

20.  Shave  the  end  down  -  (to  a  point.) 

That  is,  end  the  act  of  shaving  at  a  point :  do  not  terminate  the  act  this 
side  of  a  point ;  and  do  not  extend  this  act  beyond  a  point. 

21.  The  man  was  crowded  (to  death.) 

That  is,  the  act  of  crowding  terminated  at  the  death  of  him  who  was 
crowded.  The  man  was  crowded.  But  to  what  extent  did  the  act  go  1 
the  act  went  to  his  death.  Th'e  word,  death,  denotes  the  state  in  which 
the  act  left  him ;  but  "  to  his  death"  denotes  the  place  where  the  act  ter- 
minated. He  might  have  been  crowded  beyond  this  state — he  might  have 
been  crowded,  pressed,  to  thin  substance.  But  the  writer  says  that  the  act 
of  crowding  terminated  at  the  state  of  death. 


130  OONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 

23.   "  He  painted  her       -  (to  the  life.") 

She  was  the  work  of  nature,  of  life  ,•  her  picture,  the  production  of  art  .- 
and  the  painter  brought  his  picture  up  to  life's  own  work.  Where  life  had 
made  a  deformity  in  the  original,  the  painter  came  up  to  that  deformity  in 
his  picture ;  and,  where  life  had  made  a  beauty  in  the  original,  the  painter 
came  up  to  that  beauty  in  his  picture^  In  short  the  painter  came  up  to  the 
life  hi  all  respects,  and  there  he  stopped. 

23.  "This  is  it       -         -  (to  a  hair.") 

That  is,  the  adaptation,  the  fitness,  of  the  thing,  ends  at  a  high  degree  of 
minuteness.  The  word,  hair,  as  here  used,  means  great  exactness  ;  and  to 
indicates  that  the  adaptation  of  the  thing,  runs  up  to  this  great  exactness. 

24.  *'  He  is  alive  -  -  (to  the  sufferings)  of  his  chUdren.'^ 
That  is,  the  passion  which  is  indicated  by  the  word,  alive,  ceases,  termi- 
nates, at  the  sufferings  of  his  children.  If  you  go  heyond  the  suffering  of 
his  children  ,•  or,  if  you  stop  this  side  of  the  suffering  of  his  children,  this 
passion  is  not  felt,  not  exhibited.  He  is  alive.  But  to  what  extent  in  the 
range  of  beings,  and  things,  does  this  passion  go  1  no  farther  than  to  the 
suffering  of  his  childrert.  He  is  not  said  to  be  alive  to  the  suffering  of  his 
friends. 

25.  We  will  keep  this  seat  (to  ourselves.) 

That  is,  we  will  appropriate  this  seat  to  ourselves :  the  act  of  appropri- 
ating the  seat  shall  come  up  to  us ;  but  it  shall  not  extend  beyond  us.  The 
act  of  appropriation  shall  end,  not  only  at  our  number,  but  at  our  identity. 

26.  "  This  is  the  key       -  (to  that  door.") 

That  is,  this  is  the  key  which  is  appropriated  to  that  door.     It  is  not  ap- , 
pjopriated,  so  to  speak,  this  side  of  that  door ;  nor  is  it  appropriated  be- 
yond that  door.     Hence  the  act  of  appropriating  the  key,  ends  at  that  par- 
ticular door. 

27.  It  is  ^weet        -         -  (to  the  taste.) 

That  is,  the  attribute  of  sweet  does  not  extend  to  the  sight,  to  the  hear- 
ing, nor  to  the  feehng,  but  ends  at  the  taste. 

28.  I  have  his  word         -  (to  the  contrary^) 

That  is,  his  word  comes  up  to  the  contrary  of  what  ypu  say,  and  ends  at 
this  place:  it  does  not  extend  to  your  side  of  the  subject,  and  support  it; 
but  it,  (his  word,)  ends  on  the  side  which  is  contrary  to  your  side. 

29.  "  Marks,  and  points  out 

each  man  of  us         -  (to  slaughter.") 

That  is,  the  object,  the  purpose,  of  pointing  out,  ends  at  slaughter  :  the 
pointing  out  has  no  purpose  this  side  of  slaughter ;  nor  has  it  any  beyond 
slaughter. 

It  is  important  to  observe  here,  that  it  is  not  tlie  act  of  pointing  out  each 
man,  which  ends  at  slaughter :  The  steroclade,  to,  indicates  the  ending 
place ;  but  to  does  not  say  what  ends.  Generally,  the  act  itself  ends  at 
the  to  place.  But,  in  this  case,  it  is  not  the  act  which  ends  at  slaughter  . 
but  it  is  the  motive,  the  purpose,  of  him  who  does  the  act. 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS.  131 

30.  "  He  is  deaf     -         -  (to  our  cries)  for  relief y) 

That  is,  he  is  not  deaf  before  he  arrives  ai  our  cries ;  nor  is  he  deaf 
after  he  goes  beyond  them :  he  can  hear  well  enough  at  all  places  except  at 
our  cries  ;  consequently  his  deafness  ends  at  our  cries. 

31.  He  has  a  strong  dislike  (to  Mr.  Jones.)     - 

That  is,  his  dislike  ends  at  Mr.  Jones :  it  coraes  up  to  Mr.  Jones;  and 
to  indicates  that  it  ends  there.  To  implies  that  his  dislike  does  not  ex- 
tend bet/ond  Mr.  Jones ;  to,  then,  marks  the  boundary  line  of  his  dislike. 

32.  The  Scriptures  say  -  (to  the  sinner,)  "  Now  is  the  day 
of  salvation.'' 

That  is,  the  act  of  saying,  "Nqw^  is  the  day  of  salvation"  ends  at  the 
sinner :  this  language,  from  its  vejry  nature,  is  appropriated  to  the  sinner  .- 
it  is  not  extended  to  the  saint. 

There  is  another  point  of  view  in  which  it  seems  important  to  consider 
all  similar  instances.  To  raise  a  local  idea  in  the  mind,  some  name  of  a 
place  must  be  employed ;  as,  tn,  at,  to,  under,  over,  &c. 

This,  however,  is  mere  abdiction.  In  condiction  there  must  not  only  be 
a  place  pointed  out,  but  a  thing  must  be  found  to  occupy  this  place ;  as, 
I  am  in  this  room. 

In  names  a  place,  and  I  indicates  what  occupies  this  place. 

"  To  the  sinner"  raises  the  idea  of  a  place  in  condiction.  What,  then, 
occupies  this  place  ?  There  are  two  things  which  occupy  this  place ;  viz. 
the  act  of  saying,  and  what  is  said. 

«*  The  Scriptures  say  to  the  sinner." 

That  is,  the  speaking  of  the  Scriptures  comes  up  to  the  sinner,  and  ends 
there. 

*'  The  Scriptures  say  to  the  sinner,  '  Now  is  the  day  of 
salvation.'  n         . 

That  is,  the  Scriptures  bring  this  simple  fact  up  to  the  sinner,  in  a  little 
frame-work  of  words.  Bring  what  simple  fact  to  the  sinnes  in  a  basket 
composed  of  words'?     Why  this — 

^^  Now  is  the  day  of  salvation.'' 

Thfese  words  form  the  little  basket  in  which  the^criptures  bring  the  follow-' 
ing  simple  fact  to  the  sinner,  namely. 

The  present  day  is  peculiarly  well  adapted  to  his  salvation.  The  man 
that  is  a  sinner  to-day,  cannot  be  saved  on  any  day  that  is  past ,-  and,  as- 
he  may  not  live  to  see  any  day  that  is  yet  to  come,  the  great  Author  of  sal- 
vation, has  brought  to  the  sinner  the  simple  fact,  that  the  present  day  is 
the  only  sure  day  for  salvation.  The  Scriptures  say  to  the  sinner.  That 
is,  they  bring  to  the  sinner.  What  do  they  bring  to  him  1  This  fact : 
"  Now  is  the  day  of  salvation."  What  do  the  Scriptures  bring  this  fact 
in  !  they  bring  it  in  a  frame-wm'k  of  words.     Do  the  Scriptures  leave  this 


132  O0NDICTION   OF    NEPOECLAD^.   ■ 

fact  with  the  sinner  1     Yes — at  the  place  which  is  raised  in  the  mind 
by  the  mono,  <•  to  the  sinner"  the  thing  ends .-  So  says  to. 

"  The  Scriptures  say,  *  Now  is  the  day  of  salvation,''  to  the 
dinner." 

That  is,  they  bring  this  fact  to  the  sinner  by  speech. 

I.  To  is  a  nepoecled,  an  adverb^  where  unto  can  not  be  used  for  it ; 
as,  James  went  to  get  the  booki 

Here,  unto  can  not  be  substituted  for  to  ;  for  we  can  not  say,  James 
went  unto  get  the  book. 

II.  To  is  3.  nepoecled  at  the  end  of  the  trone,  and  at  the  end  of  a 
poeclad;  as.  He  was  spoken  ^,  and  I  was  called  to.  (In  these  in- 
stances, unto  may  be  used.)  In  short,  to  is  a  nepoecled  in  all  cases 
except  where  it  begins  a  nepoeclad,  where  it  is  ^ways  a  nepoeclide. 

III.  The  word,  to,  signifies  the  ending,  terminating  place;  as.  He 
went  from  Philadelphia  through  New  Jersey,  ^o  New  York. 

To,  in  a  demimono,  is  aTt^i-imperative,  or  ayi^i-petitionative ;  as.  To 
write  letters,  to  forgive  our  sins. 

That  to  is  used  in  the  first,  to  prevent  a;  command,  is  obvious  from 
the  fact  that  without  to,  a  command  would  be  given  ;  as,  Write  letters. 
And  that  to  is  employed  in  the  second,  to  prevent  2i  petition,  is  ob- 
vious from  the  fact  that  the  ommission  of  to,  permits  a  petition  ,•  as. 
Forgive  our  sins. 

Hence  it  is  evident  that  to,  in  the  demimono,  isTzn^f-imperative,  and 
ani^i-petionative. 

The  grammarians  of  the  old  school  illustrate  the  character  of  to, 
by  calling  it  a  preposition,  and  the  sign  of  the  infinitive  mode  !  A  pre- 
position is  that  which  stands  before ,-  as,  I  went  to  the  table. 

Does  to  stand  before  table  ?  or,  does  the  stand  before  table  ?     The, 
surely.     Which,  then,  is  the  preposition  to  table? 
The  old  school  grammarians  say, 
"  K preposition  is  a  word  placed  before  nouns,"  &c. 
But  to  is  not  placed  befc^e  the  noun — to  is  placed  before  the  article,  the! 
Can  it  be  said  that  Monday  precedes  Wednesday  1     Surely  not.     Why  1 
because  Tuesday  throws  Monday  back  from  Wednesday.     To  make  to  a 
preposition,  the  must  be  omitted ;  as,  I  went  to  table !     Or,  I  went  the  to 
table!! 

But  the  old  school  grammarians  say  that  ^q  is  a  sign  of  the  infinitive 
mode  /  Is  this  an  illustration  of  the  syntax  function  of  to.  where  it  is 
placed  before  a  verb  1  As  well  might  a  philosopher  attempt  to  define  a 
cloud  by  saying,  A  cloud  is  a  sign  of  rain,  as  a  grammarian,  to  define  to 
by  affirming  that "  To  is  a  sign  of  the  infinitive  mode  /"  But  whajt  renders 
this  attempt  at  a  definition  of  to  by  the  old  school  grammarians,  peculiarly 
ridiculous,  is,  that  they  themselves  do  not  know  what  the  infinitive  mode 
is-!!     They  say  that 

"  The  infinitive  mode  expresses  a  tiling  in  a  general,  and 
unlimited  manner ;"  as,  Jones  is  to  be  hanged. 

Here  the  expression  is  so  very  general,  so  entirely  unlimited,  that  no  one 
can  tell  who  is  to  be  hanged!!  To  be  hanged  is  in  the  infinitive  mode. 
That  is,  it  expresses  an  event  which  is  not  restricted  to  any  person* 


C<)NDICTI0N    OF    NEPOECLADS.  133 

"  Jones  ia  to  be  Jmnged." 

Who  is  to  be  hanged?  The  generalness  of  the  expression  is 
loo  great  to  allow  an  answer! !  All  that  can  be  said,  is^that  to  is 
a  sign  of  the  infinitive  mode,  and  that  the  infinitive  mode  is  an  ex- 
pression so  much  diluted  with  generality,  that  it  applies  to  no 
person,  place,  or  thing  in  particular;  as, 'Jones  is  to  he  hanged ! 
(Appeai,  Chap,  xxiii.  p;  509.) 

IV.  From  a  slight  glance  at  the  character  of  to,  in  the  derai- 
raonos  which  are  causative  in  their  condiction,  it  may  seem  that 
to  itself  means  cause ;  as.  He  went  to  get  his  book. 

The  causative  idea  which,  from  a  mere  glance,  so/we  would  be 
very  likely  to  attribute  to  for  understood,  is  suggested  by  to  ejc- 
pressed;  as,  "  He  went  ^  get  his  book." 

That  is,  as  some  hold,  he  went  for  to  get  his  book. 

Formerly,  the  nepoeclide,  for,  was  generally  expressed,  in  all 
such  cases  ;  as,  "  What  went  ye  out  for  to  see!'" 

In  modern  times,  however,  it  is  common  to  omit  for  ;  as,  What 
went  ye  out  to  see  ?  And,  from  the  long  omission  of  for,  by. 
modern  writers,  we  have  come  to  attach  the  causative  allusion 
which  was  formerly  conveyed  hy  for,  to  the  nepoecled,  to  :  hence 
it  may  be  said  that ^o  actually  imports  cause  in  all  the  demimonos 
whose  condiction  is  of  the  causative  character ;  as,  "  He  went  to 
France  (^o  see  his  friends)  who  reside  in  Paris." 

1.  To,  imports  end;  as  he  went  to  France. 

2.  To,  denotes  cause,-  as,  He  went  to  see  his  friends.  (Why 
did  he  go  1) 

3.  To,  is  used  against  a  command,  and  against  a  petition  ,•  as, 
He  went  to  see  his  friends,  To  forgive  our  enemies  is  demanded 
by  the  best  of  beings. 

Without  to,  "to  see  his  friends'^ heco men  a  command;  and  "to 
forgive  our  enemies,"  a  petition ;  as,  See  his  friends.  Forgive  our 
enemies. 

niustrationofthecondieUon  ToWClvd,    Towards. 

r  4U  1  J      I.-  1    1^  C'O  ^nd  ward.) 

of  the     nepoeclads  which  be-      _    _ 

gin  with  toward,  and  towards.      *'  ^^^^^  Ru-dicatory. 

-II.  Direction  E-dicatory. 

1 .  He  rode  -         -         -  (toward  London.) 

2.  Themencafne-         -^towards  me.) 

3.  He  looked         -         -  (towards  his  sister.) 

4.  "  He  set  his  face       -  (toward  the  wilderness.") 

II.  Concerning  E-dicatory. 

5.  "  His  eye  shall  be  evil  (towards  his  brother.") 

6.  His  conscience  is  void 

of  offence         -         -  (toward  God,) 

7.  and  -         -         -         .  ^toward  men.) 

8.  *' Thou  hast  love       -  (toward  all  the  saints.") 

12  '' 


134  CONDICTION   OP    NEPOECLADS. 

9.  "  Hast  thou  faith       -  (towards  God?") 

II.    TeNDENCY-TO  E-PICATORY 

10.  He  gave  five  doUars  -  (towards  the  sum.)       7 

11.  "This    is    the    first 
alarm  which  England 

rieceived  -         -         -  (toward  any  trouble.") 

[Clarendon. 

n.  Nearly  E-dicatory. 

12.  I  am         -         -         -  (towards  nine  years)  o/c?. — Swift. 
Illustration  of  the  condiction  TlfldcT. 

of  the     nepoeclads  which, begin  j_  Local  Ru-dicatory. 

vrith  under.  II.  Positional  E-picatory. 

1.  He  stood  -         -  Sunder  the  umbrella.) 

2.  Henry  was  carried    -  f under'the  ice.) 

3.  The  iron  is       -         -,  (under  wat^r.) 

4.  These  creatures  live  -  (under  ground.) 

5.  James  sat         -         -  (under  the  brow)  o/*  a  &i7/. 

6.  It  is  not  like  any  other        '  ~ 
thing       -        -        -  (under  the  heavens.) 

7.  We  found  him  walk- 
ing -        -        -  (under  a  heavy  load.) 

8.  The   whole   duty   of 
man  may  be  treated 

of  -        -        -        -  (under  the  head)  of  Religion. 

That  is,  this  head,  REneiojf,  is  put  on  the  page ;  and  ihe  diseussion  of 
the  duty  of  man,  is  placed  under  it. 

9.  "  7%e  duke  may  be 

mentioned  -  -  (under  the  double  capacity)  o/*  a jooe^ 
and  a  divine. ^^ — Felton. 

I  am  not  willmg  to  let  this  application  of  the  word,  under,  pass  without 
«',ensure.  There  is  not  an  idea  in  the  entire  sentence,  which  calls  for 
"  under."  He  acts  "  under  a  capacity,"  whether  double,  or  single,  is  a 
strange  perversion  of  the  proper  use  of  this  nepoeclide.  What,  can  we 
inquire,  under  what  capacity  a  man  acts  1  And  can  we  say,  Jones  went 
under  the  capacity  of  midshipman  ?  In  what  capacity,  is  English ; 
hence  the  period  which  forms  the  9th  example,  may  be  rendered  English 
by  putting  in  for  under  : 

"The  duke  may  be  mentioned  in  the  double  capacity  of  a  poet  and  a 
divine." 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS.  135 

II.  Influence  E-DicATORr. 

I.  The}" are  -         -  (under  our  laws.) 

DocTKiNE. — As  when  we  wish  to  sustain  a  thing,  We  put  it  ow,  so  when 
we  desire  to  influence  a  thing,  we  put  it  under.  On  marks  the  sustaining 
position ;  and  under,  the  influencing  position.  To  sustain  a  house  we  put 
it  on  something ;  as,  he  built  his  house  on  a  rock. 

And  so  also  to  sustain  our  word,  we  put  it  on  something-;  as,  He  declared 
071  his  honour,  He  affirmed  on  his  oaf/i.    ■  : 

Men  saw  that  a  tangible  thing  which  is  put  on  another  tangible  thing,  is 
generally  sustairied,  as  a  book  on  a  table,  a  house  on,  a  foundation. 

Hence  they  have  come  to  put  untangible  things' on  untangible  things  in 
order  to  procure  support  for  them  ;  as,  He  told  me  on  the  honour  of  a  man 
that  he  was  my  friend.  He  told  me  on  the  honour.  That  is,  he  placed  the 
veracity  of  his  word  on  the  basis  of  honour  that  he  might  support  it.  Or, 
he  put  his  word  on  the  basis  of  honour  to  procure  a  support  for  it. 

From  seeing  among  tangible  things,  as  has  already  been  said,  that  the  one 
which  is  on,  is  generally  sustained  by  the  other,  men  have  come  id  place, 
untangible  things  which  they  desire  to  support,  on  untangible  things,  as"  the 
truth  of  an  affirmation  on  an  oath. 

And  from  seeing  among  tangible  things,  as  has  already  been  suggested, 
that  the  one  which  is  under,  is  generally  influenced  in  some  way,  or  other, 
by  the  other,  men  have  come  to  place  whatever  they  wish,  to  influence,  un^ 
der  that  from  which  they  wish  to  derive  the  influence.  Hence  we  speak 
of  men  under  sin,  under  law,  under  necessity,  &c. 

Men  had  seen  that  whatever  they  put  on  a  rock,  is  generally  sustained  by 
the  rock,  before  they  attempted  to  place  the  truth  of  an  affirmation  on  ari 
oaih.  They  had  seen  too  that  whatever  is  placed  under  a  rock,  is  generally 
influenced  in  some  way,  or  other,  by  the  rock,  before  they  attempted  to 
speak  of  men  as  being  under  laws,  under  conditions,  &c. 

2    He  entered  his  office    (under  these  conditions.) 

Doctrine. — We  speak  of  untangible  things  as  being  cm  untangible 
things,  and  of  untangible  things  as  being  under  untangible  things.  Hence 
we  say,  .-' 

•»  You  were  put  into  office  on  the  condition  that  you  would 
favour  no  party  measures  ;  and  you  are  now  under  this  con 
dition. 

That  is,  your  election  to  your  office  rested  on  this  condition,  and  now  let 
your  administration,  your  policy,  be  under  this  condition.  In  other  words : 
we  supported  you  on  this  condition,  and  let  us  now  influence  your  policy 
by  this  condition.  When  we  speak  of  one  thing  being  under  another  where 
nothing  but  the  influence  of  one  upon  the  other,  is  intended,  the  idea  of 
place  is  entirely  lost.  We  say,  John  is  under  these  conditions.  But,  then, 
we  do  not  mean  that  John  is  under  these  conditions  as  one  brick  may  be 
under  another  brick.  Things  that  are  under,  are,  in  some  way,  affected, 
influenced,  by  the  thing  which  is  over  them.  For  instance — A  man  who  is 
under  an  umbrella,  is  influenced,  aflfected,  by  the  mnbrella :  he  is  kept  c&*/er 
cookry  or  warmer  from  being  uncfen  it4    So  too  a  ijjanwhais^wnisfcr  «  trefi* . 


136  CONDICTlON    OP    NEPOECLADS. 

13  in  some  way,  affected,  influenced,  by  the  tree :  he  is  somewhat  sheltered 
from  the  rain,  somewhat  shielded  from  the  sun ;  and  sornewhat  protected 
from  the  wind,  from  being  under  it.  In  short,  the  uniier  of  a  thing  is 
the .  great   influencing  position  :  hence  men  have    come  to  use 

under  where  nothirng  but  influence  is  intended ;  as, 

*•  They  suck  the  blood  of  those  they  depend  on,  {under  the 
pretext)  of  service;  and  kindness." 

That  is,  by  the  influence  of  this  pretext^  they  suck  the  blood. 

3.  Yet  he  does  this        -  (under  the  name)  oi friendship^    • 

4.  This    argument   was 

evaded  -         -  (under  some  plausible  distinctions.) 

5»  Joseph  is  -         -  (under  a  tutor.) 

The  influence  here  is  the  control,  exerted  by  the  tutor. 

6.  These  colonies  are    -  (under  the  British  government.) 

7.  James  is  now  -         -  (under  a  guardian.) 

'8.-        -        -         -         -  ("Under  God,)    this  is  our  only 

safety." 
9.  They  are  all     -         -  (under  sin.) 

10.  He  is       -         -         -  (under  some  restraint.) 

11.  What  man  is  not       -  (under  condemnation  ?) 

12.  He  was    -  ,     -         -  (under  favour)  o/"  (Ae  Pnnce. 

13.  Saints  particularly  are  (under  the  blessings)  of  God. 

14.  We  live  -        -        r  (underthe  gospel  dispensation.) 

15.  "  Nuns  are       -         -  (under  vows)  of  charity." 

16.  '*  We  should  have  for- 
titude     r         -        -  (under  the  evils)  of  life. 

17.  "  We    should    behave 

like  Christians  -  (under  reproaches.")  *, 

18.  "  Have  patience  -  (under  pain.") 

19.  He  was  then    -  -  /under  the  penalties)  of  the  law. 

20.  I  live        -   '  -  -  -  (under  extreme  oppression.) 

21.  The  army  was  -  (under  the  command)  of  General 

Jackson. 
21.  The  Anierican  revolu- 
tion commenced       -  (under  4.he  administration)  of  Lord 
North. 
In  illustrating  the  different  applications  of  Mn«?er,  Dr.  Webster  gives 
the  above  example ;  and  by  way  of  a  commentary,  he  prefixes  the  following  i 

'*  During  the  time  of."^ 
In  attempting  to  show  that  under  means  the  time  when,  he  has,  by  an 
improper  use  of  during,  showed  that  under  signifies  the  time  how  long  / 
He  says  that  under  is  synonymous  with  during.    If  so  during  can  be  sub- 
stituted for  under  /as,  , 


^  CONDlCTION   OF    NEPOECLADS.  IS? 

The  American  revolution  commenced  during  the  adminis- 
tration of  Lord  North ! 

That  is,  the  very  commencement  of  the  American  revolution,  began  at 
the  very  point  of  time  at  which  the  administration  of  LordNorth  began,  and 
terminated  at  the  very  point  at  which  the  administration  of  Lord  North 
terminated  !  In  other  words,  the  commencement  of  the  American  revolution, 
and  the  administration  of  Lord  North,  were  of  the  same  age  !  The  com- 
mencement  must  have  been  unusually  long ,-  or  the  adminisiration,  re- 
markably short!  But  I  am  botnd  to  take  Dr.  Webstek  as  he  means,  and 
not  as  he  sa,ys.  He  presumed  that  during,  and  within  were  synonymous, 
and  employed  during  for  within.  Nor  is  this  error  singular — Dr.  Wiibster 
is  not  the  only  man  that  has  dug  too  long  at  the  roots  to  know  What  the 
branches  yield !     The  following  will  express  Dr.  B.'s  meaning. 

Within  "  the  time  of."  "  The  commencement  of  the  Ame- 
rican revolution  commenced  under  the  administratioti  of  Lord 
North." 

What !  Could  it  be  said  of  a  son  of  Lord  North,  who  was  born  some 
time  within  the  administration  of  his  father,  that  he  was  born  under  the  ad- 
ministration of  his  father?  Not  unless  the  administration  of  his  father 
exerted  some  influence  in  the  birth  of  this  son.  We  can  say  that  the  temple 
of  Janus  was  shut  under  the  ^ministration  of  Augustus,  because  his  ad- 
ministration closed  the  doors.  Biit  can  we  say  that  Christ  was  bom  under 
tile  administration  of  Pontiuff  Pilate  1  Did  the  administration  of  Pilate 
exert  any  influence  in  bringing  the  Son  of  Man  from  heaven  to  earth  ?  Bet- 
ter would  it  be  to  say,  that  Christ  was  born  under  the  administration  of  sin  ^ 
It  was  sin  which  brought  the  babe  of  Bethlehem  to  the  manger  of  straw. 
Under,  then,  is  no  more  synonymous  with  within  than  within  is  with 
during. 

23.  Here  is  a  deed  -  (under  his  hand,) 

25.  and     -         -         -  (under  his  seal.) 

DocTRiisTE'. — The  hand,  and  seal  sanction  the  deed  :  without  these  the 
instrument  would  not  be  binding  upon  any  one — it  would  have  no  legal 
force — the  hand,  and  seal,  then,  exert  a  powerful  influence  over  the  deed. 

24.  "  He  has  left  us  evi- 
dence   -         -         -     (under  his  own  hand,") 

That  is,  his  own  hand  infuses  into  the  evidence  a  sanction — the  evidence, 
then,  is  under  the  influence  of  the  hand,  the  name,  the  signature,  mentioned 
in  the    nepoeclad.  ' 

26.  "  Morpheus  is   repre- 
sented    -         -         -  (under  the  figure)  q/"  a  603/ cfs/eep." 

In  what  way  is  Morpheus  under  the  influence  of  this  figure?  the  figure 
forms  Morpheus — a  beholder  of  this  figure,  has  Morpheus  -created  in  his 
mind,  by  the  figure.  12* 


138  CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS,  _^. 

27.  He  writes         -         -  (under  the  name)  0/ ZocArc. 

A  name,  a  signature,  gives,  in  most  cases,  a  sanction  to  whatever  it  is  at- 
tached ;  and  it,  in  all  instances,  fixes  the  article,  or  paper,  to  which  it  is 
attached„to  an  author.  And  because  t)xe  signature  exerts  this  influence  over 
an  instrument  of  writing,  some  attempt  to  give  a  sort  of  influence,  a  kind 
of  sanction,  to  their  productions  by  the  use  of  distinguished  names,  as 
Locke,  Bacon,  Johnson,  Jefferson,  Franklin,  Clinton,  SfC. 

Whether  such  writers  accomplish  the  object  which  they  seem  to  wish  to 
accomplish  by  the  use  of  these  names,  has  nothing  to  do  in  the  decision  of 
the  condictive  character  of  the,  nepoeclads  in  which  these  names  are  used. 
These  names  are  used  in  imitation  of  instances  where  the  signature  actually 
exerts  an  influence  over  the  paper  to  which  it  is  attached — hence  under  is 
properly  applied. 

28.  "  These  men  trade    -  (under  the  firm)  of  Wright  ^  Co." 
That  is,  these  men  sanction  their  contracts,  their  business  transactions,  by 

this  title,  by  this  name,  by  this  signature.  They  do  not  use  their  separate, 
their  individual,  names  in  their  business  transactions,  as  the  means  of  giving 
these  transactions  a  binding  force;  but  they  employ  the  firm  of  Wright  4 
Co.  for  this  purpose.  Well,  then,  may  it  be  said  that  they  trade  under  the 
influence  of  this  firm. 

29.  For  I  am  a  man         -  (under  authority,) 

30.  having  soldiers  -  (under  me.) 

DocTBiiTE. — The  cwiturion  who  is  the  author  of  these  words,  found  Jesus 
at  Capernaum,  and  addressed  him  as  follows : 

*'  Lord,  my  servant  lieth  at  home  siok  of  the  palsy,  grievously 
tormented."  "  ^  ' 

To  which  Jesus  replied,  ^   , 

"  I  will  come  and  heal  him." 

The  centurion  answers,  "i^^ 

*'Lord,  I  am  not  worthy  that  thou  shouldst  come  under  my 
roof;  but  speak  the  word  only,  and  my  servant  shall  be  healed." 

The  centurion  presumed  that  Christ  would  be  glad  to  know  by  what 
means  he,  the  centurion,  knew  that  the  disease  of  his  servant,  might  be 
made  to  leave  him,  the  servant,  by  the  mere  command  of  Christ :  hence 
the  centurion  proceeds  in  the  9th  verse  to  give  the  means  by  which  he  knew 
that  Christ  could  heal  his  servant  by  simply  speaking  the  word  : 

9.  For  I  am  a  man  under  authority,  having  soldiers  under  me ; 
and  I  say  to  this  man,  Go  ;  and  he  goeth  ;  and  to  another,  Come ; 
and  he  cometh,  and  to  my  servant.  Do'  this  ;  and  he  doeth  it. 

As  much  as  to  say — the  soldiers  obey  me  who  act  under  the  influence,  or 
authority  of  Cassar — ^hen^  I  infer  that  disease  will  obey  yott  who  act  under 
the  influence,  or  authority  of  God  himself. 

I  would  not  undertake  to  say  that  the  centurion  was  right  in  considering 
that  Christ  acted  under  the  commission  of  God.  From  the  language  of  the 
9  th  verse,  it  is  obvious  that  the  centurion  did  not  presume  that  he  had  met 


* 


^  CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS.  139 

God  himself  at  Capernaum.  Had  the  centurion  known  that  be  was  ad- 
dressing the  God  of  the  universe,  he  would  not  have  said,  as  Luke  gives  It, 
and  as  Matthew  might  have  given  it, 

"  For  I  ako  am  a  man  set  under  authority,"  &c. 

But  he  would  have  said. 

For  I  who  act  under  a  commission,  and  that  too  from  a  mere  ereafure, 
say  to  this  soldier.  Go ;  and  he  goeth ;  and  to  that,  Come ;  and  he  cometh — 
and  surely  you  who  are  God  himself  can  call  off  this  palsy  by  the  mere  ut- 
terance of  the  command.  There  is  nothing,  then,  to  justify  the  idea  ad- 
vanced by  GiiL,  that  the  centurion  was  aware  that  he  was  applying  to  God 
himself  to  call  oflf  this  disease  from  his  servant  The  word,  also,  as  used  by 
Luke  is  not  a  sign  of  difference  in  situation  between  Christ,  and  the  centu- 
rion, but  a  distinct  token  of  similarity  in  situation  between  them.  **  For  I 
also  am  a  man  under  authority."  That  is,  /,  like  yourself,  act  under  a  com- 
mission. Hence  from  what  I  can  do  under  the  authority  of  my  superior,  I 
have  some  knowledge  of  what  you  can  do  under  yours. 

31.  The  ship  was  thea    -  (under  way.) 

DocTHinE. — Therword,  way,  as  here  used,  means  action.  To  say  that 
a  ship  is  under  way,  is  to  say  that  she  is  under  the  influence  of  action. 
And,  as  a  ship  moves  on,  under  the  influence  of  regular  progressiva 
action,  the  inference  is  that'  a  ship  which  is  under  the  influence  of  such 
action,  makes  progress.  There  is  a  time  when  a  ship  is  not  under  the 
influence  of  regular  progressive  action  v  and  it  is  in  reference  to  this  time,  or 
it  is  in  reference  to  the  state  in  which  she  is  at  this  time,  that  we  use  the 
mono,  ''under  wayT  Just  after  a  ship  has  been  put  under  the  influence  of 
a  regular  progressive  action,  we  say — "  She  is  under  way."  And  just  before 
she  is  put  under  the  influence  of  such  action,  we  say — She  will  soon  be 
under  way.  That  is,  she  is  not  now  under  the  influence  of  a  regular  sea 
action,  so  to  speak,  but  she  soon  will  be  under  it,. 

II.  Sub-rank  E-dicatory. 

32.  *'  /(?  was  too  great  an 

honour  for  any  man  (under  a  duke.") 

33.  A  lieutenancy   is  an 

office  which  is  -  (unde)*  a  captaincy.) 

In  these  instances,  under  does  not  mean jo/ace,-  nof  does  it  signify  influ- 
ence. The  sense  in  which  under  is  herfe  used,  is  very  probably  derived  from 
the  fact  that  whatever  is  under  is  generally  less,  inferior,  sub,  in  size  than 
the  thing  which  is  over.  The  apple  is  under  the  howl,  the  cellar  is  under 
the  house,  the  man  is  under  the  tree. 

From  the  fact  that  whatever  is  under,  is  generally  less  in  size  than  the 
thing  which  is  over,  under  has  come  to  be  used  where  one  person  is  leas  in 
rank,  in  official  dignity,  than  another,  as,  in  the  above  example. 

II.  Minus  E-dicatory. 

34.  "  The  effect  of  medi- 
cine is  sometimes     -  (under  its  natural  strength.'*) 


^ 


140  CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 

From  Uie  fact  that  whatever  is  und^r  is  generally  lesg  in  size  than  the 
thing  which  is  over,  under  has  come  to  be  used  where  inferiority  in  rank, 
pme,  cg-e,  c^ed,  &c.  is  the  leading  idea. 
^5.  *'  There  are  parishes 

in  England      -        -  (under  forty  pounds)  a  year, 

36.  ."  He  left  three  sons  -  (under  age.")  " , 

37.  "  They  would  not  sell 

the  horse  -        -  (under  forty  pounds.") 

38.,**  Several  young  men 
could  never  leave  the 

pulpit      -         -         -  (under  half)     ,    a  dozen  conceits.''^ 

Swift. 
The  basis  on  which  I  place  the  application  of  under  in  these  instances,  is 
the  transfer  of  less,  of  injferiority,  in  size,  to  less,  to  inferiority,  in  other  par- 
ticulars, or  respects.  But  it  may  be  urged  that  tl;ie  thing  which  is  under,  is 
not  in  all  cases,  less,  inferior,  in  size— for  instance,  A  bridge  is  under  John 
when  he  crosses  it-^the  carpet  is  under  him  when  he  walks,  o^  stands  on  it. 
To  this  it  may  be  replied  that,,  if  these  expressions  ar€  taken  according  to 
their  true  import,  they  furnish  no  exception  to  the  general  principle  on 
which  I  have  attempted  to  account  for  the  use  oi  under  where  inferiority  in 
ra7ik,  age,  price,  &c.  is  the  leading  idea  in  the  condiction  of  the  nepoeclad. 
Where  it  is  said,  "The  bridge  is  under  Jb^w  when  he  crosses  it,"  the  mean- 
ing of  the  word,  bridge,  is  much  circumscribed  by  that  figure 

which  is  called  by  the  old  school  grammarians  synecdoche,  and, 
by  the  newa,  pantelogue. 


The  word,  bridge,  in  the  above  example,  does  not  comprehend  the  entire 
frame-work:  it  signifies  that  part  only,  over  which  John  actually  passes. 
True,  we  use  a  corme  which,  in  its  natural  application,  means  the  entire 
frame-work  ;  but,  then,  the  circumstances  of  the  case  show  that  this  corme 
is  not  used  with  any  reference  to  its  native  signification,  but  with  a  direct 
reference  to  an  imputed  one.  The  Scriptures,  and  all  other  writings,  abound 
with  striking  instances  of  the  figure  which  here  reduces  the  word,  bridge, 
from  the  entire  frame-work,  to  a  mere  part  of  it.  For  instance,  "  Go  ye  into 
all  the  world,  and  preach  the  Gospel  to  every  creature" 

In  this  command  the  whole  is  twice  put  for  a  mere  part :  *'  all  the  world,^^ 
**  every  creature."  Here,  the  entire  universe  is  put  for  the  earth,  and  all 
creatures,  for  the  human  race. 

A  negro  is  white  in  the  teeth. 

In  the  Irene  it  is  affirmed  that  a  negro  \b  white.  In  the  clad 
which  follows,  this  error  is  corrected.  Upon  what  principle  is  this  error  cor- 
rected ?     Upon  the  principle  of  what  is  called  synecdoche  totis  .•  putting  the 


C0N3nCI'K)N    DP    NKPOECLADS.  141 

whole  for  Sipart.  The  word,  negro,  as  here  used,  can  not  mean  the  whole 
person,  the  entire  body,  since  such  a  view  of  the  sentence  would  go  to  affirm 
that  a  negro  is  white,  that  a  black  man  is  a  white  man  !  The  word,  negro, 
as  here  used,  means  ihaX  part  of  the  person  which  is  composed  of  his 
teeth. 

Thtis  it  appears  that  we  can  make  the  word,  negro,  mean  teeth.  A  negro 
is  white  in  his  teeth.  If,  then,  we  can  make  the  word,  negro,  mean  teeth, 
may  we  not  make  the  word,  bridge,  mean  a^ar^  of  a  bridge? 

It  is  true  that  the  thing  which  is  under  is  not  in  all  instarices  smaller  than 
that  which  is  over  it.  For  instance,  one  of  two  silver  dollars  equally  large, 
may  heunder  the  other.  But  I  say,  in  general,  the  thing  which  is  under  is 
inferior  in  size,  and  from  this  inferiority,  imder  has  come  to  be  used  in 
nepoecladswhose  leading  trait  in  the  condictive  character  is  inferiority/  in 
age,  price,  rank,  &c.  &c.  Upon  the  same  principle  too  under  has  come  to 
denote  inferiority  in  cases  like  the  following :  under-ofUcers,  under-agent, 
under-sheriff,  &c. 

There  is  another  peculiarity  that  a  thing  which  is  under,  generally  de- 
rives from  this  position ;  viz.  concealment,  a  hidden  state.  From  this  under 
has  come  to  mean  secret  means,  clandestine  manner,  fraud,  &c. ;  as,  in 
underhanded  conduct,  underhanded  work  is  always  mean,  and  often  fraud- 
ulent. 

Illustration  of  the  condic-     UndeTTieClth.,   {under,  and  neath.) 
tion  of  the     nepoeclads  which      j^  Local  Ru-dicatOry. 

begin  with  underneath.  tt    r>  t^ 

^  II.  Positional  E-dicatort. 

1.  "  He  found  it  -         -  (underneath  this  stone.")    • 

2.  "  The  mole  runneth  -  (underneath     ,     ,     .") 


Illustration  of  the  condiction  ^P- 

of  the     nepoeplads  which  be-       I.  LoCal  Ru-dicatory 

gin  with  up.  II,  JPositional  E-dicatgry 

1.  *'  He  is  now     -         -  (up  the  river.") 

2.  **  The  squirrel  is       -  (up  the  tree.") 

If  "  down  the  river,*'  is  good,  up  the  river,  is  not  bad. 


II.  Space  E-dicatort 


1.  "He  was  walking     -  (up  the  hill.") 

2.  "  The  squirrel  ran    -  (up  the  tree.") 

Up  is  generally  a  nepoecled.  (See  down.") 


142  CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 

Illustration  of  the  condiction  UpOU,   Ofl.  (up,  and  on.) 

of  the     nepoeclads  which  be-      I,  XjOCdl  Ru-dicatOry» 

gin  with  upon.  #11.  Positional  E-dicatory. 

The  dads  which  begin  with  on,  and  upon  are  not  positional  un- 

less the  condictive  idea  is  that  of  location  upon  the  surf  ace  as  in  the  in- 
stances under  the  head  of  Positional  e-dicatory,  and  under  the  head 
of  Sttbject       exedicatory. 

1.  James  was  seated  -  (upon  a  high  hill.) 

2.  I  was  then        -  -  (upon  the  house.) 

3.  Was  he  then     -  -  (upon  his  horse  ?)  ' 

4.  His  hat  was      -  -  (upon  his  head.) 

5.  "He  has  his  coat-  -  (upon  his  back.") 

6.  The  basket  hung  -  (upon  his  arm.) 

.  7.  We  are  now     -        '  -  (upon  battle  gcound.) 

8.  Th.e  gun  was    -         -  (upon  his  shoulder.) 

9.  He  had  a  ring  -         -  (upon  his  fore-finger.) 

10.  I  put  my  hand  -         -  (upon  his  shoulder.) 

11.  Lean  your  head  (upon  my  arm.) 

12.  I  have  often  been      -  (upon  these  waters.) 

13.  I  have  never  seen  finer 

wings      -         -         -  (upon  any  bird.) 
In  all  the  above  instances  on  is  as  good  as  upon, 

*III.  Material  Subject  Ex-e-dica-tory. 

14.  He  "Struck  -  -  {u^ioxi  ihe  iyhle)  with  his  hand. 
DbCTRii^E. — From  the  circumstance  that  the  upun  place,  the  sustain- 
ing position,  which  belongs  to  the  thing  that  is  generally  in  some  way 
affected,  influenced,  by  the  thing  which  occupies  this  place,  upon  as  well  as 
on  has  come  to  begin  clads  whose  cormei^  are  the  names  of  things 
which  are  the  subjects  of  some  material,  or  mental  operation;  as,  "  Have 
you  come  out  (upon  me)  with  staves  as  (upon  a  thief  P^^) 

What  is  a  subject  ? 

A  subject  is  that  on  which  some  material,  or  some  mental  operation  is 
performed.  Hence  that  on  which  a  surgeon  operates,  is  called  his  subject — 
hence  too  that  upon  which  one  thinks,  speaks,  or  writes,  is  called  the  subject. 

15.  They  Struck    -         -  (upon  the  ground.) 

16.  They  beat        -         -  (upon  the  house)  till  it  fell. 

17.  They  struck  him       -  (upon  his  head.) 

18.  "  The  rain  came  down  (upon  us)  in  torrents.*^) 


CONDKJTION    OP    NEPOECLADS.  14S 

f  II.  Vague  E-dicatory. 

19.  If   you   expect    punc- 
tuality    -         -.         -  (upon  our  part,) 

20.  I  trust  tjiat  you  will  be 

.    punctual  -         -  (on  yours.) 

21.  He  is       -     .   -         -  (upon  the  other  side)  of  the  river. 

22.  He  is  now        -         -  (upon  this  side)  of  the  Delaware. 

In  these,  and  similar  instances,  the  condidion  of  the  clads  which 

begin  with  upon,  and  on,  is  general  only.     There  is  no  position  indicated. 
Take  the.  clad  in  the  first  of  the  above  instances. 

I.  If  you  expect  punctuality  upon  our  party  I  trust  that  you 
will  be  punctual  on  your  part.  ^ 

"  Upon  our  part,"  simply  points  out  a  place  where  punctuality  is  expected 
to  be  found.  But,  then,  there  is  no  intimation  that  the  punctuality  is  to  be 
found  occupying  any  certain  position  in  reference  to  our  part.  In  the  fol- 
lowing clads,  there  is  not  only  the  idea  of  place,  but  of  a  definite 
place,  in  reference  to  the  clad  thing: 

1.  Thehook  is  {under  tJie  table.) 

2.  The  pen  is  (upon  the  ink-stand.) 

But  where  we  say  that  we  will  show  punctuality  upon  our  part,  we  do  not 
attempt  to  point  out  the  exact  position  of  this  punctuality  in  relation  to  our 
part — the  idea  is,  that  the  person  addressed  may  depend  upon  finding  punc 
tuality  somewhere  about  our  part — ^but  whether  it  will  be  located  under, 
over,  againsty  ot  in  this  part,  is  not  decided  by  the  language  of  the  mono. 

"  John  is  about  the  house.'''' 

The  exact  relative  position  of  John  to  the  house,  is  not  pointed  out.  He 
is  somewhere  about  the  house :  he  may  be  in  it,  ho  may  be  out  of  it ;  he  may 
be  under  it ;  he  may  be  upon  it ;  and  he  may  be  over  it.  But  the 
clad,  "  ahout  the  house"  does  not  decide  his  exact  position,  any  more  than 
does  the  mono,  "  upon  our  part,"  decide  the  exact  position  of  the  punc- 
tuality mentioned  in  the  superior  mono. 

The  condictionof  clads  which  begin  with  upon,  and  onyU  posi- 

tional, only  where  the  idea  is  tiiat  of  location  upon  the  surface,  as  in  the 
following — 

1.  There  were  dark  spotS' wjaon  his  skin. 

2.  There  were  red  spots  on  the  under  cuticle  of  his  feet. 
•.  He  beat  upon  the  drum. 

Now,  this  does  not  mean  that  he  beat  upon  the  head  of  the  drum — it 
means  that  he  struck  upon  the  surface  of  the  drum. 

And,  as  the  surface  is  a  kind  of  skin  which  envelopes  the  entire  instru 
ment,  a  blow  on  any  portion  of  the  exterior,  is  a  blow  upon  the  drum. 

4.  John  is  upon  the  other  side  of  the  Delaware  river. 

There  is  no  positional  idea  in  the  mono,  "upon  the  other  side  "  ,for  the 
idea  is  not  that  he  is  upon  the  surface  of  the  other  side. 


144  CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS. 

5.  John  was  buried  ^^uponthi  other  side*^  of  the  Delaware 
river. 

What,  buried  upon  the  surface  !  this  is  not  at  all  probable.     In  such  in- 
stances the  idea  is  that  the  person  mentioned  in  the  superior  mono,  is  some- 
where about  the  thing  mentioned  in  the  inferior  mono.     He  may  be  under 
it,  over  it,  on  it,  or  in  it.     His  exact  position  in  relation  to  the  thing  in  the 
clad  is  left  vague.  - 

23.  I   have  made  aa  im-  ,      , 
provement       -  ^      -  (upon  that  lamp.) 

This  does  not  mean  that  the  improvement  is  placed  upon  the  surface  of 
the  lamp — but  that  it  is  somewhere  about  the  lamp.  This  sense  is  probably 
derived  from  the  general  idea  of  the  words  from  which  on,  and  upon  have 
come :,  approaching,  coming  towards,  and  even  coming  to  a  thing. 

-       ,  ■  \      '  *    'i\;--  '.' 

till.  Material  Subject Ex-e-dioa-tdry, 

24.  i  performed  an  opera-        • 

tion         -         -         -  (upon  his  arm.) 

25.  *'  The  Philistines  be     (upon  thee,)  Samson. ^^ 

26.  They  came  out .        -  (upon  me)  ivith  clubs.. 

27.  I  am  engaged   -         -  (upon  this  job,)  ifo-(/«i/. 

■jf.  11.  Contact  E-dicatory. 

(See  Note  under  Example  18,  which  begins  with  on.) 

28.  They  were  discharged  (upon  the  first  day)  of  June. 
(See  doctrinal  notes  upon  Example  IS,   under  on.  Contact  E- 

dicatory.) 

29.  "  You  do  this  -         -  (upon  pain). o/'rfea^^." 

(Examine  the  doctrinal  notes  upon  the  clads  which  begin  with 

on.  Edicatory.) 

30.  What  was   their    con- 
duct       -         -        -  (upon  this  occasion?) 

(See  the  notel^upon  Example  2€,  under  on.) 

31.  They  will  have  com- 
passion -        -        -  (upon  him.) 

(See  Example  18,  under  on.   C.  Mino.)  ^ 

32.  John  will  retire         -  (upon  our  approach.) 
(See  note  under  Example  20,  which  begins  with  on.) 

33.  He  was    -        -         -  (upon  the  look-out) /or  the  ship, 

(See  Example  21,  which  begins  with  on.) 

34.  They  were       -         -  (upon  the  alert)  all  night. 
(See  «  He  is  on  the  alert,"  Ex.  22.) 


CONDICTION   OF    NEPOECLADS.  145 

35.  He  is        -         -         -  (upon  duty.) 

36.  He  was    -         -         -  (upon  guard.) 

37.  They  were       -         -  (upon  their  guard.) 

38.  He  appears       -         -  (upon  all  public  occasions.) 

39.  We  find  ruin    -         -  (upon  ruin.) 

40.  Men  meet  with  loss  -  (upon  loss.) 

(Read  those  notes  upon  these  instances  which  begin  withow.) 

41.  He  suffered  affliction    (upon  affliction.) 

42.  The  thunder  came  peal  (upon  peal.) 

43.  He  saw  heap    -         -  (upon  heap.) 
(See  notes  upon  "  pw  Aeap,"  Ex.31.) 

44.  He  came  -         -  (upon  a  sudden.) 

45.  He  came  -         -  (upon  an  errand)  q/* /ove. 
(See  note  upon  "  on  an  errand^^  Ex.  33.) 

46.  The  ship  is       -         -  (upon  shore.)  Not  good— on  is  good. 

Jin.  Mental  Subject  Ex-e-die-a-tory. 

47.  My  reflections  -  (upon  your  situation)   have  been 

painful. 

48.  Consider  well  -         -  (upon  the  matter,)  beforehand. 

49.  I   have    not  thought 

much       -        -         -  (upon  the  affair)  since. 

50.  I  shall  not  say  a  word  (upon  his  treatment)  toward  me. 

51.  I  will  retire,  and  dream  (upon  the  thing.) 

52.  His  mind  seemed  fixed  (upon  this  one  point.) 
(What  {is  }ie\  upon  1)  (Upon  what    ,     )  is  he  ? 

53.  "He  sent  the  officer-  (upon  a  bold  enterprise.") 

54.  The  legislature  is  now  (upon  the  banks.) 

55.  While  I  am      -         -  (upon  this  subject,)  /  wilt  remark. 

56.  I    have    given    many 

notes       -         .         .  (upon  the  condiction^  of    ne-po-e- 
clads. 

57.  Congress  is  now        -  (upon  the  pre-emption  act.) 

58.  This  is  a  treatise       -  (upon  Texas.) 

59.  I  have  reflected  much  (upon  this  point)  of  the  law  in  yow 

case. 

60.  Blackstone  has  written 

much      -        -        -  (upon  the  common  law.)  - 


146  CONDICTION    OP   NEl^OECLADS. 

61.  Who   has   written    a 

sound  work     -  -  (upon  the  laws)  of  nations  ? 

62.  In   his  speech  he  en- 
larged    -         -  -  (upon  this  part)  (/ ^Ac  Mcmc. 

63.  The  point        -  -  (upon  which)  /  desire  to  add  one 

word,  is  this. 

64.  He  is  bent        -         -  {upon  mischief.) 

Some  clads  which  begin  with  on  belong  to  the  following  E- 

dicatories,  although  these        dicatories  are  not  mentioned  under  on  .♦ 

1.  Basis f  Subject,  Presence,  Belonging-to,  Vague. 

i  III.  Progression  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 

65.  He  is  now        -         -  (upon  his  way)  home. 

Examine  all  the  notes  upon  those  dads  which  commence  with  on^ 

under  the  head  of  Progression        exedicatory. 

66.  He  was  then  -  -  (upon  the  road.) 

67.  He  is       -  -  -  (upon  the  road)  to  fame 

68.  Henry  was  -  -  (upon  his  way)  to  ruin. 

69.  He  is  always  -  -  (upon  the  wing.)  '^^     • 

70.  He  was  -  -  (upon  the  alert.) 

Where  the  idea  is  action,  upon  the  alert  falls  into  the  Progression 
Eisedicatory.  But  where  the  idea  is  that  of  vigilance  only,  the 
condiction  of  this  mono  is  exhausted  at  the  Edicatory. 

1.  The  house  was     -     {on  fire.) 

Note. — The  omisfiion  of  on,  in  instances  like  the  following, 
was  not  intended — hence  you  will  bring  these  monos,  when  they 
commence  with  on,  under  the  Local  Rudicatort,  Cowtact  Edi- 
CATOHY,  and  Progression  Exedicatory. 

71.  The  horse  came  -  (upon  the  full  jump.) 

72.  The  horses  were  -  (upon  a  hard  trot.) 

73.  My  horse  was  -  (upon  a  slow  walk.) 

74.  His  horae  was  -  -  (upon  a  gallop.) 

{On  the  full  jump,)  {on  a  hard  trot,)  {on  a  slow  walk,)  {on  a  gallop.) 

Note. — It  may  be  well  to  say  also  that  in  treating  of  the  agnomeclad* 
which  begin  with  on,  there  is  no  illustration  of  on  in  the  Bbxcn  oino-to 

E-mCATORT. 

1 .  James  is  -         -  (on  the  democratic  side.) 

2.  Joseph  is        -         -  (on  the  whig  side.) 


CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS.  147 

II.  Contiguous  E-dicatory 

75.  My  father-was  -  (upon  my  right  side,) 

76.  and  my  brother  -  (upon  my  left.) 

That  is,  near  to  my  side. 

77.  "  There  is  a  village  -  (upon  the  Thames.") 

78.  "Jefferson  city  is      -  (upon  the  Missouri  river.") 

On  is  as  good  as  upon  in  these  instances.  There  are  instances,  however^ 
where  on  must  be  used  to  the  exclusion  of  upon.  We  do  not  say  the  ship 
is  upon  shore,  The  house  is  upon  fire. 

n.  Belonging-t6  E-dicatory. 

79.  James  is  -         -  (upon  the  other  side.) 

80.  Joseph  was       -         -  (on  the  whig  side.) 
That  is,  belongs  to  the  whig  party. 


II.  Basis  E  dicatory. 

I.  "John  depends    -         -         -  (upon  me) /or  mowei/." 

Doctrine, — There  are  various  /oca/ qualities, ^/ace  attributes,  which  be- 
long to  things  as  much  as  do  form,  size,  colour,  &c.  For  instance,  a  table 
nas  an  on  as  much  as  it  has  size ;  and  this  on  is  as  much  a  quality  of  the 
table  as  is  the  size  of  it.  Waits,  and  others  who  have  written  much  upon 
the  subject  of  qualities,  define  a  quality  as  follows  : — 

"  A  quality  is  that  property  which  can  not  exist  in,  and  of  itself,  but  is 
always  esteemed  as  belonging  to,  and  as5ubsistingby,the  help  of  some  sub- 
stance which,  for  this  reason,  is  called  its  subject."  Does  not  the  ow  of  a 
table  depend  as  much  upon  the  table  as  does  the  size  of  it  1  Can  that  place 
which  is  named  cm  be  separated  from  the  thing  to  which  it  belongs  any  more 
than  size,  form,  colour,  &c.  &c  1  I  should  be  glad  to  see  a  philosopher  at- 
tempt to  separate  the  on,  the  under,  the  over,  the  at,  the  to,  the  by,  the/rowi, 
the  through,  the  iii,  the  beside,  the  beneath,  of  a  table  from  the  table,  and  to 
make  them  exist  in,  and  ot  themselves  !  He  who  attempts  this  work  of  ab- 
straction, will  find  that  the  on,  the  under,  the  above,  &c  orthe  table,  have  too 
strong  an  affinity  for  their  subject  to  leave  it,  and  set  up  a  separate,  a  distinct, 
existence  for  themselves  !  Let  the  old  school  grammarians,  then,  call  on, 
under,  over,  &c,  adjectives/  An  adjective  is  a  word  which  expresses  a 
quality — and  a  quality  is  that  which  cannot  exist  independent  of  a  subject, 
a  being-giving  basis !  Now,  the  /oca/ quality,  the  pkice  attribute,  of  which 
upon  is  the  name,  or  of  which  upon  is  the  noun,  (for  name,  and  noun  are 
the  same,)  is  the  great  sustaining  place,  the  well  known  basis  position  of  a 
table,  a  chair,  a  foundation,  and  of  all  other  things.  The  house  is  erected 
upon,  not  under  its  foundation.  From  being  the  name  of  the  place  which  is 
always  occupied  when  the  subject  to  which  this  place  belongs  is  made  the 
basis,  the  foundation,  the  support,  of  another  thing,  upon,  and  on  have  come 
to  be  used  where  the  clad  thing,  instead  of  having  any  jo/acc  quality, 

any  heal  attribute  of  any  kind,  bears  a  basis,  a  foundation,  a  stietaining. 


148  CONmCTION    OF    NEP0ECLAD3. 

relation  to  something  mentioned  m  the  supe.  mono;  as,  John  lived  for 
weeks  upon  bread  alone. 

Here  the  bread  is  the  basis  of  the  continuation  of  John's  life.  And  upon 
begins  the  mono  where  bread,  the  name  of  this  basis,  is  used,  because 
upon,  in  its  local  character,  is  the  name  of  that  place  which  nniist  be 
occupied  in  order  to  make  the  thing  to  which  it  belongs,  a  basis. 

2.  I  will  remain    -         -  (upon  these  conditions.) 

That  is,  these  conditions  are  the  basis,  the  support,  of  my  remaining. 

3.  "  We  hope  to  be  for- 
given      -         -         .  (upon  our  repentance.") 

The  basis  of  the  hope  is  the  repentance. 

Why  is  upon  used  where  the  clad  thing  has  no  such 

local  attribute  as  wjoorj,  and  on,  under  \he\v  primary  meaning, 
denote  ?     Because  the  clad  thing  bears  the  same  basis 

relation  to  something  mentioned  in  the  super  mono,  which 
the  thing  that  has  this  upon  place  occupied,  must  bear  to  the 
thing  which  occupies  it.     "  The  book  is  upon  the  table." 

The  book  occupies  the  upon  place— -hence  the  table  bears  a 
basis  relation  to  the  book.  And,  as  the  occupying  of  the  upon 
place  renders  the  table  a  basis,  upon  is  used  before  things 
which  do  not  possess  the  upon  place  which  the  table  has,  pro- 
vided they  bear  the  basis  relation  to  something  in  the  supei 
mono,  which  the  table  bears  to  the  book  that  occupies  the  upon 
place  of  the  table.  In  brief,  the  doctrine  is  this — From  denot- 
ing the  basis  position^,  upon,  and  on,  have  come  to  convey  a 
basis  allusion,  d^  foundation  import. 

4.  "  It  is  written,  Man 

shall  not  live  -         -  (upon  bread)  alone, 

5.  but  -         -         -  (upon  every  word)  that  proceedeih 

out  of  the  mouth  of  God. ^^ 

6.  TVe  think         -        -  (upon  the  whole)  that  he  will  be 

able  to  fxay  his  debts. 
That  is,  the  whole  matter  is  the  basis  of  this  opinion :  this  opinion  is 
founded  upon  the  basis  of  the  whole  matter. 

7.  "  He  borrowed  money  (upon  his  lands.) 

8.  I  will  loan  money      -  (upon  real  estate  security.) 

9.  "  He  was  put   -         -  (upon  his  good  conduct.") 

10.  '*  He  was  acquitted   -  (upon  some  informality)  in  the  pro- 

ceedings.^^ 

11.  "Cattle  live      -         -  (upon  grass.") 

12.  '*  Paupers  came        -  (upon  the  town,)  like  hail  upon  the 

.ground  J*^ 


CONDICTION   OF    NEPOECLADS.  149 

13.  Hooker  took  it  (upon  himself)^©  pay  his  brother* s 

debts, 

14.  We    cannot    have   a 

stable  government     -  fupon  this  principle.) 

15.  "  His  cure  depends  -  (upon  his  care.") 
That  is,  his  care  is  the  basis  of  his  cure. 

16.  He  affirmed      -         -  (upon  his  honour)  that  he  would 

return. 

17.  He  declared      -         -  (upon  his  oath.) 

That  is,  he  placed  the  truth  of  his  affirmation  upon  the  basis  of  an  other. 
In  the  illustrations  which  I  have  attempted  to  give  of  o^i,   the  instance* 
like  these  are  presented  under  the  Local  Rudicatery, 

(See  Example  13,  and  14,  under  on.) 

18.  "  He  came        -         -  (upon  an  hour's  warning.") 

DocTMBTE. — Every  action  requires  time ,-  for  no  action  can  be  performed, 
or  done,  without  a  longer,  or  a  shortef,  time  in  which  to  act.  Hence,  every 
action  depends  upon  time — therefore  it  is  not  very  irrelevant  to  consider  time 
as  a  kind  of  basis  on  which  actions  are  necessarily  placed.  Every  event,  as 
has  been  said  already,  depends  upon  more,  or  less  time — for  without  time, 
no  event  can  happen.  Hence  we  are  constantly  appropriating  different  por- 
tions of  time  to  different  events.  Thisf  action  will  require  an  hour ;  that,  a 
day,  &c. 

He  will  draw  the  deed  upon  a  day^s  notice. 
That  is,  he  will  not  make  the  act  of  drawing  the  deed  depend  upon,  rest 
upon,  more  time  than  one  day. 

**  He  came  upon  an  hour's  warning." 

That  is,  this  action  did  not  rest,  did  not  depend,  upoi>  a  day,  a  week,  nor  a 
year,  but  upon  an  hour.  Actions  must  depend  upon  time — hence  time  be- 
comes a  basis  on  which  events  are  placed ;  and,  as  time  becomes  a  basis, 
upon,  ai>d  on  may  begin  clads  which  contain  the  cormes  that  denote 

this  kind  of  basis. 

Will  you  refer  the  clads  which  begin  with  upon,  or  on,  in  the 

following  sentences,  to  their  proper       dicatories  ? 

1.  "  While  Peter  thought  {upon  the  vision,)  the  Spirit  said 

unto  him,  Behold,  three  men  seek  thee." 

2.  "  Remember,  sir,  that 

you  are  -        -        -  {upon  your  oath)  here." 

3.  What  is  said  here  is 

said        -        ^        -  {upon  oath*)         jg* 


1*50  CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 

4.  "And  he  puts  himself  {upon  his  country)  for  trial,  which 

country  you  are." 

5.  There  should  be  ano- 
ther man  '        -  {upon  the  jury,) 

6.  What  judge  is  now   -  (upon  the  bench?) 

7.  I  have  my  doubts      -  (upon  that  subject.) 

8.  He  commenced        -  {upon  the  other  house)  last  week. . 

9.  "Is  there  not  a  God 

who  looks  down      -  {upon  us)  in  mercy?" 

10.  "  Did  not  men  cast  re- 
proaches -        -  {upon  the  Son)  of  man  ?" 

11.  "  Some  seed  fell       -  {upon  stony  places)  where  they  had 

not  much  earth." 

12.  "  And  they  spit        -  {upon  him,)  and  took  the  reed,  and 

smote  him  {upon  the  hand") 

13.  "  Then    were    there 

two  thieves  crucified  ,- 

with  him,  one  -  {upon  either  side.) 

14.  He  fell    -         -         -  {upon  his  face.) 

15.  He  is  now        -        -  {upon  his  trial.) 

16.  -        -        -        -  {Upon  the  same  principle^)  every 
man  may  violate  the  laws  with  impunity. 

17.  Have  you  any  thing  -  {upon  your  books),  against  me  ? 

18.  "  This  is  the  strangest 

thing      -        -        -  {upon  the  face)  of  the  earth." 

19.  This  is  now     -         -  {upon  the  docket,)  and  can  not  be 

removed. 

20.  The  horse  has  a  scar   {upon  his  back.) 

21.  That  ox  has  a  fly      -  {upon  his  ear.) 

22.  "  I  shall  proceed       -  {upon  the  ground)  that  it  will  be 

admitted  {upon  the  other  side,)  that  a  lawful  tender  had 
been  made  of  the  money  which  they  now  demand." 

23.  "  He  knows     -         -  {upon  ivhich  side)  |iis  bread  is  but- 

tered." 

24.  The  rain  beat  in        -  {upon  us)  with  great  severity. 

25.  -         -         -        ,-  ("  Upon  the  first  day)  of  the  week, 
very  early  in  the  morning,  came  Mary  Magdalene." 

26.  "The  angel  of  the 
Lord,  came,  and  roll- 
ed   back    the    stone 

from  the  door,  and  sat  {upon  the  stone.") 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS.  1ST 

27.  He  has  made  a  great 

improvement  -        -  (upon  your  lamp.) 

28.  He  has  improved      -  {upon  your  plcm.) 

29.  His   plan  is   a  great 
improvement   -        -  {upon  yours.) 

30.  The  fit  is  now  -  {upon  him.) 

illustration  of  the  condiction  Within.  ( WtVA,  and  m.) 

of  the     nepoeclads  which  begin  J,  Local  Ru-dicatory.. 

v/i(h  within.  II.  Positional  E-dicatOry, 

1.  There  is  no  man  -  (within  these  walls.) 
The  word,  with-in,  is  the  name  of  that  place  which  falls  within  some  boun- 
daries. The  first  part  of  this  word,  is  with  ,-  the  second,  is  in.  These  two 
parts  are  used  as  distinct  words  more  generally  than  they  are  in  connection 
in  the  compound  word,  within,  I  walked  in  the  fields  with  my  umbrella 
over  my  head. 

The  first  element  of  this  steroclade,  with-in,  has  been  formed  from 
withe.  Withe  is  the  name  of  a  small  sapling  which  some  farmers  use  for 
bringing,  and  binding  one  stake  to  another  in  constructing  fences.  From 
being  the  name  of  the  instrument  with  which  one  stake  is  brought,  and 
bound  to  another,  withe  without  the  e,  has  come  to  denote  the  act  of 
bringing  one  thing  to  another,  as,  in  the  following  instances  : 

1.  Make  me  a  coat  with  buttons  upon  the  cuffs. 

2.  I  walked  in  the  field  with  my  umbrella  over  my  head. 

1.  That  is,  with,  tie,  or  6inc?  buttons  to  the  cyffs  as  the  fence-maker  wtths 
one  stake  to  the  other. 

2.  That  is,  with,  or  bring  the  umbrella  over  my  head  as  the  fence-maker 
withs,  or  brings  one  stake  to  the  other.     (See  With.) 

The  element,  with,  in  the  word,  within,  has  the  same  import  which  Uie 
word,  ivith,  has  in  the  above  instances.  The  idea  of  binding,  bringing,  or 
fixing,  which  with,  as  an  element  of  within,  denotes,  is  not  readily  appre- 
hended. This,  however,  arises  from  the  implenary  state  of  the  sentence, 
which  may  be  seen  in  the  following  instances : 

1.  He  came  within  my  reach. 

2.  He  was  then  within  sight. 
Rendered  plenary : 

1.  He  came  with  thou  him  into  my  reach. 

2.  He  was  then  with  thou  him  into  sight. 

1.  That  is,  bring  or  with  thou  him  into  this  place  jtist  as  the  fence-maker 
brings  one  stake  to  the  other  by  a  withe.  But,  bring  him  into  what  place  t 
into  the  place  over  which  my  rea/ih,  my  arm,  can  extend. 

8.  That  is,  bring,  or  with^oxx  him  into  this  place  just  as  the  fence-maker 
brings,  or  withs  one  stake  to  the  other.  Bring,  or  with  him  into  what 
place  1     Into  that  place  over  which  Uie  sight  of  the  eye  e;3Ctends. 


152  CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS. 

2.  The  pious  man  finds 

happiness         -        -  (within  his  Bible.) 
That  is,  bring,  with,  or  put  the  pious  man  into  his  Bible. — What  then  % 
why,  he  is  happy.     Yes,  with,  hind,  bring,  oxfix,  the  pious  man  into  his 
Bible  as  the  fence-maker  withs,  binds,  brings,  or  Jixes  one  stake  to  the  other, 
and  he  is  happy : 

The  pious  man  finds  happiness  (^with     ,     ,     in  his  Bible.) 

3.  John  will  return        -  (within  a  year.) 

That  is,  with,  bring,  ox  fix  his  return  in  the  limits  of  a  year. 

4.  His  attempt  died       -  (within  itself.) 

That  is,  with,  or  bring  the  cfea^A,  or  the  dying  oiihe  event  into  the  event 
itself. 

5.  "  Keep  your  expenses  (within  your  income.") 

ThdX\s,  with,  bring,   ox  put  your  expenses  in to_y  our  income. 
(He  that  can  see  that  ^Hn-come'^  is  formed  in  idea,  and  in  materials  too, 
from  in,  and  come,  can  comprehend  with-in  as  formed  ixomwith,  and  in,) 

6.  "  The  wound  festers    (within     ,     ,     .") 

7.  "  Ills  from        -        -  (within     ,     ,     )  thy  reason  must 

prevent.) 

The  difference  between  in,  and  within. 
Upon  a  mere  glance,  in,  and  within  seem  to  be  as  much  alike,  or  as 
nearly  synonymous,  as  on,  and  upon.  A  close  examination,  however,  will 
show  that  this  is  not  the  case.  Generally,  on  may  be  substituted  for  upon, 
and  upon  for  on.  But  in  caimot  be  exchanged  for  within,  and  within  for 
in,  in  many  instances.  For  instance,  in  the  expression,  "  there  was  a  family 
in  the  house," within  cannot  be  put  for  t'p.  In  conveys  the  idea  that  the  family 
belongs  to  the  house  as  residents— -ty//Am  would  convey  nothing  of  this 
kind: 

1.  There  was  a  family  in  the  house. 

2.  There  was  a  family  within  the  house. 

In  the  first,  the  idea  is  that  the  family  belonged  to  the  house.  In  the 
second,  the  idea  is  that  the  family  did  not  belong  to  the  house. 

1.  Latent  heat  is  in  air. 

2.  Latent  heat  is  within  air. 

In  the  first,  the  condiction  is  that  this  heat  belongs  to  the  air  m  one  of  its 
parts.     In  the  second,  there  is  no  such  idea. 

1.  He  is  in  my  sight,  is  very  different  from  He  is  within  my  sight 

2.  He  is  in  my  reach,  is  different  from  He  is  within  my  reach. 

3.  There  were  many  cattle  in  that  field,  is  quite  different  from, — There 
were  many  cattle  within  that  field. 

In  the  one  case,  the  idea  is  that  the  cattle  belonged  to  the  field  in  which 
they  were.  In  the  other,  the  idea  is  that  although  they  were  in  the  field, 
they  might  not  have  belonged  to  the  field.       .;  ,        ,    _ 


CONDJCTION    or    NEPOECLADS.*^  155 

1.  There  is  guile  in  every  man's  heart. 

2.  There  is  guile  within  every  man's  heart. 

In  the  first,  the  idea  is  that  guile  belongs  to  the  heart,  and  exerts  an  influ- 
ence over  it.  In  the  second,  the  idea  is  that  although  guile  is  in  the  heart, 
it  has  no  connection  with  the  heart,  except  this  local  relation.  Within,  then, 
does  not  express  the  full  relation  which  guile  bears  to  the  heart — hence  it 
is  not  well  used. 

1.  One  difference  between  in  and  within,  seems  to  be  this  :  In  indicates 
that  whatever  occupies  the  place  which  in  points  out,  is  more,  or  less  perma- 
nently located ;  as,  Some  family  is  in  the  house. 

2.  One  difference  between  in  and  ivithin,  is  this :  In  indicates  that  what- 
ever occupies  the  place  which  in  points  out,  has  some  sort  of  right  either 
from  use,  title,  or  fitness,  to  that  place  ;  as,  We  find  fishes  in  water,  Birds 
in  air. 

3.  One  difference  between  t?z,  and  within,  is  this:  In  indicates  various 
relations  besides  that  of  place,  or  local,  which  the  thing  that  occupies  the 
place  which  in  points  out,  bears  to  the  thing  to  which  this  in  place  belongs ; 
as,  There  are  100  pages  in  that  book. 

Here  the  idea  is,  not  that  the  one  hundred  pages  are  merely  inside  of  the 
book,  but  that  they  belong  to  the  book  as  its  component  parts.  But,  if  we 
substitute  within  for  in,  nothing  but  the  naked  local  idea  is  conveyed  to  the 
mind  concerning  these  pages :  There  are  100  pages  within  the  book. 

These  pages  make  no  part  of  the  book — there  is  a  book  independent  of 
these  100  pages;  and  within  this  book  these  100  pages  are  placed. 

4.  One  difference  between  in,  and  within,  is  this:  Within,.  \n  some 
instances  where  the  clad  thing,  is  time,  brings  that  time  closer  to  you 
so  to  speak,  than  in  ;  as,  I  can  walk  a  niile  within  an  hour. 

This  is  quite  different  from,  I  can  walk  a  mile  in  an  hour.  The  hour 
which  is  alluded  to  in  the  first  instance,  is  a  definite  hour — it  is  that  which  is 
tvithed  to  you — it  is  the  hour  which  is  brought  up  to,  withed  up  to,  the 
present  moment. 

The  preceding  explanations  of  the  difference  between  in,  and  ivithin,  are 
offered,  not  as  a  full  illustration  of  the  subject,  but  as  a  mere  commencement 
to  such  an  exposition.  This  mere  beginning,  however,  is  enough  for  him 
who  can,  and  who  will,  think  for  himself;  and  for  him  who  cannot  think, 
or  who,  if  he  can,  will  not,  a  mere  introduction  is  better  than  a  full  book. 

Illustration  of  the  condiction  Atween,  Atwixt.       (two.) 

of  the     nepoeclads  which  be-  I.  Numeral  Ru-dic. 

gin  with  atween  and  atwixt.  *  II.  Dual  E-dicatort. 

1.  "Does  all  go  right    -  ^atween  us?") 

2.  "  Is  all  right    -         -  (atwixt  him),  and  hii  Maker?'' 

*  III.  Positional  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 

3.  '*  The  victim  nailed  -  Tatween  two  thieves."), 

4.  **  It  came  out  from     -  (atwixt  the  two  clefts)  oftJie  rock,** 
The  steroclades,  atween,  and  aiwixt,  are  very  rarely  found  in  prose. 


154 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 


Illustration  of  the  condic- 
tion  of  the  nepoeclads  which 
begin  with  between,  and  be- 
twixt. 

1.  There  is  a  difference 

2.  There  is  a  discord     - 


Between,  Betwixt. 

(twain,  two.) 

I.  Numeral  Ru-dic. 

II.  Dual  E'Dicatory. 

(between  the  two  horses.) 
(betwixt  the  two  brothers.) 

3.  "What  is  the  distinction  (between  right,)  and  wrong?^^ 

4.  These  two  men  hold  , 

the  land  -         -  (between  them.) 

It  is  observed  by  Mr.  Webster,  and  others,  that  these  steroclades  may  be 
used  where  there  are  more  than  two  things.  Mr.  W.  gives  the  following 
instance  in  support  of  his  position. 

"  Twenty  proprietors  own  a  tract  of  land  between  them." 

In  this  use  of  between,  there  is  a  perfect  disregard  to  the  dual  import 

which  this  steroclade  derives  from  its  parent  word,  twain.    If  we  can  say . 

between  tvventy  men,  what  is  the  diiference  between  among,  and  between  ? 

If  there  is  none ;  we  may  say,  among  the  two  men  !  among  him,  and  mc  ! 

**  Twenty  proprietors  own  a  tract  of  land  between  them." 

"  Between  them^^  should  give  place  to  the  clonoclade,  together,— ox  among 
should  be  put  for  between. 

1.  Twenty  proprietors  own  a  tract  of  land  together. 

2.  Twenty  men  own  a  tract  of  land  among  them.  Or,  twenty 
men  own  a  tract  of  land  among  themselves. 

That  is,  the  ownership  is  distributed  among  the  twenty. 

Ill,  Positional  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 

-  (between  two  rocks.) 

-  fbetwixt  the  two  cities.) 

-  (between  him,)  and  thee. 

-  (betwixt  the  eyes,") 


6.  He  sat 

6.  The  stream  ran 

7.  I  stood     - 

8.  "  The  nose  is  - 


Illustration  of  the  condiction 
of  the  nepoeclads  which  be- 
gin with  against. 

1.  "I  am     - 

2.  *' His  hand  will  be     - 

3.  "That  is  a  decree     • 

4.  .         .         . 

5.  and 


Against. 
I.  Adversative    Ru-dica. 

II.  Disapprobation  E-dicatory. 

-  (against  your  pillows.")  JEz.  xiii. 

-  (against  every  man.")  Gen.  xvi. 

II.  Repugnance  E-dicatory. 

-  (against  law,) 

-  fagainst  public  opinion,) 

-  (against  reason  itself."") 


CONDICTION   OF   NEPOECLADS.  155 

II.  Competition  E-dicatory. 

6.  This  horse  ran  -  (against  that         ,         .) 

7.  Harrison  ran    -         -  ^against  Van  Buren.) 

8.  "  The  Whigs  are      -  fagainst  the  Democrats.") 

9.  There  are  ten  votes  -  (against  nine.) 

II.  Local  E-dicatory. 

10.  "  The  ship  is  -  (against  the  mouth)  of  the  river. *^ 

11.  Aaron    lighted     the 

lamps  over      -        -  (against  the  candlestick.")   Num 

viii. 

12.  He  leans  -        -  (against  the  wall.) 

II.  Unpropitious  E-dicatory. 

13.  This  change  of  mea- 

sures is  -         -         -  (against  us.) 

14.  The  choice  of  officers 

was         -         -         -  (against  them.) 

II.  Anticipative  E-dicatory. 

15.  They  should  get  good 

wood      -         -^         -  (against  winter.) 

16.  All    should     lay    up 

something        -         -  (against  time)  of  need. 

17.  "  Urijahmade  it        -  (against  king  Ahaz  came  from  Da^ 

mascus.")    2  Kings  xvi. 

II.  Remedial  E-dicatory, 

18.  Cold  water  is  good   -  (against  a  cold.) 

19.  "  Alkalies  are  good  -  (against  the  heart-burn.") 

II.  Compensation  E-dicatory. 

"  How  will  you 
change  horses?" — 
I  will  put  mine         -  (against  yours.) 

II.  Preventive  E-dicatory. 

"  I  have  endeavoured 

to  guard  -         -  (against  a  cold.") 

I  shall  guard     -         -  (against  thieves.) 

II.  Hostile  E-dicatory. 


80. 

21. 
22. 


23. 
24 


He  raised  impious  war  (against  the  throne,) 

and  -        -         -  (against  the  monarchy)  of  God. 


166  CONDICTION   OP    NEPOECLADS. 

Illustration  of  the  condiction  FoT.    (from,  fore.) 

of  the   nepoeciads  which  be-     I,  Advcrsative    Ru-dica. 

gin  with /or.  11.  Value  E-dicatory. 

1.  He  gave  a  dollar        -  (for  the  knife.) 

DocTKiNE. — ^That  the  learner  may  understand  the  condictive  character 
of  the  eclads  which  begin  with  for,  with  ease,  I  have  attempted  to 

illustrate  the  primary  import  of  for  itself.  This  attempt  is  made  in  the 
following  cut : 

Being  Fored.  Faring. 


For,  primarily,  denoted  the  act  of  approaching  an  individual  face-wise, 
as  is  seen  in  the  above  cut.  The  person  who  fors,  or  fores,  is  placed  by 
the  very  act  oi  foring,  opposite  to  him  who  is  fored,  or  approached.  And, 
from  the  fact  that  for  was  primarily  the  name  of  the  act  out  of  which  the 
adversative  position  grew,  fore,  abridged  io  for,  has  come  to  be  used  where 
one  thing  is  put  opposite  to  another  in  value.  Hence  some  of  the  agno- 
meclads  which  begin  with  jV,  convey  the  idea  that  the  nepoeclad  thing 
is  placed  agamst  the  other  thing  in  value ;  as,  '*  Buy  us,  and  our  land  for 
bread. — Gen.  xlviii.  19. 

The  bread  is  placed  against  us,  and  our  land,  much  in  the  same  way  as 
he  who  fors,  is  placed  opposite  to  him  who  is  fored.  The  difference  between 
the  two  cases  is  that,  in  one  the  opposition  lies  in  place ,-  and  in  the  other, 
it  lies  in  value.  Or,  in  one,  the  opposition  is  produced  by  bringing  one  per- 
son against  another  in  position ,-  and  in  the  other,  it  is  produced  by  putting 
one  thing  against  another  in  value. 

2.  (*'  For  my  life)  I  cannot  understand 
the  man." 

That  is,  though  I  should  place  my  life  against  this  knowledge,  even  with 
this  high  price,  I  could  not  get  it.. 

3.  I  will  give  my  horse  -  (for  yours.) 

That  is,  I  will  put  my  horse  against  yours  in  value.  Or,  I  will  set  the 
value  of  mine  against  the  value  of  yours. 

4.  "  He  gave  cattle        -  (for  horses.") 

5.  *'  They  ^ave  him  ten 

stripes  -        -  (for  each  offence.") 


CONDICtlON    OF    NEPOECLADS.  157 

DocTRiTfE. — The  penal  code  has  fixed  a  certain  penal  value  to  each  crime 
much  in  the  same  way  in  which  the  business  system  has  fixed  a  particular 
value  to  each  article  which  is  purchased,  or  exchanged  in  the  market.  Hence 
punishments  are  spoken  of  as  being  set  off  against  crime.  Or  punishment 
is  spoken  of  as  being  given  in  exchange  for  crime,  or  against  crime.  And 
although  from  a  slight  view  this  may  seem  anomalous ;  yet  from  a  close 
examination,  no  eccentricity  will  be  found  in  it.  To  him  who  is  ignorant 
of  the  true  import  of  for,  the  expression,  "  Pennsylvania  gives  severe  punish- 
ments/or crime,"  conveys  the  idea  that  Pennsylvania  inflicts  punishment 
to  procure  crime — and,  that  she  is  bent  on  pronrnoting,  instead  of  preventing 
a  violation  of  her  laws !  But  to  him  who  understands  for  as  meaning 
against,  this  expression  is  just,  and  beautiful.  The  nepoeclads  in  the 
following  sentences,  have  the  same  condigtive  import : 

1.  Pennsylvania  gave  D.  imprisonmentybr  his  crimes. 

2.  Johnson  gave  D.  cash^or  his  corn. 

In  both,  the  idea  is  that,  one  thing  is  set  off  against  another :  in  the  first, 
the  imprisonment  is  put  against  the  crime ;  in  the  second,  the  idea  is,  that  the 
cash  is  put  against  the  com.  It  is  in  both  cases  a  matter  of  exchange : 
Pennsylvania  had  received  the  crimes  of  D.  and  she  gave  him  imprisonment 
in  exchange.  Johnson  received  the  com  of  D.  and  he  gave  him  cash  in 
exchange. 

6.  "And  if  any  mischief 
follow,      then    thou 

shalt  give  life  -         -  (for  life,) 

7.  eye 

8.  tooth 

9.  hand 

10.  foot  -         -        -  (forfoot."^  JSJa?.  xxi. 

11.  *'To  give  his 
ransom    -         -        -  (for  many.")  Matt.  xx. 

That  is,  to  set  his  life  off  in  the  character  of  an  equivalent,  against  the 
many  who  were  lost  in  the  fall  of  Adam. 

12..  "  Or  what  shall  a  man 

give  in  exchange      -  (for  his  own  soul  ?")  Mark  viii. 

II.  Rksistive  E-dicatory. 

18.  This  root  is  good       -  (for  a  cough.) 

That  is,  this  root  is  good  to  oppose,  or  stbdue  a  cough.  As  he  whofors 
another,  is  opposed  to  him  in  place,  so  is  this  root  opposed  to  a  cough  in 
action. 

14.  <' Alkalies  are  good  -  (for  the  heart-burn.") 
That  is,  they  are  good  to  resist  the  heart-burn. 


158  CONDICTION   OP    NEPOECLADS. 

15.  Every    man    should 

provide  clothing       -  (for  winter.) 
That  is,  clothing  to  resist  the  cold  of  winter. 

This,  15,  may  seem  to  many  to  fall  under  the  Adapted-to  E-bi- 

CATOBT.    Upon  this  pointy  I  shall  make  a  few  reflections  under  this 
dicat&ry. 

II.  Prevention  E-dicatory. 

16.  "  She   wrapped   him 

close       -         -        -  (for       ,     catching)  cold." — Shak. 
That  is,  she  wrapped  him  close  to  prevent  the  catching  of  a  cold. 

17.  "And,     -        -        -  (for  the  time  shall  not  seem  te- 

dious.")— Shak. 
That  is,  as  a  prevention  against  the  time's  seeming  tedious,  &c.    This 
application  is  obsolete. 

II.  Obstacle  Kdicatoby. 

18.  "  John  will  go  where 

he  pleases       -        -  (for  all)  me,"  -     ^ 

That  is,  John  will  go  where  he  pleases,  even  when  all  which  I  can  do 

stands  against  his  act  in  the  character  of  an  obstacle.  The  plenary  state 
will  do  the  reader  no  harm : 

fJohn  will  go   where]  (he  pleases)  (for  all        ,         ,  ) 

(,         ,         »         '  )  (      '         "^^0 
John  will  go  where  he  pleases  (tor  all  the  opposition)  [which  can  be 
made)  {hy  me.) 

19.  "  Joseph  Boston  may 

be  in  Philadelphia,  -  (for  any  thing)  that  I  know." 
That  is,  nothing  which  I  know  can  be  put  against  this  fact  to  prevent,  to 
disprove  it. 

20.  The  roads    are   bad, 

indeed,  but      -         -  [for  b[\)  that  I  shall  go. 
But  I  shall  go  even  against  this  obstacle.  Plenary  :  But  I  shall  go  (for, 
against  all  the  impediment)  (which  that  fact  can  produce.) 

II.  Substitution  E-picatory. 

21.  John  acts  -         -  (forme.) 

That  is,  John  is  set  off  against  me,  as  a  substitute  for  me. 

22.  "He  gave  up  the  law  (for  divinity.") 
That  is,  he  substituted  one  profession  for  the  other. 

23.  He      translated      the 

poem  line         -         -  (for  line.) 
That  is,  he  set  off  a  line  of  English,  for  instance,  as  a  substitute,  against, 
or  for,  a  line  of  Latin. 


CONDICTION   OF    NEPOEGLADS.  159 

■f  II  With  Referexce-to         fi-DicAToax. 

24.  It  was  a  great  sura  -         -     (for  John)  to  give. 

'J'hat  is,  when  this  amount  is  placed  off  against  John,  much  as  he 
who  fors,  is  against  him  that  is  fored,  it  is  great.  By  the  side  of  John 
this  sum  is  large — but  by  the  side  oi  Stephen  this  sum  is  small. 

25.  "  It  was  young  counsel    -     (for  these  persons,) 

26.  and  violent  counsel  -         -     (for  the  matters.") 

*  11.  With  Refekebtce-to        E-dicatort. 

1.  I   have   many   apprehen- 

sions -         -         -     (for  him.) 

2.  I  have  no  apprehensions  -     (for  myself.) 

DocTRiTTE. — From  being  the  name  of  the  act  of  approaching  face- 
wise, /or  has  come  to  convey  an  allusion,  in  certain  cases,  to  an  ap- 
proach without  any  regard  to  the  manner ;  as,  I  have  many  appre- 
hensions far  him;  but  I  have  no  apprehension  for  myself. 

That  is,  when  I  for,  or  approach  him,  I  have  many  apprehensions, 
but  when  I  for  myseilf,  I  have  no  apprehensions.  Hence  comes  the 
idea  expressed  in  the  distinctive  title,  "  With  Reference-to." 

3.  Thus  much    -        -        -    (for  this  trait)  in  the  character 

oi  for. 
That  is,  all  the  above  note  fipproaches,  or  fors  this  trait,  the  witk 
reference  to  trait. 

4.  "  Thus  much  -         -        -     (for  the  progress)  of  the  de- 

luge.''^ 

II.   In   the  ChAKACTER-OF  Ru-DICATORr. 

5.  I  took  him      -  "     -         -     (for  a  good  man.) 

6.  They  were  taken    -         -     (for  brothers.) 

7.  "  I  hear  -        -        -         -     (for  certain,)  and  do  speak  the 

truth.''— Skak, 

8.  "  He   quivered   with    his 

feet,  and  lay        -        -     (for  dead.") — Dryden. 

9.  We  took  you  -        -        -     (for  the  President.) 

10.  "  Let  her  go   -         -         -     (for  an  ungrateful  woman.") 

11.  "I  took  this  note     -         -     (for  the  messenger)  of  love.'' 

DocTEiBTE. — To  place  for  at  the  beginning  of  nepoeclads  that 
describe  the  character  in  which  the  thing  mentioned  in  the  superior 
mono,  is  taken,  is  not  inconsistent  with  the  primary  import  of  this 
nepoeclide.    Primarily,  it  was   the  province   of  for  to  denote   the 


w 


160  CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLAlilr- 

vidual  face-wise.  From  this  particularity  in  the  character  of  the  approach- 
ing act,  for  has  come  to  convey  an  allusion  to  character.  Hence  for  has 
come  to  be  the  first  word  in  the  dads  which  mention  the  exact  cha- 

racter in  which  a  person,  or  a  thing  is  taken ;  as,  I  took  this  note  for  good 
money. 

That  is,  I  took  it  in  the  character  of  good  money.  Or  good  money  \s  the 
character  in  which  I  took  the  note. 

Had  the  primary  import  of  for  been  the  act  of  approaching  an  indivi- 
dual in  various  characters,  or  ways — or  had  this  word  been  applied  to  the 
act  of  approaching  without  any  particular  manner,  or  character  of  action, 
there  is  no  probability  thatthisrnepoeclidewould  now  be  employed  to  con- 
vey an  allusion  to  the  character  in  which  a  thing  is  taken  by  the  mind. 

::j:II.  Destination  E-dicatorv. 

12.  "  We  sailed  from  Boston  -         -  (for  Texas.") 

13.  "  We  sailed  from  Peru  -         -  ^for  China.") 
14*.  "  We  sailed  directly  -  -         -  (for  Genoa.") 

Doctrine.' — The  word,  China,  is  the  name  of  a  city,  a  place.  This 
word  without  for  conveys  no  idea  at  all  of  a  place  of  destination.  The 
abdictive  import  of  the  word,  Chinas  is  quite  different  from  the  condictive 
import  of  "for  ChinaJ'  "  China'*  signifies  a  city,  but  "/or  China,"  as  used 
above,  signifies  a  place  of  destination. 

The  word,  for,  primarily,  was  the  name  of  an  act  which  always  had  a 
destination;  for  he  who  was  forcing,  approaching  another  face-wise,  was 
bound  to  a  certain  port,  so  to  speak :  the  other  person  became  a  sort  of  place 
of  destination :  the  foring  person  was  constantly  making  for,  ot  forwards  to 
the  other  individual.  Besides,  the  formality  of  the  act  of  foring,  is  indi- 
cative of  some  fixed  purpose.  The  act  was  done  face-wise — face  toward 
face,  as  is  seen  in  the  cut. 

This  formal  act  would  naturally  raise  in  the  mind  of  him  who  was  fored, 
the  idea  of  a  fixed  purpose  in  him  who  was  foring.  The  act  of  foring,  then, 
was  connected  with  a  particular  place,  a  special  port,  and  with  a  fixed  pur- 
pose. And,  as  these  are  two  things  which  constitute  a  destination,  with 
what  marked  propriety  is  for  employed  to  convey  the  notion  of  destination  ? 
Design,  and  place  are  the  elements  of  destination. 

^Wy'  %ll-    CONDUCIVE-TO  E-DICATORY. 

15.  It  would  be       -         -        -         -  (for  his  health)  to  exer- 

cise. 

16.  To  be  just  is     -         -  -  -  (for  the  general  good.) 

17.  To  withdraw  would  be  -  -  (for  his  honour.) 

18.  It  would  be        -         -  -  -  (for  his  comfort)  to  re- 

tire. 
Doctrine. — Originally, /or  in  the  form  of  fore,  signified  the  act  of 
approaching  an  individual,  not  in  the  direction  of  his  side,  nor  in  the  direc- 
tion of  his  back,  but  in  liie  direction  of  his  face.     And,  as  the  face  is  a 
token  of  favour,  of  good,  for  has  come  to  be  used  where  the  clad 

thing  is  to  receive  some  good  from  the  act,  or  measure,  mentioned,  either 
before,  or  after  the  clad ;  as.  To  tell  the  truth  is /or  his  credit. 


■"U%- 


m 


p.'  :"■■" 

CONDICTION   OP    NEPOECLADS.  161 

^  .    That  is,  to  tell  the  truth  is  for  the  good  of  his  credit     Or,  the  telling  of 
""•'^the  truth  will  not  be  against,  but  va.  favour  of  his  credit. 

1'hat  the  face  is  employed  as  an  emblem  of  good,  of  favour^  is  obvious 
from  the  following  instances  ; 

1.  *'  Hide  not  thy  /ace  from  thy  servant  because  he  is  in 

great  trouble." 

2.  "  Wilt  thou  for  ever  cast  us  off, 

And  still  neglect  our  cries  ? 
Why  should  we  seem  like  men  abhorred, 
Or  banished  from  thy/«ce.^"  (from  \hy  favour^ 
It  was  the /ace  that  conducted  him  who  fored,  to  him  who  was  fored.  The 
act  oiforingy  then,  had  much  to  do  with  the/zee  ,•  and  the/ace  has  much  to  do 
with  \he  favour,  good — much  to  do  with  the  idea  oi promoting  the  object  for 
which  one  approaches,  or  fors  another.  For  if  I  approach  an  individual  foraid, 
and  he  turns  his /tee  from  me,  the  conclusion  must  be  that  the  attempt  at  pro- 
curing aid  from  him,  will  be  fruitless.     The  moment  his  face  is  turned  from 
me,  the  idea  is  indicated  that  my  approaching  him  for  favour,  will  not  be 
conducive  to  the  object  for  which  I  approached  him.     The  face,  too,  has 
much  to  do  in  giving,  and  denying  favour  by  its  clear  expressions  either  for, 
or  against  the  appeal.     The  face,  however,  is  never  used  as  an  emblem  of 
ill,  of  negation — it  is  indicative  of  good,  of  favour,  in  all  instances  where 
it  is  employed.     And,  as  the  act  of  foring  leads  to  this  emblem  of  goody 
so  the  word,  for,  has  come  to  be  used  as  the  sign  that  the  act,  or  measure, 
mentioned  in  connection  with  the  agnomeclad  thing,  will  lead  to  the  ^ooc?, 
,  to  the  favour,  of  this  thmg ;  as,  it  is  for  the  cause  of  general  education  to 
establish  public  schools. 

Foring  leads  a  person  to  the /ace — the /ace  is  a  prominent  token,  or  em- 
blem of  favour,  of  ^oot^^^hence  for  has  come  to  convey  the  idea  of  one 
thing's  conducing  to  the  good  of  another. 

II.  Negation  E-dicatory. 

19.  "He  is  able  to  walk  -         -        -  (for  aught)  Ihnoioy 
That  is,  nothing  which  I  know  is  a  negation  of  the  idea  that  he  can  walk. 

'20.  (For  aught)  25  ^enera% 

^  known,  John  Boston  is  honest. 

5       21.  "  The  President  is  in  the  city      -  (for  aught)  is  known.^* 

II.  Benefit  E-dicatory. 

22.  I  write      -         -         -         -         -  (for  Mr.  Adams.) 

Docthisi. — The  face  is  often  alluded  to  in  the  scripture,  as  a  token  of 
favour.  And,  as  for  was  the  name  of  the  act  of  approaching,  which  is 
closely  connected  with  the /ace  of  each  person,  for,  like  the  face  itself,  has 
come  to  convey  an  idea  of  favour.  From  conveying  an  allusion  U)  favour 
it  has  naturally  come  to  make  an  allusion  to  benefit.    It  was  done /or  me. 

That  is,  for  my  benefit.  j^^, 


162 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 


If  you  will  not  go  for  him,  you  will  certainly  go  for  your- 

self' 
That  is,  if  you  will  not  go  for  his  benefit,  you  will  certainly  go  for  the 
benefit  of  yourself, 

23.  He  works  -        -        -        -  (for  his  brother.) 

24.  "  For  he  loveth  our  nation  ;  and  he 
hath  built  a  synagogue 

25.  Will  you  carry  this  note     - 

26.  "  I  will  go  to  Boston 


lars:' 


(for  us.") 
[for  me  ?) 
(for  you)  for  ten  doU 


27 


*II.  In  Fatour-op  E-dicatory. 

III.  Support  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 

-  (for  this  course)  ©/"con- 


-  (for    this    distinction) 


29. 
30. 


Is  there  a  good  reason 

duct? 
Is  there  a  good. cause 

among  men? 
"  But  this  argument  does  not  make  (for  the  defendant.'*) 
"  There  is  a  natural,  immutable, 

and  eternal  reason  -         -  (for  that  ,  )  which  we 

call  virtue^''''  and  against  that  which  tve  call  vice. 

Doctrine. — The  ideais  that  the  reason  here  mentionedj^br*,  approaches^ 
comes  up  to  virtue,  much  as  one  person  was  said  to  for  another.  And  the 
reason  /ws  virtue,  presses  up  to  virtue,  to  support  virtue — hence  the  idea  of 
tn  favour  of. 

The  act  of  faring  from  its  very  nature  placed  face  opposite  to  face.  Il 
was  an  act  the  manner  of  which  was  controlled  entirely  by  faces.  Hence 
for,  the  very  name  of  this  act,  has  come  to  be  used  as  the  face  itself  is  fre- 
quently used,  as  a  sign  of  favour.  "  Hide  not  thy  face  from  thy  servant 
because  he  is  in  great  trouble." 

Faring  is  a  face  action — the  face  is  a  token  of  favour — hence  the  namo 
of  this /ace  act,  has  come  to  be  employed  much  as  the  face  itself. 

*  III.  Partial  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 


31.  I  am         - 

32.  He  was     - 

vernment.) 

33.  Is  he 

narchy  ? 

34.  "Aristotle is      -         -         - 

35.  In  this  country,  every  man  is 

36.  and  all 


-  (for  a  free  trade.) 

-  (for  a  republican  go- 

-  (for    a    limited     mo- 

-  /for  poetical  justice.") 

-  (for  himself,) 

-  (for  the  government.) 


i 


COBTDICTION    OP    NiE?OECLADS.  163 

ij:.  f .  *  II.  Purpose  E-dicatory. 

*  III.  Benefit  Ex-e-dic-a-tory, 

37.  Was  this  instrument  made  -         -  (for  James?) 

38.  Were  men  born  -         -        -  (for  kings,) 

39.  as  beasts  are      -         -         -         -  (for  men  ?) 
DocTHiNE. — The  idea  of  purpose  is  quite  naturally  derived  from  the  ac 

of  foring.     The  act  itself  b  indicative  of  purpose. 

t  III.  Procurative  Ex-e-dic-a-tory 

40.  I  went (for  my  book.) 

41.  He  is  ever  waiting     -         -         -  (for     some     expected 

good.) 

42.  "  I  am  looking  -        -        -        -  (for  my  brother)  "every 

day:' 

43.  I  apply  to  this  court  -         -  -  (for  redress,) 

44.  and  ------  (for  protection.) 

45.  He  was  sent  to  me     -         -  -  (for  money.) 

46.  "  He  wrote        -         -         -  -  (for  money.") 

47.  Men  generally  write  -         -  -  (for  fame.) 

48.  I  am  ready         -         -         -  -  (for  you.) 

49.  I  have  prepared  -         ,  -  (for  you.) 

50.  He  is  now  in  search  -         -  -  (for  arguments.) 

51.  Let  him  recur  to  antiquity  -  -  (for  examples.) 

ijiIII.   Use-of  Ex^e-dic-a-tory. 

62.  Hats  are  made  -  -  -  -  (for  the  head.) 

53.  This  coat  is       -  -  -  -  (for  John  Boston.) 

54.  This  glass  is      -  -  -  -  (for  that  room.) 

55.  This  knife  is  good  -  -  -  (for  pens.) 

56.  That  knife  is  good  -  -  -  (for  nothing.l 

57.  The  osier  is  good  -  -  -  (for  twigs,) 

58.  and  the  poplar  -  -  -  -  (for  the  mill.) 

59.  **  It  is  not  -----  (for  me)  to  control  the 

sea:' 
That  is,  this  use  of  me,  so  to  speak,  is  not  the  purpose  for  which  I  was 
intended. 

II.  Lot  E-dicatory. 

60.  It  was  reserved  -        -        -        -  (for  America)  to  leaa 

the  world  to  democracy. 
That  is,  it  was  the  part,  fate,  or  division,  which  fell  to  America  as  her  let 

61.  It  was  not  -         -         -         -  (for  Adam)    to    with- 

stand the  temptation  of  the  forbidden  tree. 


164  CONDIGTION    OP    NEPOECLADS. 

62.  It  was       -         -         -        -        -  (for  Christ)  to  redeem 

the  lost  race. 

63.  It  is  not (for  me)  to  dictate  to 

you,  gentlemen. 

64.  It  is  not    -        -        -        -         -  (for  him)  to  control  the 

seas, 

II.  Auxiliary  E-dicatory. 

65.  *'  Moral  consideration  can  no  way 

move  the  sensible  appetite,  was 

it  not (for  the  will.") 

That  is,  did  not  the  will  for,  or  come  up  to  the  aid  of  moral  considera- 
tion, moral  consideration  could  not  move  the  sensible  appetite. 

In  some  instances,  for  exerts  its  influence  over  the  nepoeclad  thing ; 
an4  in  others,  over  the        trone        or  the      ^o-ec/a<^  thing : 

1.  Henry  cried  out  for  anguish. 

2.  He  gave  a  dollar  for  the  book. 

In  the  first,  ybr  renders  the  anguish  the  cause  of  the  crying  out.  In  the 
second,  for  exerts  no  influence  over  the  book,  the  clad  thing,  but 

exhausts  its  influence  upon  the  dollar,  a  trone  thing,  in  causing  it  to 
stand  against  the  book  in  value. 

In  the  instance,  "for  the  will,"  for  exerts  its  powers  upon  the  Wi  11  in 
bringing  it  up  to  the  aid  of  the  will  in  moving  the  sensible  appetite.  The 
will  fors  the  appetite  to  bestow  a  help,  a  good,  a  favour,  upon  it  in  aiding 
it  in  the  work  of  moving  the  appetite. 

66.  He  could  not  pay  his  debts,  was 

it  not    -         -         -         -  (for  his  friends.) 

That  is,  he  could  not  pay  his  debts  did  not  his  friends /or  him,  and  favoui 
him  with  their  aid. 

67.  I  should  go  was  it  not  -         -  (for  my  brothers.) 
That  is,  was  it  not  that  my  brothers  press  up  to  me,  or  for  me  with  their 

aid  in  helping  me  not  to  go.  (This  mono,  however,  except  in  form, 
belongs  to  the  prevestiok  Edicatort.) 

II.  Causative  dicatory. 

68.  "He  cried  out  -         -         -         -  (for  anguish.") 

69.  He  cannot  pay  -         -  .      -         -  (for     the     want)     of 

means. 

70.  ("  For  this  reason)  I 
cannot  believe  the  report." 

71.  "  With  fiery  eyes  sparkling         -  (for  very  wrath.") 

72.  "  That  which  we       -         -         -  (for  our  unworthiness,) 

are  afraid 

73.  to  crave,  our  prayer  is  that  Grod  -  (for  the  worthiness)  of 

his  Son  would  vouchsafe  to  grant." 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS.  165 

74.  The  inhabitants  suffered      -         -  (fof  provisions,) 

75.  and -  (for  wood.) 

Doctrine. — The  act  of  faring  seems  well  calculated  to  raise  the  idea 

of  a  cause.  The  act  is  a  formal  one :  face  against  face,  as  in  the  cut. 
This  formal  act  would  hardly  be  performed  without  some  certain  cause  to 
produce  it.  Nor  is  it  at  all  likely  that  the  person  fored,  could  witness  this 
formal  approach  without  some  mental  inquiry  into  the  cause  of  the  event. 
From  having  been  the  name,  the  sign,  of  an  act  which  is  replete  with  cause, 
for  has  come  to  begin  some  nepoeclads  which  are  founded  upon  the 
cause ;  as,  "  The  man  was  hanged  fur  the  crhne  of  murder,"  John  was 
afraid  fur  to  return. 

76.  He  was  afraid    -         -         -         -  (for  to  meet  his  oppo- 

nent.) 
"  To  meet  his  opponent,"  is  the  cause  of  the  fear,  and  is  taken  as  a  cor 
mified  gemimono. 

II.  Passing-through  E-dicatory. 

77.  "  Henry  travelled       .         -         -  (for   three   hours)    to- 

gethery 

78.  They  hold  their  offices        -         -  (for  life.) 

79.  "  They  rode      -         -         -         -  (for  miles  together.") 

80.  His   nod  has  decided  all  causes 

in  Sicily       -        -        -        -  (for  these  three  years.) 

Doctrine. — The  im^port  of  the  distinctive  word  which  is  com- 
pounded of  passing,  and  through,  is  aptly  derived  from  the  action 
of  which  for,  or  fore,  was  primarily  the  name,  or  sign.  To  for, 
was  to  pass  from  the  place  of  departure  through  all  that  space 
which  fell  between  the  foring,  and  the  fored  person.  Hence  for 
has  come  to  mean  passing  through  the  entire  time,  or  the  whole 
space  in  distance,  mentioned  in  the  nepoeclad.  For  denoted 
passing  ;  nay  more,  it  signified  passing  through.  To  for  an  indi- 
vidual, was  to  pass  through  all  the  space  which  lay  between  him 
who  was  to  for,  and  him  who  was  to  be  fored.  For  demanded 
the  performance  of  the  entire,  the  who.le  act. 

Remark. — For  is  the  only  nepoeclide  which  can  be  conjected  to 
a  demimono.  And  where  it  is  so  conjected,  the  whole  is  taken 
as  one  mono:  and  the  demimono  part  is  the  corm  to  which /or  is 
conjected ;  as.  He  went  to  Boston  for  to  see  his  friends. 

In  such  instances,  the  whole  mono  is  a  nepoeclad,  having  is 
clear  a  condictive  character  as  any  other  mono  which  begins  with 
for.  Generally,  however,  this  kind  of  nepoeclad  is  of  the  Pur- 
pose Edicatort,  and  Procurative  Exedicatory ,-  as,  "What  went 
ye  out  for  to  see.  P" 

2.  For  is  often  a  nepoecled;  as,  He  was  called  for. 


166  CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS. 

Class  the  following   nepoeclads  which  begin  with/or. 

1.  "  It  is  for  us  to  show  that  our  religion,  is  the  religion  of 

theBible." 

2.  "  There  are  tearsybr  his  love,  joy  for  his  fortune,  honour 

for  his  valour,  and  death /or  his  ambitionJ'^ 

3.  "As  I  slew  my  best  lover  for   the   good  of  Rome,   1 

reserve  the  same  dagger  for  myself  whenever  Rome 

demands  my  death." 
i.  .*'  Now,  for  so  many  glorious  actions  done, 

For  peace  at  home,  and/br  the  public  wealth, 

I  mean  to  crown  a  bowl /or  Csesar^s  health,^^ 
h.  *'  He  digged  a  place /or  the  wine-vat.'''' 

6.  "A  motion  was  made  (for  an  order)  (for  a  writ,)  (for 
the  election)  of  a  burgess  (for  to  serve  ,  ,  ^  in  parliament 
(for  the  borough)  of  Old  Sarum." 

7.  Will  you  work  (for  me)  (for  sixdays)  (for  two  dollars) 

(for  each  day  ?) 

8.  I  have  a  hat  (for  each  man.) 


Illustration   of  the  condic-  Qf.    Source, — {from,  off.) 

tionofthe     nepoeclads  which          I.   SoUFCitive      Ru-dica. 
begin  with  of.  II    Material  E-dicatory. 

1.  "  This  cloth  is  made  -         -        -  (of  good  wool.") 

DocTRiifE. — Of  denotes  that  the  following  thing 
is  the  source  "of  the  preceding  one.  It  is  thought  to 
be  a  contraction  of  off,  with  which  in  one  respect  it 
is  nearly  synonymous.     "  The  fruit  of  the  vine." 

That  is,  the  fruit  which  has  sprung  off  from  the 
vine.  The  word,  of,  seems  not  only  to  inherit  the 
significant  character  of  its  parent,  off  but  to  possess 
also  a  sourciiive  one  for  which  it  is  indebted  not  to  off, 
but  to  the  power  of  custom.  The  truth  is  that  men 
saw  the  convenience  of  having  a  word  in  our  language,  which  would  ex- 
press, not  onlj^  the  idea  of  one  thing  coming  from  another  thing,  but  that  it 
comes  from  the  other  thing  as  its  source.  Off  denotes  the  idea  of  depart- 
ure, but  not  that  of  source — and  to  furnish  this  word,  they  have  dropped 
one /in  off,  which  makes  of.  And  to  give  (/its  import,  they  have  retained 
the  import  of  off,  and  added  that  of  source.  The  figure  which  has  been 
selected  to  represent  this  word  (o/)  is  the  sun,  the  great  source  of  light, 
heat,  &c.  &c. 

Of  imports  source — and  as  the  sun  is  the  source  of  so  much,  the  sun  ia 
presented  as  the  general  meaning  of  of. 

This  cloth  is  made  of  good  wool. 


CONDIGTION    OP    NEPOECLADS.  167 

Ofy  here  means  source,  and  is  used  to  show  that  the  wool,  called  good,  is 
the  source  o^from  which  the  cloth  sprung.  This  cloth  is  made,  taken  off 
from  good  wool.  Now,  as  light,  and  heat,  spring  off  from  the  sun,  so  does 
the  cloth  spring  off  from  the  wool.     Attend  to  the  following  remark : 

As  the  sun  is  the  source  of  light,  and  heat,  so  is  the  thing,  mentioned 
AFTER  of,  the  source  of  something  mentioned  before  of. 

2.  This  hat  is  made         -         -         -  (of  fine  fur.) 

3.  This  is  a  man    -         -         -         -  (of  genius.) 

That  is,  his  mind  has  been  derived  principally  from  genius.  Or,  genius 
is  the  source  whence  his  mind,  or  his  powers  of  mind,  have  been  formed, 
constructed,  made.  The  word,  man,  as  here  used,  does  not  include  the 
person,  the  body,  of  the  individual — it  includes  the  mind  only.  It  is  an 
instance  in  which  the  luhole  is  put  for  a  part.  It  is  a  synecdoche — a  com- 
mon figure  in  which  a  part  only  may  be  put  for  the  whole,  or  the  tvJiole 
for  a  part. 

It  is  held  by  the  old  school  grammarians,  that  the  leading  idea  of  this 
mono,  is  that  of  possession.  From  a  slight  examination,  this  notion  seems 
plausible  enough. 

"  This  is  a  man  of  genius." 

Well,  say  they,  if  he  is  a  man  of  genius,  he  must  possess  genius.  This 
mode  of  reasoning,  however,  would  lead  to  very  absurd  results  ;  for  every 
thing  which  is  formed  out  of  materials,  must  be  in  possession  of  the  mate- 
rials from  which  it  is  made.  Hence  the  mono,  "  of  leather,"  in  the  follow- 
ing period,  is  possessive  in  its  condiction  : 

"These  shoes  are  made  of  leather." 

That  the  shoes  which  are  made  from  leather,  possess  leather,  cannot  be 
questioned  for  one  moment.  But  it  may  well  be  questioned  at  all  times, 
whether  the  notion  of  possession,  is  the  expressed  idea  in  the  mono  which 
mentions  the  material  ftom  which  the  thing  is  made,  is  derived,  by  the 
maker. 

"The  shoe  is  made  o/* /eaf/ier." 
The  expressed  idea  is  that  the  leather  is  the  material  put 'of  which  the 
shoe  is  derived.     The  inferred  idea  is  that  the  shoe  possesses  the  leather. 
This  is  a  natural  result — who  does  not  know  that  that  shoe  which  is  con- 
structed out  of  leather,  has  leather  in,  and  about  it  ?  The  kind  of  possession, 
however,  which  is  here  inferred  by  the  mind,  is  not  legitimate  possession. 
To  render  the  possession  legitimate,  the  shoe  should  be  formed,  and  exist 
independent  of  the  leather  which,  the  old  school  grammarians  say,  the  shoe 
possesses.      Legitimate  possession  of  leather  by  a  shoe,  does  not  require 
that  the  shoe  should  be  formed  out  of  leather ;  it  may  be  made  of  cloth,  of 
silk,  of  paper.     The  shoe  must  be  made  before  it  can  begin  to  possess 
leather,  or  any  other  thing.     Hence  it  may  be  made  of  cloth,  and 
possess  leather,  just  as  quickly,  just  as  soon,  as  it  would  was  it  con- 
structed from  leather.    If  the  shoe  is  made  of  cloth,  it  will  pos- 
sess leather  as  soon  as  leather  is  put  into  its  possession ;  and,  if 
it  is  made  of  leather  it  will  not  possess  leather  till  leather  is  put 
into  its  possession.     A  thing  cannot  be  said  to  possess  that  of 


168  CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 

which  it  is  made  I     To  give  a  sl\de  iegitimate  possession  of  leather, 

a  piece  of  leather  must,  in  some  way  or  other,  be  placed  within 

the  shoe.     This,  however,  cannot  be  done  till  the  shoe  exists — 

,  hence  a  paper  shoe  may  possess  leaf  her  as  well  as  a  leather  shoe ! 

Again,  does  it  seem  likely  that  the  word,  of,  has  been  formed  from  q^to 
xnAtk  possession  ?  Has  it  ever  been  known  that  off,  the  parent  of  of,  con- 
veys any  allusion  to  possession  ?  The  truth  is  that  the  mind,  in  matters 
of  words,  not  unfrequently  performs  a  sort  of  legerdemain  operation  upon 
itself:  from  the  ease  with  which  it  comprehends  the  inferred  idea,  it  adopts 
the  inferred  one  for  the  expressed.  The  mind  generally  cheats  itself  in 
this  way  in  instances  in  which  the  inferred  idea  is  not  inconsistent  with  the 
general  notion  of  the  sentence ;  and  the  expressed  one  is  more  difficult  to 
apprehend.  To  prevent  this  fraud  of  the  mind  upon  itself,  the  reader  should 
give  his  sole  attention  to  the  expressed  idea.  It  is  not  difficult  to  see  in 
what  way  the  old  school  syntaxists  have  come  to  the  conclusion  that  the 
nepoeclad  in  the  following  poetrone  has  a.  possessive  import  hy  expres- 
sion: 

*'  This  is  a  man  of  genius^ 
They  have  unwittingly  neglected  the  expressed  idea,  because  no  ahso- 
lute  harm  could  result  to  the  general  idea,  from  substituting  the  inferred 
one  for  the  expressed  one.  The  expressed  idea  is  that  genius  is  the  source^ 
so  far  as  the  material  constitutes  the  source,  of  the  mind.  Not  that  the 
minid  is  all  genius,  but  that  more  of  this  rare  material,  of  this  scarce  ingre- 
dient, has  been  used  than  is  generally  employed  in  forming  minds.  Is  the 
shoe  that  is  said  to  be  mside of  leather,  all  leather]  Certainly  not— it  is 
made  up  of  thread,  pegs,  cloth,  and  leather.  The  main  material,  however, 
is  leather — hence  we  say  the  ^hoe  is  made  of  leather  ,•  or,  the  shoe  is  a 
leather  shoe.  . 

Before  of  had  been  formed,  men  must  have  felt  the  necessity  of  having  a 
word  with  which  to  begin  those  nepoeclads  that  mention  the  material  out  of 
which  the  thing,  named  in  the  trone,  and  in  the  poeclad,  is  made. 
In  providing  such  a  word,  they  fell  upon  off  as  the  material  out  of  which 
to  form  it.  They  must  have  selected  off  as  the  material  for  of,  for  two  rea- 
sons. First,  q^  required  but  little  alteration  to  render  it  suitable  inform — 
the  omission  of  one  /.  But  secondly,  and  mainly,  they  selected  off  from 
which,  to  form  such  a  word,  because  off  had  a  meaning  which  they  desired 
the  new  word  to  have.  And  of,  like  off,  in  all  instances,  denotes  the  idea 
of  springing  from,  coming  from.  To  this  idea  of  from,  men  conjoined  that 
of  source  ,•  hence  of  was  made  such  a  word  as  men  saw  was  necessary  in 
the  expression  of  thoughts  concerning  that  source  from  which  things  are 
formed,  or  derived.  Of,  then,  signifies  that  the  thing  mentioned  in  the 
clad  which  of  begins,  is  in  some  way,  in  some  sense,  or  other,  the 
source  of  the  thing  mentioned  in  the  superior  mono, 
4.  "  He  is  a  man  -  -  -  -  (of  decayed  fortune.") 
That  is,  he  is  a  man,  so  far  aishis  condition  is  concerned,  of  a.  new  crea- 
tion. From  whose  hands  has  lie  now  falUen  1  From  those  of  a  decayed 
fortune.  In  condition,  he  is  a  new  creature — and,  with  propriety  may  it 
be  said,  that  he  is  the  son,  the  offspring,  of  a  decayed  fortune. 

He  is  a  man  whose  condition  is  that  of  a  decayed  fortune. 


CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS.  X69 

That  is,  ^yhose  condition  is  that  condition  which  has  proceeded  from  a 
decayed  fortune ;  or  which  has  been  formed  out  of  a  decayed  fortune  somei- 
what  as  a  shoe  is  formed  out  of  leather.  In  other  words,  the  decayed  fortune 
is  the  material  out  of  which  the  condition  is  formed,  much  in  the  same  way 
in  which  the  leather  is  the  material  out  of  which  the  shoe  is  formed.  The 
expression  is  a  figure  in  which  the  man  himself  is  put  for  his  condition. 
It  is  what  the  old  school  men  call  a  metonymy ;  and  what  the  new  deno- 
minate, a  gnomologue. 

A  metonymy  is  a  figure  which  mentions  one  thing 

with  a  view  to  point  out  another  with  which  it  has  an  index  relailon.  The 
man  is  mentioned  as  an  index  to  his  condition.  "  He  is  a  man  of  decayed 
fortune." 

That  is,  he  is  a  man  whose  condition  is  one  of  decayed  fortune.  Who 
cannot  see  this?  The  writer  is  not  speaking  of  the  man,  but  of  the  man's 
condition — and  he  informs  us  that  his  condition  is  that  which  is  made  up 
of  a  decayed  fortune. 

-  5.  "  John  Brown  is  a  man      -         -  (of,  straw.") 

If  the  old  school  men  are  correct,  the  idea  here  is  that  John  Brown  pos^ 
sesses  straw !  But,  if  the  new  are  correct,  the  idea  is  that  he  is  made  of 
materials  which  are  about  as  efficient  in  the  production  of  a  man,  as  is  the 
straw  of  which  human  scarecrows,  sometimes  placed  in  fields  of  corn,  are 
constructed  by  farmers.  To  show  that  a  shoe  is  not  good,  we  may  show 
the  materials  of  which  it  is  made  ;  so  to  indicate  that  a  man  is  not  efficient, 
we  may  show  the  materials  of  which  he  has  been  made :  he  is  a  man  of 
straw. 

Then  again,  to  indicate  that  a  man  is  a  man,  we  may  mention  the  mate- 
rials out  of  which  he  is  formed :  he  is  a  man  of  genius,  and  judgment.  That 
is,  a  man  whose  mind  has  been  constructed  out  of  the  very  best  materials. 

6.  "He  is  a  man    -         -         -         -  (of     an    unblemished 

character.") 
This,  too,  is     metonymy :  the  man  is  mentioned  in  order  to  arrive  at 
his  reputation.     He  is  a  man  of  an  unblemished  character.     That  is,  he 
is  a  man  whose  character  is  formed  out  of  an  unblemished  character. 
Every  man's  character  is  not  made  out  of  such  good  stuff. 

7.  "  The  wickedness      -         -         -  (of  the   human   heart) 

is  obvious." 
Here,  by  the  human  heart,  is  meant  the  leading  passion  of  the  human 
heart.     Hence  the  idea  is  that  wickedness  is  the  material  of  which  this 
passion  is  made,  or  formed. 

8.  "  They  are        -         -         -         -  (of  this  opinion.") 
TTiey,  here,  means  thdr  doctrine,  their  belief  their  sentiment.     Hence 

the  idea  ia  that  this  opinion  is  the  material  out  of  which  their  sentiment  is 
formed. 

9.  "  If  he  found  any       -    is  *         -  (of  that  way.") 


170  CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 

That  is,  if  he  found  any  person  whose  religious  doctrine  was  made,  or 
formed,  out  of  that  way.  That  is,  out  of  that  way,  Or  system,  which  Jesus 
Christ  revealed  to  man. 

10.  He  has  a  knowledge  -         -  (of  man.) 

That  is,  man  is  the  material  frftm  which  this  knowledge  is  formed.  But 
the  word,  man,  as  here  used,  does  not  mean  the  human  race — it  means  the 
nature  of  this  race.  Hence  the  true  idea  may  be  better  seen  from  the  fol- 
lowing : 

He  has  a  knowledge  of  the  nature  of  man. 

That  is,  the  nature  of  man  is  the  material  from  which  the  knowledge  in 
question  is  derived.  Some  how  or  other,  the  nature  is  worked  up  into  ideas ; 
and  these  are  knowledge.  But  is  the  nature  worked  up  into  ideas  as  leather 
is  worked  up  into  shoes  1  O,  no  ! — nor  is  this  particular  method  of  work- 
ing the  nature  up  into  ideas,  necessary  to  render  the  nature  a  material. 
The  mind,  some  how,  or  other,  extracts,  draws,  the  nature  of  man  from  man, 
into  itself,  and  constructs,  by  its  own  operation  upon  this  nature,  such  ideas 
out  of  it,  as  are  denominated  knowledge.  Say  for  instance,  that  one  of  the 
ideas  which  are  denominated  a  knowledge  of  the  nature  of  man,  is  that  the 
human  heart  is  prone  to  evil.  Now  th.\& proneness  must  be  the  very  mate- 
rial from  which  this  idea  is  formed.        \,        ' 

11.  "The  foundations  were  made      -  (of  precious  stones.") 

12.  *'  The  first  foundation  was  -  (of  jasper.") 

13.  "  The  second         ,         was         -  (of  sapphire.") 

14.  "  Does  he  faithfully  discharge  the 

duties    -         -         -         -         -  (of  his  office  ?") 
His  entire  office  is  cut  up  into  parts,  and  thus  made  into  different  duties. 
Each  part  is  the  material  from  which  a  distinct  duty  is  formed. 

15.  "The  state        -         -         -         -  (of  moral  purity)  is  a 

happy  condition.'*^ 

That  is,  the  state,  the  condition,  which  is  made  from  the  material,  called 
moral  purity,  is  a  happy  state. 

16.  "  This  lad  goes  by  the  name    ,  -  (of  John.") 

That  is,  he  goes  by  that  name  which  is  made  out  of  the  material,  John. 
Or,  the  word,  John,  is  the  material  out  of  which  the  name  by  which  this 
lad  goes,  is  made. 

17.  A  binominal  root  is  composed  -  (of  two  parts.) 

18.  "They  platted  a  crown      -  -  (of  thorns.") 

19.  I  saw  a  sea         -         -         -  -  (of  glass.) 

20.  "  They  made  clay      -         -  -  (of  the  spittle.") 

21.  "Ye  are   -         -         -,         -  -  (of  this  world.") 
That  is,  your  leading  character  is  sl  composition  of  worldly  materials. 

22.  He  has  a  singular  kind         -  -  (of  nose.) 

A  kind  is  a  class,  made  up  of  individuals,  having  the  same  charactenstics. 


'  CONDICTION    OP    NEPOEGLADS.  171 

Hence  these  individuals  are  the  source  of  the  kind — the  source,  inasmuch 
as  they  are  the  materials  out  of  which  the  kind  is  made,  or  formed. 

23.  Give  me  a  loaf-         -         -         -   (of  bread.) 

That  is,  a  loaf  which  is  made  out  of  the  material  that  is  called  bread. 

24.  James  got  a  loaf         -         -         -  (of  sugar.) 
This  loaf  it  seems  is  made,  riot  out  of  bread,  but  out  of  sugar. 

25.  Give  me  a  pound       -         -         -  (of  tea.) 

Give  me  a  pound — but  from  what  shall  this  pound  be  derived  ?  What 
material  shall  be  used  in  forming,  in  making,  this  pound  ]  tea.  The 
pound,  then,  shall  be  made  out  of  tea. 

26.  "  I  saw  the  body         -         -         -  (of  Samuel  Jones.") 
From  what  material  was  this  body  made,  which  I  saw  1  from  the  human 

matter,  called  Samuel  Jones.  Samuel  Jones,  then,  is  the  source  of  this  body, 
by  being  the  material  of  which  the  body  was  formed,  or  made. 

27.  *' I  live  in  the  city      -         -         -  (of  Philadelphia.") 

"  Live  in  what  city  ]"  I  will  answer  your  question  by  telling  you  the  mor 
terial  out  of  which  the  city  is  made :  I  live  in  the  city  of  Philadelphia. 
That  is,  the  city  in  which  I  live  is  that  city  which  springs  off  from,  or  out 
of,  that  place  which  is  called  Philadelphia. 

28.  Henry  lives  in  a  house        -         -  (of  stone.) 

Lives  in  what  house  1  Let  this  question  be  answered  by  naming  the 
materials  of  which  the  house  is  constructed.  "  Henry  lives  in  a  house  of 
stoner 

29.  "Language  is  the  principal  vehicle  (of  thought.") 

GooLD  Brown's  Grammar. 

The  impropriety  with  which  this  sentence  is  marred  by  an  improper  use 
of  of,  has  lead  to  its  introduction  in  this  place.  It  has  been  said  that  in 
matters  of  words,  the  mind  not  unfrequently  cheats  itself  by  unwittingly 
substituting  the  inferred  meaning  of  a  sentence,  for  the  expressed  one.  This 
instance  by  Mr.  Goold  Brown,  is  well  calculated  to  sustain  this  position. 
Men,  in  general,  upon  reading  this  sentence,  would  disregard  the  expressed 
idea  of  it,  and,  from  the  nature  of  the  subject*  fix  upon  an  inferred  one. 
The  inferred  idea  is  that  language  is  a  vehicle  which  ^is  employed  for  the 
purpose  of  communicating  thoughts.  The  expressed  idea,  however,  is 
that  language  is  a  vehicle  which  is  made  out  of  thought,  much  as  a  cartt 
or  any  other  vehicle  is  made  out  of  wood,  and  iron. 

1.  "Language  is  a  reMcZe  q/'f/ww^g'^^" 

2.  A  river  is  a    -     stream  of  fresh  water,  &c. 

Does  the  mono,  of  fresh  water,  indicate  the  purpose  of  the  stream  ?  O, 
no — this  mono  tells  of  what  the  stream  is  made :  a  river  is  a  stream  oi  fresh 
water.  A  river  is  a  stream — a  stream  of  what  1  That  is,  what  matter  is 
it  of  which  thb  stream  is  formed  1     Is  the  stream  made  ot  brandy  ?    No. 


172  CONDICTION   OF   NEPOECitADS^ 

Is  it  made  of  cider  ?  Ko.  Is  it  made  of  wine  ?  No.  Is  it  made  of  liquid 
metal?  No.     The  stream  is  made  of  fresh  water. 

1.  *'  Language  is  a  vehicle  of  thought.'^ 

2.  A  river  is  a  stream  of  fresh  water,  &c. 
Will  the  reader  examine  these  two  gnomods  in  juxtaposition  ? 

A  stream  is  something  which  must  be  made  out  of  some  material — hence, 
"  of  fresh  water"  is  subjoined,  to  show  the  material  of  which  this  stream 
is  made. 

A  vehicle,  too,  is  a  thing  which  must  be  made  out  of  some  material — 
and,  as  "o/  thought"  is  subjoined  to  vehicle,  in  the  same  way  in  which 
*'  of  fresh  water"  is  subjoined  to  stream,  is  it  not  as  obvious  that  the 
thought  is  presented  as  the  material  out  of  which  the  vehicle  is  constructed, 
as  it  is  that  the  fresh  water  is  presented  as  the  matter,  or  material  from 
which  the  stream  is  formed  i 

This  is  iliid  first  sentence  in  the  preface  of  Mr.  Goold  Brown's  compila- 
tion on  English  grammar,  which  he  calls  "His  Finished  Labouus." 
But  Ihis  is  not  the  only  instance  of  an  author's  having ^msZterf  his  labours 
before  his  task  of  qualification  had  been  half  completed  !  Of  is  rarely 
used  in  that  clad  which  is  founded  upon  a  purpose.     In  speaking 

of  the  purpose  of  a  building,  one  would  hardly  say,  A  house  of  corn  t  He, 
who  had  not  been  led  astray  by  Mr.  G.  B.'s  Grammar,  would  say,  A  house 
for  corn.  Nor  would  any  one,  not  taught  by  Mr.  G.  B.'s  "  Finished  La- 
bours," be  Hkely  to  use  of  in  speaking  of  the  purpose  of  an  instrument; 
as.  This  is  a  knife  of  carving !  He  would  probably  say.  This  is  a  knife 
for  carving — Or,  this  is  a  carving\ni^e.  Now,  language,  like  a  knife,  is 
an  instrument,  and,  in  speaking  of  it  in  reference  to  its  use,  for  must  begin 
the  clad ;    as,  Language  is  a  vehicle  for  the  communication  of 

thoughts. 

But  in  speaking  of  this  instrument  in  reference  to  the  materials  of 
which  it  is  made,  of  must  begin  the  clad ;  as.  Language  is  a  vehicle 

of  articulate  sounds,  and  alphabetic  characters.  Or,  language  is  a  vehicle 
of  signs. 

30.  Where  did  he  get  this  amount     -  (of  cash  ?)  ",; 
By  being  the  material  out  of  which  the  amount  is  made,  the  cash  is  the 

source  of  the  amount.  An  amount  derived,  made  from,  what  1  Is  the 
amount  formed,  derived,  from  wood,  from  hai/,  from  butter,  from  paper,  or 
from  money  ?  from  money.  An  amount,  a  number,  a  company,  a  family, 
&c.  are  things  which  must  be  made  from  some  kind  of  materials — and, 
when  we  speak  of  these  things  in  reference  to  the  materials  of  which  they 
are  formed,  the  clad  begins  with  of.     Of  is  the  great,  the  distin- 

guished, source-alluding  steroclade  in  the  English  phrenod.  The  amount^ 
the  nuinher,  the  family,  is  the  thing,  made,  is  the  piece  of  mechanism, 
formed ;  and  the  clad  which  follows,  is  employed  to  mention  the 

material,  used  in  the  formation  of  this  thing. 

31.  There  is  a  number      -         -         -  (of  men)  Afire. 

32.  There  was  a  family   -         -         -  (of  five  persons.) 

33.  There  was  a  convention      -         -  (of  Pennsylvanians.) 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLAPS.  173 

34.  There  is  a  society      -         -        -  (of  ladies.) 

35.  Should  there  not  be  a  convention  -  (of  nations  ?) 

36.  There  was  an  assemblage   -        -  (of  boys)  in  the  street. 

37.  There  is  a  large  collection  -         -  (of  water)  here. 

38.  Three  individuals       -        -         -  (of  the  jury)  are  owf. 

39.  Four  ,         -         -        -         -  (of  the   company)   re- 

turned. 
That  is,  four  individuals  of  the  company  returned.  From  what  did 
these  four  individuals  spring  1  They  sprang  off  from  this  company.  The 
company,  then,  is  spoken  of  in  the  light  of  a  material  from  which  these 
four  individuals  have  been  derived.  The  side  of  leather  is  that  from  which 
the  shoe  springs — the  side  of  leather  affords,  gives,  yields,  the  shoe ;  and  the 
entire  company  affords,  gives,  in  the  capacity  of  a  material,  these  four  indi- 
viduals. But  in  what  sense  does  the  company  afford  them,  give  them  1 
Does  the  company  create  them,  form  their  bodies,  and  souls  1  O,  no — in 
the  act  of  the  creation  of  their  bodies,  and  souls,  these  four  individuals  were 
given  to  themselves.  They,  however,  for  some  purpose,  or  other,  had 
united  themselves  with  others  in  the  formation  of  a  company,  an  artificial 
being,  compounded  of  several  entire  natural  beings.  These  four  natural 
beings,  therefore,  withdrew  in  a  certain  sense  from  the  community,  and 
became  mere  parts  of  an  artificial  being  which  became  a  member  of  the 
community  from  which  the  four  individuals,  and  all  the  others  in  the  com- 
pany, had  withdrawn  in  the  creation  of  this  company.  These  four  indi- 
viduals, while  members  of  this  company,  were  to  the  company,  what  the 
fingers,  the  arms,  or  the  ears  of  a  human  being,  are  to  himself.  They  were 
not  wJwle  beings — as  members  of  the  company,  they  were  not  individuals, 
but  mere  parts  of  the  artificial  frame-work  of  this  compound  being.  But 
on  leaving  the  company,  these  mere  parts  of  the  artificial  being,  became 
entire  natural  beings.  Here,  then,  is  a  new  creation — four  of  the  boneSf 
so  to  speak,  of  the  artificial  being,  were  converted  into  entire  natural  beings 
These  four  bones,  these  four  simples,  in  this  point  of  view,  became  the  mor 
terials  from  which  the  four  entire  beings  were  formed. 

40.  A  company        -         -         -         -  (of  thirty  individuals) 

was  formed. 
A  company  was  formed.     Out  of  what  1  out  of  thirty  individuals. 

41.  A  company        -         -         -         -  (of  thirty  individuals) 

42.  - (of  Philadelphia,)  was 

sent. 

From  what  materials  was  this  company  formed  1  from  thirty  individuals. 
And  from  what  materials  were  these  individuals  formed  ?  from  Philadel- 
phia. What,  from  ihe place,  called  Philadelphia?  O," no— but  from  the 
people  who  reside  in  this  place.  The  shoe  is  taken  out  of  the  side  of  the 
leather ;  the  nail,  out  of  the  bar  of  iron  ;  the  coat,  out  of  the  roll  of  cloth — and 
this  company,  out  of  thirty  persons  ;  and  the  thirty  persons  are  taken  out, 
made  out,  of  the  Philadelphians.  Who  does  not  hear  the  remarks,  that  our 
legislature  is  composed  of  had  materials,  that  our  congress  is  made  of  the 


174  CONDICTION    OP    NEP0ECLAD9. 

Wong  stuff;  that  this,  or  that  jury  is  formed  of  mixed  materials?  Bat 
It  may  be  replied  that  these  qxg  figures.  Admitted — so  too  are  the  instances 
on  which  I  am  commenting,  figures — they  are  figures,  however,  which  have 
sprung  out  of  the  close  analogy  between  the  material,  employed  in  the 
formation  of  a  shoe,  a  nail,  a  house,  a  table,  &c.,  and  those  lyings,  or  indi- 
viduals of  which,  or  from  whom,  a  company,  a  society,  a  number,  &c.  are 
made.  Thirty  individuals,  then,  are  presented  in  a  figure  of  speech,  as  the 
materials  out  of  which  a  company  is  formed.  And  the  Philadelphians  too, 
are  presented  in  a  figure  of  speech,  in  the  character  of  the  materials  out 
<rf  which  the  thirty  individuals  who  are  worked  up,  who  iare  manufac- 
tured, into  this  company.  I  ask  for  nothing  more  from  the  old  school 
syhtaxists :  I  desire  nothing  but  the  tarue  character  in  which  things  are 
presented — and  it  is  of  little  moment  to  my  purpose,  whether  that  character 
is  presented  in  a  figure  of  speech,  or  in  a  literal  expression,  in  a  golden 
tankard,  or  in  a  tin  basin. 

43.  This  is  a  matter  -         -         -  (of  business.) 

44.  This  book  is  a  system         -         -  (of  English  Syntax.) 

45.  "  A  part    -         -         -         -         -  (of  the  planetary  sys- 

tem) can  be  seen  only,  by  the  aid  of  a  telescope." 

46.  He  has  paper     -         -         -         -  ^of  every  kind.)  -^ 

47.  They  have  hats  -         -         -  (of  all  descriptions.) 

48.  He  lives  in  a  singular  kind  -        -  ^of  house.)  I 

49.  I  will  call  in  the  course       -         -  (of  the  day.) 

That  is,  I  will  call  sometime  within  the  entire  course,  entire  awwin/, 
which  is  made  out  of  this  day. 

50.  "  This  child  is  the  very  picture  -  (of  his  mother.") 

In  what  way  is  the  mother  the  material  out  of  which  the  picture  is 
formed  1  The  mother  herself  is  put  for  her  features  which  are  the  mate 
rials  out  of  which  ihe  picture  is  formed.  The  mother's  features  have  been 
communicated  to  her  child ;  and  these  features  constitute  that,  resemblance 
of  the  child  to  the  mother,  which  is  called  the  picture.  That  is,  the  resem- 
blance  is  called  the  picture. 

51.  This  is  a  portrait        ^         -         -  (of  John  Banks.) 
That  is,  John  Banks  has  been  worked  up  by  the  painter,  into  a  portrait ; 

his  features,  his  form,  siz§,  &c.  &c.  have  been  used  as  the  materials  out  of 
which  the  artist  has  made,  ponstructed  this  portrait. 

52.  "  John  went  to  Boston  in  the  year  (of  1840.") 

1840  is  the  matter,  the  material,  out  of  which  the  very  year  in  which 
John  went  to  Boston,  is  made. 

53.  His  conduct  was  a  course    -         -  (of  deceit.) 

The  matter,  the  material,  of  which  this  Course  was  formed,  was  deceit. 

54.  A  system (of  general  education.) 

55.  "  We  have  toiled  all  -        -         -  (of  the  night,)  and  have 

caught  nothing." 
That  is,  all  the  time  which  is  made  out  of  the  night 


CGNIiICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS.  175 

11.  Actor  E-dicatory. 

56^  "  He  was  led  up         -         -         -  (of  the  Spirit.") 

The  Spirit  was  the  source  of  this  act ;  hence  of  is  properly  employed. 
Of  is  better  than  by — was  hy  used,  the  exact  idea  naight  be  more  easily 
lost.  By  the  use  of  of  we  are  informed  that  the  Spirit  was  the  very  actor  ; 
for  of  signifies  that  the  act  of  leading  was  derived  directly  from  the  Spirit. 
And,  as  this  precise  notion,  or  fact,  could  not  be  expressed  by  hy,  the  trans- 
lator has  used  the  right  nepoeclide.  To  say,  the  house  was  builj;  by  John, 
is  not  to  say  that  John  did  the  work  of  building  it.  This  is  obvious  from 
the  numerous  instances  in  which  by  is  employed  in  clads  which 

are  founded  upon  those  who  merely  paid  for  the  work,  or  who  merely 
superintended,  either  directly,  or  indirectly,  the  general,  or  several  acts 
which  accomplish  what  is  said  to  be  done  in  the  superior  mono. 

1.  "  These  houses  were  huilt  hy  Stephen  Girard." 

2.  "  The  temple  was  built  hy  Solomon." 

3.  "  This  house  was  built  hy  the  government." 
In  these  instances,  the  clad  beings  are  not  the  actors. 

57.  "  Being  forty  days  tempted  -  (of  the  devil.")  ZwAe 

iv.  2. 

58.  "  And  ye  shall  be  hated     -        -  (of  all  men)  for  my 

riame's  sake.*^ 

59.  "My  house  shall  be  called  -  (of     all    nations)     the 

house  of  prayer  J*^ 

60.  "They  were  baptized        -        -  (of  John.") 

.-7^^   "  If.    A.UTHOR  E-DICATORY. 

61.  *^  Salvation  is     -        -        -        -  (of  the  Lord.") 

The  source  character  of  the  Lotd  lies,  not  in  his  being  the  material,  not 
in  his  being  the  actor,  but  ia  being  the  author.  An  author  is  more  than 
an  a/:tor. 

62.  *'  This  is  the  grammar        •         -  (of  L.  Murray.") 
That  is,  L.  Murray  is  the  source,  not  the  owner  of  the  book.     And,  as 

the  sourcitive  relation  to  the  book,  lies  in  his  being  the  author  of  it,  this 
clad  is  of  the  Author  E-dicatory.     The  word,  author,  indi- 

cates the  way  in  which  he  is  the  source  of  the  book. 

63.  "  This  lad  is  the  son  -        -      '  -  (of  Mr.  Jones.") 
That  is,  this  lad  sprang  off  from  Mr.  Jones,  he,  Mr.  Jones,  being  the 

lad's  parent,  or  his  author.  Mr.  Jones  is  here  presented  as  the  author 
source,  as  the  parent  source,  of  the  lad. 

III.  Character  Ex -e-dic-a-tory. 

64.  "  Mr.  Jones  is  the  father    -         -  (of  this  lad.") 

It  is  not  here  pretended  that  Mr.  Jones  himself  is  the  offspring  of  the  lad  •  \ 
it  i»  contended  that  only  i^e  father  charact^  of  Mr.  Jones,  is  the  oflspring 


i7(j  CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 

of  the  lad.  Hence  this  lad  is  the  author  source  of  the  fathership,  so  to 
speak,  of  Mr.  Jones.  Whence  is  the  fathership  of  a  man  derived  1  from 
his  child,  his  offspring — without  an  offspring,  no  man  can  become  -a  father 
— the  offspring  alone  gives  the  father  character.  The  offspring  is  the  source 
of  the  fathership,  inasmuch  as  it,  the  offspring,  is  the  author  of  the  father- 
ship. 

65.  Mrs.  Mary  Davis  is  the  mother  -  (of  Miss  Jane  Davjs.) 
That  is,  the  mothership  of  Mrs.  Mary  Davis  has  been  derived  from  Miss 

Jane  Davis.  Miss  Jane  Davis  has  given,  or  produced,  this  mothership — 
hence  she  is  the  author  of  it. 

66.  *'  Mr.  Jones  is  the  father    '.-         -  (of  this  lad.") 

67.  **  Miss  Mary  Davis  is  the  mother  (of  Miss  Jane  Davis.") 

"Of  Miss  Jane  Davis,"  a  plenary  unbroken  clad,  sourcitive  gene- 

condicatory,    author  E-dicatory,    character      Exedicatory, 

ttni-relation,  belonging  to  its  super      mono.     Conjective  Reading : 

"  Mrs.  Mary  Davis,  is  the  mother  of  Miss  Jane  Davis."  "  Sourcitive" 
indicates  that  Miss  Jane  Davis  is  the  source ;  author  indicates  that  she  is  the 
source  by  producing  something;  and  "character"  indicates  what  it  is 
which  she  as  an  author  has  produced.  She  has  produced  the  mother 
character. 

68.  Mr.  James  is  the  father      -        -  (of  three  sons,)  and 

69.  (of  two  daughters.) 

It  may  be  said  that  these  instances  prove  too  much,  and  consequently, 
destroy  the  whole:  no  man  can  be  three  fathers,  much  less  can  he  he  Jive  ! 
Each  offspring  must  render  Mr.  James  z.  father — hence  the  three  sons,  and 
two  daughters  must  render  him  jive  fathers  I  Ah  !  and  is  the  man  who 
is  made  president  of  any  society,  by  five  different  elections,  and  at  five  dif- 
ferent times,  multiplied  iniofive presidents?  Nor  does  he  who  is  president 
of  five  different  societies  at  the  same  time,  suffer  such  a  numeral  increase  as 
to  become  Jive  presidents  !  True,  he  has  derived  d^  presidency  from  each 
society. 

Mr.  James  is  the  father  (of  three  sons.) 

That  is,  each  of  the  three  has  given  him  the  father  character.  Mr. 
James  has  derived  the  ^^Aer  character  from  three  distinct  sources.  Says 
Mr.  James,  "  I  am  the  father  of  that  boy,  of  this  one,  and  the  one  between 
these  two." 

That  is,  I  am  father  off  of  that  one,  off  of  this  one,  and  pff  of  the  other 
one, 

70.  General  Harrison  is  President    -  (of  the  United  States.) 
He  derived  his  presidency  from,  out  of,  the  United  States,  the  United 

States  having  been  the  author  of  this  official  station,  or  character.  His 
presidency  has  sprung  off  from  the  United  States,  hence  the  United  States 
is  the  source  of  it. 

Tl.  *' John  is  the  6roMer-         -         -  (of  James.") 

4)f  what  is  James  the  source  ?  of  the  brother  character.     Let  it  be  sup- 


CONDICTION   OP    NEPOECLADS.  177 

posed  that  for  ten  years  John  was  an  only  child.  Under  this  supposition, 
was  he  a  brother  ? 

Again,  let  it  be  supposed  that  the  birth  of  Jarnes  happened  immediately 
after  John  became  ten  years  of  age.  Would  not  John,  under  this  view  of 
the  case,  become  a  brother  at  the  age  of  ten  years  ]  Surely.  Is  not  James, 
then,  the  source,  the  author,  of  the  brother  character  of  John  ? 

72.  Mr.  John  Davis  is  the  grandfather  (of  this  young  lad.) 

73.  Mr.  Nathans  was  the  uncle         -  (of  Mr.  Sanderson.) 

74.  "  This  lady  was  the  aunt  -         -  (of  James  Harper.") 

75.  "  Abraham  was  the /cf/Aer  -         -  (of  Isaac") 

76.  **  David    R.  Porter  is   now    the 

Governor      -         -      ,  -         -  (of  Pennsylvania.") 
That  is,  the  governor  relation  is  derived  from  Pennsylvania. 

77.  John  B.  Purcell  is  Bishop  -         -  (of  Cincinnati.) 

78.  This  gentleman  is  a  J5is/iop    -  (ofthe  Episcopal  church.) 
That  is,  the  Episcopal  church  is  the  source  whence  the  bishoprick  has 

sprung. 

79.  Henry  Jones  is  a  merchant        -  (of  Philadelphia.) 

In  order  to  become  a  merchant,  it  is  necessary  that  the  buyer  should  have 
purchasers — purchasers,  then,  are  the  source  of  that  business  character 
which  is  called  merchant.  He  that  has  no  purchasers  is  not  a  merchant. 
But  Mr.  Jones  has  purchasers  in  the  Philadelphians — hence  the  Philadel- 
phians  are  the  source,  the  authors,  of  the  merchant  character  of  Mr.  Jones. 

80.  *'  Joseph  Hewet  is  the  pupil      -  (of  John  Foster.") 
The  only  source  from  which  a  person  can  become  a  pupil,  is  a  teacher. 

Pupilage  is  not  natural — ^it  is  something  which  must  be  derived  from  a 
source.  Whoever  teaches  becomes  the  source  of  a  pupilage — hence  John 
Foster  is  the  source  of  the  pupil  character  of  Mr.  Hewet. 

81.  I  am  the /eacAer         -        -         -  (of  this  school.) 

My  teacher  character  is  derived  from  this  school.  The  teacher  character 
of  a  person  must  be  derived  from  him,  or  them,  whom  he  teaches :  there 
must  be  some  one  taught,  or  there  can  be  no  teacher. 

82.  James  is  the  apprentice      -         -  (of  two  masters.) 

His  apprenticeship  sprung  from  two  masters— two  masters,  then,  were 
the  source  of  it 

•  UI, 'Property  Character  Ux-e-dic-a-tory. 

83    This  house  is  the  projoer/t/  -  (of  Jane  Foster.)   . 

That  an  uncleship  of  Mr.  Nathans  (73  Ex.)  was  derived  from  Samuel 
Sanderson,  is  obvious,  for  the  birth  of  Sanjuel  Sanderson  rendered  Mr.  Na- 
thsms  an  uncle  to  Samuei  Sanderson.  True,  Mr.  Nathans  may  have  been 
made  an  uncle  long  before  the  birth  of  S?(inuel  Sanderson,  but,  then,  he  had 
not  been  made  uncle  to  Samuel  Sanderson  before  Samuel  Saaderson  made 


178  CONDICTIpN    OF    NEFOECLADS. 

him  so.  T^ie  uncleship,  so  to  speak,  which  is  mentioned  in  the  seventy- 
third  instance,  is  the  very  uncleship  of  which  Samuel  Sanderson  is  thq 
source,  the  author. 

♦*  This  house  is  the  property  of  Jane  Foster.'' 

What  does  this  house  derive  from  J^ne  Foster  1 

Mr.  Nathans  derives  an  uncleship  from  Samuel  Sanderson.  But  what 
does  this  house  derive  from  Jane  Foster  ?  The  house  derives  a  property 
character  from  Jane  Foster.  There  is  but  one  means  of  rendering  a  house, 
a  knife,  a  hook,  or  any  other  thing,  property.  This  means  is  an  owner. 
If  a  house  can  be  found  for  which  there  is  no  owner,  it  is  not  property — for 
property  is  that  which  is  appropriated,  disposed  of,  conveyed  to  some  being, 
or  thing  as  its  owner.  And  from  this  being,  or  from  this  thing  to  which 
the  thing  is  in  some  sense,  or  other,  conveyed,  appropriated,  the  thing  itself 
derives  a  property  character.  A  knife  in,  arid  of  itself,  is  a  mere  instru- 
ment— but  in  relation  to  its  owner,  it  is  property.  Its  property  character, 
then,  springs  out  of  an  owner.  In  order  to  show  to  whom  the  house  belongs, 
we  show  from  whom  the  property  character  of  the  house,  has  sprung ;  as, 
"  This  house  is  the  property  of  Jane  Foster." 

That  is,  this  house  has  hecome  property  from  Jane  Foster,  she  being  the 
proprietor  of  the  same.  But  by  what  means  has  Jane  Foster  made  this 
house, property  ?     By  appropriating  it,  in  some  way  or  other,  to  herself. 

The  old  school  syntaxists,  however,  attempt  to  maintain  that  of  means 
possession.  Hence,  they  contend  that  Jane  Foster  is  presented,  not  as  the 
source  of  the  property  character  of  the  house,  but  as  the  mere  possessor  of 
the  house.  And  the  ground  on  which  their  position  is  sustained,  is  the 
simple  fact  that  "Jane  Foster's  house,"  and  the  house  of  Jane  Foster,  are 
the  same  in  condiction.  But  as  this  mode  of  reasoning  proves  too  much, 
it  proves  nothing.  Upon  this  principle,  even  for  may  denote  possession  ; 
as,  "Have  you  any  hatsjfbr  boysl" 

Now,  can  it  be  said,  because  you  may  substitute  the  following  construc- 
tion without  being  misunderstood  in  the  general  idea,  that  for  denotes  joo«- 
session  ? 

*'  Have  you  boys'  hats?" 
The  possessive  case,  boys',  can  be  substituted  for  for  in  this  instance,  as 
well  as  for  of  in  the  other : 

1.  "  The  house  of  Jane  Foster." 

2.  ^*Jane  Foster's  house." 

"  Have  you  hats /or  boys?" 
"  Have  you  boys'  hats  ?" 

The  idea  of  possession,  is  a  matter  of  inference,  not  of  expression.  When 
a  man  becomes  the  author,  the  source,  of  the  property  character  of  a  thing, 
he  generally  takes  possession  of  the  thing — it  is  generally  delivered  to  him ; 
hence  he  becomes  the  actual  possessor.  From  this  circumstance,  of,  the 
very  word  which  is  employed  to  express  the  man's  sourcitive  relation  to  the 
property  character  of  the  thing,  is  presumed  to  mean  possession.  Of,  how- 
ever, does  not  express  any  notion  of  possession — this  steroclade  expresses 
the  fact  that  the  clad  thing  is  the  source,  the  author  of  something ,- 


CONDICTION    OP    NEPQECLADS*  179 

and  it  is  the  business  of  thevhearer,  or  the  reader,  to  ascertain  by  the  means 
of  his  judgment,  what  this  something  is,  of  which  the  clad  thing 

is  the  source ,-  as, 

"  The  house  of  Jacob  shall  possess  their  possessions.'* 

It  is  indicated  by  o/,  that  Jacob  is  presented  as  the  s(mrce  of  something  : 
and  it  is  the  province  of  the  reader  to  ascertain  what  the  something  is,  of 
which  Jacob  is  the  source.  Of  does  not  tell  the  reader  what  has  sprung 
from  Jacob.  The  reader  must  help  himself  to  this  fact.  A  child  says  to 
his  father, 

^^Papa,  some  man  is  (Joming." 

The  child,  however,  cannot  tell  what  man  is  coming — this  the  father  may 
ascertain  by  employing  the  proper  means.  Of  says  to  the  reader  that  Jacob 
is  here  presented  under  the  relation  of  a  source ,-  but  of  leaves  it  for  the 
reader  to  find  that  which  has  sprung  from  this  source : 

"  The  house  of  Jacob  shall  possess  their  possessions." 

Is  Jacob  here  presented  as  the  source  of  a  real  house  ?  O,  no — the  house 
of  Jacob  is  mentioned  as  an  index  to  his  children  who  were  reared  in  the 
house.  Hence  from  the  context,  from  the  nature  of  the  subject,  the  reader 
ascertains  that  Jacob's  children  are  the  things  of  which  Jacob  is  here  pre- 
sented as  the  source. 

84.  The  colour  -  -  -  -  (of  that  cloth)  is  good. 
The  colour  is  spoken  of  under  a  property  character  :  it  is  not  mentioned 
in  the  abstract,  not  mentioned  simply  as  colour,  but  as  a  property  which 
belongs  to  that  cloth.  If  the  colour  did  not  belong  to  any  thing,  could  it 
be  mentioned  as  the  property  of  any  thing  1  Surely  not.  From  what, 
then,  does  colour  derive  its  property  character  T  From  the  subject,  from 
the  thing,  which  is  the  proprietor  of  the  colour. 

S5.  ''The  length     -        -         -         -  (of  the  stick)  is  great." 

86.  The  buttons      -         -         -         -  (of  the  coat)  are  silver. 
The  buttons  are  not  spoken  of  as  buttons,  but  as  sl  property  of  the  coat, 

To  speak  of  the  buttons  merely  as  aUch,  would  be  simply  to  say-^silver 
buttons.  ■  '  ' 

87.  The  eyes (of  the  buttons) 

(of  this  coat.) 

88.  Is  the  man         -         -         -         -  (of  the  house)  wn'Min^^ 
To  find  a  man  to  each  house  is  nearly  as  common  as  it  is  to  find  buttons 

to  coats.  The  man  mentioned  here,  is  not  spoken  of  as  a  mere  human 
being,  but  he  is  mentioned  under  the  property  character  of  which  this  par- 
ticular house  was  the  source.  Is  the  man— what  man  1  the  man  who  is 
appropriated  to  this  house  as  the  head  of  the  house.  "  The  man^  then, 
means  the  head.  The  head  of  what  1  the  head  of  the  house.  To  speak 
of  a  man  merely  as  a  mian,  would  be  to  say,  A  man. ,  But  to  speak  of  a 
man,  as  property,  would  be  to  subjoin  to  the  words,  "  a  man^'  that  mono, 


ISO  CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 

that  clad,  which  mentions  the  source  of  his  propertt/  character ;  as, 

A  man  of  the  house.  ' 

N.  B.  1.  When  a  things  is  spoken  of  in  relation  to  itself  only,  it  is  spo- 
ken of  as  itself,  and  not  as  property;  as  a  man,  a  book,  a  joew,  colour,  height, 
beauty,  deformity,  an  individual,  individuals,  rock,  window,  &c.  &c. 

2.  But  when  a  thing  is  mentioned  as  appropriated,  it  is  mentioned  as 
pr(^erty  ;  as, 

1.  This  gentleman  is  the  man  of  the  house. 

2.  This  is  a  hook  of  John. 

3.  This  is  the  pen  of  James. 

4.  The  colour  of  this  chair  is  fine. 

5.  The  height  of  the  wall. 

6.  The  beauty  of  this  lady. 

7.  The  deformity  of  his  foot  is  obvious. 

8.  An  individual  of  the  company  was  present. 

9.  "  Four  individuals  of  th6  company  returned." 

89.  "The  birds  -        -         -         -  (qf  the  air)  sre  for 

man"  -i 

90.  The  warmth         -        -        -        -  (of  the  water)  is  per- 

ceptible. 

91.  "The/j/e    -         -        -        -        -  {oim^n)  is  short." 

92.  ^'^  The  foundation        -        -        -  (of  the  house)  was 

stone." 

93.  The  captain      -        -        -        -  (of  the  ship)  was  lost. 

94.  "  Four  individuals    -        -        -  (of  the  company)  re- 

turned." 
"Of  the  company*^  is  presented  under  the  material  E-dicatory. 

But,  as  it  may  be  considered  as  naturally  enough  falling  under  the  Property 
Character  Exedicatory,  I  have  placed  this  mono  here  also.  This  mono 
may  be  monologized  as  follows : 

"  Of  the  company,^*  B.  plenary  unbroken  c\aA,  sourcitive 

Rudicatory,  material  E-dicatory,  property  character    Exedicatory, 

Mwe-relation,  belonging  to  its  superior  mono. 

III.  Propria  Persona  Ex-e-dic-a-tory, 

95.  John  went        -         -         -         -  (of  himself.) 

A  person  may  be  the  author  of  a  thing,  in  his  own  proper  person  ;  and 
he  may  be  the  author  of  it  in  the  person  of  another,  or  by  proxy.  When 
John  himself  acts,  he  acts  in  Propria  Persona,  in  his  own  proper  person. 
But  if  John  acts  in  the  person  of  another,  he  acts  by  proxy.  In  some 
instances  it  becomes  necessary  to  express  in  direct  terms,  that  the  agent 
acted  in  his  own  proper  person — hence  a  mono  is  often  added  indicative  oi 
this  idea ;  as,  "  John  himself  is  the  writer  of  the  note." 

The  basis,  the  corwc,  of  this  propria  persona  mono,  is  some  word  ending 
with  self,  or  selves.  The  mono  is  generally  implenary  except  where  it  has 
a /)(M#  place ;  as 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS.  181 

Johii  (         ,         himself)  went,  John  went  [of  himself .) 

96.  "  As  the  branch  cannot  bear  fruit  (of  itself.") 

That  is,  the  branch  cannot  be  the  author  of  fruit  in  propria  persona^  in 
its  oum  proper  self,  for  it  miist  receive  aid  from  the  trunk. 

97.  God  is  the  author  of  the  universe  (of  himself.) 

98.  God  -         -         -         -         -  (       ,     himself)  is  the 

author  of  the  universe. 

99.  I -(       ,       myself,)  was 

there. 

100.  I  was  there      -         -  -  (i)f  myself.) 

101.  John (       ,       himself)   was 

at  court. 

102.  John  was  at  court     -         -         -  (of  himself.) 

How,  in  what  way — ^was  he  there  in  Propria  Persona^— or  was  he  there 
by  proxy  ? 

In  the  EiTGLTSH  Stntascope,  page  58,  I  have  attempted  to  show  that 
the  cormes,  himself,  themselves,  <f c.  are  not  used  for  emphasis  as  the  old 
school  syntaxists  teach.  Under  the  same  page,  I  have  also  attempted  to 
show  that  these  cormes  are  not  in  the  nominative  case,  that  they  are  not 
po-e-cormes,  but  ne-po-e-cormes. 

John  himself  went. 

Here  himself  is  parsed  in  the  nominative  case  to  went.  Himself,  how- 
ever, is  in  the  objective,  after  q/"  understood ;  as,  John  q/"  himself  went.  (See 
the  58th  page  of  the  Ekglish  Stittascofe.) 

II.    THEMfi  E-DICATORY. 

103.  **  He  spake      -         -         -         -  (of  his  parents.") 

The  parents  were  the  theme,  the  subject — hence  they  were  the  source  of 
what  he  said.     Theme  indicates  in  what  way  the  parents  were  the  source. 

104.  Did  John  say  any  thing  -  -  (of  himself?) 

105.  *' I  shall  speak  -  -  -  (of  that  affair)  iSOon." 

106.  He  will  give  a  history  -  -  (of  the  Jews.) 

107.  He  spake  very  highly  -  -  (of  the  services)  which 

Jackson  had  rendered  his  country. 

108.  "  And  he  charged  them  that  they 

should  tell  no  man  -         -  (of  it.") 

That  is,  that  they  should  not  make  it  the  theme,  and  consequently,  not 
the  source  of  any  information — that  they  should  not  make  it  the  theme 
vource  of  any  remark,  because  it  would  tend  to  give  pubUcity  to  the  event. 

109.  '♦  These  gentlemen  told  me       -  (of  it.") 


1S2  CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS. 

That^'is,  th^  made  it  the  theme  source  of  information.  All  information 
is  derived  from  something.  It  is  derived  from  the  informer  as  author^  and 
from  the  theme  as  subject.  Hence  that  of  which  one  speaks  is  one  source  of 
the  information  given. 

110.  "I  have  heard-        -        -        -  (of  his  troubles.") 

That  is^his  troubles  have  been  the  theme  source,  not  the  author  source, 
of  information  to  me. 

111.  *' I  have  been  informed     -         -  (  ,  that)  the 

President  is  in  the  city."  (o/'that.) 

That  is,  that,  viz. « the  President  is  in  the  city"  has  been  made  the  theme 
source  of  information  to  me. 

112.  Nothing  was  said     -         -         -  (of  his  sons.) 

113.  He  spake  well  -         -         -(of  Thomas  Jefferson.) 

114.  "When  Pilate  heard         -        -  (of  GalUee,)  he  asked, 

whether  the  man  was  a  Galilean." 

115.  "  And  when  ye  shall  hear  -  (of  wars,) 

116.  "and  rumours  -         -         -  (of  wars,)   be  ye  not 

troubled, ^^ 

II.  Compensation  E-dicatory. 

117    "Wherefore  that  field  shall  be 

called  the  field       -         -         -  (of  blood.") 
118.  All  strangers  were  buried  in  the 

field       -         -        -         -        -  (of  blood.) 

Judas  betrayed  "  the  innocent  blood  of  Christ  for  thirty  pieces  of  silver." 
This  traitor,  however,  repented,  and,  not  being  willing  to  retain  that  which 
had  induced  him  to  commit  this  great  sin,  he  returned  the  thirty  pieces  to 
the  chief  priests,  and  elders.  Judas  having  thrown  down  the  thirty  pieces 
of  silver  in  the  temple,  the  chief  priests  took  th6m  up,  and  said,  "  It  is  not 
lawful  to  put  them  into  the  treasury,  because  they  are  the  price  of  blood." 
Upon  consultation,  they  came  to  the  conclusion  to  purchase  with  these 
thirty  pieces  of  silver,  "  the  potter's  field,"  in  which  to  bury  strangers. 
"  Therefore,  that  field  was  called  the  field  of  blood  unto  this  day." 

The  blood  of  Christ,  then,  became  the  source  of  this  field,  inasmuch  as  it 
was  given  through  the  silver  pieces,  hs  a  compensation  for  it.  Hence  the 
blood  of  the  Redeemer  was  the  compensation  source  of  the  potter's  field. 
The  Jews  derived  possession  of  the  potter's  field — they  derived  a  title  to 
-his  field.  From  what  source  did  they  derive  this  title  1  from  innocent 
blood.  The  blood,  then,  is  the  compensation  source  of  this  title  to  the  pot- 
ter's field.  This  is  the  only  instance,  I  believe,  in  which  the  compensation 
given  for  a  thing,  is  presented  under  the  character  of  a  source.  We  do  not 
say,  this  building  is  the  house  of  ten  thousand  dollars  !  Nor  do  we  say, 
"  This  is  the  house  of  much  labour.  Yet  the  labour  is  a  source  of  the 
house.     But  we  do  not  speak  of  the  labour  under  its  source  relation  to  the 


CONDICTION   OP    NEPdECLADS.  183 

house.  Nor  do  we  speak  of  the  §10,000  under  the  source  relation  which 
this  money  bears  to  the  building. 

II.  Purpose  E-dicatory 

119.  This  is  the  field       -         -         -  (of  batde.") /br. 

120.  "  Peter  andJohn  went  up  at  the 

hour     -         -         -      .  -         -  (of  prayer.") /or. 

121.  "After  this  there  was  a  feast      -  (of  the  passover.") 

122.  "  The  heavens  must  receive  him 

until  the  times       -         -  (of  the   restitution)  of 

all  things." 

"  Field  of  6««/c." 
That  is,  a  field  which  is  so  far  derived  from  war,  from  battles,  as  to  be 
prepared,  or  set  apart,  for  the  purpose  of  fighting  battles.  For  the  purpose 
of  fighting,  a  field  has  been  procured,  prepared,  and  set  apart.  Hence  this 
field  is  derived  from  its  purpose :  a  thing  which  is  formed,  procured,  fash- 
ioned, or  set  apart,  for  a  particular  purpose,  owes,  in  a  high  degree,  its  deri- 
vation to  that  purpose.  Therefore  the  use  for  which  a  thing  is  formed,  or 
provided,  becomes  the  purpose  source  of  the  thing. 

*»  The  hour  o/*  prayer." 
That  is,  the  hour  of  whose  particular  designation,  prayer  was  the  pur- 
pose source.     The  setting  apart  of  this  hour  from  all  other  hours,  finds  its 
source  in  the  purpose  of  prayer. 

**k  fezst  of  the  passover.*^ 
The  passover  was  a  great  event ;  in  smiting  the  fijst-born  of  the  Egyp- 
tians, God  passed  over  the  houses  of  the  Israelites,  which  were  marked 
with  the  blood  of  the  paschal  lamb.  For  the  purpose  of  commemorating 
this  event,  the  Jews  instituted  a  feast.  If  it  is  asked,  then,  What  is  the  pur- 
pose which  has  given  rise  to  this  feast,  the  answer  will  be  found  to  be,  the 
pass  over,  or  the  commemoration  of  the  pass  over. 

II.  Quantity  E-dicatory. 

123.  This  man  is  worthy  -         -  (of  great  praise.) 
DocTBiifE. — "  Great  praise'*  is  the    source    from  which   the  reader 

derives  the  extent  to  which  this  man  is  worthy.  The  mono,  "  of  great 
praise,*'  is  the  measure  by  which  the  reader  ascertains  how  much  the  writer 
intends  to  ascribe  to  this  man.    Hence  this  clad  is  a  rule,  a  stan- 

dard, a  a-iterion — the  source  of  the  quantity  intended  by  the  writer.  What 
the  yard-stick  is  to  the  roll  of  cloth,  the  mono,  "  of  great  praise,'^  is  to  the 
worth  in  this  man.  And  what  the  yard-stick  is  to  him  who  attempts  to 
ascertain  from  it  the  amount  of  the  entire  roll,  this  clad,  "  of  great 

praise,"  is  to  him  who  desires  to  ascertain  what  amount  of  worth  there  is 
in  this  man.  To  the  man  who  measures  the  roll  of  cloth,  the  yard-stick  is  a 
source :  not,  however,  the  source  of  the  cloth,  but  of  the  determination  of 
the  amount  of  the  cloth:  the  yard-stick  is  the  source  of  the  knowledge 
which  he  who  measures  the  cloth,  derives  as  to  the  quantity  in  the  entire 


184  CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS. 

roll,  inasmach  as  it,  the  yard-stick,  is  the  rule,  the  measure,  the  means,  too 
criterion,  from  which  this  knowledge  springs. 

To  give  the  gnomod  vmder  consideration  to  the  reader,  without  the  quan^ 
iity  mono,  would  be  to  give  the  roll  of  cloth  to  A,  B,  or  C,  without  any 
yard-stick,  without  any  criterion  stick,  without  any  criterion  source,  from 
which  he  could  derive  the  knowledge  of  the  amount  of  cloth  in  the  roll : 

*'  This  man  is  worthy. ^^ 
Now,  if  we  add  the  criterion  mono  to  the     cormotene,  the  reader  will 
have  the  source  from  which  he  can  derive  how  much  worth  the  writer  intends 
to  ascribe  to  this  man. 

Quantity  Source  mono. 

124.  "  This  man  is  t^or?%       -         -  (of  great  praise.'' ) 

125.  This  subject  is  worthy      -         -  (of  close  attention.) 

126.  That  affair  is  worthy         -         -  (of  much  attention.) 

127.  "  This  fellow  is  not  worthy      -  (of  our  notice.") 

128.  Although  man  is  vile,  his  soul 

was  deemed  z^Jorf/iy       -         -  (of  Christ's  own  blood.) 
"  Of  ChrisVs  own  blood,'"  is  the  mono  from  which  the  quantity  of  worth, 
which  the  writer  intends  to  ascribe  to  the  human  soul,  is  derived. 
Of  is  not  unfrequently  omitted  ;  as. 

The  knife  is  worth  (    ,     a  dollar,)   He  is  not  worth  (    , 
our  notice,)  This  man  is  worth  (  ,    one  thousand  dollars.) 

The  want  of  a  word  to  distinguish  between  moral  worth,  and  property 
worth,  has  given  rise  to  the  use  of  worth  instead  of  worthy,  in  cases  where 
the  value  spoken  of,  is  not  moral  worth,  but  property  worth.  Hence  we 
never  find  the  following  : 

1.  The  knife  is  worthy  of  a  dollar. 

2.  The  book  is  worthy  of  thirty  cents. 

In  such  instances  we  frnd^worth  used  for  worthy,  and  o/ entirely  omitted : 

1.  The  knife  is  worth  a  dollar. 

2.  The  book  is  worth  thirty  cents. 

,  The  attempt  at  making  a  distinction  in  this  way  between  the  methods  of 
speaking  of  moral  worth,  and  property  worth,  results  in  the  improper  use 
of  the  corme,  worth,  for  the  metaclade,  worthy.  This  practice,  however, 
is  too  old,  and  too  general  to  be  arrested  at  once.  Indeed,  before  this  error 
can  be  corrected,  a  new  word,  or  a  new  form  of  worth,  must  be  devised  as 
a  substitute  for  worth.  The  present  metaclade  form,  worthy,  has  been  so 
long,  and  so  exclusively,  applied  to  moral  worth,  that  it  can  never  be  extended 
io  property  worth.  The  book  is  worthy  of  a  dollar,  can  hardly  be  tolera- 
ted. If  "  worth''  could  be  used  in  either  of  the  forms,  worthal,  or  worthic, 
we  might  have  some  hopes  that  this  error  would  perish  out  of  our  phrenod. 
But  as  worthal,  and  worthic  are  not  sanctioned  by  any  of  the  laws  of  ety- 
mology, and  as  they  are  not  at  all  euphonical,  we  may  as  well  hope  that 
the  spots  will  decay  out  of  the  sun,  as  to  expect  that  this  deformity  will  cease 


CONDICTION   OP    NEPOECLADS.  185 

to  inar  the  syntax  of  our  language.  But,  however  contrary  to  custora 
die  application  of  worthy  to  property  worth,  may  be,  it  must  be  applied  to 
this  species  of  worth  in  rendering  the  mono  plenary.  Hence  the  sentence 
which  applies  worth  to  property,  because  worthy  is  consecrated,  so  to  speak, 
to  moral  worth,  must  insert  of  after  worth,  or  change  worth  into  worthy : 

The  book  is  worth  (        ,         a  dollar.) 

1 .  The  book  is  worth  of  a  dollar,  or 

2.  The  book  is  worthy  of  a  dollar. 

The  book  is  of  the  worth  of  a  dollar,  is  neither  English  nor  sense. 

129.  That  hat  is  tiJorM    -         -         -  (         ,      ten  dollars.) 

130.  This  deed  is  worthy         -        -  (of   high    commenda- 

tion.) 

II.  Subject  E-dicatory. 

131.  The  destruction       -        -        -  (of  the  house)  was  in 

June. 

There  can  be  no  destruction  without  something  to  be  destroyed :  the  thing 
to  be  destroyed,  then,  is  a  source  of  the  destruction.  The  thing  destroyed 
is  the  subject  which  is  acted  upon  in  the  operation  of  destroying.  There 
can  be  no  operation  without  a  subject  on  which  to  operate — in  other  words, 
there  can  be  no  destroying  operation  without  a  subject  to  be  destroyed. 
Hence  the  thing  to  be  destroyed,  is  the  source,  because  it  is  the  subject 
without  which  no  destruction  could  be  produced. 

132.  This  course  is  obviously  subver- 

sive     -         -         -         -         -  Tof  sound  morals.) 

133.  This  climate  is  destructive         -  (of  health.) 

134.  The  destruction       -         -        -  (of  this  race)  was  un- 

expected. 

This  clad,  as  well  as  that  in  sentence  131,  is  of  the  Scbjectitx 

E-DicATORT,  and  Property  Character  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 

II.  State  E-dioatort. 

135.  He  is  sick       -        -        -        -  (of  a  cold.) 
The  eold  is  the  source  of  that  state  which  is  denoted  by  sick. 

136.  I  am  quite  tired       -         -        -  ^of  this  subject.) 

137.  \  2m  tired       -        -         -         -  (of  your  talk.) 

138.  The  room  is /mZ/      -        -        -  (of  smoke.) 

139.  The  Word  was  made  flesh,  and 

dwelt  among  us,     -        -  full  (of  grace,) 

140.  and  ...         -  full  (of  truth.) 

141.  "All  ye  shall  be  offended^  -  (because-of  me.) 


.186  CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS. 

The  state  of  offence  is  derived  from  me.  Because- of  must  be  tak^i  as 
one  nepoeclide.  The  two  words,  as  here  used,  form  but  one  part  of  speech, 
142..  I 'dm  glad        -         -         -         -  (of  it.) 

li  is  the  source  of  the  state  of  gladness. 

143.  He  was  impatient    -         -         -  (of  these  restraints.) 
These  restraints  were  the  source  of  his  state  of  impatience. 

144.  "For (of  necessity)  he  must 

J     release  one  at  the  feast." 

The  state  of  freedom  springs  out  of  the  source  of  necessity. 

145.  For  he    ^         -         -         -     ,    -  (of  necessity)  wz^s^  ^o. 
Necessity  is  the  source  of  the  state  of  action,  denoted  by  go. 

The  cure  (of  the  disease)  was  im,mediate. 

146.  "  He  who  first  stepped  in  was  ^^ 

cured (of  whatever  disease)  *• 

he  had.'' 

147.  "  He  preached  the  remission     -  (of  sins,)  to  all.'*       ^ 

148.  "  He  who  first  stepped  in  after 

the  troubling  of  the  water,  was 

cured   -         -         -         -         -  (of  whatsoever  disease) 

hehad." 

149.  "He  preached  the /orgivcncss  -  (of  sins)  to  all." 

II.  Diction  E-dicatory. 

150.  - ("  Of  a  truth)  /  say 

unto  you,  this  man  went  down 

justified  rather  than  the  first." 
Truth  is  the  source  whence  this  diction  proceeds :  "  I  say  unto  you,  this 
man  went  down  Justified  rather  than  thejirst"  is  diction,  is  speech.  And 
this  speech,  this  diction,  says  the  speaker,  has  its  source  in  truth. 

151.  I  say  unto  you  -         -         -  (of  a   truth)    that   no 

good  will  come  of  this  thing. 

II.  Moral  E-dicatory. 

152.  "Much  evil  will  come      -         -  (of  that  measure.") 
The  word,  of,  may  be  put  before  the  source  from  which  springs  either 

good,  or  evil,  where  the  word,  come,  denotes  the  act  of  emanation ;  as.  Good 
will  come  of  it. 

We  do  not  say.  Good  will  spring  of  it ;  nor  do  we  say.  Good  will  result 
of  it.     In  these  instances  we  use /rom,-  as,  Good  will  result /rom  it. 

We  also  say.  Good  will  come  from  it. 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS.  187 

'  153.  "  No  good  will  come        -         -  (of  it.") 

154.  ^' Will  any  good  come      -         -  (of  him.") 

That  is,  will  this  person  be  the  source  of  any  moral  offspring  ? 

From  the  gradual  disuse  of  this  steroclade,  in  instances  like  the  above,  it 
is  reasonable  to  conclude  that  many  modern  writers  consider  this  applica- 
tion of  it  inconsistent  with  the  true  genius  of  the  word.  So  far,  however, 
is  this  use  from  being  inconsistent  with  the  true  signology  of  this  steroclade, 
that  no  other  application  of  it,  is  so  well  calculated  to  illustrate  the  exact 
import  of  the  word. 

II.  Time  E^dicatorit.,  -'^ 

155.  *' I  have  known  him  -         -  (of  a  child.")  •-' ' 

156.  He  has  been  known  to  us  -         -  (of  a  long  time.) 
i57.  He  went  -         -         -         -  (of  a  Saturday.) 

"I  have  known  him  of  a  child," 

"  Of  a  child,''*  is  of  the  source         Rudicatory,  and  time  E-dica- 

tory.  That  long  time  is  necessary  to  an  intimate  acquaintance  with  a  thing, 
or  to  a  thorough  knowledge  of  a  person,  cannot  be  doubted  by  any.  Time, 
then,  becomes  a  source  of  knowledge."     " I  have  known  him  of  a  child" 

That  is,  childhood,  so  far  as  knowledge  can  emanate,  spring,  from  time,  is 
the  source  whence  my  knowledge  has  been  derived.  By  child  is  intended 
earli/  days,  early  time — and,  as  length  of  time  is  necessary  to  acquire  that 
degree  of  information,  which  is  here  intended  by  the  word,  known,  the 
corme,  child,  is  used  as  the  name,  as  the  sign,  of  this  necessary  source  of 
knowledge. 

What  is  more  natural  for  a  person  who  wishes  to  show  that  he  has  a 
thorough  knowledge  of  Mr.  A,  B,  C,  or  D,  than  to  recur  to  the  length  of 
time  during  which  he  has  been  acquainted  with  him  1  Why  does  a  per- 
son recur  to  this  time  1  Because  he  knows  that  time  is  a  legitimate  source 
of  knowledge.  "  How  long  have  you  known  this  man  ]'*  "  Ten  years." 
"  How  long  have  you  known  the  prisoner  at  the  bar  1"     "  Six  weeks." 

"  He  went  of  a  Saturday. ^^ 
Every  event  must  emanate,  spring,  from  time  as  one  of  its  sources ;  for 
no  event  can  happen  without  time.  But  it  is  not  common  to  present  time 
in  its  source  relation  to  events ;  hence  whenever  it  is  so  presented,  the  ex- 
pression produces  that  emotion  in  the  mind,  which  is  generally  the  offspring 
of  eccentricity  in  expression.  But,  as  the  eccentricity  which  produces  this 
emotion,  may  not  be  an  error,  the  emotion  itself  is  no  proof  of  an  inaccu- 
racy.  With  respect  to  the  case  in  hand,  the  point  is,  whether  tiTue  itself 
does  bear  a  source  relation  to  events.  If  time  does  bear  a  source  relation 
to  events,  it  is  not  improper  to  express  the  fact  of  this  source  relation  by  of, 
the  little  word  which  is  the  great  sign  of  the  source  bearing  of  one  thing 
upon  another.  That  time  does  bear  this  relation  to  events  is  obvious  from 
the  fact  that  without  time,  no  event  can  happen.  Will  it  be  contended  that 
A.  can  make  a  shoe  without  time  ?  As  well  may  it  be  said  that  he  can 
make  a  shoe  without  materials  / 

John  made  a  shoe  of  leather,  of  n  Monday  evening  last. .. 


U:.-^.  .  i. 


1B8  CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 

The  material  source  of  the  shoe  is  leather—the  time  source  is  last  Mon- 
day evening.  From  what  material  did  the  shoe  emanate  ]  leather.  What 
time  gave  it  birth  1  last  Monday  evening. 

It  may  be  said  that.  John,  too,  bore  a  source  relation  to  this  shoe.  Cer- 
tainly— hence  that  relation  may  be  expressed  by  of  ,•  as,  A  shoe  was  made 
of  John,  of  leather,  of  a  Monday  evening  last.  (He  was  led  up  of  the 
Spirit.) 

The  truth  is,  that  the. same  thing  has  so  many  sources,  that  was  each 
source  expressed,  0/ would  be  so  frequently  employed  in  the  same  gnomod, 
that  the  sentence  would  be  much  marred  by  the  numerous  applications  of 
this  steroclade.  Or,  in  other  words,  was  the  source  relation  which  each  thing 
bears  to  the  same  offspnng,expressed,  the  frequent  use  of  0/*  would  very  much 
offend  the  ear : 

A  shoe  was  made  of  leather,  of  a  Monday  evening  last,  0/ John  Brown. 

The  leather,  the  time,  and  the  agent,  all  bear  a  source  relation  to  the 
offspring  the  shoe.  But  to  render  the  use  of  of  so  unfrequent  as  to  pre- 
vent that  marring  which  its  use  would  produce,  was  the  source  relation  of 
each  sourcitive  thing  expressed,  the  agent,  and  the  time  are  rarely  expressed 
as  sources  of  the  offspring  of  which  they  are  as  much  the  source  as  any 
other  thing : 

John  Brown  made  a  shoe  0/ leather^  o»  Monday  evening  last. 

158.  "He  is  well    -         -         -         -  (of  late.") 

159.  "  Henry  is  not  well  -         -  (oflate  years.") 

That  is,  as  he  springs  off  from  late  years,  he  is  not  well. 

No  man  can  exist  as  a  man,  without  time:  the  cessation  of  time  would 
close  the  existence  of  men  as  men.  If,  then,  tune  is  a  source  whence 
springs  the  continuation  of  men  as  such,  time  must  be  a  source  of  all  their 
conditions.  A  man  is  well  one  day,  but  ill  another.  Without  time,  how- 
ever, he  could  neither  be  well,  nor  ill ;  time,  then,  is  a  source  of  these  two 
states.  The  illness  which  a  man  is  (6  suffer  next  week,  is  to  come  forth 
from  next  week.  Hence,  as  every  portion  of  time  gives  birth  to  a  continu- 
ation of  the  same  state,  or  to  a  change  of  a  state^  each  portion  is  spoken  of 
as  bearing  a  source  relation  to  the  endless  variety  of  situation  of  men,  and 
things. 

"  He  is  quite  well  of  late."  Here,  the  portion  of  time,  called  late,  is  a 
source  (so  far  as  time  can  be  a  source)  of  that  state  which  is  denommated 
quite  well.  ' 

Class  the  clads  which  begin  with  of. 

1.  "  The  publication  (of  this  letter)  was  wrong." 

■2.  The  invention  (of  a  telescope)  has  contributed   to   the 

improvement  (of  astronomy.) 

3.  The  proceeds  (of  the  sales)  shall  be  yours. 

4«  The  distance  (of  Utica)  from  Auburn,  is  65  miles. 

6.  This  child  is  the  very  picture  (of  his  mother.) 

6.  He  has  given  many  proofs  (of  his  military  skill.) 

7.  I  saw  men  (of  all  nations.) 


CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS  189 

8.  This. is  an  aflfeir  (of  tne  cabinet.) 

9.  Is  there  any  proof  (of  liis  filial  alfection?) 

10.  Justice  is  a  prominent  attribute  (of  God.) 

11.  He  is  not  well  (of  late.) 

12.  James  boasts  (of  his  patriotism.) 

13.  ("  Of  a  truth)  I  say  unto  you  that  he  is  blessed  who  is  not 

offended  (because  of  Christ.") 

14.  This  arises  out  (of  their  negligence.) 

15.  Is  there  any  thing  in  the  necessity  (of  the  case,)  which 

calls  for  these  measures  ?" 

16.  John  spoke  (of  his  sisters.) 

17.  **  And  I  saw  the   woman  drunken  (of  the  blood)  (of  the 

saints,)  and  (of  the  blood)  (of  the  martyrs)  (of  Jesus.") 

[Rev.  xvii.  6. 

18.  Henry  was  afraid  (of  John.) 

19.  "Has  betaken  the  oath  (of office?")     He  has  had  no 

opportunity  (of        ,        taking)  (        ,        it.) 

20.  "  They  were  absolved  from  all  duty  whatever  in  regard 

(of  dominion,)  fealty,  and  obedience." 

The  conjection  is — "  from  all  duty  (of  dominion.") 
Hence  the  idea  is,  all  duty  which  springs  out  of  dominion,  or  all  duty  of 
which  dominion,  power,  or  rule  over,  is  the  source. 

21.  He  made  clay  (of  the  spittle.) 

22.  "  The  commissioners    will  probably  complain  (of   Mr. 

Norvell's  resolution  ;)  and  we  learn  that  one  (of  them) 
ascribes  it  to  the  impertinent  curiosity  (of  junior 
officers.") — Public  Ledger. 

23.  "  He  was  denied  (        ,        his  seat.") 

24.  "  But  enough  (of  details)  for  the  present." 

25.  They  were  deprived  (of  their  books.) 

26.  The  expedition  was  attended  with  a  loss  (of  life.) 

27.  The  pentecost  (of  the  Jews)  was  called  the  feast  (of 

weeks.) 

28.  What  was  the  cost  (of  the  building)  (of  the  ship  ?) 

29.  "Jerusalem  shall  be  trodden  down  (of  the  Gentiles.") 

30.  •'  We  of  the  press,  are  not  amenable  to  courts  martial  for 

,         speaking  (     ,        truth.") — Pub.  Led. 

31.  He  had  a  good  opportunity  (of      ,     seeing)  (     ,  him.) 

32.  "I  am  glad  (of  it.") 

33.  Can  any  good  thing  come  out  (of  Nazareth  ?) 


I&O  CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 

^  II.  Local  E-dicatory* 

III.  Inceptive  Es6-e-dic-a-tory. 

1.  "They  came  out         -         -  -(of  Egypt.") 

2.  I  went  directly  out     -         -  -  (of  the  house.) 

3.  Is  not  this  man  out      -         -  -  (of  the  road  ?) 

4.  These  very  pins  came  out  -  -  (of  his  mouth.) 

5.  Move  these  chairs  out         -  -  (of  my  way.) 

OF — X  Nepoecled. 
Of  is  &  nepoecled  where  it  terminates  a  mono,  as,  [It  was  not  even 
thought  of,]  [This  gentleman  was  spoken  of]  (by  me.) 
OF — impkopeult  used. 
1.  *'  Language  is  the  principal  vehicle  of  thought;" 

G.  Browx's  Grammar 
2.  The  remarkable  difference  of  writers  from  each  other,  even  m  th« 
same  language,  and  still  more  the  evident  variance  from  philosophic  truth, 
showed  that  there  must  be  something  very  defective  in  the  manner  of  con 
ducting  the  inquiry."  Preface  to  Cardell's  Gram, 

1.  "Of  writers,"  should  be  among  writers.  2.  "From  each  other'^  is  a 
redundant  mono.  3.  "  Variance  from"  is  not  English ;  I  am  at  variance 
with  him,  is  English. 

The  sentence  corrected : 

The  remarkable  difference  among  \\Titers,  (  .,  ,  ,  )  even 
in  the  same  language,  and  still  more,  the  various  opinions  upon  philosophic 
truth,  show  (not  showed)  that  something  is  (not  *'  there  must  be")  vary 
defective  in  the  manner  of  conducting  the  inquiry. 

2.  *'  The  learning,  talents,  and  means  of  research,  possessed 
by  many  who  have  spent  the  labour  of  their  lives,  in  the  same 
field,  are  not  to  be  depreciated,  or  denied." 

Cardell's  Grammar. 

The  learning  o/ research  is  bad — ^the  talents  o/ research  is  shamefully 
bad.     The  mea/<s  o/ research  is  correct.     (See  Appeal,  page  320.) 

Corrected.  The  means,  talents,  and  learning,  possessed 
by  many  who  have  spent  their  lives  in  the  same  field,  are  not 
to  be  depreciated,  or  denied.  (Rejected  parts — *'  the  labour 
of ,  of  research.)  — 

1.  "  But  this,  as  our  readers  are  aware,  is  wide  q/'the  truth.'" 
{The  Presbyterian,  March  6,  1841.) 

The  following  sentence  is  from  a  Grammar  by  Joab  Brace.  The  few 
reflections  which  I  have  made  upon  some  of  the  improprieties  that  pervade 
it,  may  be  ascribed  to  the  attempt  of  him,  and  his  brother  to  turn  pub- 
lic opinion  against  my  works,  while  they  were  preparing  theirs ! 


CONDICTION   OP    NEPOECLADS.  191 

•'  Its  author  was  a  teacher  of  age,  of  experience  in  teaching, 
and  of  uncommon  professional  tact." 

JoAB  Brace's  Grammar. 

"  Of  age." 

This  is  a  very  common  mono :  we  often  hear  it  said.  The  son  is  of  age. 
And  in  one  instance  in  the  New  Testament,  this  very  mono  is  used  to  express 
a  competency  to  act  for  one's  self:  "  he  is  of  age — ask  him.**  But,  as  used 
by  Mr.  Brace,  this  mono  seems  to  indicate  an  inferiority  in  age,  or  in  some- 
thing else,  which  renders  him  incompetent  to  act  for  others  in  the  cause  of 
education. 

"  Lennie's  Grammar  was  published  some  years  since  in 
Edinburgh.     Its  author  was  a  teacher  of  age  J*  "* 

Had  Mr.  Brace  said,  Its  author  is  of  age,  he  would  have  been  understood 
to  mean  that  its  author  was  capable,  competent.  He  affirms,  however,  that 
its  author  was  a  teacher  of  age,  and,  from  the  context,  seems  to  wish  to 
mean  a  teacher  well  stricken  in  years  ! 

"  In  its  general  outline,  in  the  arrangement  of  the  several 
parts,  and  in  the  manner  of  presenting  each,  it  does  indeed 
correspond  in  some  degree  with  Lennie's  Grammar." 

JoAB  Brace's  Grammar. 

1.  "  Correspond  ivith*^  imports  reciprocation  in  action — ^but  Mr.  Brace 
uses  it  to  express  similarity,  likeness  ! 

2.  *^  Of  age"  means  old  enough  to  act  for  oneself — ^but  Mr.  Brace  em- 
ploys it  to  express  the  idea  of  being  too  old  to  act  for  oneself!  I  know  as 
little  of  Mr.  Brace  as  he  seems  to  know  of  English  grammar.  As  a  man, 
he  may  be  of  age.    But  as  an  author,  he  is  certainly  a  minor  ! 

Should  what  is  here  said,  be  considered  by  him  as  an  attack  upon  his  book, 
I  should  be  glad  to  correspond  with  him  upon  the  subject;  and  I  will  now 
pledge  myself  to  demonstrate  even  to  himself,  that  his  book  does  not  cor- 
respond either  in  frikciples,  or  stxle  to  the  grammar  of  the  English 
Language. 

"  Its  author  was  a  teacher  of  age^  of  experience^  in  teach 
ing,  and  of  uncommon  professional  tact." 

In  the  second  agnomeclad,  of  experience,  of  is  well  used  ;  but  the  whole 
mono  is  redundant.  "  A  teacher  of  ag€''  was  intended  to  signify  a  teacher 
of  experience :  hence  the  mono,  "  of  experience^  is  nothing  but  a  correct 
way  of  expressing  what  Mr.  Brace  had  already  expressed  in  an  incorrect 
way  ! 

"  In  teachin^^  is  as  redundant  as  is  the  mono,  "  of  experience/* — hence 
as  useless  in  this  sentence,  as  is  his  Grammar  in  the  world. 

[]Its  author  was  a  teacher]  (of  experience)  (in  teaching.) 


192  CONDICTION    OF   NEPOECLADS. 

Is  there  any  thing  more  in  the  above  three  monos,  than  there  is  in  the  fol 
lowing  two  1 

**  Its  author  was  a  teacher  of  experience. 

and  of  uncommon  ^ro/es5ion«/ tact." 

This  is  the  conclusion  of  the  above  sentence,  and  is  no  doubt  intended 
to  impart  a  finish,  a  garnishing,  to  the  whole.  But  of  what  essential  ser- 
vice is  the  word,  professionalP  Is  it  not  as  important  to  insert  ^^profes- 
sional" before  experience^  as  it  is  to  put  it  before  tact  ? 

Its  author  was  a  teacher  of  professional  experience. 

The  word,  teacher,  shows  that  the  experience  intended,  is  an  experience 
in  the  profession  of  teaching.  And  would  not  this  corme,  teacher,  show 
also  that  the  tact  intended  by  Mr.  Brace,  is  tact  in  the  same  profession  ? 

Its  author  was  a  teacher  of  much  tact. 

Is  it  necessary  to  add  the  mono,  in  teaching  ? 

Its  author  was  a  teacher  of  much  tact  in  teaching. 

The  use  o(  prof essional  is  pedantic,  axid  pleonastic,  and  reminds  me  of 
the  following  encomium : 

"  My  brother  is  a  broom-maker,  of  uncommon  broom-making  skill !" 
"  Its  author  is  a  teacher  of  age,  of  experience  in  teaching,  and  of  xxn- 
common professional  tact."     That  is, 

My  brother  is  an  old  broom-maker,  of  experience  in  m,aking 
brooms,  and  of  uncommon  broom-making  tact ! 

Now,  in  these  days  of  retrenchment,  would  not  the  following  be  more 
acceptable  ? 

My  brother  is  a  broom-maker  of  experience,  and  uncommon 
skill. 

This  principle  of  retrenchment  applied  to  the  sentence  of  Mr.  Brace, 
would  greatly  diminish  his  engine,  without  any  subtraction  from  its  burden, 
or  powers. 

Its  author  was  a  teacher  of  experience,  and  uncommon  tact. 
The  redundant  parts,  then,  are — of  age,  in  teaching  of,  and  prof essional  / 
What  a  waste  of  matter,  and  a  crush  of  words  ! 
Under  page  5,  is  the  following : 

*'  This  the  author  is  ready  to  acknowledge,  and  he  would 
express  a  hope  that  by  an  approval  of  the  present  arrangement, 
the  public  may  show  themselves  prepared  for  the  full  develop- 
ment of  the  perfect  plan." 

From  this  sentence,  it  seems  that  the  book  already  published  by  Mr. 
Brace,  is  only  ike  first  ray  of  that  luminary  which  is  to  wind  up  the  catas- 
trophe of  illustration,  after  this  mere  gleam  shall  have  prepared  the  benighted 
vision  of  the  "public  themselves'^  for  the  blazing  beams  "of  his  perfect 
plan !" 


COND^CTtON   OF    NEPpBCJ.AIJ%  193t 

I'he  British  English  grammarians  have  said  much — their  extravagance 
dampens  the  spirits  of  the  pupil  at  the  very  threshold  of  his  study  ;  and 
their  incongruities,  and  palpable  contradictions  force  him  from  the  sound, 
and  sober  exercise  of  his  judgment.  They  have  founded  their  system  upon 
principles  which  have  been  demonstrated  false.  This  is  certainly  a  matter 
of  regret.  But  it  is  matter  of  astonishment,  and  lamentation,  to  find  so 
many  Americans  labouring  to  improve  these  radical  defects  by  varying  the 
size,  style,  and  mode  of  the  British  essays.  Mr.  Brace  says,  that  his 
system  is  built  upon  the  basis  of  Lennie's. 

"It  has  been  already  stated  that  this  Grammar  is  arranged 
on  the  basis  of  Lennie's  Grammar." 

.  Had  Mr.  Brace  erected  a  superstructure  upon  the  basis  of  Lennie's  work, 
he  would  have  furnished  another  instance  of  building  upon  sand  !  But  he 
has  not  only  not  built  upon  Lennie's  foundation,  hut  he  has  not  built  upon 
any  foundation  !  He  is  without  a  basis,  and  may  be  swept  off  by  a  sin- 
gle imff  of  the  critic's  breath  !  He  is  not  only  without  a  foundation,  but 
without  a  superstructure  also — his  title  page  is  a  door  without  a  temple, 
without  a  hinge  upon  which  to  turn,  or  a  beam  on  which  to  hang.  What  he 
calls  his  system,  is  condemned  matter,  abstruse  beyond  the  powers  of  illus- 
tration, and  tangled  beyond  the  skill  of  human  method  ;  benumbing  to  the 
judgment,  and  enslaving  to  the  memory  of  the  pupil.  But,  then,  Mr, 
Brace  is  yet  in  a  state  of  incubation — order  is  yet  to  be  brought  out  of 
chax)s  ;  in  a  word,  "  the  perfect  plan"  is  to  come  forth  :  the  author  has  pro- 
mised, and  it  would  be  infidelity  not  to  believe  !  Chasms  are  yet  to  be 
filled ;  and  crooked  is  to  be  made  straight.  There  is,  then,  a  day  of  triumph 
for  English  Grammar.  Let  it  come — I  long  to  see  error  exchanged  for 
truth,  confusion  for  method,  contradiction  for  harmony,  absurdity  for  con^ 
sistency,  and  foolishness  for  wisdom.  But  when  I  consider  that  this  great 
work  is  to  be  accompHshed  by  the  author  of  the  following  sentence : 

"  Its  author  was  a  teacher  of  agd  of  experience  in  teach' 
ingf  and  of  uncommon  prof essio7ial  tact," 

I  feel  guilty  of  the  sin  of  unbelief/  Mr.  Brace — to  produce  a  perfect 
Grammar,  a  perfect  book — he  that  is  not  able  to  write  one  correct  sentence  !! 
The  great  pretensions  of  such  simplifiers,  that  their  coiintless  modifications 
of  Murray's,  or  of  Lennie's,  absurdities,  destroy  the  fundamental  rotten- 
ness of  the  British  system,  are  lamentable  as  the  sure  proof  of  unsound 
minds.  And,  inasmuch  as  these  overgrown  pretensions  influence  the  credu- 
lous, and  unwary,  they  are  hostile  to  the  advancement  of  science,  and 
destructive  as  a  bane  to  public  utility.  Did  I — could  I  believe  these  new 
modellers  meritorious,  I  would  bid  them  God  speed.  But  knowing  as  I  do, 
that  they  are  engaged  in  an  enterprise  which  even  the  angels  of  heaven 
tould  not  prosecute  with  any  success,  I  should  rejoice  to  witness  the  spire 
tf  their  fame  crumble  into  dust,  and  the  schools  of  our  country  liberated 
"rom  the  mental  bonds  which  these  men,  in  their  rage  to  become  authors, 
kave  laboured  to  rivet  upon  American  children.  (Let  those  who  wish  to 
ee  what  the  army  of  new  modellers  of  rotten  systems,  have  done  for  the 
Miuseof  grammar,  read  *'  Brown's  Appkal." 


194 


CONDICTION   OP   NEPOECLADS. 


Illustration  of  the  condiction 
of  the  nepoeclads  which  be- ^ 
gin  with  with. 


With  (from  withe.) 

I.  Conjunctive     Ru-dica 

n.  Means  E-dicatory. 


1.  He  writes  letters         -        -        -  (with  a  pen.) 
DocTHiiTE. — In  order  to  be  better  understood  on  with,  I  shall  connect  it 
with  without,  its  opponent  nepoeclide. 

I.  1.  He  writes   letters  uoith  a 
pencil. 

2.  He  makes  coats  with  a  nee- 
dle. 

3.  He  made  a  coat  with  fifly 
buttons. 

He  writes  letters  without  a 
pencil. 

He  makes  coats  without  a 
needle. 
He  made  a  coat  without 
buttons. 

In  the  first  two  instances  with  is  made  upon  the  withe  which  is  employed 
as  an  instrument  for  bringing  one  stake  up  to  the  other. 

In  the  third,  with  is  made  upon  the  act  of  bringing  one  stake  to  the  other 
by  means  of  the  withe. 

Without  is  made  upon  the  act  of  drawing  one  stake  from  the  other  by 
means  of  the  withe. 

Having  stated  these  facts,  it  may  be  well  to  examine  the  philosophy  of 
this  application  of  with,  and  without. 

You  find  a  stake  around  which  is  fixed  the  bushy  part  of  a  young  sap- 
ling. Upon  this  sapling  the  word,  with,  is  made.  This  word,  however,  is 
made  not  so  often  upon  this  sapling  itself  as  it  is  upon  the  action  which  the 
fence-maker,  or  farmer  performs  by  means  of  the  sapling  as  the  instrument 
in  bringing  one  stake  up  to  the  other.  The  word,  withe,  was  primarily  the 
name  of  this  sapling ;  and  from  the  fact  that  this  sapling  was  the  instru- 
ment, or  means  used  by  farmers  in  bringing  one  stake  to  the  other  in  fence- 
making,  with,  the  name  of  this  instrument,  has  come  to  denote  instrument, 
or  means,  in  very  many  instances  in  our  language  ;  as,  He  makes  pens  with 
his  knife,  He  walks  with  a  cane,  He  satisfied  his  creditor  for  some  time 
with  fair  promises. 

Here  the  simple,  and  obvious  use  of  with,  is  to  express  that  the  knife, 
the  cane,  and  the  promises  are  to  their  respective  agents  what  the  fence- 
maker's  withe  or  sapling  is  to  him  ;  namely,  an  instrument,  or  a  means  in 
accomplishing  his  deeds,  or  operations  in  fence-making. 

Now,  as  withe  was  the  name  of  the  means,  the  instrument  by  which 
the  fence-maker  brought  one  stake  to  the  other,  it  was  quite  natural  that 
with  should  come  to  be  applied  to  the  action  itself- — Hence  in  cases  where 
the  speaker  desires  to  represent  that  one  thing  is  connected  to  another  much 
in  the  same  way  in  which  one  stake  is  connected  to  the  other  by  means  of 
the  young  withe,  he  tells  the  auditor  to  withe  this  already  connected,  this 
already  withed  thing,  to  the  other ;  as,  John  went  with  his  bundle. 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS.  195 

Here  it  is  not  the  intention  of  the  speaker  that  he  who  is  addressed,  shall 
actually  ivitke,  or  bind  this  bundle  to  John,  except  in  mind.  The  speaker 
wishes  to  show  that  the  bundle  is  gone  as  well  as  its  owner — and  to  do 
this,  he  puts  the  bundle  in  such  a  situation,  or  condition  in  relation  to  its 
owner,  as  renders  it  impossible  for  the  owner  to  go,  and  the  bundle  to  remain 
behind.  Hence,  after  asserting  that  John  has  gone,  he  tells  the  hearer  to 
withe,  tie,  or  bind  the  bundle  to  him.     "  John  went  witit  his  bundle." 

That  is,  do  you  withe  the  bundle  to  John  as  the  fence  maker  withes  on© 
stake  to  the  other. 

"John  went  without  his  bundle."  This  proposition  proceeds  upon  the 
ground  that  it  had  been  presumed,  or  expected  that  John  would  have  taken 
his  bundle  with  him.  And  to  show  that  this  was  not  the  case,  the  speaker 
asserts  that  John  went,  and  then  tells  the  hearer  to  place  the  bundle  in  such 
a  condition  in  relation  to  John,  that  he  could  not  have  taken  it  along.  John 
went  without  his  bundle.  That  is,  withe  away  his  bundle  from  him — teat 
it  off.  As  with,  in  its  conjunctive  import,  is  represented  by  drawing,  by 
means  of  a  withe,  one  stake  to  the  other,  so  without,  in  its  disjunctive  im- 
port, is  represented  by  drawing,  by  means  of  a  wither  one  stake  from  the 
other. 

2.  "  And  the  angel  measured  the  city  (with  a  golden  reed.") 

3.  Is  not  his  conscience  seared         -  Twith  a  hot  iron  ?) 

4.  He,  like  others,  eats    -         -  (with  his  teeth.) 

5.  The  rust  of  iron  may  be  eaten  off  (with  vinegar.) 

6.  "  She  anointed  his  feet  with  oint- 

ment, and  wiped  them   -         -  (with  her  hair.") 

Ointment  is  not  the  means,  but  the  material  used — hair  is  the  instru- 
ment, or  means  with  which  she  wiped  his  feet. 

7.  The  gentleman  convinced  me      -  (with  his  arguments.) 

8.  She  sewed  these  pieces       -         -  (with  a  needle.) 

9.  Sew  the  buttons         -         -         -  (with  strong  thread.) 

10.  The  coat  was  made    -         -         -  (with  silk.) 

11.  He  paid  the  demand  -         -         -  (with  this  money.) 

12.  They  deceived  me      -         -         -  (with  rare  pretensions.) 

13.  What  went  ye  out  to  see-— a  reed 

shaken  ....  (with  the  wind  ?) 

14.  They  raised  their  bread       -         -  (with  yeast.) 

15.  The  man  was  cured  -         -         -  (with  this  ointment.) 

(See  example  6.) 

16.  Judas  betrayed  him    -  -  -  (with  a  kiss.j 

17.  Men  become  learned  -  -  -  (with  study.) 

18.  Fire  is  extinguished   -  -  -  (with  water.) 

II.  Cause  E-dicatort. 

19.  "  They  are  distressed         -         -  (with  pain.") 


196 


CONDICTION   OF    NEPOECLADS, 


20.  Martin  was  elevated  -         -         -  (with  joy.)  "••  ^   ■-'- 

21.  The  grass  was  injured        -         -  (with  the  frost.) 

1.  With  thou  the  pain  as  the  cause  of  the  distress. 

2.  With  thou  the  joy  as  the  cause  of  the  elevation. 

3.  With  thou  the  frost  as  Ulae  cause  of  the  injury. 

22.  He  is  offended  -         -         -         -  (with  Samuel.) 

23.  He  is  now  ill     -         -         -         -  (with  a  fever.) 

II.  Appendant  E-dicatort. 


24.  Make  me  a  coat 

25.  He  purchased  a  farm  - 

26.  That  lad  has  a  knife  - 

27.  He  found  a  silver  watch 

28.  He  has  a  steel  watch-chain - 

29.  My  teacher  gave  me  this  book 

30.  My  father  sends  you  this  note 
31.1  want  a  cloth  -         -         - 

32.  He  has  a  cane  -         -         - 

33.  Give  the  word  -         -         - 

34.  1  like  books       -         -     '    - 

35.  He  wrote  -         -         - 

36.  They  will  return 

37.  I  want  a  Geography  - 

38.  He  shot  six  birds 


-  (with  buttons.) 

-  (with  a  house.) 

-  (with  four  blades.) 

-  (with  a  gold  chain.) 

-  (with  a  gold  key.)       '' 

-  (with  good  advice.) 

-  (with  his  respects.) 

-  (with  a  black  colour.) 

-  (with  an  ivory  head.) 

-  (with  its  import.) 

-  (with  a  good  margin.) 

-  (with  great  accuracy.) 

-  (with  reluctance.) 

-  (with  an  atlas.) 

-  (with  black  feathers.) 


(with  great  advantage. ) 


That  is,  append  the  feathers  to  the  birds. 

39.  He  may  peruse  this  book    - 
That  is,  join,  or  with  to  him  great  advantage  as  an  appendage. 

40.  I  have  returned  -         -         -  (with  an  apology.)    . 
That  is,  with  an  apology  to  me  as  an  appendage. 

41.  We  shall  sketch  the  contents  of 

this  chapter  -         -         -         -  (with  great  rapidity.) 
ThSt  is,  append  the  great  rapidity  to  the  sketching. 


42. 
43. 

44. 


45. 
46. 


'*  The  first  beast  was  like  a  lion 
"  I  saw  a  beast  like  a  bear  - 

John   speaks   of  a  leopard-like 
monster         -         -         - 

and  - 
its  back. 

That  man  was  in  town 

He  has  built  him  a  house     - 


(with  eagle's  wings.") 
(with  three  ribs)  in  its 


-  (with  four  heads,) 

-  (with  four  wings)  upon 

-  (With  his  two  servants.) 

-  (with  an  iron  roof.) 


T  CONDICTION   OE   NEPOECLADS.  197 

11.  Matter  E-dicatory. 

47.  The  house  was  filled  -         -         -  (with  smoke.) 

Smoke  is  the  matter,  or  material  with  which  the  house  is  filled.  The 
idea  is,  with  thou,  reader,  the  smoke  to  the  house  as  the  material  with  which 
it  was  filled. 

48.  "And  she  anointed  his  feet  -         -  (with  ointment.") 

49.  "And  the  bottles  were  filled         -  (with  air.") 

50.  The  measure  is  now  filled  -         -  (with  corn.) 

51.  "  Henry  was  filled     -         -         -  (with  fear.") 

II.  Presence  E-dicatory. 

52.  Henry  was  sitting      -        -        -  (with    me,)     in    my 

house. 
That  is,  voith  me  to  him  as  the  one  in  whose  presence  he  was. 

53.  When  I  said  that,  John  was         -  (with  us.) 

n.  Concomitant  E-dicatory. 

54.  The  gentleman  travelled     -        -  (with  me)  to  Boston. 
Join,  or  add  me  as  a  concomitant,  as  his  companion  on  the  road. 

55.  I  went  to  Boston        -        -        -  (with  my  brother.) 
With  denotes  a  connection — and  the  context  shows  that  connection  to  be 

that  of  a  concomitant.    "  With  my  brother"     That  is,  j§in  him  to  me  as 
a  concomitant,  as  my  companion  on  the  way. 

56.  "  This  apple  grew  upon  the  same 

branch  -         -         -         -         -  (with  that.") 

57.  That  man  was  in  town       -        -  (with   his    wife.)   See 

J?a?.45. 

n.  In  THE  Society-op  E-dicatory. 

58.  I  like  to  live       -        -        -        -  ^with  such  neighbors.) 

59.  There  is  no  living      -         -         -  (with  such  a  man.) 

II.  Reciprocation  E-dicatory. 

60.  He  corresponds  -         -         -  (with  his  brother.) 

It  is  to  be  lamented  that  even  grammar  makers  do  not  understand  the 
reciprocating  character  of  with.  Before  me  is  a  system  of  English  grammar 
by  JoAB  Brace,  in  which  is  the  following  paragraph : 

**  In  its  general  outline,  in  the  arrangement  of  the  several 
parts,  and  in  the  manner  of  presenting  each,  it  does  indeed 
correspond  in  some  degree,  with  Lennie's  Grammar." 


198 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLAD^. 


"It  does  indeed  correspond  with  T Jennie's  grammar !" 

Mr.  Brace  wishes  to  say,  that  there  is  an  analogy,  a  similurily,  in  some 
respects,  between  his  grammar,  and  Lennie's.  But,  as  the  complex  sign, 
"  corresponds  with"  does  not  mean  similarity,  it  is  somewhat  surprising 
to  find  it  employed  to  express  the  analogy  between  the  worics  of  these  two 
compilers.  English  grammar,  says  Mr.  Brace,  teaches  the  principles  of 
the  English  language.  And  is  it  English  grammar,  to  use  a  sign  of  recip- 
rocation in  letter  ivriting,  to  express  a  similarity?  Corresponds  to  denotes 
similarity,  likeness,  analogy — but  '^'^  correspond^  urith'''  means  reciprocal 
action !  For  instance,  this  hat  corresponds  to  that  in  size.  John's  state- 
ment corresponds  to  his  brother's  account  of  the  same  event. 

But,  to  say,  as  Mr.  Brace  does,  that  this  hat  corresponds  with  that  hat,  is 
to  put  the  two  hats  into  an  epistolary  correspondence  \  I  do  not  object  to 
this,  however,  on  the  ground  i\idXhats  are  ill  qualified  for  this  task,  for  many 
of  them  write  better  than  their  heads — I  object  to  the  use  of  corresponds 
with  by  Mr.  Brace,  not  only  because  it  does  not  express  what  he  wishes  to 
communicate,  but  because  it  expresses  what  is  entirely  dissimilar  to  that 
which  he  desires  to  say. 

61.  "The  connection  of  one  piece  -  (with  the  other  piece,) 

is  obvious." 

Where  the  connection  is  reciprocal,  with  should  be  used  as  in  Pig.  I. 

he  d  Part  a  is  framed  into  part  b 

by  tenors,  and  mortise ;  and 

part  h  into  part  a,  by  the  same 


Where  the  relation  is  not  re- 
ciprocal, to  should  be  used  as 
in  Fig.  II. 

Here  c  is  framed  intoe^,-  but 
d  is  not  framed  into  c»  . 
In  speaking  of  the  two  parts  of  Fig.  I.  in  reference  one  to  the  other, 
loiih  should  be  used  ;  as,  part  a  has  an  obvious  relation  with  part  h.     Or, 
part  h  has  an  obvious  relation  with  part  a. 

In  speaking  of  the  parts  of  Fig.  II.  to  should  be  used ;  as,  the  relation 
of  part  c  to  part  d,  is  obvious. 

It  may  be  said,  however,  that  part  d  has  a  relation  to  part  c.  True,  but 
the  relation  of  part  d  to  part  c,  is  different  from  that  of  part  c  to  part  di 
part  c  has  a  branch,  a  clados,  a  dependent  fTSime-work  relation,  to  part  d — 
but  part  d  has  a  cormos,  a  trunk,  a  sustaining  frame-work  relation,  to  part 
c.  Part  d  is  the  basis,  the  corme — and  part  c  is  a  clade,  a  branch,  inserted 
into  this  corme. 

In  Fig.  I.  the  case  is  different — there  is  no  corme  in  the  figure ;  part  a 
has  a  tenon,  and  is  framed  into  part  b — and  part  b  also  has  a  tenon,  and  is 
framed  into  part  a.  A  corme,  a  ba^is,  can  have  no  tenon-^-a.  corme  cannot 
be  framed  into  another  part. 

»'The  relation  of  the  branches  with  the  trunk,"  is  not  good — the  branch 
relation  is  not  reciprocated  by  the  trunk :  the  trunk  does  not  hold  a  branch 
relation  to  the  branches,  as  the  branches  do  to  the  trunk. 


CGNDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS.  IB$ 

62.  "  The  connection  of  the  child  -  (with   his    parents,)   is 

close." 

It  may  be  close  ;  but  as  it  is  not  reciprocal,  to  should  be  used  fcH:  with. 
The  offspring  relation  which  the  child  bears  to  the  parent,  is  hot  recipro- 
cated by  the  parent — the  parents  do  not  bear  an  offspring,  but  a  parental'i 
relation  to  the  child. 

63.  The  relation  of  one  brother       -  (with  another  brother,) 

is  tender. 

64.  **  The  connection  of  a  brother  -  (with   a  sister)   iV  also 

tender.^^ 

65.  The  relation  of  ^ixty        -        -  (with  six  tens)   is  ob- 

vious. 
There  is  a  relation  of  equality  between  sixty  units,  and  six  tens.    This 
relation  ia  reciprocal— for  as  sixty  is  equal  to  six  tens,  so  six  tens  are  equal 
to  sixty. 

66.  The  relation  of  six  -        -         -  (with  five)  is  obvious.  . 

The  relation,  here,  is  a  numeral  connection — and  must  be  reciprocal — 
for,  although  five  units  do  not  equal  six  units ;  yet  they  reciprocate  this  nu- 
meral connection  as  far  as  they  go.  Five  bears  the  relation  of  a  numerat 
inferiority  to  six.    Six  bears  the  relation  of  a  numeral  superiority  \x>Jive, 

67.  "  He  compared  pleasure  -         -  (with  pain.") 

Although  jo/easure,  and^ain,  are  by  no  means  analogous  in  themselves, 
they  may  be  similar  in  their  results  upon  whatever  they  exert  an  influence : 
hence,  although,  as  emotions,  they  cannot  be  compared,  yet  as  causes,  pro- 
ducing effects,  they  may  be  compared.  For  instance,  pleasure  may  produce, 
a  want  of  appetite,  so  also  may  pain. 

68.  '*  This  cloth  compares  well         -  (with  that  cloth.") 

69.  Let  us  compare  his  arguments     -  (with  reason.) 

That  is,  let  us  see  how  far  the  arguments  reciprocate  the  attributes  of 
reason  with  reason,  and  how  far  reason  reciprocates  itself  with  his  argu- 
ments. In  short,  wherever  any  two,  or  more  things  are  brought  together 
either  actually  or  mentally,  with  a  view  to  ascertain  their  agreement,  or 
their  disagreement,  in  any  particular,  or  particulars,  with  should  be  used ; 
as.  Let  us  compare  hla4:k  with  white. 

Whether  there  is  any  agreement,  or  not — with  should  be  used  where  the 
speaker  intends  to  speak  of  the  things  as  having  an  agreement.  But  where 
a  comparison  is  made  without  any  desire,  or  intimation  to  ascertain  the  par- 
ticulars in  which  the  things  reciprocate,  or  to  ascertain  the  extent  to  which 
they  reciprocate  their  condition,  or  qualities,  to  should  be  used  instead  of 
with.  ,;; 

1.  Christ  is  compared  with  a  lamb. 
3.  Christ  is  compared  to  a  lamb. 
Ii)  the  first,  the  object  of  the  comparison,  is  to  ascertain,  or  to  show  in 
what  respects,  and  to  what  extent,  Christ,  and  a  Iamb  agree. 


200  CONPICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 

In  the  second,  the  object  of  the  comparison,  is  merely  to  illustrate  the 
innocence,  and  purpose  of  the  Redeemer,  in  relation  to  the  sins  of  the  world, 
for  which  he,  lamb-like,  was  to  be  offered  up. 

1.  When  illustration  is  the  object  of  the  comparison,  to 
should  be  used. 

2.  When  agreement  between  the  two  things,  compared,  is 
the  object  of  the  comparison,  with  should  be  used. 

1.  *'  Solon  compared  the  people  to  the  sea  ;  and  orators,  and 
counsellors,  to  the  wind, — the  sea  would  be  calm,  and  quiet,  if 
the  wind  would  not  trouble  it." — Bacon. 

2.  The  historian  compared  America  ivith  England. 

3.  He  compared  the  government  of  Great  Britain  with  that 
of  France. 

4.  Who  will  compare  this  rivulet  with  the  sea  ? 

5.  Historians  rarely  compare  the  second,  with  the  first 
temple. 

II.  Possession  E-dicatory.  .  - 

70.  I  would  trust  him       -         -         -  (with  my  horse.) 

71.  James  trusted  his  brother    -         -  (with  the  secret.) 

1.  That  is,  I  would  trust  him  with  the  actual  possession  of  my  horse. 

2.  That  is,  James  trusted  his  brother  with  the  possession  of  the  secret 

72.  Was  any  of  the  money  found      -  (with  the  thief?) 
That  is,  was  any  found  in  his  possession  ? 

73.  Have  you  a  knife       -        .         -  (with  you  ?)  .^ 
That  is,  is  there  a  knife  in  your  possession  at  this  time.                          -j, 

74.  They  found  the  silver  cup  -         -  (with  Joseph.)  ,;a 

75.  I  will  trust  him  -         -         -         -  (with  goods.) 

That  is,  I  will  allow  him  to  take,  to  have,  goods  upon  the  confidence 
which  I  have  in  his  disposition,  and  ability  to  pay  at  a  future  time. 

76.  I  am  here  -         -         -         -         -  (with  power)  to  act. 
That  is,  having  power,  possessing  power,  to  act. 

77.  James  went;  but  he  went  -         -  (with  your  permission.) 
That  is,  havingi  or  possessing,  your  permission  to  go. 

78.  "He  came         -         -        -        -  (with  full  authority)  to 

act." 
That  is,  having,  or  possessing  full  authority  to  act. 

II.  Concurrent  E-dicatory. 

79.  John  stole  the  apples  -         -         -  (with  his  brother.) 
The  act  was  a  joint  one — they .  took  the  apples  unitedli/t  coneurrentljf.   . 


;  CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS.  201 

80.  "And  there  was  a  great  company 

of  publicans,  and  others,  that 

sat  down        -         -         -         -  (with  him.") 

The  act  of  feasting  upon  the  banquet  which  Levi  prepared  for  Christ, 
was  a  joint  one — one  in  which  the  Redeemer  who  is  denoted  by  "  Arm," 
concurred.  Sat  down  (with  him.)  That  is,  with  thou  Jesus  to  the  others 
as  concurring  in  the  various  acts  at  the  table. 

81.  I  work  at  shoe-making         -         -  (with  my  brother.) 

"  Co7icurrent,^'  signifies  meeting  in  the  same  point ;  running,  or  acting 
together  J  united  in  action ;  contributing  to  the  same  event,  or  effect" 

82.  I  live         -         -         -         -         -  (with  my  sister.) 

My  sister,  apd  I  help  to  form  one  family,  the  same  family — ^^in  this  act,  we 
concur. 

83.  This  slave  lives  -         -         -  (with  his  master.) 
The  condiction  is  that  the  master  contributes  to  the  formation  of  the 

same  family  which  the  slave  helps  to  form — they  both  act  in  the  production 
of  the  same  thing.     In  this  act  they  are  concterrent. 

84.  Sarah  boards      -         -         -         .  (with  Mrs.  Davis.) 
There  is  a  concurrence  in  the  act  of  Mrs.  Davis,  and  that  of  Sarah — both 

aid  in  forming  the  same  family.     This  is  the  leading  idea  in  this  kind  of 
sentences. 

85.  John  studied  his  lesson       -         -  (with  me.) 

86.  James  went  through  college         -  (with  my  brother.) 
They  acted  concurrent  It/,  though  each  laboured  for  himself — they  contri- 
buted too  to  the  formation  of  the  same  college  family. 

87.  The  Indians  shot  John        •        -  (with  his  brother.) 

In  geometry,  a  figure  which  exactly  meets  every  part  of  another  figure, 
is  called  a  concurring  figure.  The  brother  in  fate,  in  condition,  exactly 
meets  John  in  fate,  in  condition.  Hence  the  brother  may  be  withed,  tied, 
or  bound,  to  John.  The  fate  of  the  brother,  like  a  concurrent  figure  in 
geometry,  meets  every  part  of  the  fate  of  John.  The  thing,  then,  which 
has  a  concurring  condition,  may  be  subjoined  by  with;  as,  John,  with  his 
mother,  is  sick. 

So  also  may  the  concurring  thing  be  subjoined  by  and;  as,  John,  and 
his  mother  is  sick.     (/«  is  right — are  is  common.) 

What,  then,  is  the  difference  between  "with,"  and  "and^    Both  denote 
that  the  condition  of  the  subjoined  thing,  concurs  with  that  of  the  antede- 
dent  thing  :  both  words,  too,  give  a  new  mono.     But,  then,  "  with'' 
gives  a  nepoeclad,  but  ''and,*'  a  poeclad.     We  do  not  say,  John 
went  with  I.    Nor  do  we  say,  [John]  (and  me  went,)     (We  say, 
[John  went]  (with  me.)     [John     ,     ]  (and /went.) 

Where  the  condition  is  concurrent  with  reference  to  the  sub- 
joined thing,  ♦* M>t7A,'' and  "and"  are  nearly  i\xe  same  in  Epidi' 
cology.  Both  words  convey  an  allusion  to  the  agreement,  to  the 
concurrenoef  of  the  subjoined  thing.    These  words,  however,  differ 


202  COXDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 

in  this — '-awe?"  in  all  cases,  indicates  concurrence  in  condition; 
whereas,  "wit/i"  has  many  other  imports.  In  other  words,  while 
"and,'^  in  its  application,  is  confined  to  those  instances,  where 
there  is  this  concurrence  to  which  with  may  allude,  "with"  is  ap- 
plied where  there  is  no  concurrence  whatever  in  the  condition  of 
the  subjoined  thing;  as,  John  walked  with  his  cane. 

The  condition  of  the  cane  is  not  concurrent  with  that  of  John. 

Again — " and,"  and  *^ with"  differ  in  this:  "and"  is  indicative 
of  an  additional  poetene,-  as,  [John  ,  ;]  (and  I  went,)  [John 
read  the  letter,]  (and  his  brother  read  it.)  That  is,  [John  went ;] 
(and  I  went.) 

"With"  however,  is  never  indicative  of  an  additional  poetene, 
of  an  additional  cordiction,-  as,  [John  went]  (^with  me,)  [John  read 
the  letter]  (with  his  brother.) 

In  each  poetrone,  there  is  but  one  poetene ;  in  the  first  exam- 
ple, there  are  two  poetenes  in  each  poetrone. 

1.  ["John         ,  ;]  (awe/ 1  went.") 

2.  [John  went]  {with  me.) 

These  two  poetrones  difier  in  another  point :  in  the  first,  it  is 
not  said  that  we  went  in  company,  that  we  went  together.  In  the 
second,  it  is  said  that  we  went  together.  To  say,  that  the  Indians 
shot  John,  and  his  brother,  is  not  to  say  that  the  Indians  shot  John 
with  his  brother.  In  the  first,  the  events  may  have  happened  at 
very  different  times,  and  in  very  different  places,  in  places  which 
throw  the  one  hundreds  of  miles  from  the  other.  In  the  second, 
the  events  must  have  happened  much  at  the  same  time,  and  in  the 
same  place,  i^AiVe  and  toAere  the  brother  and  John  were  together. 
"With,"  and  "and,"  then,  are  not-  synonymous  in  meaning,  much 
less  in  Syntiihology. 
What  is  the  difference  between  the  following  sentences  ] 

1.  Henry  purchased  a  horse  with  a  saddle. 

2.  Henry  purchased  a  horse,  and  a  saddle. 

A  very  obvious  difference  between  "  and,"  and  "  with,"  is  derived  from 
their  conjective  powers.  ''And'^  cannot  be  conjected  to  a  word,  whereas 
**  with"  can  be  conjected  to  nothing  but  ^word:  "and"  is  always  con- 
jected to  an  entire  mono,  whereas  "  with"  can  never  be  conjected  to  a  mono. 
Hence  "and"  is  a  »»onoclade,  while  "  with"  is  a  single-word  clade. 

88.  "John      -----  (with  his   horse)  was 

drowned." 

89.  "  IVIust  our  fortunes  be  twisted    -  (with     your     sinking 

fate?") 
Must  our  fortunes,  and  your  fate^  concur  in  fate  % 

90.  Our  condition  is  so  connected      -  (with  yours)  that  we 

must  sink,  or  swim  together. 

91.  Henry  purchased  a  horse     -       -  (with  asaddle."^ 


CONDICTION   OP    NEPOECLADS.  20$ 

92.  "Simon  Peter  {writes)  to  them 

that  have  obtained  the  like  pre- 
cious faith     -      ,  -         -   .      -  (with  us.") 

In  what  do  they  concur  1  in  the  act  of  receiving,  in  the  act  of  obtaining  T 
no.  Peter,  and  those  whom  he  includes  with  himself,  under  the  word,  us, 
concur  with  those  to  whom  he  wrote,  in  this — they  had  all  obtained  the 
same  kind  of  faith :  in  the  kind  of  faith  obtained,  they  agreed,  they  concur- 
red. This  is  an  important  instance,  for  this  must  either  be  rejected  as  bad 
— or  the  following  must  be  received  as  good  : 

*♦  Henry  got  the  same  kind  of  book  with  James. 

Identity  in  the  kind  of  their  books,  is  that  in  which  Henry,  and  James 
concur.  Identity,  then,  in  the  thing  possessed,  is^ood  ground  for  the  use 
of  with. 

II.  Contest  Ex-e-dic-a-tory.   ~ 

93.  "  He  will  lie      -         -         -         -  (with    any   man)   liv- 

ing."    Against. 

94.  "  The  champions  fought    -        -  (with  each  other)   an 

hour."    Against. 

95.  These  men  have  long  struggled  -  (with  adversity.) 

Against. 

96.  This  horse  ran  -         -         -         -  (with  that         ,         .) 

Against. 

These  horses  are  connected — they  concur  in  their  situation,  inasmuch  as 
one  is  pitted  against  the  other. 

II.  In-fatour-of  E-dicatory. 

97.  "  Fear  not,  for  I  am    -         -         -  (with  thee.") 

[Gen.  Xxvi. 

98.  "  Go — and  may  the  Lord  be        -  (with  you.") 

99.  "  He  fell  not,  for  the  Lord  was     -  (with  him.") 

II.    PWRPOSE  E-DICATORY. 

100.  **  I  went  to  Boston   -         -         -  (with  a  view)   to  see 

him." 

101.  "  Henry  came  to  my  house        -  (with  a  view)   to  see 

me." 

102.  "  Did  he  seem  to  act  -  (with  a  determination) 

to  succeed?" 

II.  In-refkrence-to  E-dicatory. 

103.  "  Has  Mr.  Jones  don€  any  thing  (with   respect)   to  his 

claim?" 


204  CONDICTION   OP   NEPOECLADS. 

104.  "  Henry  Davis  is  resolved  to  do 

nothing         -         -        -         -  (with   regard)    to    his 
own  election." 

II.  Conversant  E-dicatory. 

105.  John  acquainted  his  mother       -  (with  his  success.) 
Doctrine. — Where  the  superior  mono  contains  a  word  which  imports  a 

high  degree  of  knowledge,  with  begins  the  clad  which  mentions 

the  thing  of  which  this  high  degree  of  knowledge  is  possessed  by  some  one 
mentioned  in  the  superior  mono  ;  as, 

"  John  acquainted  his  mother  (with  his  success.) 
Acquainted  is  in  the  superior  mono,  and  denotes  the  giving  of  a  critical 
knowledge  by  John  to  his  mother.     Success  is  the  clad  thing  of 

which  the  mother  possesses  a  minute  knowledge.  The  word,  acquainted, 
denotes  the  act  of  making  the  mother  familiar,  conversant,  with  the  success 
of  the  son — hence  tvith  is  used  instead  of  of.  But  why  is  with  preferable 
to  of?  With  means  a  full,  unreserved  connection.  He  acquainted  his 
mother  with  his  success.  That  is,  with,  bind,  tie,  his  success  to  his  mother. 
Why  use  a  word  which  imports  tihis  close  connection  of  his  success  to  the 
mother  1  Because  the  word,  acquainted,  in  the  superior  mono,  means  that 
degree  of  knowledge  which  corresponds  to  the  close  connection  of  which 
vjtth  is  the  sign. 

*'  John  acquainted  his  mother  of  his  success." 
With  imports  that  the  success,  entire,  is  withed,  bound,  to  the  mother. 
Of,  however,  imports  no  such  thing,  no  such  idea.  Of  imports  that 
the  success  is  a  source  of  the  act  of  acquainting  the  mother.  .  Beyond 
this,  of  does  not  go.  The  nature  of  the  caae  shows  that  the  success 
is  the  subject  source — hence,  as  far  a  subject  is  a  source  of  knowledge, 
the  success  is  a  source  of  the  mother's  knowledge  of  her  son's  success.  But 
the  word,  acquainted,  means  the  giving  of  a  minute  knowledge ;  and,  as 
of  does  not  indicate  the  degree  of  knowledge'  of  which  the  success  is  a 
source,  of,  and  acquainted  do  not  correspond — hence  of  should  not  be  used. 
The  import  of  the  sentence  with  of  for  with,  is  that  John  spoke  of  his  sue-* 
cess  to  his  mother.  That  is,  he  mentioned  it  to  her.  But  the  import  of 
the  sentence  with  with  in  the  place  of  of  is  that  John  made  his  mother 
familiar  with,  well  acquainted,  with  the  entire  subject  of  his  success.  There 
is  nonepoeclidein  the  language,  which  denotes  a  closer,  and  a /u/^r  connec- 
tion than  with.  This  may  be  seen  from  instances  which  fall  under  the 
Appendage  Edicatory. 

1.  The  trunk  with  its  branch,  was  taken. 
The  branch  is  a  part  of  the  tree — hence  with  is  employed  to  denote  this 
natural,  and  close  relation. 

2.  He  wrote  the  letter  with  accuracy. 

Here  the  accuracy  is  as  minutely  connected  to  the  action  of  writing,  as 

the  branch  is  to  the  trunk — and  the  connection  is  denoted  by  with.     An 

appendage  is  not  any  thing,  or  any  being  that  is  joined  to  another  thing,  or 

being.     An  appendage  is  a  branch  thing  which  is  joined  to  another  thing 


CONDICTION   OP   NEPOECLADSk  205 

as  a  part  of  the  other  thing,  as  a  roof  to  a  house,  a  key  to  a  lock,  a  chaxn  ta 
a  watch,  a  mode  to  a  subject,  «&c. 

106.  "  Mr.  Webster  is  familiar  -  (with  all  our  constitu- 

tions.") 

107.  **  He  was  a  man  of  sorrow,  and 

acquainted     -         -        -         -  (with  grief.") 
0/is  used  before  sorrow,  because  there  is  no  word  in  the  super      mono 
which  imports  any  degree  of  knowledge,  much  less  a  high  degree.     The 
mtroduction  of  such  a  word;  would  throw  out  of,  and  introduce  with  .• 
He  was  a  man  acquainted  with  sonrow,  and  grief. 

II.  Forbearance  E-dicatory. 

108.  "Reason  would  that  I   should 

bear  -  .         -         _         .  (with  you.") 

[Acts  xviii. 
lOd.  •'  Shall  not  God  avenge  his  elect, 

though  he  bear  long        -         -  (with  them  ?") 

[^LuKE  xviii. 

110.  **  Would  to  God  you  could  bear    (with  me,)  a  little  in 

my  folly."— 2  Cor.  xi.  1. 
It  may  be  thought  that  the  idea  of  forbearancCj  is  derived  from  the 
eladef  bear.    This,  however,  is  so  far  from  the  truth  that  the  notion  of 

forbearance,  is  commenced  in  the  clad,  with  you.    This  will  be 

obvious  from  a  little  attrition  to  the  various  imports  of  the  word,  bear. 

Bear,  to  produce  fruit,  to  act  in  any  character,  to  make  haste,  as  to  bear  a 

hand,  to  show,  or  exhibit,  as  to  bear  testimony,  &c.  &c. 

II.  Tutorage  E-nioATORT. 

111.  Henry  Davis  Studied  law  ^        -  (with Daniel  Webster.) 

112.  Mr.  Joab  Brace  must  have  studied 

grammar       -        -        -        .  (with  Lennie)  himself. 
That  is,  under  the  care,  instruction,  or  tutorage,  of  Lennie. 

113.  The  professor  of  religion  should 

show  in  his  daily  intercourse 
with  men,  that  he  has  been     -  (with  Christ.) 
That  is,  that  he  has  been  under  the  tutorage  of  Christ 

114.  "  From  the  statement  of  this  wit- 

ness, I  presume   that  he   has 

been (with  the  defendant.") 

That  is,  that  the  witness  has  been  under  the  tutorage  of  the  defendant. 
II.  Contrast  E-dicatory. 

115.  ("With  the  Unitarian,)     -        -  Christ  is  a  mere  man  " 

^  '     18 


206  CONDICTION   OP    NEPOECLADS. 

That  is,  with,  join,  or  add,  the  Unitarians  to  Christ ;  and  he  is  a  mere 
man  :  Christ  is  a  mere  man  with  the  Unitarians. 

This  form  of  expression,  however,  suggests  that  there  are  persons  who 
in  their  connection  with  Christ,  make  him  a  God :  hence  the  notion  of  con- 
trast. 

116.  (With  the  Presbyterians,)  -         -  Christ  is  God  himself. 

117.  (*' With  the  industrious  man,)    -  there      is      generally 

enough." 

118.  (*' With  the  idle  man,)      -        -  there  is  generally  too 

little." 

'*  With  him,)  -         .         -         .  nothing  is  right." 
"  With  his  brother,)         -        -  nothing  is  wrong." 
["  With  the  ancients,)       -         -  tragedy  was  originally 
a  piece  of  religious  worship." 

Here  the  ancients,  and  modems  are  contrasted  in  reference  to  their  different 
views  of  tragedy.  The  original  estimation  in  which  the  ancients  held  tra- 
gedy, and  more  modern  views  of  the  subject,  axe  contrasted. 

122.  ("  With  the  Sioux  Indians,)  -  dogs  are  beasts  of  bur- 
den." 

12^.  ("  With  all  savage  tribes,)  -  skins  are  converted  into 

clothing." 

124.  ('*  With  some  people,)      -         -  one    remedy    is    em- 

ployed for  all  diseases." 

125.  f"  With  a  philosopher,)    -         -  demonstration  is  joy." 

126.  ("  With  you,)  -         -         -         -  the  word  of  the  Lord 

has  free  course." 
Here  it  is  intimated  that  the  reverse  is  the  case  in  some  places.     The 
same  mono,  however,  in  the  following,  is  not  of  the  contrast  Edica- 

tory.   , 

"  May  the  word  of  the  Lord  have  free  course  (with  youJ'^) 
It  is  not  wished  here  that  the  word  of  the  Lord  may  not  have  free  course 

in  all  other  places.     But  in  the  following  it  is  intimated  that  the  word  of 

the  Lord  has  not  free  course  in  all. 

("  With  you,)  the  word  of  the  Lord  has  free  course." 

In  general,  the    nepoeclad  of  the  contrast  Edicatory,  should  begin 

the  poetene. 

(It  is  seen,  then,  that  contrast  is  an  occasion  on  which 
with  may  begin  a  clad.) 

n.  Subject  E-dicatory. 

127.  "  This     gentleman     had     great 

weight  -        -        -         -        -  (with  the  President.") 


CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS.  207 

When  the  President  is  withed,  joined,  or  brought,  in  contact  with  the 
weight,  the  influence  of  this  gentleman,  he,  the  President,  was  swayed, 
much  influenced  by  it.  And  in  exact  proportion  to  the  influence  which  the 
weight,  the  opinion,  of  this  gentleman,  exerted  over  the  President,  the  Pre- 
sident was  controlled  by  this  weight.  The  President,  then,  was,  to  a  greater, 
or  less  extent,  suhjeded  to  the  weight,  to  the  influence,  of  this  gentleman. 
Hence  he,  the  President,  was  as  much  a  subject  of  this  weight  as  is  any  man 
or  woman,  who  is  a  native  of  England,  and  who  resides  in  London,  a 
subject  of  the  British  crown. 

128.  That    circumstance    had    great 

weight Twith  the  jury.) 

129.  This  argument  had  much  influence  (with  the  judge.) 

130.  No  reasoning  will   have  much 

weight  -----  (with  the  fool.) 

131.  These  demonstrations  had  invin- 

cible influence        -         -         -  (with  those  pagan  phi- 
losophers.) 
Being  subject  to,  or  influenced  by,  then,  sometimes  furnishes  an  occasion 
for  the  use  of  with.    We  never  say  exerted  great  influence  with  him,  but 
we  say  aver  him,  on  him. 

II.  Prevalence  E-dioatory. 

132.  **  I  thought  him  an  innocent  man, 

and       -         -         -         -        -  (with  this  impression) 
I  did  what  I  could  to  procure  his  pardon." 

"  Prevalence,  influence,  or  efficacy,  most  efficacious  force  in  producing  an 
effect"  Now,  what  was  it  which  was  prevalent,  which  was  efficacious,  with 
me  in  inducing  me  to  do  all  that  I  could  to  obtain  his  pardon  %  it  was  this 
impression.  What  impression  ?  the  impression  that  he  was  an  innocent 
man.  It  was  tlie  prevalence,  the  influence,  of  this  impression  which 
induced  me  to  act.     It  may  be  well  to  advert  to  the  clads  under  the 

subject  Edicatory,  which  begin  with  with. 

"  The  duke  well  knew  what  kind  of  arguments  was  of  pre- 
valence {with  him.'''') 

Here  the  clad  thing  is  under  the  control,  under  the  influence,  of 

the  arguments.    In  the  Prevalence  Edicatoiy,  the  clad  thing 

is  so  far  from  being  under  control,  that  it  exerts  a  controlling  influence  on 
some  person  in  another  mono. 

133.  "  If  any  one  should  take  up  this 

work    -         -        -        -         -  (with  the  impression) 
that  he  has  met  with  another  Murray's  Grammar,  &c." 
Roswell  C.  Smith's  Grammar. 

That  is,  should  any  one  take  up  this  work  under  the  prevalence,  under 
the  influence,  of  the  impression  tlwit  he  has  met  with  another  Murraj't 
Grammar,  &c. 


208  CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS. 

Perfiaps  the  use  of  under,  would  be  better  than  tnat  of  with,  in  this  par- 
ticular case.  With,  aidetl  by  the  context,  seems  to  carry  the  idea  that  the 
impression  under  whose  prevalence  the  act  is  done,  is  in  fact  the  instrument 
with  which  it  is  done.  "  If  any  one  should  take  up  this  work  with  the 
impression,"  &c. 

The  impression,  when  connected  with  the  act  of  taking  up,  seems  to 
resemble  an  instrument  rather  than  a  cause.  We  take  up  books  with 
the  hand.  I  do  not  think,  however,  that  the  use  of  ivith  in  the  above 
instance,  is  a  very  great  impropriety.  But,  from  the  errors  which  pervade 
the  rest  of  the  sentence,  I  am  disposed  to  attribute  tlie  propriety  in  this  use 
of  with  more  to  chance  than  to  knowledge. 

"If  any  one  should  take  up  this  work  with  the  impression 
that  he  has  met  with  another  Murray's  Grammar,  he  is  re- 
spectfully requested  to  suspend  his  judgment,  &c." 

Mr.  Smith  intends  to  say  another  Grammar — but  he  has  not  only  failed 
in  this  attempt ;  but  he  has  actually  created  a  second  Murray  1  Says  Mr. 
Smith,  you  have  not  found  the  well  known  Lindley  Murray's  Grammar 
in  the  work  which  you  have  just  taken  up,  bijt  a  Grammar  of  another 
Murray !     I  presume  that  this  other  Murray  is  Roswell  C.  Smith  Murray  ! 

1.  Another  Joy's  book. 

2.  Another  marCs  hat. 

3.  Another  Murray's  Grammar. 

Corrected. — Should  any  one  take  up  this  book  under  the 
impression  that  he  has  found  another  Grammar  by  Mr.  Mur- 
ray,  he  is  respectfully  requested  to  suspend  his  judgment  till 
a  careful  perusal  of  its  contents  has  furnished  some  data 
upon  which  to  predicate  a  just,  and  candid  opinion  of  its 
merits. 

1.  Upon  should  be  exchanged  for  of:  we  can  not  properly  say,  predi- 
cate on,  or  upon. 

2.  The  words,  its,  contents,  some,  data,  upon,  which,  to,  predicate,  a, 
just,  and,  candid,  opinion,  and  of,  are  redundant!! 

3.  ^Has  furnished"  should  be  exchanged  for  shall  have  furnished. 

4.  If  should  be  rejected,  and  should  should  be  the  first  word  in  the 
sentence. 

5.  If  any  mau  should  take  up  this  work  with  the  impres- 
sion that  he  has  met  with  another  Murray's  Grammar,  &c. 

Now,  a  man  who  is  under  this  impression,  would  not  be  very  likely  to 
take  up  Mr.  Smith's  book  at  all !  What,  pray,  could  induce  any  one  to 
take  it  up  1  Mr.  Smith  says  that  the  impression  that  it  is  another  Mur- 
ray's Grammar  induces  him  to  take  it  up.  If  any  one  should  take  up  this 
book  with  the  impression  that  it  is,  &c.  Now,  it  appears  to  me  that  this 
impression  would  rather  induce  one  to  lay  it  down  than  to  take  it  up  ! 
Indeed  does  not  Mr.  Smith  himself  mean  this  \ 

From  a  slight  glance,  some  may  be  under  the  impression, 
that  this  work  is  nothing  but  Murray'' s  Grammar. 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS.  209 

Or— 

From  a  slight  glance,  some  may  lay  down  this  work, 
under  the  impression  that  it  is  nothing  but  another  edition  of 
Murray's  Grammar. 

What  a  grammarian  must  he  be,  who  by  a  blunder  in  syntax,  gives  that 
as  the  cause  for  taking  up,  which  he  intends  as  the  cause  for  laying 
dawn  !  Things  seem  strangely  inverted  by  grammarians :  "  taking  up'* 
is  used  for  throwing  down,  and  "  throwing  dowvH^  for  taking  up,  so  that 
Mr.  Smith  will  hardly  know  whether  I  have  taken  him  up,  or  thrown  him 
down  !  But  should  he  find  much  difficulty  in  settling  this  point,  I  would 
commend  his  case  to  the  teachers  of  our  public  schools,  who,  from  a  long 
familiarity  with  his  work,  must  be  able  to  give  him  prompt  relief!  In 
the  mean  time  I  must  be  excused  for  putting  Mr.  Smith's  old  wine  into  a 
new  bottle. 

Those,  who,  from  a  slight  glance  at  this  work,  are  under 
the  impression  that  it  is  Murray^s  Grammar,  are  invited  to 
correct  their  error  by  a  full  examination,     (28  words.) 

"  If  any  one  should  take  up  this  work  with  the  impression 
that  he  has  met  with  another  Murray's  Grammar,  he  is  re- 
spectfully requested  to  suspend  his  judgment  till  a  careful  pe- 
rusal of  its  contents  has  furnished  some  data  on  which  to  pre- 
dicate a  just  and  candid  opinion  of  its  merits.  (51  words.) 
(23  redundant  words.) 

n.  Successor  E-dicatoby. 

134.  "He  replied,  you  are  a  dead 

man ;  and  -  -  -  -  (with  this  ,  )  dis- 
charged his  pistoV^ 
The  mono,  "  vnth  this,*'  indicates  that  the  discharging  of  the  pistol  is 
the  successor  of  the  uttering  of,  "  You  are  a  dead  man?*  With  the  event 
of  discharging  the  pistol  to  the  event  of  uttering  the  affirmation,  "  You  are 
a  dead  man."  No  event,  then,  came  between  these — whence  the  withed 
one  is  the  successor  event     {Successive  does  not  express  the  idea.) 

II.  Union  E-dioatort. 

135.  Falstaff  at  that  oak,  shall  meet  -  (with  us.) — Shak. 
That  is,  Falstaflf  shall  unite  with  us,  comQ  into  a  union  with  us— join 

our  company. 

II.  Contact  E-dicatory. 

III.  Incident  Ex-e-dic-a-tory. 

136.  "We  met      -        -  (with  this  gentleman)  in  i?o«^on." 

137.  "  We  met      -        -  (with  rare  things)  on  the  way." 

138.  "  We  met      -        -  (with  curiosities)  everywhere.'* 


d\0  CONDICTION    OP   NEPOECLADS. 

II.  Reception  E-dicatory. 

III.  Accident  Ex-e-dic-a-tory . 
139    "They  met     -         -         -         -  (with  a  fall)  on  ^/»e  ice." 

140.  *'  They  have  met     -         -         -  (with  heavy  losses)  at 

seaJ*^ 

II.  Foreign  E-dicatory. 

141.  How  is  business      -        -        -  (with  the  Bostonians  ?) 

142.  Is  business  brisk      -         -         -  (with  you?) 

143.  Why  is  it  that  fruit  trees  do  not 

grow  well      -         -         -         -  (with  us  ?) 
This  clad  alwaya  conveys  an  aHosion  to  some  one  who  is  dis- 

tinct, separate,  from  the  speaker.  Even  in  the  mono,  " with  us"  there  is 
an  allusion  made  to  others. 

144.  "  Finally,  brethren,  pray  for  us, 

that  the  word  of  the  Lord  may 
have  free  course,  and  be  glori- 
fied even  as  it  is     -        -        -  (with  you.") 

WITH~A    KEPOBCXEB. 

Wt^A  is  a  nepoecled  where  it  terminates  a  trone  or  a  poe- 
clad  ;  as,  Henry  was  spoken  with  upon  the  subject.  (Perhaps  to  would  be 
better.) 

Remarks. — From  denoting  the  means  with  which  the  fence-maker 
brings  one  stake  to  the  other,  with  has  come  to  denote  the  act  of  bringing 
one  thing  to  another ;  from  denoting  the  act  of  bringing  one  thing  to 
another,  with  has  come  to  denote  the  state  of  subiunction — and  from 
denoting  the  state  of  subjunction  of  the  withed  thing,  with  has  come 
to  convey  an  allusion  to  the  nature  of  that  connection  which  the 
withed,  or  subjoined  thing,  has  to  the  other  thing.  That  is,  whether  it  is 
a  causative  relation  ;  as,  John  is  sick  with  a  eold-  a  medium  relation ;  as 
John  walked  with  his  cane- — a  competition  relation ;  as,  John  will  lie  with 
any  man  in  town — a  similarity  relation ;  as,  John  compared  this  country 
with  France — a  prevalence  relation ;  as.  If  any  one  should  take  up  this 
work  with  the  impression  that  he  has  met  with  another  Murray's  Gram- 
mar"— a  succession  r^ation ;  as,  John  said  that  he  had  a  dirk,  and,  with 
this,  seized  the  stranger.     And  so  on. 

I  think  that  I  have  found,  and  illustrated  the  various  cases  in  which  with 
may  begin  an  clad.     If,  however,  instances  should    occur,    which 

do  not  fall  under  any  of  the  Edicatories  that  I  have  given,  let  the 

pupil,  or  teacher  himself  find  a  distinctive  name  for  a  new  Edicatory. 

That  all  the  raonos  which  begin  with  xvith,  fall  naturally  under  the  Con- 
junctive  Rudicatory,  admits  of  no  doubt.     And  I  would  recommend 

teachers  to  examine  with  great  care  before  they  attempt  to  provide  a  new 


Edicatory  for  any  doubtful 
Class  the  clads  which  begin  with -wiTa. 


CONDICTION    OP   NEPOECLADS,  211 

1.  **In  Damascus  the  governor  kept  the  city  (with  a  gar- 

rison.") 

2.  *'  Thrice  was  I  beaten  (with  rods.") 

3.  **  Seize  on   him,  furies — take   him  to   your   torments ! 

{With  that     ,     ),  methought  a  legion  of  foul  fiends 
environed  me." 
4»  "  And  when  I  was  present  (with  you,)  and  wanted,  I  was 
chargeable  to  no  man." 

5.  Would  to  God  you  could  bear  (with  me)  a  little  in  my 

folly :  and  indeed  bear  (with  me.)  For  I  am  jealous 
over  you  (with  a  godly  jealousy.) 

6.  "  We  have  a  building  of  God,^a  house  not  made  (with 

hands,)  eternal  in  the  heavens." 

7.  **  For  in  this  we  groan,  earnestly  desiring  to  be  clothed 

upon  (with  our  house)  which  is  from  heaven." 

8.  **  We  then,  as  workers  together  (with  him,)  beseech  you 

also,  that  ye  receive  not  the  grace  of  God  in  vain." 

9.  «  Simon  Peter,  a  servant,  and  an  apostle  of  Jesus  Christ, 

{writes)  to  them  that  have  obtained  like  precious  faith 
(with  us,)  through  the  righteousness  of  God,  and  our 
Saviour,  Jesus  Christ." 

10.  "  Who  is  like  unto  the  beast — who  is  able  to  make  war 

(with  him?") 

11.  "And  it  was  given  unto  him  to  make  war  (with  the 

saints.") 

12.  "  He  that  killeth  (with  the  sword,)  must  be  killed  (with 

the  sword.") 

13.  *'  And  the  earth  was  lightened  (with  his  glory.'')     "And   # 

he  cried  mightily  (with  a  strong  voice.") 

14.  "  And  she  shall  be  utterly  burned  (with  fire.") 

15.  "  See  where  on  earth  the  flow'ry  glories  lie, 

(With  her)  they  flourish,  and  (with  her)  they  die."— Popie. 

16.  ("  With  the  blessing)  of  God  we  hope  to  reach  home  to- 

day." 

17.  I  agree  (with  my  opponent.)     Concurrent. 

18.  ♦^In  the  beginning  was  the  Word;  and  the  Word  was 

(with  God  ;)  and  the  Word  was  God." 

19.  "  You  are  buried  (with  him)  in  baptism,  wherein  also  you 

are  risen  (with  him)  through  the  faidi  of  the:  operation 
of  God." 

20.  "If  ye  then  be  risen  (with  Christ,)  seek  those  things 

which  are  above.' 


312  CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS 

21.  "  And  be  not  entangled  again  (with  the  yoke)  of  bondage." 

22.  I  shall  not  differ  Cwith  you.)     Quarrel  with. 

23.  **  We  were  gratified  (with  the  presence)  of  a  person  so 

much  respected." 

24.  *'  Ye  crags,  and   peaks,  I'm  (with  you)   once  again — I 

hold  to  you  the  hands  you  first  beheld." — Tell. 

25.  It  is  of  unspeakable  advantage  to  possess  our  minds  (with 

an  habitual  good  intention.) — Addison. 

26.  "  The  duke  better  knew  what  kind  of  arguments,  was 

prevalent  (with  him.") — Clarendon. 

27.  "  Prepare  to  meet  (with  more)  than  brutal  force  from  the 

fierce  prince." — Bacon, 

Illustration  of  the  condiction  WitJlOUt  (with,  and  out.) 

of  the    nepoeciads  which  be-       J.  Detractive        Ru-dica. 

%m  With  without.  II.  Destitution  E-dicatory. 

1.  "He  is  always-         -         -         -  (without  money.") 

2.  "  There  is  no  living  -         -         -  (without  thee.") 

_This  steroclade,  without,  is  explained  under  the  head  of  with.     (See 
with.'') 

3.  '*  Henry  is         -         -         -         -  (without  a  hat.") 

4.  "  They  are        -         .         .  '      .  (without     hope)     in 

Christ:' 

II.  Local             E-dicatory. 

5.  "  Henry  stood  -         -         -  .  (without  the  gate.") 

6.  "  James  was  eating   -         -  -  (without  the  door.") 

III.  Beyond Ex-e-dic-a-tory, 

7.  "  Eternity  is      -         -         -         -  (without  our  reach.") 

II.  Condition  E-dicatory. 

8.  "  The  most  advantageous  terms  from 

the  French,  must  end  in  our  de- 
struction       -         -         -         -  (without    the    separa- 
tion) of  the  two  monarchies. ''' 

H.  Independent-of  E-dicatory. 

9.  "  Men  like  to  live       -         -         -  (without  labour.") 

10.  "Wise  men  will  do  right       -         -  (without  laws.) 
That  is,  independent  of  laws. 

II.  Result  E-dicatory. 

11.  That  event  may  happen      -         -  (without  any  danger.) 


CONDICTION   or    NEPOECLADS.  213 

12.  "  That  event  cannot  take  place    -  (without    damage)    to 

our  interests," 

13.  They  can  live  together       -         -  (without  any  difficulty.) 
That  is,  no  difficulty  will  result  from  their  living  together. 

14.  They  cannot  live  together  -         -  (without  difficulty.) 

15.  They  cannot  labour  -         -         -  (without  success.) 
That  is,  success  will  be  the  result. 

16.  They  have  laboured  -         -         -  (without  success.) 
That  is,  no  success  is  the  result  of  their  labour. 

II.  Omission  E-dicatobt 

17.  John  came  out  -         -         -         -  (without  his  hat.) 
(See  example  3.) 

WITHOUT— Never  a  nepoecled. 
Without  is  never  a  nepoeclide  -hence  it  cannot  be  used  in  the  place  of 
unless,  even  where  it  would  have  the  sense  of  unless ,-  as,  "  I  will  not  go 
without  you  do." 

Class  the     nepoeclads  which  begin  with  without. 

1.  There  is  a  house  (without  a  roof.) 

2.  I  have  come  (without  my  gun.) 

3.  (*'  Without     ,     ,     )  were  fightings,  within     ,     ,     were 

fears. 

4.  *'  These  were  (from      ,      ,     )  (      ,      ,     )  (without  the 

growing  miseries.") 

These  were  (from  the  place)  (which  is)  (without  the  growing  miseries.) 
That  is,  they  are  from  the  place  which  is  not  inside,  but  which  is  out- 
side of  the  growing  miseries. 


TO   THE  PUPIL. 

On  the  €ighty-eighth  page  I  have  given  a  specimen  of  Ap- 
propriation* Should  the  pupil  find  any  difficulty  in  deciding 
the  exact  condiction  of  any  nepoedad  in  the  Exercises  which 
follow,  he  should  resort  to  the  Doctrinal  Notes,  in  the  preced- 
ing pages. 

The  learner  will  derive  much  help  from  a  careful  attention  to 
the  page  of  Dicatories.     The  title,  Dicatory  of  Ne-po-e-clads. 


•^' 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLABS.  2l5 


DIRECTIONS. 


Appropriate  the  following  Exercises  exactly  according  to 
the  specimen  under  page  88. 

Be  particular  to  give  the  doctrine^  especially  of  the  condic- 
tion  of  the  nepoeclads.  In  doing  this,  you  will  derive  consi- 
derable aid  from  a  critical  perusal  of  the  Doctrinal  Remarks 
in  the  preceding  pages.  Let  the  class  prepare  ten,  fewer  or 
more,  of  the  instances  which  fall  under  ABOUT,  for  one 
Lesson.  This  preparation  should  be  made  by  a  close  examina- 
tion of  the  Doctrinal  Notes  on  the  condiction  of  the  nepoeclads 
which  begin  with  ABOVE.  Continue  in  this  way  through  all 
the  Exercises  These  being  exhausted,  appropriate  in  the  New 
Testament. 

ABOUT.— Exercises. 

1.  The  belt  was  -         -         -     (about  his  waist.) 

2.  "Bind  them    -         -        -    (about  thy  neck.") 

3.  It  was  six  feet  •       -        -     (about  the  trunk.) 

4.  "  Get  you  up  from  -  -  (about  the  tabernacle.") 

5.  They  were  sitting   -  -  (about  the  fire.) 

6.  «  He  went  out         -  -  (about  the  third  hour.") 

7.  "  Paul  was     -         -  -  (about  to  open  his  mouth.") 

«  To  open  his  mouthy*'  is  the  nepoecorm  of  about, 

8.  "  They  were  -         -     (about  to  flee  out)  of  the  ship.''^ 

9.  They  were  then      -         -     (about  sixty  men.) 

10.  Everything    -         -         -     (about  you)  is  in  orJer. 

11.  They  stood    -         -         -     (about  the  room.) 

12.  His  knife  was  not  -         -     (about  him.) 

13.  My  father  is  -         -         -     (about  the  house.) 

14.  I  was  speaking        -         -     (about  my  brother's  house.) 

15.  He  was  reading       -         -     (about  General  Washington.) 

16.  "I  must  be     -         -         -     (about  my  father's  business.") 

17.  James  was  then       -         -     (about  his  work.) 

18.  John  is  now   -        -         -     (about  his  writing.) 

19.  He  is  wandering     -         -     (about  ,  ,)  from  place  to  place. 

20.  Why  go  ye     -         -         -     (about  ,  ,)  to  injure  me. 

21.  Scatter  the  sands     -         -     (about  ,  ,) 


216 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 


ABOVE.— Exercises. 


1.  My  h^nd  was 

3.  The  powers  which  are 

3.  Henry  then  went    - 

1.  His  conduct  was 

2.  They  now  live 

3.  They  wrote  copies  - 

4.  The  light  was 

5.  He  was  seen  by 

6.  The  weight  is  now  - 

7.  Hannaniah  feared  God. 

8.  This  man  is    - 

9.  A  real  gentleman  is 

10.  They  gave  stripes   - 

11.  He  is  now 

12.  Indeed  he  is  almost 

13.  Give  me  peace 

14.  But    -    -    - 


(above  his  head.) 
(above  ,  ,  .) 
(above  me.) 

(above  board.) 

(above  board.)  f. 

"—  ??" 

(above  an  hour.)  ^  ^ 

(above  the  sun's  brightness.) 
(above  five  hundred  brethren.) 
(above  six  pounds.) 
(above  many     ,     .) 


(above  mean  actions.) 
(above  disguise.) 

(above  measure.) 

(above  his  business.) 
(above  himself.) 

(above  all  other  things.) 
(above  all     ,     ,     .) 


15.  "The  Lord  thy  God  will 

set  thee      -        -         - 

16.  The  law  should  be  - 


(above  all  nations.") 
(above  all  men.) 


AFTER.-— Exercises. 

1.  These  men  stood  one       -     (after  another.) 


2.  He  came 

1.  He  was  named 

2.  He  made  this  machine 

3.  Did  he  cut  his  coat  - 

4.  John,  have  you  come 

5.  I  will  send  an  officer 

6.  I  have  now  come     - 

7.  "  Ye  shall  not  go     - 


(after  me.) 


Behind. 
Behind, 


(after  his  uncle.) 
(after  that  model.) 
(after  mine  ?) 

(after  your  book  ?) 
(after  you.) 
(after  the  papers.) 
(after  other  gods.*') 


CONDIGTION    OF    NEPOECLADS.  217 

8.  They  walk     -         -         -     (after  the  flesh.) 

9.  They  judge    -         -         -     (after  the  sight,) 

10.  Does  he  consider  things  -     (after  their  real  value  ?) 

11.  Can  you  drink         -         -     (after  me  ?) 

ACROSS.— Exercises. 

1.  He  went         -         -         -     (across  the  street.) 

2.  We  looked     -         -         -     (across  the  river.) 

3.  There  was  a  bridge  -     (across  the  stream.) 

AMID,  AMIDST.— Exercises. 

1.  He  is  now      -         .         -     (amid  the  waves.) 

2.  I  was     -         -         -         -     (amidst  the  shade.) 

3.  The  shepherd  was  -         -     (amidst  his  flock.) 

4.  How  could  I  comprehend     (amid  all  this  confusion  ?) 

AMONG,  AMONGST— Exercises. 

1.  He  is  sending  agents        -     (among  his  friends.) 

2.  "  He  sends  his  blessings  -     (amongst  his  enemies.") 

3.  He  immediately  went      -     (amongst  the  people.) 

4.  And  he  is  now        -        -     (among  them.) 

AROUND,  ROUND.— Exercises. 

1.  There  was  a  belt     -  -  (around  his  waist.) 

2.  They  all  sat   -         -  -  (round  the  fire.) 

3.  He  has  sailed  -         -  -  (round  the  world.) 

4.  They  then  went      -  -  (around  the  hill.) 

5.  They  were  seated   -  -  (round  the  table.) 

6.  The    mother   called  her 

children     -         -  -  (around  her.) 

7.  They  are  now  strolling  -  (around  the  country.) 

8.  They  rove      -         -  -  (round  the  world.) 

9.  "  They  went  -         -  -  (around   ,  ,)  about  the  camp.^* 
10.  They  are  fond  of  riding  -  (round     ,     ,     .) 

AT. — Exercises. 

1.  John  was       -         -         -     (at  church.) 

2,  I  was X present)      -        -    (at  the  trial.) 


^■t 


218 

CONDICTION 

01 

?    NEPOECLADS. 

3. 

My  father  is  not     - 

(at  home.) 

4. 

They  are  now 

(at  ease.) 

5. 

They  are  now 

(at  play.) 

6. 

The  pen  is  now 

Tat  hand.) 

(at  a  loss)  for  words. 

7. 

He  was  then  - 

8. 

The  bill  was  to  be  paid 

(at  sight.) 

9. 

I  told  you  this 

(at  first       ,       .) 
(at  best.) 

10. 

He  is  a  poor  tool    - 

11. 

He  made  no  reply  - 

(at  all     ,     )  to  them. 

12. 

He  aims 

(at  this  mark.) 

13. 

1  shall  not  be  there  - 

(at  all  events.) 

14. 

He  purchased  the  gloves 

3  - 

(at  a  small  price.) 

15. 

I  am       - 

(at  your  service.) 

16. 

I  am       - 

(at  your  command.) 

17. 

You  shall  return 

(at  my  cost.) 

18. 

It  was  done    - 

(at  his  suggestion.) 

19. 

He  deserves  well    - 

(at  our  hands.) 

20. 

He  was  surprised    - 

. 

(at  this  statement.) 

21. 

He  was  troubled 

(at  this  report.) 

22. 

He  was  much  pleased 

(at  this  event.) 

23. 

He  is  now 

(at  the  law.) 

24. 

He  is  a  student 

(at  law.) 

25. 

He  is  good     - 

(at  figures.) 

26. 

He  was  good  - 

(at  engraving.) 

27. 

He  struck 

(at  me.) 

28. 

They  shot      - 

(at  him.) 

29. 

He  laughed    - 

(at  them.) 

30. 

They  are 

(at  variance.) 

31. 

They  have  long  been 

- 

(at  swords'  points.) 

32. 

Texas  is          -         - 

- 

(at  war.) 

33. 

He  longs  to  be 

- 

(at  him.) 

ATHWART 

'.- — Exercises. 

1. 

He    advanced    hia    mis- 

created front 

. 

(athwart  my  way.) 

2. 

The  fleet  stood 

- 

(athwart  our  course.) 

%' 


Wfff 


■^. 


CONDICTION    or    NEPOECLADS.  219 

BEFORE.— Exercises. 

1.  He  stood         -         -         -     (before  his  desk.) 

2.  He  is  not  behind,  but       -     (before  me.) 

3.  "Wherewithal  shall  I  come     (before  the  Lord.") 

4.  They  are  now  -         -     (before  this  court.) 


5.  "  Abraham  bowed   -         -     (before  the  people)  o/'fAe/anc?.'* 

1.  "The  world  was  all         -     (before  them.") 

1.  He  that  cometh  after  me, 

is  preferred         -         -     (before  me,)  [above  me] 

for  he  was  before  me. 


1.  "  And  he  set  Ephraim     -     (before  Manasseh.") 

2.  "  He  esteemed  virtue       -     (before  gold.") 

3.  "  Poverty  is  desirable       -     (before  torments.") 

BEHIND.— Exercises. 

1."  Get  thee      -  -  -  (behind  me,)  ^a/an." 

2.  The  book  lies  -  -  (behind  the  table.) 

3.  He  sat  -         -  -  -  (behind  that  tree.) 

4.  He  rode          -  -  -  [behind  me.) 

5.  He  rode          -  -  -  (behind     ,     .) 

6.  Look      -        -  -  -  (behind     ,     .) 

1.  In  Syntithology  John  is   -     (behind  his  brother.) 

2.  In  history  I  am        -         -     (behind  my  class.) 

3.  "  I  was  not  a  whit  -         -     (behind  the  very  chiefest  apos- 

tles.") 

4.  "  They  cast  thy  laws       -     (behind   their   back.")     Heb, 

xix.      Without    heed, 
Sin-i,  without. 

5.  Forgetting    those    things 

which  are  -        -         -     (behind     ,     .)     Phil.  iii. 

6.  We  should  not  forget  what 

is   .  ;«        -        "        -     (behind     ,     .)      -        ,      .  ► 


2^ 


CONDICTION    OF   NEPOECLADS. 


7.  "  And  fill  up  that  which  is  (behind  ,  ,)  of  the  afflictions 

of  Christ  in  my  flesh."   i 

8.  Alas  ?   we  do   not  know  "* 

what  is       -         -         -  (behind  ,  .) 

9.  Is  there  much  evidence  yet  (behind  ,  ?) 
10.  We  know  not  what  evi- 
dence is     -         -         -  (behind  ,  .) 


11.  There  is  a  small  sum       -  (behind  ,  ,     .) 

12.  There  are  sixty  dollars     -  (behind  ,  ,     .) 

13.  He  has  gone,  and  left  us  -  (behind  ,  .) 

14.  Be  went  there,  but  left  us  (behind  ,  .) 


BELOW.— Exercises. 


1.  The  earth  is  - 

2.  The  chain  is  - 

3.  Man  lives 

4.  Man  is  the  fairest  one 

5.  He  hit   - 

6.  The  water  is  - 

7.  The  water  is  - 

8.  He  purchased  it 

9.  This  note  is   - 


10. 
11. 
12. 


He  is     - 
A  lieutenant  is 
He    appealed 
court 


from     the 


(below  the  heavens*) 
(below  the  mouth.} 
(below     ,     ,     .) 
(below     r    »     •) 
(below  the  mark.) 

(below  the  mark.) 
(below  the  banks.) 
(below  the  first  cost.) 
(below  par.) 


(below  me)  in  the  class, 
(below  a  captain.) 

(below     ,     ,     .) 


BENEATH.— Exercises. 

1.  He  stood 

2.  The  earth  is  - 

3.  He  had  a  cushion    - 

4.  The  earth  from 


5.  Has  he  conducted 

6.  This  act  is      - 

7.  He  was 


(beneath  the  branch.)  under, 
(beneath  the  heavens.)  under, 
(beneath  him.)  under, 
(beneath     ,     .) 


(beneath  his  station  ?) 
(beneath  a  gentleman.) 
(beneath  her  notice.) 


^^' 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 


221 


8.  They  will  sink 
^     9.  Did  Milo  sink 


10.  An  ox  ranks  - 

11.  Man  is  - 

12.  "  Our  country  sinks 

13.  We  have  sunk 

14.  He  was  borne  down 


(beneath  their  burden.) 
(beneath  the  ox)  which  he  car- 
ried on  his  back  ? 

(beneath  a  man.) 
(beneath  angels.) 

(beneath  the  yoke.") 
(beneath  his  taxation.) 
(beneath   the   burden)  of  his 
sins. 


BESIDE.— Exercises 

He  sat  - 

They  were  seated  - 


4.  "It  is 


John  is  - 

"  Paul,  thou  art 

To  all    -        - 
i  saw  nothing 


-  (beside  me.) 

-  (beside  the  stream.) 

-  (Beside   all  this,)  there  is  a 

great  gulf  between  us, 
and  you. 


'  (beside  my  present  purpose) 
to  enlarge  upon  this 
subject." 

-  (beside  himself.) 

-  (beside  thyself.'*) 

-  (beside      ,      )   as  much  an 

empty  shade. 
'    (beside  this  book.) 


BEYOND.— Exercises. 


1.  He  went 

2.  He  travelled  far 

3.  My  stick  reached    - 

4.  "  Let  no  man  go 


-  (beyond  that  tree.) 

-  (beyond  that  river.) 

-  (beyond  his     ,     .) 

-  (beyond     ,     ,    )  and  defraud 

his  brother."  .  ^• 


5.  ["  A  thing]  ( 


(beyond  us)  even  before  out 
death." 


19* 


i5»jtd.  Y^f).  vjiii. '-«.'■•  "f" 


222 


CONDICnON   OF    NEPOECLADS- 


6.  To  comprehend  this  is 
7»  This  doctrine  is 

8.  To  pay  this  note  is 


(beyond  my  power.) 
(beyond    human    comprehen 

sion.) 
(beyond  his  power.) 


9.  Washington  was  great 

10.  This  matter  is  mysterious 

11.  This  night  is  dark  - 

12.  Let  no  man  think  that  he 

is  wise       -         -        - 


(beyond  any  other  man.) 
(beyond  any  other  ,  .) 
(beyond  all  others.) 

(beyond  what     ,    )  (     , 
(     ,    is  written.) 


BY. — Exercises. 

1 .  He  came  -        -  (by  land.)  on  land, 

2.  There  have  been  great 

battles     -        -        .  (by  water.)    on  water, 

3.  We  shall  return         -  (by  water.)    on  water. 


4.  His  house  stands 

5.  I  was  sitting     - 

6.  1  stood     - 

7.  The  man  had  come 

8.  He  just  passed 

9.  Who  passed     - 


•) 


(by  mine     , 
[by  the  fire.) 
by  the  river  side.) 
fby  this  time.) 
(by  the  window.) 


iO.  A  gentleman  was       -  (by 

11.  Was  any  one    -         -  (by 

12.  Joseph  remained  there  "(by  the  space)  of  seven  years. 


)  at  the  time, 
)  at  the  time  ? 


13. 
14. 


He  swore 
He  afiirmed 


-  (byheaVen)  to  be  just. 

-  (by  all)  that  is  sacred. 


15.  The  stick  is  too  long   (by  an  inch.) 

16.  The  tea  is  too  heavy    (by  six  pounds.) 


17.  He  works 

18.  The  fact  appears 

19.  Does  he  live     - 


(by  the  perch.) 


:i 


by  John's  own  statement, 
by  any  fixed  rules  ?) 


20.  He  has  a  cask  of  wine  (by  him.) 

21.  He  had  thirty  dollars   (by  him.) 


CONDIGTION   OP    NEPOECLADS.  223 

22.  He  lives  -         -         -  (by  himself.J 

23.  He  sat     -         -         -  (by  himself.) 

24.  Put  this  book  -         -  (by  itself.) 


25.  "  I  shall  stand  -        -  (by  him,)  come  what  will.* 

26.  I  was  at  court  -        -  (by  my  attorney.) 

27.  The  temple  was  built  (by  Solomon.) 

28.  These  houses  were  built  (by  Stephen  Girard.) 

29.  He  works       -        -     (by  a  candle.) 

30.  He  saw  the  pin       -     (by  moonlight.) 

31.  He  travelled  day      -     (by  day.) 

32.  He  counted  his  army 

man        -        -        -  (by  man.) 

33.  He  commanded    the 

army  year     -        -  (by  year.) 


1.  How  came  he  -  (by  so  much  land?) 

2.  How  came  James     -  (by  that  house  ?) 


3.  This  pen  was  made  -  (by  John.) 

4.  This  land  is  owned  -  (by  my  brother.) 

5.  The  sinner  is  converted  (by  Qhrist.) 

6.  I  am  commanded      -  (by  the  people)   of  the  State  ej 
Pennsylvania, 


7.  The  grass  was  killed    (by  the  frost.) 

8.  He  was  hurt     -         -  (by  a  fall.) 

9.  He  has  been  injured     (by  the  tricks)  of  Jude, 


10.  He  was  killed  -  (by  a  sword.) 

11.  He  saw  the  pin         -  (by  moonlight.) 

12.  They  live         -         -  ^by  speculation.) 

13.  They  applied  -         -  (by  a  petition.) 

14.  Do  you  know  a  man    (by  the  name)  of  Paul? 


,-M..    1...'..       .  .       -^ 


224 


CONDICTION    OF    NErOECLADS. 

DOWN.— Exercises. 


1.  He  is      - 

2.  They  went 

3.  They  sailed      - 

4.  We  are  all  going 

5.  He  went  up,  and 

6.  They  went 

7.  He  came 

8.  The  squirrel  ran 

9.  The  deer  swam 


-  Mown  the  country.) 

-  fdown  the  hill.) 

-  fdoWn  the  river.) 

-  fdown  the  stream)  of  life, 

-  (down      ,         ,         ,\ 


[down  the  hill.) 
[down  stairs.) 
[down  the  tree.) 
[down,  the  stream.) 


.««^ 


FROM. — Exercises. 


1. 
2. 
3. 
4. 
5. 
6. 
7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 

16. 
17. 


Henry  went 
Separate  the  good 
Men  go   - 
And         ,         , 
He  looked  down 
He  came 
Call  the  dog     - 


ffrom  Boston)  to  Texas. 
(from  the  bad         ,         .) 


(from  good 
(from  bad 
(from  , 
(from  , 
(from    ,     , 


Wo 
)  to 


had,         .  r:; 

good. 
)     ,      ,  above. 
)  beyond,      , 
,  under  the  table. 


Light  proceeds  -  (from  the  sun.)"^^ 

Men  have  all  sprung    (from  Adam.) 


Water  springs  - 

Money  is  acquired 

He  descended  - 

All  things  sprung 

This  light  is      - 

"And      -         -  ^ 

is  not  dead." 

This  yarn  was  spun  -  (from  that  wool.) 

Can   any    good  thing 

come       -        -        -  (from  Nazareth.) 


-  (from  the  earth.) 

-  (from  industry.)  ' 

-  (from  a  noble  race.) 

-  (from  God.) 

-  (from  that  lamp.) 

-  (from  this      ,      )  it  seems  that  he 


The  horse  is 
The  horse  is 
The  horse  is 
The  fork  is 
Henry  is  good 


IN.- — Exercises. 

-  (in  the  stable.) 

-  (in  the  harness.) 

-  (in  the  carriage.) 

-  (in  the  knife  case.) 

-  (in  deed.) 


6.  Washington  was  great  (in  fact.) 


%,■- 


?j 


CONDICTION   OF   NEPOECLADS. 


225 


7.  These  balls  are  alike 

8  God  will  judge  all 

i>.  One 

10.  Heis       - 

11.  John  is     - 

12.  John  did  right 

13.  The  horse  is     - 


lour.) 


14.  John  is  kind    - 

15.  Heis       - 

16.  He  is       - 

17.  Henry  is 

18.  The  man  is      - 

19.  John  is  kind 

20.  He  is       - 

21.  Henry  is 

22.  He  is       - 

23.  He  is       - 

24.  He  did  it 

25.  He  was    - 

26.  He  is 

27.  Heis       - 

28.  He  was   - 

29.  I  command  you 
Pennsylvania. 

30.  I  got  the  wine 


m  size.] 

in  that  1 

in  five.) 

in  that  office.) 

in  sight.) 

-  (in  replying)  to  me. 

-  (in  a  good  case.) 


(in  sickness.) 
(in  good  spirits.) 
(in  good  health.) 
'in  pain.) 
in  a  severe  fit.) 
in  sickness.) 
'in  good  spirits.) 
[in  a  high  fever.) 
'in  good  heart.) 
in  good  courage.) 
[in  good  faith.) 
•in  his  right  reason.) 
in  the  darkness)  of  the  night. 
fin  doubt.) 
[in  fear.) 

-  (in  tne  name)  of  the   people  ot 

-  (in  John's  name.) 


1.  There  is  carbonic  acid  (in  coal.) 

2.  Latent  heat  is  -  (in  air.) 

3.  There  is  nourishment  (in  bread.) 

4.  We  find  the  fishes     -  (in  the  water,) 

5.  and  the  birds    -         -  (in  the  air.) 

6.  There  are  1000  pages  Cm  the  book.) 

7.  There  are  three  pieces  (in  the  apple.) 


INTO.— Exercises. 


He  went  - 
I  put  the  knife  - 
"Water  enters - 
I  looked  - 
"Put  these  ideas 


-  Tinto  the  house.) 

-  finto  my  pocket.)    not  in. 

-  (into  the  fine  vessels)  of  plants. 

-  (into  the  room.)  j^- 

-  (into  other  words.") 


226  CONDIOTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 

6.  One  river  runs-         -  (into  another.) 

7.  "  They  went  down  -  (into  the  water.") 

8.  He  plunged      -         -  (into  the  snow.) 

9.  He  turned  some  water  (iijto  wine.) 

10.  '*  He  turned  water     -  (into  wine.") 

11.  "Command  that  these 

stones  be  made         -  (into  bread.") 

12.  Make  this  leather      -  (into  boots.) 

13.  Reduce  all  these  sub- 
stances   -        -         -  (into  one  mass.) 


14.  "  Put  more  animation  (into  your  composition.'*) 

15.  The  instillation  of  ar- 
dour      -        -        -  (into  the  mind.) 

16.  There  is  an  infusion 

of  zeal    -        -        -  (into  the  mind.) 

17.  I  dislike  the  infusion 

of  Gallicisms  -         -  (into  English.) 


18.  "Put  other  ingredients  (into  the  compound.") 

19.  How  many  ingredients 

have  been  put  -        -  (into  this  medicine.) 
%0.  You  should  not  put 

horses,  and  sheep     -  (into  the  same  drove.) 

21.  The  child  was  fright- 
ened      -        -        -  (into  fits.) 

22.  Evidence  puts  us       -  (into  a  belief)  of  truth. 

23.  "We   reduce   many 

distinct  substances    -  (into  one  mass.") 

24.  Men  are  often  enticed  (into  the  commission)  of  crime, 

25.  "We  are  all  liable  to 

be  seduced       -         -  (into  error.")  i   ,  ^ 

26.  The  cup  was  broken  (into  several  parts.) 

27.  The  land  was  divided  (into  six  lots.) 

OFF. — ^Exercises. 

1.  James  is  now  -         -  (off  his  seat.) 

2.  James  is  not    -        -  (off  his  bed.) 


CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECI4ADS. 

3.  James  was       -        -  (off  his  guard.) 


227 


1.  "They  were  seen    -  (off  the  Cape)  of  Good  Hope  *' 


1.  The  paper  is     - 

2.  Some  fell 

3.  The  ball  rolled 

4.  He  plays  - 

5.  Joseph  plays    - 

6.  John  is    - 

7.  "They  depend 

8.  His  cure  depends 

9.  My  dependence 


10. 
11. 

12. 

13. 
14. 

15. 

16. 
17. 
18. 


ON. — Exercises. 

-  (on  the  desk.) 

-  (on  good  ground.) 

-  (on  the  carpet.) 

-  (on  the  drum.) 

-  (on  the  violin.) 

-  (on  his  horse.) 


Man  should  depend 
Man's    salvation   de- 
pends     -         -         - 
I  agreed  to  go  - 
me, 

I  affirm    - 
He  declared 
well  treated. 
His  blood  be    - 
and  his  blood  be 


(on  him)  to  pay  the  note." 
(on  his  care.) 
(on  him)  is  well  known. 
(on  the  promises)  of  God." 

(on  this  condition.) 
-  (on  condition)  that  you  would  pay 

'  (on  my  word)  that  he  was  well. 
'  (on  his  Jionour)  that  I  should  be 


-  (on  us ;) 

-  (on  our  children.) 

His  blood  be  {on  us,)  and  {on  our  children. 
They  will  have  compassion  (on  him.") 


19.  He  preached     - 

20.  John  retired 

21.  "He  was 

22.  They  were 

23.  He  is       - 

24.  He  was    - 

25.  They  were 

26.  He  appears 

27.  We  find  ruin    - 

28.  Men  meet  with  loss  - 

29.  He  suffered  affliction 

30.  The  thunder  came  peal 

31.  He  saw  heap    - 

32.  He  came  -        -        - 


on  last  Sabbath.) 

on  your  approach.) 

Jon  the  look-out) /or  h^rn.'' 

on  the  alert.) 

on  duty.) 

on  guard.) 
(on  their  guard.) 
(on  public  occasions.) 

on  ruin.) 
Jon  loss.) 

on  affliction.) 

on  peal.) 

on  heap.) 
[on  a  sudden. ) 


228 


CONDICTION   OP    NEPOECLADS^ 


33.  He  came  - 

34.  The  ship  is 


■■! 


on  an  errand)  of  love, 
on  shore.") 


35. 

He  is  now        -        -  ( 

Jon  his  way.J 
on  the  road.) 

36. 

He  was  then    -         -  ( 

37. 

He  is       -        -        -( 

fon  the  road)  to  fame. 

38. 

They  are          -         -  | 

[on  their  way)  home. 

39. 

Henry  was       -         -  i 

(on  his  way)  to  ruin. 

40. 

He  is  always    -         -  ( 

[on  the  wing.) 

41. 

He  was   -         -         - 

(on  the  alert.) 

42.  The  ship  was  - 

43.  Jefferson  City  is 

44.  Vandalia  stands 

45.  The  British  fleet 


■-[ 


(on  Galveston  Island.) 
(on  the  Missouri  river.) 
on  the  Kaskaskia  river.) 
was  on  the  American  coast.) 


OVER. — Exercises. 


1.  He  held  the  umbrella 

2.  The  smoke  rose 

3.  The  flag  was  waving 

4.  "  The  mercy-seat 

5.  There  was  a  window 

6.  The  hat  hung  - 

7.  The  cat  jumped 

8.  The  deer  jumped 

9.  The  water  ran  - 

10.  The  horse  jumped   - 

1 1 .  The  lad  stepped 

12.  He  went  -         -         - 

13.  He  went  - 

14.  "He  remained  - 


over  his  head.) 
over  the  city.) 
over  our  heads.) 
(over  the  testimony.'*) 
over  the  door.) 
over  the  table.) 

(over  the  table.) 

(over  the  stream.) 

(over  the  dam.) 

Tover  the  fence.) 

^over  the  pin.) 

[over     ,     ,     Wo  England. 

'over    ,     ,     )  ^0  the  other  party. 

[over  night.") 


15.  He  sailed  -        -  (over  the  lake.) 

16.  They  travelled-         -  (over  all  the  earth.) 

17.  The  cap  was    -         -  (over  his  face.) 

18.  We  put  cloths  -         -  (over  his  hand.) 

19.  Spread  a  counterpane  (over  us.) 


20.  The  water  was 

21.  The  snow  was - 


(over  his  head,") 
(over  his  boots.) 


C0NWGTION   OP    NEPOECI^DS.  22D 


22.  "  Devout  men  carried 
Stephen  to  his  burial, 
and  mada  great  la- 
mentation       -        ^  (over  him.") 


1 .  He  remained  with  me  (over  Sunday.) 

2.  **  He  kept  it  fresh     -  fover  winter.") 

3.  Will  you  stay  -        -  (overnight?) 

4.  "They  prepared  for 

each  day  -        -        -  (over  night.") 

1.  Christianity  has  ad- 
vantages-       -        -  (over  every  other  religion.) 

2.  Has  John  an  advan- 
tage       -        -        -  (over  Joseph  ?) 

3.  "  Young  Pallas  shone 
conspicuous     -        -  (o'er  the  rest.") 

4.  What  advantages  has 

learning  -     .    -        -  (over  ignorance  ?) 

5.  What  advantages  has 

Texas      -         -         -  (over  the  United  States  ?) 
6.^  Who  put  thee  -        -  (over  us  ?) 

7.  "I  will  make  thee 

ruler        -         -         -  (over  many  things.") 

8.  "  Thou  shalt  be         -  (over  my  house.") 

9.  "  Parents  watch        -  (over  their  children;") 
10.  '*  His  tender  mercies 

are-,       -         ->        -  (over  all  his  works.") 


11.  "  Dost  thou  not  watch  (over  mjj  sin  T") 

PAST. — Exercises. 

1.  He  was  then     -        -  (past  the  true  line.) 

2.  It  is^ow  -         -         '   (past  ten)  o^ clock. 


3.  He  was  then    -         -  (past  feeling.) 


4.  He  is  now        -    •     -  fpast  recovery. 

5.  He  was  then     -         -  (past  cure.) 


230  CONDICTION    OP   NEFOECLADS. 


THROUGH.— Exercises. 

1.  He  pulled  the  thread    ^through  the  eye)  of  the  needle. 

2.  The  breath  comes     -  (through  the  glottis)  of  the  wind- 
pipe. 

3.  "He  went        -        -  (through  the  land)  of  Judea  to  Je- 
rusalem.''* 

4.  The  deer  ran    -         -  (through  the  forest.) 

5.  Fishes  swim     -         -  f through  the  water.) 

6.  He  bored  -         -  (through  the  log.) 

7.  They  passed     -         -  (through  the  gate.) 

8.  They  came      -         -  (through  the  canal.) 

9.  All  business  must  pass  (through  his  hands.) 

10.  He  remained    -        -  (through  the  night.) 

11.  I  will  go  -         -         -  (through  this  business.) 

12.  He  has  gone     -         -  (through  many  hardships.) 


13.  They  went       -        -  {Xhxoxx^  ihe  city)  in  search  of  their 
friend. 

14.  "  Their  tongue  walketh  (through  the  earth.")  Ps.  Ixxxiii. 


1.  By  grace  are  ye  saved  (through  faith.) 

2.  "It  will  bud     -        -  (through  the  scent)  o/"  t^afer." 

3.  "  Sanctify  them        -  (through  thy  truth.") 

4.  "  The  gift  of  God  is 

eternal  life       -         -  (through  Jesus  Christ.") 

5.  But    some    of    them 
said,  He  casteth  out 

devils      -         -         -  (through  Beelzebub.) 

6.  He  slew  his  brother  -  (through  thirst)  for  gold. 

7.  He  sold  his  country  -  (through  a  false  ambition.) 

8.  We  see  things  -         -  (through  the  medium)  of  the  eye. 

9.  The  crime  was  disco- 
vered      -         -         -  (through  the  folly)  of  the  offender. 

10.  An  artery  is  a  vessel  -  (through  which)  ^Ae  blood  is  con- 
veyed from  the  heart  to  all  parts  of  the  animal  body. 

11.  A  vein  is  a  vessel      -  (through  which)  the  blood  is  re. 
turned  to  the  heart. 


CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS.  231 

THROUGHOUT.—ExERcisEs. 

1.  This  measure  was  ap- 
proved   -         -        -  (throughout  the  country.) 

2.  This  is  a  practice      -  (throughout  France.) 

3.  He  has  been  consist- 
ent -        -         -  (throughout  his  political  course.) 

TO,  UNTO.— Exercises. 

1.  John  went        -        -  (to  church.) 

2.  "John  is  equal  -  Tto  his  brother)  m  ^a/en^s." 

3.  Six  units  are  equal    -  ao  half)  of  one  dozen, 

4.  "He  is  going  -         -  (to  a  trade.") 

5.  They  are  rising         -  (to  honour.) 

6.  This  business  is  suited  (to  his  health.) 

7.  "  She  has  a  husband  -  (to  her  mind.") 

[]She  has  a  husband]  {who  is  adapted)  (to  her  mind  } 

8.  These  remarks  were 

addressed         -         -  (to  a  large  audience.) 

9.  "  They  pledge  their 

honour    -         -         -  (to  you.") 

10.  "  Go,  buckle    -         -  (to  the  law.") 

11.  Give  yourself  wholly  (to  it.) 

12.  Add  virtue        -         -  (to  your  faith.) 

13.  "They  met  us  -         -  (to  the  number)  of  three  hundredJ^ 

14.  Six  is       -         -         'ho  twelve)  what  twenty 

15.  is    -         -         -         -  (to  forty.) 

16.  They  were  engaged  man  (to  man.) 

17.  "It  is  ten         -        -  {io  ono)  that  he  will  fail  ^ 

18.  "  Few  of  the  Esqui- 
maux can  count        -  (to  ten.") 

19.  "  The  prince  was  flat- 
tered       -        -        -  (to  his  ruin.") 

20.  Shave  the  end  down  -  (to  a  point.) 

21.  The  man  was  crowded  (to  death.) 

22.  "  He  painted  her       -  (to  the  life.") 

23.  "This  is  it       -         -  (to  a  hair.") 

24.  "  He  is  alive    -        -  (to  the  sufiierings)  of  his  children*** 

25.  We  will  keep  this  seat  (to  ourselves.) 

26.  "  This  is  the  key       -  (to  that  door.") 

27.  It  is  sweet       -        -  (to  the  taste  V 


232  CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS. 

28.  I  have  his  word         -  (to  the  contrary.) 

29.  "Marks,  and  points  out 

each  man  of  us         -  (to  slaughter.") 

30.  *'  He  is  deaf     -         -  (to  our  cries)  for  relief,'^ 

31.  He  has  a  strong  dislike  (to  Mr.  Jones.) 

32.  The  Scriptures  say   -  (to  the  sinner,)  "  Now  is  the  day 
of  salvation.^^ 

TOWARD,  TOWARDS.— Exercises. 

1.  He  rode  -         -  -  (toward  London.) 

2.  The  men  came-  -  (towards  me.) 

3.  He  looked         -  -  (towards  his  sister.) 

4.  "He  set  his  face  -  (toward  the  wilderness.") 

5.  "  His  eye  shall  be  evil  (towards  his  brother.") 

6.  His  conscience  is  void 

of  offence         -  -  (toward  God,) 

7.  and  -         -         -  -  (toward  men.) 

8.  "  Thou  hast  love  -  (toward  all  the  saints.") 

9.  "  Hast  thou  faith  -  (toward?  God?") 

10.  He  gave  five  dollars  -  (towards  the  sum.) 

11.  "This    is    the    first 
alarm  which  England 

received  -        -        -  (toward  any  trouble.") 

Clarendon. 


12.  I  am        -        -        -  (towards  nine  years)  old, — Swift. 

UNDER.— Exercises. 

1.  He  stood  -         -  Tunder  the  umbrella.) 

2.  Henry  was  carried    -  (under  the  ice.) 

3.  The  iron  is       -         -  (underwater.) 

4.  These  creatures  live  -  (underground.)         ^'^  ''''.;    ; 

5.  James  sat  -        -  (under  Sie  brow)  ofd'MH, 

6.  It  is  not  like  any  other 

thing  -         -  (under  the  heavens.) 

7.  We  found  him  walk- 
ing .    '    -  (under  a  heavy  load.) , 

8.  The   whole   duty   bf 

man  may  be  treated  of  (under  the  head)  of  Religion. 


CONDICTION   OF   NEPOECLADS.  233 

9.  **  TTie  duke  may  be 

mentioned       -        -  (under  the  double  capacity)  o/'a/)ocf 
and  a  divined — Felton. 


]    They  are  -         -  (under  our  laws.) 

2.  He  entered  his  office    Sunder  these  conditions.) 

3.  Yet  he  does  this        -  (under  the  name)  oi friendship, 

4.  This    argument   was 

evaded  -        -  f under  som6  plausible  distinctions.) 

5.  Joseph  is  -         -  (under  a  tutor.) 

6.  These  colonies  are    -  (under  the  British  government.) 

7.  James  is  now  -         -  (under  a  guardian.) 

8.  -        -        -        -  ("  Under  God,)   this  is  our  only 
safety." 

9.  They  are  all     -        -  (under  sin.) 

10.  He  is       -         -         -  (under  some  restraint.) 

11.  What  man  is  not       -  (under  condemnation?) 

12.  He  was    -         -        -  (under  favour)  q/*  ^Ae  Prmcc. 

13.  Saints  particularly  are  (under  the  blessings)  of  God. 
14    We  live   -         -         -  (under  the  gospel  dispensation.) 

15.  "  Nuns  are       -         -  (under  vows)  q^  cAari/y." 

16.  "  We  should  have  for- 
titude     -        -        -  (under  the  evils)  o/'/i/e. 

17.  "  We    should    behave 

like  Christians  -  (under  reproaches.") 

18.  "  Have  patience         -  (under  pain.") 

19.  He  was  then    -         -  (under  the  penalties)  of  the  law. 

20.  I  live        -         -         -  (under  extreme  oppression.) 

21.  The  atrmy  was  -  (under  the  command)  of  Genera, 

Jackson. 

22.  The  American  revolu- 
tion commenced       -  (under  the  administration)  of  Lord 

North. 

23.  Here  is  a  deed  -  (mider  his  hand,) 

24.  and     -         -         -  (under  his  seal.) 

25.  *'  He  has  left  us  evi- 
dence   -        -        -     (under  his  own  hand.") 

26.  "  Morpheus  is   repre- 
sented    -         -         -  (under  the  figure)  q/' a  601/ as/eep 

27.  He  writes         -        -  (under  the  name)  of  Locke.    20* 


234  ^JONDYCT'ION    Of    IN'EPOECLADS. 

28.  "  These  men  trade  -  (under  the  firm)  of  Wright  Sf  (?» 

29.  For  I  am  a  man  -  Tunder  authority,) 

30.  having  soldiers  -  (under  me.) 

31.  The  ship  was  then  -  (under  way.) 

32.  "  It  was  too  great  an 

honour  for  any  man  (under  a  duke.") 

33.  A  lieutenancy   is  an 

office  which  is  -  (under  a  captaincy;) 

34.  "  The  effect  of  medi- 
cine is  sometimes     -  (under  its  natural  strength.*') 

35.  "  There  are  parishes 

in  England      -        -  (under  forty  pounds)  a  year" 

36.  **  He  left  three  sons  -  (under  age.") 

37.  "  They  would  not  sell 

the  horse  -         -  (under  forty  pounds.") 

38.  ^^  Several  young  men  ,     . 
could  never  leave  the 

pulpit    -        -        -  (under  half)     ,    a  dozen  conceits,^ 

Swift. 

'UNDERNEATH.— Exercises. 

1.  "He  found  it  -        -  ^underneath  this  stone.") 

2.  *'  The  mole  runneth  -  (underneath     ,,.'*) 

UP. — Exercises. 

1.  "  He  is  now     -        -  (up  the  river.") 

2.  "  The  squirrel  is       -  (up  the  tree.") 

1.  "  He  was  walking     -  (up  the  hill.") 

2.  "  The  squirrel  ran    -  (up  the  tree.") 

UPON.^ — Exercises. 

1.  James  was  seated  -  (upon  a  high  hill.) 

2.  I  was  then        -  -  (upon  the  house.) 

3.  Was  he  then     -  -  (upon  his  horse?) 

4.  His  hat  was      -  -  (upon  his  head.) 

5.  "  He  has  his  coat  -  (upon  his  back.") 

6.  The  basket  hung  -  (upon  his  arm.) 


CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS.  235 

7.  We  are  now     -        -  (upon  battle  ground.) 

8.  The  gun  was    -         -  fupon  his  shoulder.) 

9.  He  had  a  ring  -         -  (upon  his  fore-finger.) 

10.  I  put  my  hand  -         -  (upon  his  shoulder.) 

11.  Lean  your  head         -  ^upon  ray  arm.) 

12    I  have  often  been      -  (upon  these  waters.) 

13.  I  have  never  seen  finer 

wings     -        -        -  (upon  any  bird.) 

14.  He  struck        -        -  (upon  the  table)  with  his  hand. 
16.  They  struck     -         -  (upon  the  ground.) 

16.  They  beat        -         -  (upon  the  house)  ^i7/ zV/c//. 

17.  They  struck  him       -  (upon  his  head.) 

18.  "  The  rain  came  down  (upon  us)  in  torrents,** 

19.  If  you   expect    punc- 
tuality    -        -        -  (upon  our  part,) 

20.  I  tmst  that  you  will  be 
punctual  -        -  (on  yours.) 

21.  He  is       -        -        -  (upon  the  other  side)  o/"  Me  nvcr. 

22.  He  is  now        -        -  (upon  this  sid^)  o///ic  i>e/at^are. 

23.  I   have  made  an  im- 
provement      -         -  (upon  that  lamp.) 


24.  I  performed  an  opera- 
tion        -         -         -  (upon  his  arm.) 

25.  "  The  Philistines  be    (upon  thee,)  Samson.'' 

26.  They  came  out         -  (upon  me)  loith  clubs. 

27.  I  am  engaged   -         -  (upon  tliis  job,)  to-day. 


28.  They  were  discharged  (upon  the  first  day)  of  June. 

29.  "  You  do  this  -         -  (upon  pain)  of  death.'' 

30.  What  was   their   con- 
duct       -         -         -  (upon  this  occasion?) 

31.  They  will  have  com- 
passion -        -        -  (upon  him.) 

32.  John  will  retire         -  (upon  our  approach.) 

33.  He  was    -         -         -  (upon  the  look-out) /or  Me  */iip. 

34.  They  were       -         -  (upon  the  alert)  all  night 

35.  He  is        -         -         -  (upon  duty.) 

36.  He  was    -         -         -  (upOn  guard.) 

37.  They  were       -         -  (upon  their  guard.) 


236  CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS. 

38.  He  appears       -         -  Tupon  all  public  occasions.)    * 

39.  We  find  ruin    -         -  (upon  ruin.) 

40.  Men  meet  with  loss  -  (upon  loss.) 

41.  He  suffered  affliction  (upon  affliction.) 

42.  The  thunder  came  peal  (upon  peal.) 

43.  He  saw  heap    -         -  (upon  heap.) 

44.  He  came  -         -  (upon  a  sudden.) 

45.  He  came  -         -  (upon  an  errand)  q/* /o?;c. 

46.  The  ship  is       -         -  (upon  shore.)  Not  good-on  is  good. 

47.  My  reflections  -  (upon   your   situation)   have  been 

painful, 

48.  Consider  well  -         -  (upon  the  matter,)  beforehand. 

49.  I    have    not  thought 

much       .        -         -  (upon  the  affair)  since. 

50.  I  shall  not  say  a  word  (upon  his  treatment)  toward  me. 
51.1  will  retire,  and  dream  (upon  the  thing.) 

52.  His  mind  seemed  fixed  (upon  this  one  point.) 

53.  "He  sent  the  officer  r  (upon  a  bold  enterprise.") 

54.  The  legislature  is  now  (upon  the  banks.) 

55.  While  I  am      -        -  (upon  this  subject,)  /  will  remark. 

56.  I    have    given    many 

notes       -        -         -  (upon  the  condiction)  of  agnome- 
clads. 

57.  Congress  is  now       -  Tupon  the  pre-emption  act.) 

58.  This  is  a  treatise       -  Tupon  Texas.) 

59.  I  have  reflected  much  (upon  this  point)  of  the  law  in  your 

case. 

60.  Blackstone  has  written 

much       -        -         -  (upon  the  common  law.) 

61.  Who  has   written    a 

sound  work     -         -  (upon  the  laws)  of  nations  9 

62.  In  his  speech  he  en- 
larged    -        -         -  (upon  this  part)  of  the  theme. 

63.  The  point        -        -  (upon  which)  /  desire  to  add  one 

word,  is  this. 

64.  He  is  bent        -        -  (upon  mischief.) 


65.  He  is  now        -         -  (upon  his  way)  home. 

66.  He  was  then     -         -  (upon  the  road.) 

67.  He  is       -         -         -  (upon  the  road)  to  fame. 


CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS.  237 

68.  Henry  was       -  -  (upon  his  way)  to  ruin. 

69.  He  is  always    -  -  (upon  the  wing.) 

70.  He  was   -         -  -  (upon  the  alert.) 

71.  The  horse  came  -  (upon  the  full  jump.) 

72.  The  horses  were  -  (upon  a  hard  trot.) 

73.  My  horse  was  -  (upon  a  slow  walk.) 

74.  His  horse  was  -  -  (upon  a  gallop.) 

75.  My  father  was  -  (upon  my  right  side,) 

76.  and  my  brother  -  (upon  my  left.) 

77.  '*  There  is  a  village  -  (upon  the  Thames.") 

78.  **  Jefferson  city  is     -  (upon  the  Missouri  river.") 

79.  James  is  -        -(upon  the  other  side.) 

80.  Joseph  was       -         -  (on  the  whig  side.) 

WITHIN.— Exercises. 

1.  There  is  no  man       -  (within  these  walls.) 

2.  The  pious  man  finds 

happiness         -         -  (within  his  Bible.) 

3.  John  will  return        -  (within  a  year.) 

4.  His  attempt  died       -  (within  itself.) 

5.  "  Keep  your  expenses  (within  your  income.") 

6.  "  The  wound  festers    (within     ,     ,     .") 

7.  "  Ills  from       -        -  (within    ,     ,    )  thy  reason  must 

prevent. 


ATWEEN.— Exercises. 

1.  *' Doe?  all  go  right    -  (atween  us?") 

2.  '*  Is  all  right    -         -  (atwixt  him),  and  his  Maker?^* 

3.  "  The  victim  nailed  -  (atween  two  thieves.") 

4.  **  It  came  out  from     -  (atwixt  the  two  clefts)  q/'^^crocA:.' 


BETWEEN,  BETWIXT.— Exercises. 

1.  There  is  a  difference    (between  the  two  horses,) 

2.  There  is  a  discord     -  (betwixt  the  two  brothers.) 

3.  "Whatisthe  distinction  (between  right,)  and  wrong  9^^ 

4.  These  two  men  hold 

the  land  -        -  (between  them.j 


238  CONDICTION    or    NEPOECLADS. 

5.  He  sat     -         -  -  (between  two  rocks.)  I    T% 

6.  The  stream  ran  -  (betwixt  the  two  cities.) 

7.  I  stood     -         -  -  (between  him,)  and  thee. 

8.  "The  nose  is  -  -  (betwixt  the  eyes.") 


A  GAINST.— Exercises. 

1.  *'Iam     -         -         -  (against  your  pillows.") -£^2r.  xiii 

2.  "His hand  will  be     -  (against  every  man.")  Gen.  xvi. 

3.  "That  is  a  decree     -  (against  law,) 

4.  -         -         -         -  (against  public  opinion,) 

5.  and  -         -         .  (against  reason  itself.") 

6.  This  horse  ran  -  (against  that        ,         .) 

7.  Harrison  ran    -         -  ?against  Van  Buren.) 

8.  "  The  Whigs  are      -  (against  the  Democrats.") 

9.  There  are  ten  votes  -  (against  nine.) 

10.  "  The  ship  is  -  (against  the  mouth)  of  the  river  J*"* 

11.  Aaron    lighted    the 

lamps  over     -        -  (against  the  candlestick.") 

\_Num.  viii. 

12.  He  leans  -         -  (against  the  wall.) 

13.  This  change  of  mea- 

sures is  -         -        -  (against  us.) 

14.  The  choice  of  officers 

was         -         -         -  (against  them.) 


15.  They  should  get  good 

wood      -        -        -  (against  winter.) 

16.  All    should    lay    up 

something       -        -  Tagainst  time)  of  need. 

17.  "  Urijahmade  it        -  (against  king  Ahaz  came  from  Da- 

mascus.")  2  Kings  xvi. 

18.  Cold  water  is  good  -  (against  a  cold.) 

10.  "  Alkalies  are  good  -  (against  the  heart-bum.") 


CONDICTION    OP    NEPOBCLADS.  231> 

20.  "How     will      you 
change    horses?" — 

I  will  put  mine         -  (against  yours.) 

21.  "  I  have  endeavoured 

to  guard  -         -  (against  a  cold.") 

22.  I  shall  guard     -         -  (against  thieves.) 

23.  He  raised  impious  war  (against  the  throne,) 

24.  and  -         -        .  (against  the  monarchy)  of  God, 

FOR. — Exercises. 

1.  He  gave  a  dollar        -  (for  the  knife. 

2.  ("  For  my  life)  I  cannot  understand 
the  man." 

3.  I  will  give  my  horse  -  (for  yours.) 

4.  "  He  gave  cattle        -  (for  horses.") 

5.  "  They  gave  him  ten 

stripes  -         -  (for  each  offence.") 

6.  "And  if  any  mischief 
follow,      then    thou 

shalt  give  life  -  -  (for  life,) 

eye  .         .  .  (for  eye,) 

.  tooth        -        -  -  (for  tooth,) 

9.  hand        -         -  -  (for  hand,) 

10.  foot         -        -  -  (for  foot.")  j^^ar.xxi. 

11.  "To  give  his  life  a 

ransom    -         -         -  (for  many.")  Matt.  xx. 

12.  "  Or  what  shall  a  mart 

give  in  exchange      -  (for  his  own  soul  ?")  Mark  viii. 

13.  This  root  is  good       -  (for  a  cough.) 

14.  "  Alkalies  are  good  -  (for  the  heart-burn.") 

15.  Every    man    should 

provide  clothing       -  (for  winter.) 

16.  "  She   wrapped   him 

close       -         -         -  ^for       ,     catching)  coW."— Shak. 

17.  "And,     -         -         -  (for   the   time   shall  not  seem   te- 

dious "V—'Shak. 


240  CONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 

18.  "  John  will  go  where 

he  pleases       -        -  (for  all)  me,'*'' 
[[John  will  go   where]  (he  pleases)  (for        ,        , 
(,         >         ,         '  )  (      »        ™e.) 

19.  "  Joseph  Boston  may 

be  in  Philadelphia,  -  (for  any  thing)  that  I  know." 

20.  The  roads    are  bad, 

indeed,  but      -        -  (for  all)  that  I  shall  go. 

21.  John  acts  -         -  ^for  me.) 

22.  "He  gave  up  the  law  (for  divinity.") 

23.  He     translated      the 

poem  line        -        -  (for  line.) 


24.  It  was  a  great  sum    -  (for  John)  to  give, 

25.  "  It  was  young  coun- 
sel -         -         -  |for  these  persons,) 

26.  and  violent  counsel    -  (for  the  matters.") 


1.  I  have  many  appre- 
hensions -         -  (for  him.) 

2.1  have  no  apprehen- 
sions      -         -         -  (for  myself.) 

3.  Thus  much      -        -  (for  this  trait)in  the  character  off  or. 

4.  "  Thus  much  -        -  (for  the  progress)  of  the  deluge." 

5.  I  took  him       -         -  (for  a  good  man.) 

6.  They  were  taken      -  (for  brothers.) 

7.  "  I  hear  -        -  (for  certain,)  and    do  speak  ttk9 

truth.'" — Sh;ak. 

8.  "He   quivered   with 

his  feet,  and  lay         -  (for  dead.")' — Dryden. 

9.  We  took  you   -         -  (for  the  President.) 

10.  "  Let  her  go     -         -  (for  an  ungrateful  woman.") 
\i.  "I  took  this  note       -  (for  the  messenger)  of  love^ 

12.  "  We  sailed  from  Boston  -  -  (for  Texas.") 

13.  "  We  sailed  from  Peru  -  -  ffor  China.") 

14.  "  We  sailed  directly  -  -  -  (for  Genoa.") 

15.  It  would  be       -         -  -  -  (for  his  health)  fo  ca^cr- 

dse. 


GONDICTION    OF    NEPOECLADS. 


241 


16.  To  be  just  is     - 

17.  To  withdraw  would  be 

18.  It  would  be 

tire. 


-  Tfor  the  general  good.) 

-  (for  his  honour.) 

-  (for  his  comfort)  to  re- 


19.  "He  is  able  to  walk  -        -        -  ^for  aught)  I  know,** 

20.  (For  aught)  is  generally 
known,  John  Boston  is  honest. 

21.  "  The  President  is  in  the  city      -  (for  aught)  is  known,** 

22.  I  write      -         -        -        -        -  (for  Mr.  Adams.) 

23.  He  works  -        -        -        -  (for  his  brother.) 

24.  "  For  he  loveth  our  nation  ;  and  he 

hath  built  a  synagogue       -         -  (for  us.") 

25.  Will  you  carry  this  note    -        -  (for  me  ?) 

26.  "  I  will  go  to  Boston  -        -  (for  you)  for  ten  dol- 

lars," 


27.  Is  there  a  good  reason 

duct? 

28.  Is  there  a  good  cause 

among  men? 

29.  "  But  this  argument  does  not  make 

30.  "  There  is  a  natural,  immutable, 

and  eternal  reason 

call  virtue**  and  against  that 


(for  this  course)  of  con- 
(for  this  distinction) 
(for  the  defendant."} 


(for  that     ,)  which  we 
which  we  call  vice. 


\^  4\* 


31.  I  am 

32    He  was     -         -      V 
vernment.) 

33.  Is  he 

narchy?) 

34.  "Aristotle is      -        -        - 

35.  In  this  country,  every  man  is 

36.  and  all       -         -        -         - 


:.li 


for  a  free  trade.) 

for  a   republican  go- 


37.  Was  this  instrument  made 

38.  Were  men  bom 

39.  as  beasts  are 


-  (for    a    limited     mo- 

-  (for  poetical  justice.") 

-  (for  himself,) 

-  (for  the  government.) 

^  (for  a  knife?) 
^  (forkings,^ 

-  (for  men  ?) 


31 


243 


CONDICTION   OP   NBP0KCLAP5. 


40. 
41. 

42. 

43. 
44. 

45. 
46. 
47. 
48. 
49. 
50. 
51. 

52. 
53. 
54. 
55. 
56. 
67. 
58. 

59. 
60. 
61. 


63. 
64, 


ifto-ff.  ^i 


I  went 

He  is  ever  waiting 

good.) 
"  I  am  looking  • 

day." 
I  apply  to  this  court 
and  -        -        - 
He  was  sent  to  me 
*'  He  wrote 
Men  generally  write 
I  am  ready         -         -        - 
I  have  prepared 
He  is  now  in  search  -       .-• 
Let  him  recur  ^o  antiquity  - 

Hats  are  rtiMe  * 

This  coat  is       -  -         - 

This  glass  is      -  -  -     .» 
This  knife  is  good  -  - 

That  knife  is  good  - 
The  osier  is  good 

and  the  poplar  -  -         - 


(for  my  book.) 

(for     some    expected 

(for  my  brother)  every 

for  redress,) 
for  protection.) 
for  money,) 
(for  money.") 

-  (for  fame.) 

-  (foryou.J 

-  (for  you.) 

flf  (for  arguments.) 
T  (fpr  examples,) 

7  mW  .ma 

fortheheai.)/^-  -^^• 
for  John  Boston.) 
for  that  room.) 
for  pens.)  ^ 

-  (for  nothing.) 

-p  (for  twigs,)  :^ 

-  (for  the  mill.) 


.r4:J4 


(for  me)  to  control  the 
^^i  »c^:i.'(for  America)  to  lead 
to    with- 


*'Itisnot- 

sear 
It  was  reserved  - 

the  world  to  democracy. 
It  was  not  -        -         -         -  (for  Adam) 

stand  the  temptation  of  the  forbidden  tree. 
It  was (for  Christ)  to  redeem 

the  lost  race. 
It  is  not    -        -        -        -        -  (for  me)  /o  dictate  to 

you,  gentlemen. 
It  is  not    -        -        -        -        -  (for  him)  ^oconfro/ me. 


65.  "  Moral  consideration  can  no  way 

move  the  sensible  appetite,  was                           .  ,;f  .  >f  g 

it  not    -        -         -     .   -         -  (for  the  will.")i  jy  *g|* 

66.  He  could  not  pay  his  debts,  was                             ^  q^ 

it  not    -         -         -         -  (for  his  friends.) 

67.  I  should  go  was  it  not         -        -  (for  my  brothers.) 


COKDICriON   OF   NEP0ECZ.AD9. 


248 


68. 


70. 


"  He  cried  out  - 
He  cannot  pay  - 
means. 


-  (for  anguish.") 

-  (for    the     want)     of 

("For  this  reason)  I 

-  Tfor  very  wrath.") 

-  (for  our  unworthinesa,) 


cannot  believe  the  report." 

71.  "  With  fiery  eyes  sparkling 

72.  **  Thai  which  we 

are  afraid 

73.  to  crave,  our  prayer  is  that  God,  -  (for  the  wdrthiness)  of 

his  Son  would  vouchsafe  to  grant." 
4.  The  inhabitants  suffered      -        -  (for  provision^,) 

75.  and (for  wood.) 

76.  He  was  afraid   -        -        -        -  {for  to  meet  his  op^io- 

nent.) 


77.  "  Henry  travelled 

gether,*' 

78.  They  hold  their  offices 

79.  "They rode      -         -        .         * 

80.  His  nod  has  decided  all  causes 


-  (for  Uiree   hours)   fo- 

-  (for  life.) 
(for  miles  together.") 


in  Sicily 


-  (for  these  three  years. 


OF. — Exercises. 


"  This  cloth  is  made  - 

This  hat  is  made 

This  is  a  man    -         -        - 

"  He  is  a  man   - 

"  John  Brown  is  a  man 

"  He  is  a  man    -        -        - 

character.") 
"  The  wickedness 

is  obvious." 
"They  are 
"  If  he  found  any 

10.  He  has  a  knowledge 

11.  "The  foundations  were  made 
"  Th6  first  foundation  was 
"  The  second 


1. 
2. 
3. 
4. 
5. 
6. 

7. 

8. 
9. 


(of 

(of 
(of 
(of 
fof 


good  wool.") 
fine  fur.) 
genius.) 

decayed  fortune.") 
straw.") 
an    unblemished 


-  (of  the   human  heart) 


12. 
13. 
14. 


was 


-fof 
-(of 
-fof 
-of 
-fof 
-of 


this  opinion.") 

that  way.") 

man.) 

precious  stones.") 

jasper.") 

sapphire.") 


Does  he  faithfully  discharge  the 
duties (of  his  office  ?") 


244 


CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS. 


15. 

16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 
20. 
21. 
22. 
23, 
24. 
25. 
26, 
27, 
28. 
29. 

30. 
31. 
32. 
33. 
34. 
35. 
36. 
37. 
38. 
39. 

40. 

41. 
42. 

43. 
44. 
45. 

46. 
47. 
48. 
49. 


"The  state 

happy  condition,'*^ 
"  This  lad  goes  by  the  name 
A  binominal  root  is  composed 
*'  They  platted  a  crown 
I  saw  a  sea         -         -         - 
"  They  made  clay 
"Ye  are   -        -        - 
He  has  a  singular  kind 
Give  me  a  loaf  -         -        - 
James  got  a  loaf 
Give  me  a  pound 
"  I  saw  the  body 
♦'  I  live  in  the  city      -        - 
Henry  lives  in  a  house 


-  (of  moral  purity)  h 

of  John.") 
of  two  parts.) 
of  thorns.") 
of  glass.) 
of  the  spittle.") 
of  this  world.") 
of  nose.) 
of  bread.) 
of  sugar.) 
of  tea.) 

-  (of  Samuel  Jones.") 

-  /of  Philadelphia.") 

-  (of  stone.) 


"  Language  is  the  principal  vehicle  (of  thought.**) 

GooLD  Brown's  Grammar. 


Where  did  he  get  this  amount    - 
There  is  a  number     -        -         - 
There  was  a  family   -         -         - 
There  was  a  convention 
There  is  a  society       -         -         - 
Should  there  not  be  a  convention  - 
There  was  an  assemblage   - 
There  is  a  large  collection  - 
Three  individuals 
Four  ,         -        -        - 

turned. 
A  company         -         -         - 

was  formed. 
A  company        -         -         - 


(of  cash?) 
(of  men)  here. 

of  five  persons.) 

of  Pennsylvanians.) 

of  ladies.) 

of  nations  I) 

of  boys)  in  the  street. 

of  water)  here. 

-  (of  the  jury)  are  out. 

-  (of  the   company)  re- 

-  (of  thirty  individuals) 

-  (of  thirty  individuals) 

-  (of  Philadelphia,)  was 


-  (of  business.) 

-  (of  English  Syntax.) 

-  (of  the  planetary  sya- 


sent. 
This  is  a  matter 
This  book  is  a  system 
"  A  part    -         *         -         - 

tern)  can  he  seen,  only  by  the  aid  of  a  telescope.''^ 
He  has  paper     -         -         -         -  (of  every  kind.) 
They  have  hats  -         -         -  (of  all  descriptions..) 

He  lives  in  a  singular  kind  -         -  (of  house.) 
I  will  call  in  the  course       -         -  (of  the  day  ) 


€€JNPIOTKrW   0¥    IfEFOECLABS. 


^45 


60.  "  This  child  is  the  very  picture  -  (of  his  mother.") 

51.  This  is  a  portrait        -         *         -  (of  John  Banks.) 

52.  "  John  went  to  Boston  in  the  3nBar  (of  1840.") 


53.  His  conduct  was  a  course 

54.  A  system  *         -         - 

55.  *'  We  have  toiled  all  - 

caught  nothing." 


64. 

65. 
66. 
67. 
68. 
09. 
70. 
71. 


fof  deceit.) 

[of  general  education*) 
-  (of  the  night,)  and  have 


56.  '*  He  was  led  up 

57.  "  Being  forty  days  tempted 

iv.  2. 

58.  **  And  ye  shall  be  hated 
'    r  name's  sake." 

"8§.  *^My  house  shall  be  called 

house  of  prayer." 
60.  *•  They  were  baptized 


(of  the  Spirit.") 
(of 


61.  "Salvation  is     - 

62.  **  This  is  the  grammar 

63.  "  This  lad  is  the  son  - 


the  devil.")  Luke 

-  (of  all  men)  for  my 
-'(df  all  nations)  the 
-,(^hn.") 

-  (of  the  Lord.") 

-  (of  L.  Murray.") 

-  (lof  Mr.  Jones.") 


"  Mr.  Jones  is  the  father    -    .     -  (of  this  lad.") 

Mrs.  Mary  Davis  is  the  mother  -  (of  Miss  Jane  Davis.) 

"  Mr.  Jones  is  the  father    -        -  (of  this  lad.") 

"  Miss  Mary  Davis  is  the  mother  (of  Miss  Jane  Davis.") 

Mr.  James  is  \ht  father     -        -  (of  three  sons,)  and 

(of  two  daughters.) 
General  Harrison  is  President    -  fof  the  United  States.) 
*' John  is  thefero^Acr-         -         -  (of  James.") 


72.  Mr.  John  Davis  is  the  grandfather  (of  this  young  lad.) 

(of  Mr.  Sanderson.) 
(of  James  Harper.") 
(of  Isaac") 


73.  Mr.  Nathans  was  the  uncle 

74.  ^'  This  lady  was  the  aurtt  - 

75.  "Abraham  wais  the  father  - 

76.  **  David    R.  Porter  is  "now 
,  .  Governor      -        -  '     - 
i*t.  John  B.  Purcell  is  Bishop  - 

78.  This  gentleman  is  a  Bishop 

79.  Henry  Jones  is  a  iherchdnt 

80.  *'  Joseph  Hewet  \i  the  pupil 

81.  I  am  the  feather 

82.  jaftied  is  the  apprentice 


the 


*►  (of  Pennsylvania.") 

-  (of  Cincinnati.) 

-  (dfthe  Episcopal  church.) 

-  (of  Philadelphia.) 

-  (of  John  Foster.") 
(of  - 


41" 


this  school.) 
.  (of  tw6  masters.) 


246 


CONBICTION  01*  NXFOSeULDS. 


83.  This  house  is  the  property 

84.  The  colour       -        -        - 

85.  ''The  length    - 

86.  Th.e  buttons      -        -        ■ 

87.  The  eyes  -        -        -        . 

88.  Is  the  man        -        -        - 

89.  "The  birds 

manJ'^ 

90.  The  warmth      - 

ceptible. 

91.  "The/z/e 

92.  ''The foundation     - 

stoneJ*^ 

93.  The  captain      -        -        - 

94.  **  Four  individuals    - 

turned,'' 


'  (of  Jane  Foster.) 

-  ^of  that  cloth  is  good  ) 

-  (of  the  stick  is  great.") 

-  (of  the  coat)  are  silver, 

-  fof  the  buttons) 
(of  this  coat.) 

-  fof  the  house)  mMtw.^ 

-  (of  the    air)  are  for 

-  (of  the  water)  is  per- 

-  Yof  man)  is  short.'" 

-  (of   the    house)    was 

-  (of  the  ship)  was  lost, 

-  (of  the  company)  rC' 


95.  John  went        -        -        -         -  (of  himself.) 

96.  *'  As  the  branch  cannot  bear  fruit  (of  itself.") 

97.  God  is  the  author  of  the  universe  (of  himself.) 

98.  God  -         -        -         - 

author  of  the  universe. 

99.  I      -        -        - 

there. 

100.  I  was  there      - 

101.  John       -       '-        -        . 

at  court. 

102.  John  was  at  court     - 


-( 


himself)  is  the 
myself)  was 


-  (of  myself.) 

-  (       ,       himself)  was 


•  (of  himself.) 


"  He  spake 

Did  John  say  any  thing 


103 
104 

105.  *'  I  shall  speak 

106.  He  will  give  a  history 

107.  He  spake  very  highly 


') 


-  (of  his  parents. 

-  (of  himself?) 

-  (of  that  affair)  soon,'^ 

-  (of  the  Jews.) 

-  (of  the  services)  which 


Jackson  had  rendered  his  country. 

108.  *'  And  he  charged  them  that  they 

should  tell  no  man  -        -  (of  it.") 

109.  "  These  gentlemen  told  me       -  (of  it.") 

110.  "  I  have  heard  -       -       -         -  (of  his  troubles.") 


CONDICTION  OV   NEPOECLADS,  247 

111.  ♦*  I  have  been  informed     -         -  (  ,  that)   the 

President  is  in  the  city."  (©/"that.) 

112.  Nothing  was  said     -        -         -  (of  his  sons.) 

113.  He  spake  well  -         -         -  (of  Thomas  Jefferson.) 

114.  "  When  Pilate  heard         -        -  (of  Galilee,)  he  asked, 

whether  the  man  was  a  Galilean." 

115.  "  And  when  ye  shall  hear  -  (of  wars,) 

116.  "and  rumours  -        -        -  (of  wars,)   be  ye  not 

troubled. ^^ 


117.  "Wherefore  that  field  shall  be 

called  the  field       -         -         -  (of  blood.") 

118.  All  strangers  were  buried  in  the 

field (of  blood.) 


119.  This  is  the  field       -        -        -  (of  battle.")  for. 

120.  "  Peter  and  John  went  up  at  the 

hour fof  prayer.")  for. 

121.  "  After  this  there  was  a  feast    -  (of  the  passover.") 

122.  **  The  heavens  must  receive  him 

until  the  times       -        -        -  (of  the  restitution)  of 
all  things.''^ 


123.  This  man  is  worthy          -  -  (of  great  praise.) 

124.  "  This  deed  is  t^or/Ay      -  -  [of  great  praise.") 

125.  This  subject  is  worthy     -  -  fof  close  attention.) 

126.  That  affair  is  worthy        -  -  (of  much  attention.) 

127.  "  This  fellow  is  not  worthy      -  (of  our  notice.") 

128.  Although  man  is  vile,  his  soul           * 

was  deemed  toor^At/       -  -  (of  Christ's  own  blood.) 

129.  That  hat  is  worth    -         -  -  ^     ,     ten  dollars.) 

130.  This  deed  is  worthy          -  -  (of   high    commenda- 

tion.) 


131.  The  destruction       -        -        -  (of  this  race)  was  in- 

stant. 

132.  This  course  is  obviously  subver- 

sive       fof  sound  morals.) 

133.  This  climate  is  destructive        -  (of  health.) 

134.  The  destruction       -        -        -  (of  this  race)  was  un- 

expected. 


248 


CONDlCttON   Of   NEPOECLADB. 


135.  He  is  sick        .         -        -        - 

136.  I  am  quite  tired       -         -         - 

137.  I  am  tired       -         -         -         - 

138.  The  room  is  full    - 

139.  The  Word  was  made  flesh,  and 
dwelt  among  us     -        -  full 

and         _         -        -         -  full 
*'  All  ye  shall  be  offended 
night.'' 

142.  I  am  glad        -         -         -         - 

143.  He  was  impatient    -      '  -  '       - 
"For      -         -         -   ,;.-.J  - 

release  one  at  the  feast. 
For  he    -         -         -         -         - 
'*  He  who  first  stepped  in  was 

Cured  -         -         -         -         - 

he  had.'' 
"He  preached  the  remission    - 
'•  He  who  first  stepped  in  after 

the  troubling  of  the  water,  was 

cured   -         - 

he  had." 
*♦  He  preached  the  forgiveness 


140. 
141. 


144. 

145. 
146. 


147. 

148. 


149. 


(of  a  cold.) 
(of  this  subject.) 
(of  your  talk.) 
(of  smoke.) 

(of  grace,) 
(of  truth.) 
(because-of   me)    this 

(of  it.) 

fof  these  restraints.) 

(of  necessity)  he  must 

(of  necessity)  mws/  go, 

(of  'whatever/ disease) 

- ■  ..^  -.  ■    -       mi 

(of  sins,)  to  aU" 

-  (of  whatiioever  disease) 


(of  I 


to  all. 


150. (««df  a  trtith)  /  say 

unto  you,  this  man  went  down 

justified  rather  than  the  first." 
151.  I  say  unto  you         -        -        -  (of  a   truth)   that  no 

good  will  come  of  this  thing. 


192.  **  Much  evil  will  come 

153.  **  No  good  will  come 

154.  *«  Will  any  good  come 


155. 
156. 
157. 
158. 
160. 


•'  I  have  known  him 
He  has  been  knowh  to  us  - 
He  went         -         -         - 
"  He  is  well    -         - 
"Henry  is  not  well 


-  (ofthat  iilieasure.**) 

-  (of  it.") 

-  (of  him.") 

-  (of  a  child.") 

-  (of  a  long  time.) 

-  (of  a  Saturday.) 
.  (of  late.") 

-  (of  late  years.") 


'¥. 


CONDICTION   OP   NEPOECLADS. 


249 


1.  "They  came  out 

2.  I  went  directly  out     - 

3.  Is  not  this  man  out 

4.  These  very  pins  came  out  - 

5.  Move  these  chairs  out 


(of  Egypt.") 
of  the  house.) 
of  the  road  ?) 
(of  his  mouth.) 
(of  my  way.) 


WITH.— -Exercises. 


1.  He  writes  letters         -         -         - 

2.  "  And  the  angel  measured  the  city 

3.  Is  not  his  conscience  seared 

4.  He,  like  others,  eats    - 

5.  The  rust  of  iron  may  be  eaten  off 

6.  "  She  anointed  his  feet  with  oint- 

ment, and  wiped  them   - 

7.  The  gentleman  convinced  me 

8.  She  sewed  these  pieces 

9.  Sew  the  buttons         -         -        - 

10.  The  coat  was  made    -         -         - 

11.  He  paid  the  demand  -         -         - 

12.  They  deceived  me      -         -         - 

13.  What  went  ye  out  to  see — a  reed 

shaken  -         -         -         - 

14.  They  raised  their  bread 

15.  The  man  was  cured  -         -         - 

(See  example  6.) 

16.  Judas  betrayed  him    -         -         - 

17.  Men  become  learned  -         -        - 

18.  Fire  is  extinguished   -        -         - 


19.  "  They  are  distressed 

20.  Martin  was  elevated  - 

21.  The  grass  was  injured 

22.  He  is  afflicted    - 

23.  He  is  now  ill     - 


24.  Make  me  a  coat 

25.  He  purchased  a  farm  - 

26.  That  lad  has  a  knife  - 

27.  He  found  a  silver  watch 

28.  He  has  a  steel  watch-chain- 


(with  a  pen.) 
(with  a  golden  reed.") 
(with  a  hot  iron  ?) 
(with  his  teeth.) 
(with  vinegar,) 

(with  her  hair.") 
with  his  arguments.) 
with  a  needle.) 
with  strong  thread.) 
with  silk.) 
(with  this  money.) 
(with  rare  pretensions.) 

(with  the  wind  ?) 

(with  yeast.) 

(with  this  ointment.) 

(with  a  kiss.) 
(with  study.) 
(with  water.) 

(with  pain.") 
(with  joy.) 
(with  the  frost.) 
(with  poverty.) 
(with  a  fever.) 


(with  buttons.) 
(with  a  house.) 
(with  four  blades.) 
(with  a  gold  chain.) 
(with  a  gold  key.) 


250 


CONDICTION    OP   NEPOECLADS 


29.  My  teacher  gave  me  this  book  - 

30.  My  father  sends  you  this  note  - 

31.  I  want  a  cloth  -         -         -  - 

32.  He  has  a  cane  -         -         -  - 

33.  Give  the  word  -         -         - 

34.  I  like  books       -         -         -  - 

35.  He  wrote  -         -         - 

36.  They  will  return 

37.  I  want  a  Geography  -         -  - 

38.  He  shot  six  birds        -         -  - 

39.  He  may  peruse  this  book    - 

40.  I  have  returned           -         -  - 

41.  We  shall  sketch  the  contents  of 

this  chapter  -         -         -  - 

42.  "  The  first  beast  was  like  a  lion  - 

43.  "  I  saw  a  beast  like  a  bear  - 

44.  John   speaks  of  a  leopard-like 

monster         -         -        -         - 
and-         -         -        -        .         . 
its  back. 

45.  That  man  was  in  town 

46.  He  has  built  him  a  house     - 


(with  good  advice.) 
(with  his  respects.) 
(with  a  black  colour.) 
(with  an  ivory  head.) 
(with  its  import.) 
(with  a  good  margin.) 
(with  great  accuracy.) 
(with  reluctance.) 
(with  an  atlas.) 
(with  black  feathers.) 
f  with  great  advantage.) 
(with  an  apology.) 

(with  gteat  rapidity.) 
(with  eagle's  wings.") 
(with  three  ribs)  in  its 


(with  four  heads,) 
(with  four  wings)  upon 

(with his  two  servants.) 
(with  an  iron  roof.) 


47. 
48. 
49. 
50. 
51. 

52. 
53. 

54. 
55. 


The  house  was  filled  - 
"And  she  anointed  his  feet  - 
"And  the  bottles  were  filled 
The  meaisure  iis  now  filled  - 
"  Henry  was  filled     - 


Henry  was  sitting      -  -     - 

house. 
When  I  said  that,  John  was 


The  gentleman  travelled 
I  went  to  Boston 


56.  "  This  apple  grew  upon  the  same 


[with  smoke.) 
[with  ointment.*')     ^ 
■with  air.") 

-  (with  corn.) 

-  (with  fear.") 

•  fwitfi:   me,)     in    my 

-  (with  us.) 

-  {with  me)  to  Boston. 

-  (with  my  brother.) 


branch 

57.  That  man  was  in  town 
Ex.  45. 


(with  that.") 
-  (with   his    wife.) 


See 


CONDICTION   OP   NEPOECLADS. 


251 


58.  r  iiKe  to  live 

59,  There  is  no  living 


60.  He  corresponds 

61.  "  The  connection  of  one  piece 

is  obvious."  ■ 
"  The  connection  of  the  child 

close." 
The  relation  of  one  brother 

is  tender. 
'*  The  connection  of  a  brother 

tender.^* 
The  relation  of  sixty 

vious. 


62 


63. 


64 


65 


"  (with  such  neighbours.) 

-  (with  such  a  man.) 

-  (with  his  brother.) 

-  (with  the  other  pi^ce,) 

-  (with  hig  pareptSi)  is 

-  (with  another  brother,) 

-  (with  a  sister)  is  also 

-  (with  six  tens)  is  oh- 


66. 

The  relation  of  six    -       -        -  (with  five)  is  obvious. 

67. 

"  He  compared  pleasure     -         -  (with  pain.") 

68. 

"  This  cloth  compares  well,         -  (with  that  cloth.") 

69. 

Let  us  compare  his  arguments    -  (with  reason.) 

70. 

I  would  trust  him       -         -         -  (with  my  horse.) 

71. 

James  trusted  his  brother    -        -  ( 

with  the  secret.) 

72. 

Was  any  of  the  money  found      -  j 

[with  the  thief?)' 

73. 

Have  you  a  knife       -         -         -  ( 

[with  you?) 

74. 

They  found  the  silver  cup  -         -  ( 

Jwith  Joseph.) 
Jwith  goods.) 

75. 

I  will  trust  him  -         -         -         -  ( 

76. 

I  am  here 

(with  power)  to  act. 

77. 

Jaknes  went ;  but  he  went  -         -  (with  your  permission.) 

78. 

'*  He  came         -         -         -         -  ( 

[with  full  authority)  to 

%-iZ 

^iapt.*?                              '  ^^^ 

79. 

John  stole  the  apples  -         -         -  | 

[with  his  brother.) 

80. 

"And  there  was  a  great  company 
^of  publicans,  s^nd  others,  that 

'sat  down       -         -         -         -  i 

with  him.") 

81. 

I  work  at  shoe-making 

with  my  brother.) 

82. 

I  Jive.        -         -         -        -        -  1 

with  my  sister.) 

83. 

This  slave  lives          -      "  -      ~  -  i 

with,  his  master.) 

84. 

Sarah  boards      -         -         -         -  ( 

with  Mrs.  Davis.) 

85. 

John  studied  his  lesson    "  - 

(with  me.) 

86. 

j«mes  went  through  college        -  | 

[with  my  brother.) 

252  CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS. 

87.  The  Indians  shot  John       -        -  (with  his  brother.) 

88.  "John      -        -        -        -        -  (with  his   horse)  was 

drowned." 

89.  "  Must  our  fortunes  be  twisted    -  (with     your     sinking 

90.  Our  condition  is  so  connected      -  (with  yours)  that  we 

must  sink,  or  swim  together. 

91.  Henry  purchased  a  horse     -        -  (with  a  saddle.) 

92.  "  Simon  Peter  {writes)  to  them 

that  have  obtained  the  like  pre- 
cious faith     -         -        -        -  (with  us.") 


93.  "  He  will  lie      -        -  -  (with    any   man)   /iv- 

iw^."     Against. 

94.  "  The  champions  fought    -  -  (with  each  other)   an 

hour."    Against. 

95.  These  men  have  long  struggled  -  (with  adversity.) 

Against. 

96.  This  horse  ran  -        -        -  -  (with  that  .) 

Against. 

97.  "  Fear  not,  for  I  am    -        -  -  (with  thee.") 

[Gen.  xxvi, 

98.  "  Go — and  may  the  Lord  be  -  (with  you."^ 

99.  "  He  fell  not,  for  the  Lord  was  -  (with  him.") 


100.  "I  went  to  Boston  -        -        -  (with  a  view)  to  see 

him." 

101.  **  Henry  came  to  my  house       -  (with  a  view)  to  see 

me." 

102.  "  Did  he  seem  to  act         "        -  (with  a  determination) 

to  succeed?" 


103.  "  Has  Mr.  Jones  done  any  thing  (with  respect)  to  his 

claim  ?" 

104.  "  Henry  Davis  is  resolved  to  do 

nothing         -        -         -        -  (with   regard)    to   his 
own  election." 


105.  John  acquainted  his  mother       -  f with  his  success.) 

106.  **  Mr.  Webster  is  familiar  -  (with  all  our  constitu- 

tions.") 


CONDICTION  OP   NEPOECLADS.  253 

107.  "  He  was  a  man  of  sorrow,  and 

acquainted     -         -        -        -  (with  grief.") 

108.  »*  Reason   would  that  I  should 

bear  -  -        -        -        -  (with  you.") 

[Acts  xviii. 

109.  "  Shall  not  God  avenge  his  elect, 

though  he  bear  long       -        -  (with  them  ?") 

[Luke  xviii. 

110.  "  Would  to  God  you  could  bear    (with  me,)  a  little. 

111.  Henry  Davis  studied  law  -        -  (with Daniel  Webster.) 

1 12.  Mr.  Joab  Brace  must  have  studied 

grammar       -        -        -        -  (with  Lennie)  ^imse//". 

113.  The  professor  of  religion  should 

show  in  his  daily  intercourse 

with  men,  that  he  has  been    -  (with  Christ.) 

114.  "  From  the  statement  of  this  wit- 

ness, I  presume   that  he   has 

been (with  the  defendant.") 


115.  ("  With  the  Unitarian,)     -  -  Christ  is  a  mere  man." 

116.  (With  the  Presbyterians,)  -  -  Christ  is  God  himself. 

117.  ("  With  the  industrious  man,)  -there      is      generally 

enough." 

118.  ("  With  the  idle  man,)      -  -  there  is  generally  too 

little." 

119.  f"  With  him,)-        -        -  -  nothing  is  right." 

120.  r*  With  his  brother,)         -  -  nothing  is  wrong." 

121.  ("  With  the  ancients,)      -  -  tragedy  was  originally 

a  piece  of  religious  worship." 

122.  ("  With  the  Sioux  Indians,)  -  dogs  are  beasts  of  bur- 

den." ^ 

123.  ("  With  all  savage  tribes,)^  -  skins  are  converted  into 
.  clothing."  .^          ^km^^4^  -*  ^-^ 

124.  (•♦  With  some  people,)      -  -  one    remedy    is    em- 

ployed for  all  diseases." 

125.  ("  With  a  philosopher*)   -  -  demonstration  is  joy." 

126.  ("  With  you,)  -        -        -  -  the  word  of  the  Lord 

has  free  course." 


254  CQNPieTiQN  or  nepoeclads. 

127.  "  This     gentlemw    had     great 

weight  -----  (with  the  President.") 

128.  That    circumstance    had    great 

weight  -----  ^with  the  jury.) 

129.  This  argument  had  much  influence  (with  the  judge.) 

130.  No  reasoning  will  have  much 

weight  -----  (with  the  fool.) 

131.  These  demonstrations  had  invin- 

cible influence       -        -        -  (with  those  pagan  phi- 
losophers.) 

132.  **- 1  thought  him  an  innocent  man, 

and (with  this  impression) 

I  did  what  I  could  to  procure  his  pardon." 

133.  **  If  any  one  should  take  up  this 

work (with  the  impression) 

that  he  has  met  with  another  Murray's  Grammar,  &c." 
Roswell  C,  Smithes  Grammai:* 

134.  "He  repUed,  you   are  a  dead 

man;   and    -        -        -         -  (with  this       ,    )  dis- 
charged his  pistoV^ 

135,.  Falstaff  at  that  oak,  shall  meet  -  (with  us.)— Shak. 

136.  "We  met      -        -  (with  this  gentleman)  in  ^os^on." 

137.  "  We  met      -        -  (with  rare  things)  on  the  way  J** 

138.  "  We  met      -        -  (with  curiosities)  everywhere,''* 

m  ■ 

139.  "They  met    -        -        -        -  f  with  a  fall)  on  ^Ac  tee." 

140.  "  They  have  met     -        -        -  (with  heavy  losses)  at 

sea,''* 


141.  How  is  business  -^  -^^J^     -  (with  the  Bostonians  ?) 

142.  Is  business  brisk      -     %,-        -  (with  you?) 

143.  Why  is  it  that  fruit  tredijido  n*!- 

grow  well     -        -      W^       ■  (with  us  ?) 

144.  "  Finally,  brethren,  pray  for  us,   .  % 

that  the  word  of  the  Lord  may  Tt 

have  free  course,  and  beglori-  T^''^ 

fied  even  m  it  is    -        -        -  (with  you.") 


r 


CONDICTION    OP    NEPOECLADS. 


255 


1.  "  He  is  always  - 

2.  "  There  is  no  living 

3.  "  Henry  is 

4.  "They  are 

Christ:' 

5.  "  Henry  stood  - 

6.  "  James  was  eating 

7.  "Eternity is      - 


-  ^without  money.**) 

-  (without  thee.") 

-  (without  a  hat.") 

-  (without     hope)     %n 


f without  the  gate.'*) 
(without  the  door."; 

(without  our  reach.**) 


8.  "The  most  advantageous  terms  from 
the  French,  must  end  in  our  de- 
struction       >        -        -        -  (without    the    separa- 
tion) of  the  two  monarchies^' 


9.  "  Men  like  to  live 
10.  "Wise  men  will  do  right 


-  (without  labour.") 

-  (without  laws.) 


11.  That  event  may  happen      -        -  (without  any  danger.) 

12.  "  That  event  cannot  take  place    -  (without    damage)    to 

our  interests." 

13.  They  can  live  together 

14.  They  cannot  live  together  - 

15.  They  cannot  labour  - 

16.  They  have  laboured  - 


-  (without  any  difficulty.) 
[without  difficulty.) 
without  success.) 
Vithout  success.) 


17.  John  came  out  - 
(See  example  3.) 


(without  his  hat.) 


/fU^P^ 


^ 


J> 


^,x^^^^<~ 


c 


I 


4^    m.   4L 


RETURN   EDUCATION-PSVpOLOGY  LIBRARY 
TO^^   9A0nTQlman  Hall  642-4209 


LOAN  PERIOD  1 


iiJlELO  BONE  RENEWALS 


QUAHTCn  LOAN 


ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

2-  hour  books  must  be  renewed  in  person 

Return  to  desk  from  which  borrowed 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


QUARTER  LOAN  Dl 

E: 

JUN2  51982 

SUBJECT  TO  RECAI 

L 

JPR28REC'D-^ 

Ph 

- 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA,  BERKELEY 
FORM  NO.  DDIO,  5m,  3/80  BERKELEY,  CA  94720 


YB  36436 


■■■^.^ 


